JP2016140535A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine including characteristic notification means among game machines represented by pinball game machines (pachinko machines), enclosed game machines, and rotary-drum game machines (slot machines).SOLUTION: A game machine includes: a first area (detection area for a V detection switch) associated with a second game state (jackpot game state) more advantageous than a first game state (non-jackpot game state); and notification means 208 that can perform a first notification (notification of a jackpot with a jackpot performance illustrated in FIGS. 132(g') to 132(h')) and a second notification (notification of a jackpot with a V animation illustrated in FIGS. 133(i) to 133(j)) having a different mode from the first notification. The first notification is performed if a game ball enters the first area during a first period (from just before the state of FIG. 132(f) to just before the state of FIG. 132(g')), and is associated with the second game state. The second notification is performed if a game ball enters a first area 2356 during a second period (from the state of FIG. 133(h) to just before the state of FIG. 133(i)) successive to the first period, and is associated with the second game state.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 132

Description

  The present invention relates to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine), an enclosed game machine, and a spinning machine (slot machine).

  Game consoles such as pachinko machines are equipped with obstacles that change the direction of the fall of the game ball in the game area of the game board, a winning opening, a starting opening, a variable winning opening, etc. where the game ball can win. It is common. When a game ball wins a prize, a privilege is given to the player such as paying out the prize ball (for example, see Patent Document 1).

  Some of these game tables are provided with a notification means.

JP 2008-200302 A

  However, the conventional game stand has room for improvement in the notification means.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having a feature of a notification means.

The game stand of the present invention that solves the above-described object is as follows.
The first area,
Notification means;
A game machine equipped with
The first area is an area related to a second gaming state,
The second gaming state is a more advantageous gaming state than the first gaming state,
The notification means is a means capable of executing a plurality of types of notification,
One notification of the plurality of types of notifications is notification of a first aspect (hereinafter referred to as “first notification”),
One notification of the plurality of types of notifications is notification of a second aspect (hereinafter referred to as “second notification”),
The second aspect is an aspect different from the first aspect,
The first notification is a notification executed when a game ball enters the first area in the first period,
The second notification is a notification that is executed when a game ball enters the first area in the second period,
The second notification is a notification that is executed when a game ball enters the first region in the first period,
The second notification is a notification that is executed after the execution of the first notification,
The first notification is a notification that is not executed even when a game ball enters the first region in the second period,
The second period is a period after the first period;
The first notification is a notification related to the second gaming state,
The second notification is a notification related to the second gaming state.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a game machine having a feature in the notification means.

It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 from the front side (player side). The circuit block diagram of a control part is shown. (A-1) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect (first symbol aspect) of Special Figure 1, and (a-2) shows the stop symbol aspect (First Symbol aspect) of Special Figure 2. An example is shown, (b) shows an example of a decorative design, and (c) shows an example of a usual stop design mode (second design mode). It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. (A) is a figure which shows the high probability table for common figure determination, (b) is a figure which shows the low probability table for common figure determination, (c) is a figure which shows the high probability table for success / failure determination, (D) is a figure which shows the low probability table for the success / failure determination, and (e) is a figure which shows the special figure determination table. (A) is a figure which shows the table set selection table at the time of big hit in special figure 1, (b) is a figure which shows the table set selection table at the time of big hit in special figure 2, (c) FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining a table used in the table set, and FIG. 4D is a diagram for explaining a timer number. (A) is a figure for demonstrating the table set 1, (b) is a figure for demonstrating the table set 2, (c)-(e) is a figure which shows the table 1. FIG. . (A)-(c) is a figure which shows the table 2, (d)-(f) is a figure which shows the table 3. FIG. (A) is a figure which shows the table 4 for determining the fluctuation | variation time of the symbol fluctuation | variation display to win a big hit, and (b) in order to determine the fluctuation | variation time of the symbol fluctuation | variation display which becomes a loss irrespective of the number of pending | holdings. (C) is a diagram showing the table 5 for determining the variation time of the symbol variation display to be a big hit, (d) is a symbol that loses regardless of the number of pending It is a figure which shows the table 5 for determining the fluctuation | variation time of a fluctuation | variation display. (A) is a time chart showing an example when the second game condition is satisfied and the third game condition is also satisfied, and (b) is a time chart when the second game condition is satisfied and the third game condition is satisfied. It is a time chart which shows an example when the game condition of is not satisfied, and (c) is a time chart which shows an example when the first game condition is satisfied. (A) is a flowchart of the main process which CPU404 of the 1st sub control part 400 performs, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of the 1st sub control part 400, (c) is 5 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the process regarding special figure 2 among special figure prefetch processes. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the process regarding Special Figure 1 among special figure prefetch processes. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the sub side prefetch notice execution process at the time of a start winning prize. (A) is a figure which shows the hold change prefetch notice lottery table used in a non-electric support state, (b) is a figure which shows the hold change prefetch notice lottery table used in an electric support state (C) is a figure which shows the hold display (normal hold) of a default display mode, (d) is a figure which shows the display mode of hold notice A, The figure (e) is a hold notice B It is a figure which shows the display mode of. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the sub side notice execution process at the time of a change start. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific production example in the pachinko machine of the 1st example. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 23. FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 24. FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 25. FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 26. FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 27. FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 28. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific production example which occurs rarely in the pachinko machine of the 1st example. FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 30. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 32. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 34. FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example in which the 100th symbol variation display has been reached without making a big hit from the state shown in FIG. 35 (26). (A-1) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect (first symbol aspect) of the special figure 1 in the pachinko machine of the second example, and (a-2) is an example of the second example. An example of the stop symbol mode (first symbol mode) of the special figure 2 in the pachinko machine is shown, and (b) is a diagram summarizing the actions of the attacker during the big hit game of the special figure 1. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the pachinko machine of the 2nd example. FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 38. FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 39. FIG. 40 is a diagram showing an example in which the 50th symbol variation display is reached without making a big hit from the end of the big hit game shown in FIG. 39 (7). It is a figure which shows the continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. In the pachinko machine of the 2nd example, it is a figure which shows the operation example of an attacker when special figure B is elected in special figure 1. FIG. (A-1) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect (first symbol aspect) of the special figure 1 in the pachinko machine of the third example, and (a-2) is an example of the third example. FIG. 2 shows an example of the stop symbol mode (first symbol mode) of the special figure 2 in the pachinko machine, and (b) is a diagram summarizing the actions of the attacker during the big hit game of the special figure 1, ( (c) is a figure which shows the table set selection table at the time of big hit in special figure 1, (d) is a figure which shows the table set selection table at the time of big hit in special figure 2. FIG. (A) is a figure for demonstrating the table used by a table set, (b) is a figure for demonstrating a timer number, (c) is the table set 1 in a 3rd example. (D) is a figure for demonstrating the table set 2 in the 3rd example. 5 is a flowchart showing a flow of decorative symbol determination processing of the first sub-control unit 400. (A) is a figure which shows the jackpot decoration symbol determination table for special figure 1, (b) is a figure which shows the temporary stop symbol lottery table at the time of "333" "777" selection for special figure 1, (c ) Is a diagram showing a special symbol 2 jackpot decorative symbol determination table, and (d) is a diagram showing a temporary stop symbol lottery table when “333” and “777” are selected for special diagram 2. FIG. (A) is a figure which shows the special figure 1 low probability notice lottery table, (b) is a figure which shows the special figure 2 high probability notice lottery table. (A) is a figure which shows the notice lottery table for special figure 2 low probability electric support, (b) is a figure which shows the notice lottery table for special figure 2 low probability. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100A of the 4th example from the front side (player side). It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the pachinko machine of the 4th example. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 51. 53 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 52. FIG. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of a concrete effect in the jackpot game of 15R special jackpot of the pachinko machine of the 4th example. 56 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 55. FIG. FIG. 57 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 56. It is a figure which shows the other example of production in the jackpot game of 15R special jackpot of the pachinko machine of the 4th example. 59 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 58. FIG. FIG. 54 is a diagram showing another effect example that follows the specific effect example shown in FIG. 53. It is a figure which shows the other example of production in the jackpot game of 15R special jackpot of the pachinko machine of the 4th example. 62 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 61. FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 62. FIG. FIG. 54 is a diagram showing another effect example that follows the specific effect example shown in FIG. 53. It is a figure which shows the example of a concrete effect in the big hit game of 15R jackpot of the pachinko machine of the 4th example. FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 65. 66 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 66. FIG. It is a figure which shows the table set selection table used in the pachinko machine of the 5th example, Comprising: (a) is a figure which shows the table set selection table at the time of big hit in special figure 1, (b), It is a figure which shows the table set selection table at the time of big hit in special figure 2. FIG. (A) is a figure which shows the table set selection table used in the pachinko machine of the 6th example, (b) is a figure for demonstrating the table set 1, (c) is a table set (D) is a diagram for explaining the table set 3, (e) is a diagram for explaining the table set 4, and (f) is a table for explaining the table set 3. It is a figure for demonstrating the table used by a set. (A) is a figure which shows the table 6 for determining the fluctuation | variation time of the symbol fluctuation | variation display which makes a big hit, (b) is a figure which shows the table 6 for deciding the fluctuation | variation time of the symbol fluctuation | variation display which becomes lost. (C) is a figure which shows the table 7 for determining the fluctuation | variation time of the symbol fluctuation | variation display which makes a big hit, (d) is the table 7 for determining the fluctuation | variation time of the symbol fluctuation | variation display which becomes a loss. FIG. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the hold icon used for special figure 1 hold display, (b) is a figure which shows an example of the hold icon used for special figure 2 hold display. It is a figure showing the front of the attacker unit applied to the pachinko machine of the 7th example. It is the figure which looked at the attacker unit shown in FIG. 72 from the back surface. It is a figure explaining the internal structure of a 2nd variable winning a prize mouth, Comprising: (a) shows that the V shutter is a closed state, (b) shows that the V shutter is an open state. ing. It is a timing chart which shows each operation timing of the 1st variable prize opening, the 2nd variable prize opening, and V shutter in the 1st round of a big hit game from the end to the end. It is a figure explaining the game property in the pachinko machine provided with the attacker unit shown in FIG. (A-1) is the figure which showed an example of the stop symbol aspect (1st symbol aspect) of the special figure 1 in the 8th example pachinko machine, (a-2) is the figure of the 8th example. It is the figure which showed an example of the stop symbol aspect (1st symbol aspect) of the special figure 2 in a pachinko machine, (b-1) is an example of the action | operation of the attacker in the big hit game of the special figure 1, and a big hit game It is the figure shown about the game state transferred later, (b-2) is the figure shown about the example of the action | operation of the attacker during the big hit game of the special figure 2, and the game state transferred after the big hit game. (A) is the figure which represented schematically the external appearance structure of the 1st variable winning opening 234a and the 2nd variable winning opening 235a, (b) is the 1st variable winning opening 234a and the 2nd variable winning opening 234a. It is the figure which represented schematically the internal structure of the winning opening 235a, (c) is a figure which represented that the V shutter 2352a is an open state, (d) is the V shutter 2352a. Is a diagram schematically showing that is closed, (e) is a diagram schematically showing the appearance of another embodiment of the first variable winning opening and the second variable winning opening is there. (A) is a timing chart showing an example of the operation timing in the big hit game when special figure B is displayed in special figure 1 and the big hit (15R big hit) is made, and (b) is a special timing chart in FIG. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the operation timing in the big hit game when FIG. A is displayed and it becomes a big hit (16R special big hit), (c) is a special figure B in special figure 1 and a big hit (15R It is a timing chart which shows an example of the operation timing in a big hit game when it becomes a big hit. (A) is a timing from when the second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) is closed until the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is opened in the next round. FIG. 6B is a timing chart showing a first example of the first variable winning opening 234a (second) in the next round after the second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) is closed. (C) is a second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) in at least two rounds in the jackpot game. 12 is a timing chart for explaining an example of an opening / closing pattern of a second variable prize opening 235a (second attacker) when the player opens / closes. It is a timing chart which shows an example of operation | movement from the start of the fluctuation | variation display of the special figure which becomes a big hit until the big hit game is complete | finished. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific production example in the pachinko machine of the 8th example. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific production example in the pachinko machine of the 8th example. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific production example in the pachinko machine of the 8th example. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific production example in the pachinko machine of the 8th example. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific production example in the pachinko machine of the 8th example. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific production example in the pachinko machine of the 8th example. (A-1) is the figure which showed an example of the stop symbol aspect (1st symbol aspect) of the special figure 1 in the 9th example pachinko machine, (a-2) is the figure of a 9th example. It is the figure which showed an example of the stop symbol aspect (1st symbol aspect) of the special figure 2 in a pachinko machine, (b-1) is an example of the action | operation of the attacker in the big hit game of the special figure 1, and a big hit game It is the figure shown about the game state transferred later, (b-2) is the figure shown about the example of the action | operation of the attacker during the big hit game of the special figure 2, and the game state transferred after the big hit game. (A) is a figure explaining each operation | movement of the 1st variable winning opening and 2nd variable winning opening in 4 rounds (substantially 3 rounds) jackpot, (b) is the 1st in 4 round special jackpots It is a figure explaining each operation | movement of a variable prize opening and a 2nd variable prize opening, (c) is a figure explaining each operation | movement of the 1st variable prize opening and the 2nd variable prize opening in 16 round special jackpots. (D) is a diagram for explaining each operation of the first variable winning award and the second variable winning award in 16 rounds (substantially 3 rounds) big hit. It is a figure which shows the specific example of an effect in the jackpot game of 4R special jackpot. It is a figure which shows the specific example of an effect in the jackpot game of 16R special jackpot. It is a figure which shows the other example of the specific example of an effect in the jackpot game of 16R special jackpot. It is a figure which shows the specific example of an effect in the big hit game of 4R big hit (substantial 3R big hit). It is a figure which shows the other example of the specific example of an effect in the jackpot game of 16R special jackpot. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the 9th example pachinko machine. (A-1) is the figure which showed an example of the stop symbol aspect (1st symbol aspect) of the special figure 1 in the 10th example pachinko machine, (a-2) is a figure of the 10th example. It is the figure which showed an example of the stop symbol aspect (1st symbol aspect) of the special figure 2 in a pachinko machine, (b-1) is an example of the action | operation of the attacker in the big hit game of the special figure 1, and a big hit game (B-2) is a diagram showing an example of the action of the attacker during the jackpot game of FIG. 2, and the game state that is shifted after the jackpot game, (C) is a figure which shows an example of the operation | movement aspect of the attacker in the 14th round of the jackpot game to which special figure A is displayed and transferred in special figure 1. FIG. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the table set selection table used in the case of big hit in special figure 1, (b) is the table set selection table used in the case of big hit in special figure 1 It is a figure which shows the example of. It is a figure which shows the specific example of an effect in the big hit game of 16R big hit (substantial 13R big hit). It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the 10th example pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the 10th example pachinko machine. (A) is a front view explaining an example of a start winning device, (b) is a perspective view explaining another example of a starting winning device, and (c) explains an example of a jackpot generating device. (D) is a figure explaining an example of the lamp module for performing the various displays controlled by the main control part. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the 10th example pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a series of effects. It is a figure which shows the specific example of an effect in the symbol fluctuation | variation used as big hit. It is a figure which shows the other example of the specific effect example in the symbol fluctuation | variation used as big hit. It is a figure which shows the specific example of an effect in jackpot game. It is a figure for demonstrating the visual recognition state in a decoration symbol display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the 10th example pachinko machine. (A) is a timing chart showing an example of an operation in the case of releasing a long in all four consecutive rounds, and (b) is a long release only in the first round of the four consecutive rounds. FIG. 6 is a timing chart showing an example of an operation when short-opening in other rounds, and (c) is a probability change operation region solenoid set when a round in which the second variable winning opening 235a is released is started. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the period which is an operation | movement pattern of this, and a probability change operation area | region effective state. (A) is a timing chart showing an example of an operation in a case where only the second round of the four consecutive rounds is opened short and the other rounds are opened long, (b) is a continuous 4 It is a timing chart which shows an example of operation | movement in the case of releasing short only in the 2nd round of one round, and releasing long in other rounds. (A) is a timing chart showing an example of the operation when the first attacker opens long in all two consecutive rounds, and (b) is the first of the three consecutive rounds. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing an example of an operation when the first attacker opens long only in a round and the second attacker opens short in other rounds. (A) is a timing chart showing an operation in a case where a long release is performed in all four consecutive rounds, and (b) is a long release only in the first round of the four consecutive rounds. And it is a timing chart which shows an example of the operation | movement in the case of short open in other rounds. (A) is a timing chart which shows an example of operation | movement in a small hit game, (b) is a timing chart which shows an example of operation | movement in a big hit game. (A) shows an example of the special symbol jackpot stop pattern mode and the action pattern of the attacker for each round in the twelfth example pachinko machine, and (b) shows the big winning mouth (variable) in the jackpot game An example of a specific operation pattern of (winning mouth) is shown. (A) shows an example of the effect pattern in the jackpot game executed by the 12th example pachinko machine, and (b) shows an example of the effect contents for each round. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the 12th example pachinko machine. 116 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 116. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the 12th example pachinko machine. FIG. 119 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 118. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the 12th example pachinko machine. FIG. 121 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 120. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the 12th example pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the 12th example pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the 12th example pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the 12th example pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the 12th example pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific production example in the 13th example pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific production example in the 13th example pachinko machine. 1 is a schematic front view of a game board 200 provided in a pachinko machine 100 as a premise of an embodiment of the present invention, as viewed from the front side (player side). It is a figure which shows the characteristic of the pachinko machine which can apply this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the production | presentation in a 1 type 2 type pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the 1st rare case and 2nd rare case of the production shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the 3rd rare case of the production shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the production | presentation in a round decision type pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the rare case of the effect shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the modification of the effect shown in FIG. FIG. 138 is a diagram showing a first rare case of the effect shown in FIG. 137. FIG. 137 is a diagram showing a second rare case of the effect shown in FIG. 137. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the combination of effect data. It is a figure for demonstrating a display area. It is a time chart which shows the relationship between the 1st period and the 2nd period, and the approach (entrance ball) of the game ball to the 1st field. FIG. 135 is a timing chart at the normal time in the one type and two types of pachinko machines, for which specific examples of effects are described with reference to FIGS. 132 to 134. It is a timing chart of the rare case in the 1 type 2 type pachinko machine. It is a timing chart of the rare case in the 1 type 2 type pachinko machine. It is a timing chart in the round decision type pachinko machine which explained the specific example of the production in FIG. 135 and FIG. It is a timing chart in the pachinko machine which provided V passing switch SW9 for production independently. 1 is a front view of a sealed pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable.

  First, a gaming table (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 or a spinning machine such as a slot machine) to which the present invention can be applied will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. In the following description, a pachinko machine will be described as an example, but the present invention can also be applied to a slot machine.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 100 to which the present invention can be applied will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface (player side).

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop.

  The main body 104 is a door member that is provided inside the outer frame 102, has a locking function, and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. . The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. A store clerk at the store (amusement store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104 and is provided with a main body opening sensor 1041 for detecting that the main body 104 is opened.

  The front frame door 106 has a locking function and is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via a hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable. Is a door member having an opening 116. The store clerk of the amusement store can also open and close the front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor 1061 for detecting that the front frame door 106 is opened is also provided. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A space in which the game area 124 is provided is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. In this example, an LED whose light source is an LED is also called a lamp.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a locking function and be openable and closable. The door 108 with the ball storage tray is opened by pressing an opening lever 1081 that can be operated with the front frame door 106 opened. Further, a door sensor with ball storage tray 1082 for detecting that the door with ball storage tray 108 is opened is also provided. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player Built in the ball launching handle 134 for launching into the game area 124, a chance button 136 for changing the production mode of various production devices 206 (see FIG. 3) by the player's operation, and the chance button 136 A chance button lamp 138 for emitting the chance button 136, a ball lending operation button 140 for instructing ball lending to a card unit (CR unit) installed in the game store, and a player's balance of the card unit A return operation button 142 for giving a return instruction, and a ball rental display unit 144 for displaying a player's balance and card unit status are provided. Further, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with a lower pan full tank detection sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower pan 128 is filled with game balls.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. . While the ball launching handle 134 is continuously being fired by the player, the launching device 110 sends the game ball to the game area 124 of the game board every time a predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds) elapses. Fire towards.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104. In FIG. 1, the specific configuration of the game area 124 is not shown, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.

  FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 viewed from the back side.

  The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is positioned below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball passing through the formed communication hole and dropping to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The payout device 152 is detachable and is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154 when mounted at a predetermined position.

  The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152. In other words, the payout device 152 is a kind of a ball feeding device that applies a driving force to a game ball and conveys the game ball.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 is provided with a predetermined grant. Based on the establishment of the condition, the player is given (paid out) with an amount of game value (game ball) corresponding to the grant condition.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 (see FIG. 4) that performs overall game control processing, and processing information generated by the main control section 300 are displayed. Based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing related to the production, and the first sub-control unit 400. The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control unit 500 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing related to effects, and the payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to game ball payout ( 4) and a payout board case 172 for storing a payout board 170 having an error release switch 168 for releasing an error by the operation of a game clerk. A launch board case 176 that houses a launch board 174 that constitutes a launch control unit 630 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing, and a power management unit 660 (see FIG. 4) that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines are configured. A power supply board case 184 that houses a power supply board 182 that includes a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by an operation of a game store clerk and a RAM clear switch 180 that is operated when the power is turned on and outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300; In addition, a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit is provided. In this example, a setting switch 161 is provided on the first sub-board 160. The setting switch 161 is, for example, a dial-type switch, and can start various settings related to effects according to the position of the dial.

  FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 substantially in the center, and a normal symbol display device 210 and a first special symbol display device (hereinafter referred to as a “first special symbol display device”) around it. 212, a second special symbol display device (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "second special symbol display device") 214, a normal symbol hold lamp 216, a first special symbol hold lamp 218, 2 A special symbol holding lamp 220 and a high-probability middle lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol”, and one or more of the special symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In this example, the decorative symbol display device 208 is constituted by a liquid crystal display (LCD). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be employed.

  The common map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a normal map, and in this example, is configured by a 7-segment LED (Light Emitting Diode). The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and in this example, are constituted by 7 segment LEDs. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are examples of symbol display means. The decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is a symbol that represents the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214 in an enhanced form. The display device 208 may also be an example of a symbol display unit.

  The multi-purpose hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of first variable games that are on hold (details are shown below). In this example, a general-purpose variable game is indicated by a predetermined number (for example, It is possible to hold up to 4). In the following description, “lamp” is an example of light emitting means, and various light emitting devices such as LEDs and EL can be applied to the light emitting means.

  The first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of second variable games that are being held (detailed special figure variable games to be described later in detail). In this example, It is possible to hold a special figure variation game up to a predetermined number (for example, four, eight for the first special figure and the second special figure). The term “hold” as used herein means that the start of various determination processes (such as lottery processes) based on start-up information described later is put on hold.

  The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp (notification means) for performing notification indicating the current symbol control state. This high-probability lamp 222 is configured so as to give a notification indicating the current symbol control state from the time the power is turned on until the start of the big hit game, and thereafter does not notify the current symbol control state. Yes. In the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state immediately before the power is turned off is restored. This symbol control state will be described later, but the symbol control state here may be any one of a normal state, a short-time state (electric support state), and a probability variation state. It is good also as one state in the state without special figure certain change.

  In the present specification, the term “control state” will be used to describe the state inside the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100). The term “control state” includes the concept of a so-called gaming state.

  In addition, there are a general prize opening 226, an ordinary figure starting opening 228, a first special figure starting opening 230, a second special figure starting opening 232, and a first variable winning opening 234 around the effect device 206. A second variable winning opening 235 is provided.

  In this example, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (wins in the general winning holes 226). 2), the dispensing device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged as prize balls to the upper plate 126 shown in FIG. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In this example, the balls to be paid out to the player as a consideration for winning are sometimes referred to as “prize balls”, and the balls lent to the players are referred to as “lending balls”, which are collectively referred to as “principal balls” and “lending balls”. This is called a “ball (game ball)”.

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed through a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this example, on the right side of the game board 200 One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In this example, only one first special figure starting port 230 is arranged at the center of the game board 200. The first special figure starting port 230 is a first starting region where the size of the entrance through which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. At the same time, the special figure changing game is started by the first special figure display device 212. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which the size of the first special diagram starting port 230 does not change. Such a first special figure starting port 230 may be referred to as a second region.

  In this example, only one second special figure starting port 232 is disposed below the first special figure starting port 230. That is, the second special figure starting port 232 is provided below the center of the game board 200. In the vicinity of the second special figure starting port 232, a pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid are provided. A combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special figure starting port 232 is provided. This corresponds to a variable starting means, and is generally called an electric tulip. The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning a prize to the second special figure starting port 232. That is, when the pair of blade members 2321 is closed, it is impossible to enter the second special figure starting port 232, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an open / close mode in which winning is difficult. On the other hand, when the universal figure change game is won and the universal figure display device 210 stops and displays the symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 are opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and the second special figure starting port 232 is opened. The ball can be entered (easy winning state), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 are open is an easy winning state. In other words, the second special figure starting port 232 has either a small size (corresponding to the first size) or a large size (corresponding to the second size) of the entrance (game ball entrance). A variable starting area in which the ease of entering a game ball, which changes from one size to the other, is equivalent to an example of a second starting area. The size of the large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. In the state where the pair of blade members 2321 are opened, out of the game balls that have entered the game area 124, the second special feature that is the variable start area is more than the game ball that has entered the first special figure start opening 230 that is the fixed start area. There are more game balls entering the starting port 232 in the figure. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special diagram starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. Such a second special figure starting port 232 may be referred to as a second region.

  In this example, only one first variable winning opening 234 is disposed below the center of the game board 200. On the other hand, only one second variable winning opening 235 is disposed obliquely to the lower right of the game board 200 in this example. In this example, the second variable prize opening 235 may be referred to as a first area. Both the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 include a variable winning opening and a door member that can be opened and closed by a solenoid. The variable winning opening is sometimes called a big winning opening, and the variable winning opening is sometimes called an attacker. Accordingly, the first variable prize opening 234 includes the first variable prize opening and the first door member 2341 and is a first attacker, and the second variable prize opening 235 is the second variable prize opening. And a second door member 2351, which is a second attacker. Hereinafter, when the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 are described without particular distinction, the variable winning opening (234, 235), the variable winning opening, the door member, etc. (2341, 2351) or an attacker. The door member (2341, 2351) changes its state from either one of the closed state and the open state in which the game ball can easily enter the variable prize opening than the closed state. . Both the closed state and the open state are stationary states, and the closed state is a predetermined first stationary state. In the closed state at the variable winning opening (234, 235) in this example, the door members (2341, 2351) are games. It is a stationary state that coincides with the player side surface of the board 200. On the other hand, the open state is a predetermined second stationary state, and the open state at the variable winning opening (234, 235) in this example is until the door members (2341, 351) are substantially perpendicular to the game board 200. It is a stationary state rotated to the player side. The variable winning opening (234, 235) is kept closed until a jackpot game, which will be described later, is started. In the first to fourteen rounds of the jackpot game, the first variable winning opening 234 is opened and closed. The state change is repeated between the two, and the second variable winning opening 235 still remains closed. When the big hit game enters the 15th round, the second variable winning opening 235 repeats the state change between the open state and the closed state for 15 rounds. On the other hand, during the 15th round, the first variable winning opening 234 is kept closed. That is, the first variable winning opening 234 can be won during the first period (here, the period of 1 round to 14 rounds) during the big hit game, and the second variable winning opening 235 is the big win game. It is possible to win in the second period (here, the period of 15 rounds). Note that the closed state may be a state where the game ball is slightly opened to the extent that it is substantially impossible to enter the game ball, in addition to the completely closed state. Further, the variable winning opening is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 3 as long as it becomes a winning of the game ball by passing or entering the game ball. When the special figure variable game is won and the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol, the door member opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening (234, 235), the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as a winning ball. To do. The ball that has entered the variable winning opening (234, 235) is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

  Further, a plurality of disk-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  The sphere accommodated in the upper plate 126 is supplied to the firing position of the firing rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the launch motor is driven with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the player's ball launch handle 134, and the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 146 and the launcher 148 into the game area 124. Launch. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening (234, 235)) ) Or the start opening (the first special figure start opening 230, the second special figure start opening 232), without winning any of the winning openings or start openings, or only passing through the ordinary start opening 228 To reach the outlet 240.

<Directing device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll. In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are located behind the warp device 242 and the stage 244.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball naild by the game nail 238, etc., and the passed ball enters the first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate the ball.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 covers the inner end portions of the shielding device 246 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely closed (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.

  The decorative lamps such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122 shown in FIG. 1, the decorative design display device 208, and the shielding device 246 shown in FIG. 3 correspond to the production means, and among these, the decorative design display device 208 is the production display means. It corresponds to an example.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

  The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that controls the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 A payout control unit 600 that mainly performs control related to payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of game balls, and a power management unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. Yes. In this example, the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 are made of different circuit boards, but these three control units (300, 400, 500) are common. The first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 may be composed of a common circuit board different from the circuit board of the main control unit 300. It may be. Therefore, each of the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 can be regarded as a predetermined control means, or one of these three control units (300, 400, 500) combined. One can be regarded as a predetermined control means, or one combined with the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500 can be regarded as a predetermined control means. Each of the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 includes a plurality of boards (for example, a plurality of control boards, one or more relay boards, and one or more control boards). It may be constituted by. Further, when the combination of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 is regarded as sub-control means, in the pachinko machine 100 described here, the main control unit 300 and sub-control means (first sub-control) Unit 400 and second sub-control unit 500) are provided on separate boards, and the boards are directly connected by electric signal lines, but the electric signals between these boards are further connected by another relay board. The transmission / reception may be relayed.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data. RAM 308 for storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time and frequency, and a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing Yes. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308. In addition, various data representing predetermined information and the like are stored in the ROM 306 for each address, and when referred to as a table in the following description, a condition for determining which address in the ROM 306 is designated is displayed in a table format. May refer to a summary. The same applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 also includes a random value generation circuit 318 for deriving a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes three random value generation circuits). 1), the main body opening sensor 1041, the front frame door sensor 1061, the door sensor with ball storage tray 1082, and the lower tray 128 shown in FIG. Receives signals output from various sensors 320 including a full tank detection sensor, a ball detection sensor provided inside each start opening, winning opening and variable winning opening, and disturbs the result of amplification and comparison with reference voltage. A sensor circuit 322 for outputting to the numerical value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302, and a drive circuit for performing display control of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 24, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the general map display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, a general map hold lamp 216, a first special figure hold lamp 218, a second special figure hold lamp 220, Drive circuit 330 for performing display control of the high accuracy lamp 222 and the like, and various solenoids 332 for opening and closing the second special figure starting port 232, the first variable winning port 234, the second variable winning port 235, and the like. A drive circuit 334 for controlling the above is connected.

  The main control unit 300 is a game control unit that performs game control, and includes a success / failure determination unit, a start information prefetching unit, and a prior determination unit, which will be described later.

  The random value generation circuit 318 generates a random value used in the basic circuit 302. Random number generation in the random value generation circuit 318 can be broadly divided into two types of methods: counter mode and random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value that is counted up (down) at a predetermined time interval is acquired, and the numerical value is derived as a random number. There are two more methods in the random number mode. The first method in the random number mode performs an operation using a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function) using a seed of random numbers, and derives the operation result as a random number. In the second method, a numerical value is read from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and the read numerical value is derived as a random number. The random value generation circuit 318 acquires an irregular value using white noise superimposed on a signal input from the various sensors 320 to the sensor circuit 322. The random value generation circuit 318 uses the acquired value as an initial value of a counter that counts up (down) in the counter mode, uses it as a seed of random numbers, or determines a read start position of the random number table. .

  When the sphere detection sensor among the various sensors 320 detects that the sphere has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 sends a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to a random value generation circuit. Output to 318. The random value generation circuit 318 that has received this signal latches the value at that timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230, and the latched value is incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318. It is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won the second special figure starting port 232, the timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 is also the same. Is latched, and the latched value is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318. Further, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the universal start port 228, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the general start port 228. Then, the latched value is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the normal start port 228 built in the random value generation circuit 318.

  Further, as the ball detection sensor referred to in this specification, specifically, the general winning opening 226, the first special figure starting opening 230, the second special figure starting opening 232, the first variable winning opening 234, the second Examples include a sensor that detects a sphere that has won a predetermined winning opening, such as the variable winning opening 235, and a sensor that detects a sphere that passes through the normal start opening 228.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 336. The game information of the machine 100 (for example, information indicating the control state) is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power management unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302. The low voltage signal is an electric system abnormality signal indicating that there is an abnormality in the electric system for operating the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 corresponds to an example of an electric system abnormality signal output unit.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control section main processing described later is started). The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of game control means.

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication. The main control unit 300 sends commands and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 are configured such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The basic circuit 402 is connected to a ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effects data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  The basic circuit 402 detects a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418, and pressing of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. A chance button detection sensor 426 and a sensor circuit 428 that outputs a detection signal from the chance button detection sensor 426 to the basic circuit 402 are connected.

  Furthermore, a second sub-control unit 500 for controlling the decorative symbol display device (liquid crystal display device) 208 and the shielding device 246 is connected to the first sub-control unit 400.

  The sub-control unit that combines the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 receives a command signal from the main control unit 300 that is a game control unit, and based on the received command signal, the decorative symbol display device The effect means such as 208 is controlled.

<Discharge control unit, launch control unit, power supply management unit>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power management unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 mainly based on a signal such as a command transmitted from the main control unit 300, and awards based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. While detecting whether or not the payout of the ball or the rental ball has been completed, communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Based on the control signal instructing the launch intensity according to the amount, the launcher 146 and the launcher motor 632 driving the launcher 148 shown in FIG. The device 634 is controlled.

  The power management unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and supplies the predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500. The main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the launch control unit 630 are supplied with a predetermined voltage from the payout control unit 600. The power management unit 660 also stores a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In this example, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply management unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the launch control unit 630 are supplied from the payout control unit 600. However, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

<Type of design>
Next, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. The types of special maps and general maps to be stopped will be described.

  Fig.5 (a-1) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect (1st symbol aspect) of the special figure 1. FIG. The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that a ball has entered the first special figure start port 230. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment “variable display of special figure 1” (special figure). 1 variation game). Then, when the variation time determined before the variation start of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1. Hereinafter, a series of displays from the start of the “fluctuation display of special figure 1” to the stop display of the stop symbol form of special figure 1 may be referred to as the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 1. The symbol variation display of the special figure 1 may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  Fig.5 (a-2) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect (1st symbol aspect) of the special figure 2. FIG. The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that a ball has entered the second special figure start port 232. When the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment “variable display of special figure 2” (special figure). 2 variation games). Then, when the variation time determined before the start of variation in the special figure 2 has elapsed, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 2. Hereinafter, a series of displays from the start of the “fluctuation display of special figure 2” to the stop display of the stop symbol form of special figure 2 may be referred to as the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 2. The symbol variation display of the special figure 2 may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  In FIG. 5 (a-1) and FIG. 5 (a-2), six types of special drawings from “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure F” are shown as stop symbol forms in the symbol variation display. In both FIG. 5A-1 and FIG. 5A-2, the white portion in the figure indicates the location of the segment that is turned off, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment that is turned on.

  In this example, the stop symbol aspect of special figure 1 and the stop symbol aspect of special figure 2 are common. However, the special figure 2 has more advantageous game characteristics than the special figure 1, and in the special figure 2, the big hit symbols are all 15 round (R) special big hits. On the other hand, in Special Figure 1, only "Special Figure A" and "Special Figure B" are 15R special big hits, and "Special Figure C" and "Special Figure D" are 14R special big hits.

  The round here means the number of chances that a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls) can be obtained. In this example, the number of operations of the variable prize opening (234, 235) is represented, and 15 rounds means one or more opening / closing operations of the first variable prize opening 234 (one operation). Then, after this operation is continued 14 times, one or more opening / closing operations of the second variable prize opening 235 are performed once (one operation), and this operation is performed once. Fifteen rounds means that one or more opening / closing operations of the first variable prize opening 234 are performed once (one operation), and after this operation has continued 14 times, This means that the opening / closing operation is performed once (one operation), and this operation is performed once. Each round is one of a predetermined round end condition (for example, entry of a game ball of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls), acquisition of a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls), elapse of a predetermined time from the start of the round, etc. Or the process ends. In the pachinko machine 100 of this example, as will be described later, whether or not a big hit in the special figure variable game is determined by lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether or not it is a special big hit is determined by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the big hit and the special big hit or the short time big hit is the difference in whether the probability of winning the big hit is high (special big hit or short time big hit) or low (big hit) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state.

  In this example, in the special figure 2, when the big winning symbol (special figures A to D) is stopped and displayed and the second variable prize opening 235 which becomes an open state (for example, an open state for 30 seconds) at 15R is won, After the big hit game ends, the control state becomes a special figure high probability state. If the second variable prize opening 235 is not won at 15R, the control state remains in the special figure low probability state after the big hit game ends. That is, it can be said that the pachinko machine 100 in this example performs the transition to the special figure high probability state by a structure such as the second variable winning opening 235. That is, in this example, for example, there is a case where the probability variable function operating region is inside the second variable prize opening 235 and the probability variable function operating region is called a high probability variable determining region switch (or “probability changing region switch”). ) And the pachinko machine 100 is disclosed that shifts to the special figure high probability state on condition that the game ball passes to the high probability variation determination area switch. Further, in the high probability variation determination region valid state set while the second variable winning opening 235 is in the open state, the special ball high probability state is entered on condition that the game ball passes to the high probability variation determination region switch. You may make it transfer. On the other hand, in the special figure 1, “special figure A” or “special figure B” is stopped and displayed on the condition that the winning to the second variable winning opening 235 of the 15R is made, and after the big hit game is over, the special figure is in a high probability state. Thus, “special drawing C” or “special drawing D” is a big hit of 14R, and since there is no 15R, there is no special figure high probability state, and the special figure low probability state remains. That is, according to the pachinko machine 100 of this example, the 15th round jackpot is a jackpot that gives the right to shift to a special figure high probability state after the jackpot game ends, and is the second variable prize opening that is opened only at the 15th round. On condition that 235 is won, the game shifts to the special figure high probability state after the big hit game.

  The special figure low probability state corresponds to an example of a first probability control state. In addition, a special figure high probability state after the jackpot game is finished is sometimes referred to as a special figure probability change. Is an example of a second stochastic control state. This special figure high probability state may be referred to as a probability variation state or simply a probability variation. In this example, in the case of jackpot with probability change, after the jackpot game is finished, the probability variation state (special figure high probability state) is maintained while the symbol variation display is performed 100 times, and the non-probability variation state ( (Special figure low probability state). The probability variation state may be maintained until the next big hit.

  In the present specification, description will be made using a term indicating a state inside the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100) as a control state, but the term “control state” includes a concept of a so-called gaming state. The transition of the probability control state is performed by the main control unit 300, and the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a probability control state transition unit.

  Also, in this example, when a big hit is won, after the big hit game is over, the state shifts to a state with electric support (electric support) (hereinafter referred to as an electric support state). In the electric support state, after the big hit in the special figure fluctuation game is finished, the symbol change display is performed 100 times in the case of a big hit with probability variation, and the symbol variation display of 50 times in the case of a big hit without probability variation. This is a predetermined state that is maintained while the player is performing and the player's advantage is higher than the non-electric support state. This power support state is one of the control states prepared in the pachinko machine 100, and may be referred to as a time-short state. That is, the electric support state (time-short state) is started on condition that the big hit game ends. Strictly speaking, the “electric support state” is a state related to a general plan, and the “short-time state” is a state related to a special figure or a state related to a general figure and a special figure. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is also provided with a time reduction flag. When the time reduction flag is set to ON, it is in the electric support state and is usually in a high probability state. In the normal figure high probability state, compared to the normal figure low probability state, it becomes easier to win the common figure variable game (general figure certain change). For example, the winning probability of the usual figure floating game is 1/101 in the usual figure low probability state (non-electric support state), but increases to 99/101 in the usual figure high probability state (electric support state). In addition, in the electric support state, the fluctuation time of the general figure change game is shorter than that in the non-electric support state (the general figure change short). For example, in the non-electric support state, the fluctuation time of the usual game of 10 seconds is reduced to 1.2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, compared to the non-electric support state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 tends to be long (electric chew releasing period extension). For example, in the non-electric support state, the electric chew release period of 0.3 seconds is extended to 1.7 seconds in the electric support state. Furthermore, the pair of blade members 2321 are more likely to open in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state (increase the number of times the electric chew is released). For example, a pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened only once in the non-electric support state per opening to the normal start port 228 is opened three times in the electric support state (for example, 3 to open for 1.7 seconds) Repeatedly, the closing time between opening is 1.6 seconds). The probability of entering the second special figure starting port 232 increases due to the extension of the electric chew release period and the increase in the number of electric chow releases. Note that the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game. Therefore, the non-electric support state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, if the power is supported during the big hit game, a predetermined number of the variable winning holes (234, 235) during the big hit game and a large amount at the second special figure start opening 232 until the game ball enters. In order to solve this problem, there is a problem that the number of game balls that can be obtained during the big hit increases the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit and the gambling is increased. In this example, in the electric support state (short-time state), the universal figure change, the universal figure change, the electric chew release period extension, and the electric chew release frequency increase are all performed. If one of them is performed, the player's advantage is high, and it may be in the electric support state (short time state). Alternatively, if either one of the extension of the electric chew release period or the increase in the number of electric chew release is performed, the electric support state (short-time state) may be set. . In the non-electric support state, the game ball is less likely to enter the second special figure starting port 232 than in the electric support state. As described above, in the second special figure starting port 232, the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters changes from one of the small size and the large size to the other size. The entrance of the second special figure starting port 232 is larger in the electric support state over a longer period than in the non-electric support state.

  In this example, in the special figure 2, the jackpot symbol (special symbols A to D) is stopped and displayed, and if the second variable prize opening 235 which is opened at the 15th R is won, the symbol 100 times after the big hit game is finished. While the variable display is performed, the probability change state and the electric support state (special figure high probability normal figure high probability state) are maintained, and the 101st time the non-probable state and the non electric support state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state). ), And if the second variable prize opening 235 is not won at 15R, the electric support state (normal figure high) is displayed while the symbol variation display is performed 50 times in the non-probability change state after the big hit game ends. (Probability state) is maintained, and the 51st shift to the non-electric support state (ordinary low probability state). In this way, in this example, when the big game is a big game in the special figure 2, the first condition is surely easily established.

  On the other hand, in the special figure 1, “special figure A” or “special figure B” is stopped and displayed 100 times after the big hit game is over, on condition that the 15R second variable prize opening 235 is won. During the process, the probability change state and the electric support state (special figure high probability normal figure high probability state) are maintained, and the 101st time is the non-probable change state and the non-electric support state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state). If there is no winning at the second variable winning opening 235 at 15R, the power support state (while the symbol variation display is performed 50 times with the non-probability changing state after the big hit game is finished. The normal state high probability state) is maintained, and the 51st operation shifts to the non-electric support state (normal state low probability state). Also, in the special figure 1, when “Special figure C” or “Special figure D” is stopped and displayed, after the big hit game is finished, the symbol change display is performed while 50 symbols change display is performed in the non-probable state. The state (normal high probability state) is maintained, and the 51st shift to the non-electric support state (normal low probability state).

  In the non-electric support state, the entrance of the second special figure starting port 232 is kept small. On the other hand, as described above, in the electric support state, the entrance of the second special figure starting port 232 is large, and the entry rate of game balls is increased. That is, in the non-electric support state, the game ball enters the second special figure start port 232 that is the variable start area at the first approach rate, whereas in the electric support state, the game ball starts the second special figure start. It enters the mouth 232 at a second approach rate that is higher than the first approach rate. Therefore, the non-electric support state corresponds to an example of the first approach rate control state, and the electric support state corresponds to an example of the second approach rate control state.

  In this example, a small hit is not prepared, but a small hit may be prepared. In this small hit, during the small hit game, the first door member 2341 of the first variable winning opening 234 operates a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times), and the first door member 2341 is Maintains an open state for a maximum of 1.5 seconds per run. In opening the first door member 2341 at the small hit, for example, when a game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the first opening, or a predetermined amount of game value (a predetermined number of balls) is obtained. Once acquired, the second and subsequent releases are not performed. During the small hit game, it shifts to the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit is a role in which the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and after the small hit game is finished, the control state returns to the control state before the start of the small hit game.

  In the following description, the big hit game and the small hit game may be collectively referred to as a win game.

  In the big hit game, the variable winning opening (234, 235) is opened, and the player's advantage is relatively high.

  In this example, two types of lost symbols are also prepared. The special figure E shown in FIG. 5 (a-1) and FIG. 5 (a-2) is the first lose symbol, and the special figure F is the second lose symbol. When the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, the door members (2341, 2351) of the variable prize opening (234, 235) are not opened and closed, and the player's advantage is relatively low. In addition, a losing symbol (for example, a third losing symbol or the like) other than “Special E” and “Special F” may be prepared. In this example, the losing symbol includes a plurality of types of symbols. .

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 100 of this example, the hit control state of the second advantage with a high advantage of the player and the loss of the first advantage with a lower advantage than the second advantage. A control state is prepared, and the pachinko machine 100 takes either one of a control state (second control state) and a loss control state (first control state). The transition of the control state is also performed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a control state transition unit.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of this example, other symbols corresponding to “Special Figure A” are prepared, and the same applies to other symbols such as “Special Figure B”.

  The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are notifying means for informing the determination result (lottery result), and the pattern mode ( This corresponds to an example of symbol display means for performing symbol variation display until the special symbols A to F) are stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 5B shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decorative designs in this example, “decoration 1” to “decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the first special figure start port 230 or the second special view start port 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special view start port 230; or On the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the second special symbol start port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Displayed in the order of “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →... “Decoration display of decorative pattern” is performed. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variably displays the decorative symbols separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. And the stop symbol aspect (2nd symbol aspect) which is a combination of a decoration symbol is stopped and displayed. When notifying 14R big hit (normal big hit) or 15R special big hit (big hit with probability variation), “decorative combination 1” (for example, “decoration 1” in which three same decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. -Decoration 1-Decoration 1 "and" Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2 ") are stopped and displayed. Further, “decoration pattern combination 2” (for example, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” or “decoration 7—decoration 7—decoration 7”) in which the same three odd-numbered ornamental symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Etc.) is stopped, the 15R special big hit (big hit with probability variation) is confirmed. In this example, the decorative symbol combination 2 corresponds to the second combination. Further, the combination of the decorative symbols 1 other than the decorative symbol combination 2 corresponds to the first combination.

  It should be noted that the stop symbol mode (see FIGS. 5A-1 and 5A-2) of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 and the symbol display areas 208a to 208c on the left middle right of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. The decorative pattern (see FIG. 5B) is larger in the stop pattern mode (see FIG. 5B) of one decorative pattern to be performed.

  FIG.5 (c) shows an example of the usual stop symbol mode (2nd symbol mode). In this example, there are two types of stoppage display modes for normal maps, “general map A” which is a winning symbol and “general map B” which is a lost symbol. Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a sphere detection sensor, detects that the sphere has passed through the general start port 228, the general display display device 210 illuminates all seven segments and the central one segment. Repeat the lighting and perform “variable display of ordinary figure” (ordinary figure fluctuation game). Then, after the fluctuation time has elapsed, one of the symbols “general symbol A” which is a winning symbol and “general symbol B” which is a lost symbol is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 5C, the white portions in the drawing indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are illuminated.

  Hereinafter, a series of displays from the start of the “variable display of the normal diagram” to the stop display of the stop pattern mode of the normal diagram may be referred to as a normal diagram of variable stop display. The universal symbol display device 210 corresponds to an example of auxiliary symbol notification means.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, the main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes a jackpot special figure 1 random number counter, a lost special figure 1 random number counter, and a counter for these counters in the special figure 2. In addition, the RAM 308 stores the special figure 1 holding number, the special figure 1 winning random value, the jackpot special figure 1 random value, the lost special figure 1 random value, the special figure 1 success / failure determination result, the special figure 1 determination result, The special figure 1 variation time, and the number of reservations, the random number value, and the result for special figure 2 are stored. In addition, the RAM 308 has a separate storage section divided into the maximum number of areas (four in this example) that can hold the start of the determination (lottery) for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 separately. ing. As will be described later, the reserved storage unit of FIG. 1 includes 5 of special figure 1 winning random number value, jackpot special figure 1 random value, loss special figure 1 random value, and special figure 1 variation time determining random value. One random number value is set as one set, and these five random number values are stored for each area one set at a time in winning order (holding order).

  As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input resets by a reset interrupt and executes the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, to the WDT 314 The operation permission and initial value setting are performed. In this example, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared and time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500 by the power supply control unit 660. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this example), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), the step is performed. The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312 and a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before power interruption (before power interruption), and the state before power interruption is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to an initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of a game store operates the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. If the RAM clear signal is ON (RAM clear is necessary), the process goes to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. move on. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the power-off state. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the same way as the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115, after setting for prohibition of interruption, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, four initial value generating random number counters for generating initial values of the regular winning random number counter, the big hit special figure random value counter, and the lost special figure random value counter, Three random number counters for generating the normal timer random number value, the special figure 1 variation time determination random value, and the special figure 2 variation time determination random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as normal timer random numbers is 0 to 20, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal timer random value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this example, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The timer interrupt process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically (in this example) so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this example) and no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect processing abnormality). Then, restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the main controller timer interrupt period.

  In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of the various sensors 320 shown in FIG. The data is stored in a signal state storage area provided for each sensor 320. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interruption process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms is started several times while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In this example, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there has been a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores winning determination pattern information (in this example, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal). In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is pre-determined winning determination pattern information (in this example, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). If there is a match to the general winning port 226, the first variable winning port 234, the second variable winning port 235, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232 It is determined that there has been an incoming ball or a normal start port 228. In other words, it is determined that there has been a winning at these winning ports 234, 230 and the starting ports 230, 232, 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226. The ROM 306 of the main controller 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this example, information indicating that there is a detection signal before, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 and step S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the normal winning random number value used in the main control unit 300, Special-purpose timer random numbers, jackpot special figure 1 random value, lose special figure 1 random value, special figure 1 variation time determining random value, jackpot special figure 2 random value, lose special figure 2 random value, and special figure 2. Update a random number counter for generating each random time value for determining the variation time. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next time, in addition to setting it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value Keep it. Further, apart from the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. An initial value storage area is provided in the RAM 308. In this example, the counter for acquiring the random number value related to the special figure 1 and the counter for acquiring the random number value related to the special figure 2 are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update processing, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 210, and the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 are timed. Special symbol 1 display symbol update timer for performing, special symbol 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed and stopped on the second special symbol display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215, winning prize counter update processing is performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when winning holes 234, 230 and starting holes 230, 232, 228 are won, the RAM 308 stores the winning ball number storage area provided for each winning hole or for each starting hole. The value is read, and 1 is added to set the original prize ball number storage area.

  In step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, if there is a winning at the first special figure starting port 230 and the number of the special figure 1 variable games on hold is less than a predetermined number (4 in this example), a predetermined starting is performed. Get information. That is, if the number of holdings is less than the predetermined number, the special figure 1 winning random number value, the jackpot special figure 1 random value, the loss special figure 1 random value, and the special figure 1 variation time determining random value are acquired. The special figure 1 winning random value acquired here is a value obtained by processing a hardware random number (a value of hardware random number + a value of R register + 1). On the other hand, the jackpot special figure 1 random value, the loss special figure 1 random value, and the special figure 1 variation time determining random value are values obtained by processing software random numbers derived from the software random number counter provided in the RAM 308 (software Random number value + R register value + 1). The combination of the random value generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 4, the software random number counter provided in the RAM 308, and the main control unit 300 that performs random number processing generates and derives start information, and start information deriving means This corresponds to an example of (first start information deriving means, second start information deriving means). The various random number values (starting information) acquired here are stored as a set of starting information in a vacant area corresponding to the winning order (holding order) of the holding storage unit of FIG. The The reserved storage unit of FIG. 1 stores the start information acquired when a game ball enters the first special figure start port 230 (first start area) up to a predetermined first upper limit number (here, four). This corresponds to the first start information storage means that can be stored. At this time, various random values (starting information) may be temporarily stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the value stored in the temporary area may be stored in the holding storage unit of FIG. The first start-up information storage means may be used, or the reserved storage section and the temporary area in FIG. 1 may be used as the first start-up information storage means. Further, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 adds 1 to the value of the number of holdings in FIG. 1 stored in the RAM 308, and the number of holdings in FIG. Therefore, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a holding unit. As for special figure 2, each random value which is starting information is acquired similarly to special figure 1, and the acquired random number value is similarly stored as a set of starting information in the reserved storage unit of special figure 2 provided in RAM 308. In addition, 1 is added to the value of the number of holdings in FIG. 2 stored in the RAM 308. The reserved storage unit of the special figure 2 stores the start information acquired when the game ball enters the second special figure start port 232 (second start area) up to a predetermined second upper limit number (here, four). This corresponds to a possible second starting information storage means. At this time, various random values (starting information) may be temporarily stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the value stored in the temporary area may be stored in the holding storage unit of FIG. 2 may be used as the second start-up information storage unit, or the reserved storage unit and the temporary area in FIG. 2 may be used as the second start-up information storage unit.

  In addition, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the general map starting port 228 and the number of the general map variable games held is less than a predetermined number (4 in this example), the general map winning at that timing is determined. The value of the random number counter for generating the random number value is acquired as the normal winning random number value, which is the starting information, and stored in a random number value storage area provided in the RAM 308 different from that for the special figure. In this winning acceptance process, a predetermined ball detection sensor is used to win (winning) the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228, or the variable winning port (234, 235). Sphere) is included in the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the universal figure starting port 228, and the variable prize opening (234 235), winning acceptance information indicating the presence / absence of winning (winning) is set.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a probability variation flag, and when a winning (winning) of the second variable prize opening 235 is detected, the probability variation flag is set to ON. In this example, the probability variation flag is not set to on and remains off unless a winning (successful ball) at the second variable winning opening 235 is detected.

  Whether the start information of the special figure or the start information of the usual figure, if the number of holdings is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the start information is not acquired and the process proceeds to step S219.

  In step S219, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 4 are composed of 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the normal state update process in the middle of the normal symbol display (the above-described general symbol display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on / off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to display the lost symbol display mode 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines the symbol of either one of the winning symbols (the common symbol A shown in FIG. 5C) or the lost symbol (the universal symbol B shown in FIG. 5C). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting region, and the blade member 2321 is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that performs the opening control of the pair of blade members 2321 in this way corresponds to an example of a variable start region control unit that performs variable start region control. On the other hand, if it is in the non-electric support state, in the setting area of the RAM 308, the normal operation is not set, and no signal is sent to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232. Is not output. By doing so, the blade member 2321 remains closed. Note that a signal for maintaining the blade member 2321 in the closed state may be output without fail.

  In the case of the electric support state, in the process starting at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 0.1 second), a signal for holding the blade member 2321 in a closed state is output to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321, and the valve is closed in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set information indicating the period.

  In the case of the electric support state, in the normal state update process which starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area, set “Normal” inactive. Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is lost, the usual figure lose flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure loss flag is on, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  Subsequently, in the step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is executed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the second special map start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is not in operation), and the pending general map variable game is not held. When the number is 1 or more, it is decided whether to win or not to win the result of the variable figure game by random lottery based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area. Make a hit determination (determining whether or not to win a normal figure).

  FIG. 8A is a diagram showing a common figure determination high probability table, and FIG. 8B is a figure showing a common figure determination low probability table. These tables are stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  When the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 obtains the normal winning random number value, it refers to the short time flag, and if the short time flag is on, it is in a high probability state, and therefore the normal winning random number value (possible numerical range is 0 to 99) is derived as a universal figure determination result based on which random number range in the general figure determination high probability table shown in FIG. The hit probability in the usual high probability state is 99/100. The hit probability in the normal high probability state may be 100%.

  On the other hand, if the time flag is off, it is a normal low probability state, and in this example, the hit probability in the normal low probability state is 1/100. In the ordinary low probability state, the loss may be 100%. In such a case, in the ordinary low probability state (non-electric support state), the electric chew may not be released and a random lottery may be performed. It does not have to be done.

  As a result of the general drawing lottery, when winning, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the determination of whether or not the normal figure is determined, the value of the random number counter for generating the normal figure timer random number described above is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of values are determined based on the acquired general figure timer random number value. One time to display the variable map on the general map display device 210 is selected from the variable time, and this variable display time is stored in the general map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the normal map variable display time. . Note that the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the general figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308. A value obtained by subtracting 1 from the number is re-stored in the usual figure reservation number storage area. In addition, the random number value that is used for determining whether or not it is normal is deleted.

  Subsequently, special figure prefetching processing (step S224) is executed. This special figure prefetch process will be described later.

  Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225), Subsequently, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) about special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following eight processes is performed according to the state of the special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), Performs lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns off. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game).

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the general command rotation start setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area described above, and the process ends.

  In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has passed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is changed from 1 to 0), the special figure in the special figure related lottery process to be described later Based on the determination result (stop pattern mode of the special figure), the 7 segment LED constituting the second special figure display device 214 is controlled to be turned on / off, and the special figure 2 stop display is being displayed in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set to represent. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs a fixed display of any one of the special symbols shown in FIG. 5A-2. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 milliseconds). With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player.

  In addition, a predetermined transmission information indicating that a general command rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in a command setting transmission process (step S233) to be described later is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and a pattern for stopping the variable display is displayed. Special figure 2 identification information indicating that it is special figure 2 is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the 15R big hit flag is turned on. When the 15R jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 Is set in the setting area of the special figure 2 and a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, waiting for a period during which an image for notifying the player that the big win by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. In order to do this, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, 5H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the transmission information storage area described above in order to execute the general command winning effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Or a solenoid (332 for driving to open / close the first door member 2341 of the first variable winning port 234) until a winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the first variable winning port 234 ), A signal for holding the first door member 2341 in the opened state is output, and information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, 7H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command big prize opening release setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the first door member 2341 in a closed state is output to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the first door member 2341 of the first variable prize winning opening 234, and the door closing time provided in the RAM 308 Information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the management timer. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, after the opening / closing control of the first door member 2341 is repeated 14 times (for 14 rounds), this time, a predetermined opening period (for example, 30 seconds or a predetermined number of balls ( The second door member 2351 is held in the open state by the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the second door member 2351 of the second variable prize opening 235) until the winning of the game ball (for example, 10 balls) is detected. A signal indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Next, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the second door member 2351 in the closed state is output to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the second door member 2351 of the second variable winning opening 235, and the door closing time provided in the RAM 308 Information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the management timer. Thus, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts after performing the opening / closing control of the second door member 2351 once (for one round), a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a decorative symbol display device Information indicating the effect standby period is set in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to wait for a period during which an image for notifying the player that the jackpot by 208 is to be ended is displayed. To do. In the present embodiment, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 allows the first variable prize opening 234 and the second variable prize opening 235 (which may be referred to as special electric accessories) to be opened. Outputs a special electric accessory release signal. Further, the special electric combination actuating signal is output during the opening of the special electric combination and during the closing period described above. The special electric accessory actuating signal is output in an effective period for processing the winning balls of the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 in the closing period, instead of the closing period described above. You may comprise. In the present embodiment, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 outputs an accessory continuous operation signal during the execution of the big hit game. That is, it can be said that the jackpot game is being executed while the accessory continuous operation signal is being output. These output signals may be output to an external hall computer via the information output circuit 336, may be output from a test output port, or output information. It may be output from both the circuit 336 and the test output port.

  As described above, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 is an example of variable winning control means for performing change control of the opening / closing state of the door members (2341, 2351) of the variable winning opening (234, 235) during the big hit gaming state. It corresponds to. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores the opening / closing patterns of the door members (2341, 2351) of the variable prize opening (234, 235), and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 receives a special drawing from the ROM 306. An open / close pattern corresponding to the determination of whether or not the variable game is successful is acquired.

  As described above, in this example, when a winning (winning) of the second variable winning opening 235 is detected, the probability variation flag is set to ON. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is also provided with a time reduction flag in addition to the probability variation flag. Further, the RAM 308 is also provided with a number storage unit. In this example, the time reduction flag is set to ON simultaneously with the end of the big hit game. If the probability variation flag is set to ON, 100 is set in the number storage unit, and if the probability variation flag remains OFF, the power support count is set to 50 in the number storage unit. It should be noted that 100 times may be set in the number-of-times storage section at the stage where the winning (winning) of the second variable winning opening 235 is detected. In addition, the winning flag is turned on when a winning at the second variable winning opening 235 is detected, and the probability variation flag is set to ON on condition that the winning flag is turned on at the end of the big hit game. You may make it do. Also, in this example, when the game shifts to the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state after the big hit game ends, the control state continues until the symbol variation display is performed 100 times, and the special figure low probability common figure is displayed. In the case of transition to the figure high probability state, the control state continues until the symbol variation display of 50 times is performed. Even when transitioning to the probabilistic normal pattern high probability state, for example, the number of symbol variation displays that the control state continues is set to the same number in any control state, for example, it is continued until 100 symbol variation displays are performed. May be.

  When a value is set in the number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 subtracts 1 from the value if the value is 1 or more, and the subtraction result is 1 to 0. If it becomes, the time reduction flag is turned off. If the probability variation flag is on, the probability variation flag is also turned off when the subtraction result in the number storage unit is changed from 1 to 0.

  Also during the big hit game, the probability variation flag and the hourly flag are turned off. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shifts to the non-electric support state (first entry rate control state) when the big hit gaming state (second control state).

  Furthermore, 6H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command end effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (the timing when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Furthermore, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a loss, the loss flag is turned on. When the lost flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next process.

  When the special figure 2 state update process is completed, the special figure 1 state update process is performed. If the result of the special figure 1 variable game is 15R special big hit, the 15R big hit flag is turned on, and if the result is 14R big hit, the 14R big hit flag is turned on. When the 15R jackpot flag is on, the process is the same as the process described in the special figure 2 state update process described above, in which “special figure 2” is replaced with “special figure 1”.

  On the other hand, when the 14R big hit flag is on, the opening / closing control of the second door member 2351 at the second variable winning opening 235 is not performed, and the first door member 2341 at the first variable winning opening 234 is not controlled. After performing the opening / closing control, information indicating the effect standby period is set in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer in the RAM 308, and thereafter, the same control as that described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed. . Therefore, the probability variation flag remains off and the time reduction flag is set to on, but the number of times of electric support is set to 50 in the number storage unit.

  The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the special figure related lottery process corresponds to an example of the determination unit. The main control unit 300 first performs the process for the special figure 2 (the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229)), and then performs the process for the special figure 1 (the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231)). Do. As described above, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) before the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231), so that the first special figure start port 230 can be operated at the same timing. When starting information is acquired based on a game ball entering and starting information is acquired based on a game ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, or a special figure 2 variable game start condition Even if the start condition of the special figure 1 variable game is satisfied at the same time, or both the start condition of the special figure 2 variable game and the start condition of the special figure 1 variable game are satisfied, the special figure 2 variable game is first Therefore, the special figure 1 variable game does not start to change. That is, the pachinko machine 100 of this example performs priority variation of the special figure 2, and the lottery based on the winning of the second special figure start port 232 (whether or not the special figure 2 is determined) is determined as the first special figure start port. This is prioritized over the lottery based on the winning of 230 (whether or not to determine whether or not special figure 1). In other words, in the pachinko machine 100 of this example, when a game ball enters the first special start area, the random number value is stored in the first random number storage area up to the maximum number of reservations, and is stored in the second special start area. When a game ball wins, both the first random number storage area and the second random number storage area are randomized in the winning storage section that stores random number values up to the maximum number of reservations in the second random value storage area. When a numerical value is stored, the first random number value storage area stores the random number value and the second random number value storage area stores the random number value regardless of the time. 2 is determined based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area, the random number value is not stored in the first random number value storage area, and the second random number value storage area is stored. If a random value is stored, the second random value The determination is made based on the random number value stored in the storage area, the random value is not stored in the second random value storage area, and the random value is stored in the first random value storage area. If there is, a go / no-go determination means for making a go / no-go determination based on the random number value stored in the first random value storage area is provided. In addition, the main control unit 300 notifies the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variable game by the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214, and wins a prize to the second special figure start port 232. Based on the determination result, the start information of FIG. 1 is used as the start information in which the determination result is not performed. In the state where only the start information of the special figure 1 of the start information of the special figure 2 remains, and the start information of the special figure 2 is newly stored, the newly stored start of the special figure 2 The notification of the result of the determination based on the information is performed prior to the notification of the result of the determination based on the startup information of FIG. Further, the start information acquisition means for acquiring start information, when start information is stored in both of the first start information storage means and the second start information storage means, the second start information When starting information is acquired from the storage means and the starting information is stored in one of the first starting information storing means and the second starting information storing means, the starting information is stored. The starting information is obtained from the information storage means. It should be noted that the special figure 2 related lottery process is performed first after the special figure 2 state update process of step S225, and then the special figure 1 state update process of step S227 is performed, and then the special figure 1 related lottery process is performed. It may be. Further, the pachinko machine 100 of this example performs priority variation of the special figure 2, but the success / failure determination (in order of winning) according to the order of winning the prize for the first special figure starting port 230 and the second special figure starting port 232. (Variation) may be performed. For example, when winning in the order of the second special figure starting port 232, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, the pachinko machine 100 that changes the winning order changes the special figure 2 The determination is made in the order of determination of success / failure determination of FIG.

  In the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229), the execution of the success / failure determination (lottery) for the special figure 2, determination of the special figure to be stopped, and determination of the variation time are performed. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the special figure related lottery process corresponds to an example of the determination unit. In the special figure 2 related lottery process, first, it is determined whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied. In this determination, first, it is determined whether or not a predetermined success / failure determination prohibition condition is not satisfied. That is, it is determined whether or not the second special figure display device 214 is displaying the special figure variation or the stop display, and if any one is being displayed, the main controller timer interrupt processing is performed. Returning, if neither is displayed, it is determined whether it is set during special figure operation or special figure non-operation, and if it is set during special figure operation, the main controller timer interrupt Returning to the process, if the special figure is not in operation, it is determined that the validity determination prohibition condition has not been established, and this time, it is determined whether or not a predetermined validity determination condition has been established. The determination as to whether or not the game is successful is determined by referring to the reserved storage unit of the special figure 2 provided in the RAM 308 to determine whether or not the number of the special figure 2 variable game held is larger than zero. If the hold number is 0, the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if the number of holdings is 1 or more, a predetermined success / failure determination condition is established, and the start information stored most recently from the holding storage unit of FIG. Random value for set (Special figure 2 winning random value, Special figure 2 random value for jackpot, Special figure 2 random value for lost, and Special figure 2 variable time determining random value) is taken out and stored in its reserved storage The start information (a set of random values) that has been stored is transferred from the currently stored area to the adjacent area. That is, if the starting information stored in the past is taken out from the holding storage unit of FIG. 2 and the starting information is stored in the holding storage unit of FIG. 2, the Nth oldest starting information is held in FIG. It is set as the (N-1) oldest starting information in the storage unit. Also, 1 is subtracted from the pending number stored in the RAM 308. One set of random values from the reserved storage unit of the special figure 2 of the RAM 308 (the special figure 2 winning random value, the jackpot special figure 2 random value, the lost special figure 2 random value, and the special figure 2 variable time determining random number value) The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that performs the process of taking out) corresponds to an example of a second start-up information acquisition unit.

  FIG. 8C is a diagram showing a high / bad determination table, and FIG. 8D is a low probability table for determination. These tables are stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  When the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 retrieves the start information from the holding storage unit of the RAM 308, the CPU 304 refers to the probability variation flag. If the probability variation flag is on, the special diagram high probability state is obtained. Based on which random number range in the high probability table for success / failure determination shown in FIG. 10 (c) belongs to the numerical range to be obtained, “big hit” or “lost” To derive. The big hit probability in the special figure high probability state is 1 / 65.536.

  On the other hand, if the probability variation flag is off, it is in the special figure low probability state. Therefore, based on which random number range in the special figure 2 winning random number table shown in FIG. Then, “big hit” or “losing” is derived as the result of the special figure 2 determination. The big hit probability in the special figure low probability state is 1 / 262.144.

  Next, the symbol of the special figure 2 is determined based on the special figure 2 determination result.

  FIG. 8E shows a special figure determination table. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. In the special figure determination table, a random number range corresponding to the stop pattern form of the special figure (see FIG. 5A-2) is defined for each success / failure determination result.

  The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, if the special figure 2 determination result is a big hit, the special figure 2 random number value for big hit (taken out of one set of random values previously acquired from the reserved storage unit of the RAM 308. The numerical value range to be obtained is 0 to 99), it is determined which random number range of the jackpot the result of determination of the success / failure in the special figure determination table shown in FIG. “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure D” are determined. All random number ranges are 25%, and the distribution probability is the same. The distribution probability may be different for each symbol.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 win / fail judgment is a loss, the special figure 2 random value for the loss (a numerical value range that can be taken is 0 to 0) among the random values for one set previously acquired from the holding storage unit of the RAM 308. 99) determines which random number range out of the misses the result of determination of the success / failure in the special figure determination table shown in FIG. Determine “Special Figure F”. The special figure 2 decision result decided here is information representing the symbol form of special figure 2 to be stopped and displayed by the second special figure display device 214.

  Deriving “big hit” or “losing” may be determined as the success / failure determination, but determining the special symbol of the stop symbol form may also be determined as the success / failure determination.

  Subsequently, the symbol variation time (special symbol 2 variation time) in the symbol variation display of the special symbol 2 is determined based on the special symbol 2 determination result. First, the special symbol in the special symbol 1 related lottery process (step S231) is determined here. The determination of FIG. 1 determination result and the special figure 1 to be stopped will be described.

  First, in the special figure 1 related lottery process, one set of random values (special figure 1 winning random number value, jackpot special figure 1 random value, loss special figure 1 random value, And a special figure 1 variation time determination random number value) are taken out, based on one set of random values (starting information), execution / non-use determination (lottery) for special figure 1 and determination of special figure to be stopped and displayed I do. In the execution of the appropriateness determination, the appropriateness determination table shown in FIG. 8C and FIG. 8D is used, and the special figure determination table shown in FIG. In the case of special figure 1, special figure A and special figure B are big hits of 15 rounds, and there is a possibility of big hits with certainty. The probability of a big hit of 15 rounds in Special Figure 1 is 50%. However, if the second variable prize opening 235 is not won in the 15th round, the probability variation is not provided, and the number of time reductions is reduced to 50 times.

  In both the special figure 2 lottery process and the special figure 1 related lottery process, when the special figure to be stopped (special figure determination result) is determined, the special figure variable display is performed based on the special figure determination result. Determine the symbol variation time. In this example, there is almost no chance that the symbol variation display is executed for the special symbol 2 in the low probability state of the ordinary figure, so the symbol variation display related to the special symbol 2 in the low probability state of the common symbol is all the same. The symbol variation time (for example, 5 seconds) may be used. At this time, the symbol variation time may be different between the symbol variation display that is lost and the symbol variation display that is a big hit.

  FIG. 9A is a diagram showing a table set selection table when a big hit is made in FIG. 1, and FIG. 9B is a diagram showing a table set selection table when a big hit is made in FIG. These tables are also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  In this example, in the ordinary figure low probability state, the ordinary drawing lottery is only hit with a probability of 1/100, so the electric Chu is hardly released and the probability of winning the second special figure starting port 232 is low. The table shown in (a) corresponds to a table set selection table that is frequently used in the case of the normal figure low probability (special figure low probability normal figure low probability) state. FIG. 9A shows a control state after the big hit game corresponding to the stop pattern at the time of the big hit in the special figure 1 for reference. A circle mark indicates that there is a mark, and a cross mark indicates that there is no mark (hereinafter the same).

  On the other hand, in the ordinary high probability state, the electric Chu is almost open, and the big hit in the special figure 2 is more advantageous to the player than the big hit in the special figure 1, so the player aims at the second special figure starting port 232. The table shown in FIG. 9B corresponds to a table set selection table that is frequently used in the case of the normal figure high probability (special figure high probability normal figure high probability, special figure low probability normal figure high probability) state. In FIG. 9B, for reference, the control state after the big hit game corresponding to the stop pattern at the time of the big hit in the special figure 2 is shown.

  9A and 9B, it is not possible to change with certainty unless the second variable winning opening 235 opened in the 15th round is won.

  From the table shown in FIG. 9A and the table shown in FIG. 9B, when the special figure determination result is a big hit (15R big hit) symbol that the second special figure start port 232 opens, a table set When 1 is selected and the special figure determination result is a big hit (14R big hit) symbol that the second special figure start port 232 does not open, the table set 2 is selected.

  FIG. 9C is a diagram for explaining tables used in the table set.

  In the table set, as will be described in detail later, a table to be used is defined in accordance with the number of symbol fluctuations of the special figure after the big hit game ends.

  There are five types of tables 1 to 5 used in the table set. Table 1 is a table originally used in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, and the default gaming state of the table 1 Becomes a low probability state of special maps. Table 2 is a table originally used in the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state, and the default gaming state of the table 2 is the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. The table 3 is originally a table used in the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and the default game state of the table 3 is the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. The table 4 is originally a table used in the state immediately before falling in the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state, and the default gaming state of the table 4 becomes the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. The table 5 is a table that is originally used in the state immediately before falling in the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and the default gaming state of the table 5 is the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. Thus, in this example, the table used differs according to the control state.

  Each table is used when selecting a variable time (timer number) to be used, as will be described in detail later.

  FIG. 9D is a diagram for explaining timer numbers.

  FIG. 9D shows the variation time corresponding to each timer number. Further, it is performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 (display means) according to the control state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, special figure low probability normal figure high probability state). The production mode is also shown for reference. In this example, according to the gaming state, the variation time (timer number) of the special figure and the effect mode of the decorative symbol display device 208 are associated one-to-one. That is, if the gaming state is different, the effect pattern of the decorative symbol display device 208 is different even if the timer number is the same. For example, even when the timer number is 4 (10 seconds), in the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state or in the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state, it becomes the rendering mode of Battle Gase Aori 1, and the special figure low probability ordinary figure low. In the probabilistic state, it becomes a normal losing effect mode. Even if the timer number is 6 (30 seconds), the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state or the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state becomes the effect mode of battle A defeat, and the special figure low probability normal figure low In the probabilistic state, it becomes an effect mode of Super Reach A Loss. As described above, depending on whether the normal figure high probability state or the normal figure low probability state is used, the effect pattern on the decorative symbol display device 208 may be different even though the variation time is the same.

  The main control unit 300 may determine up to the effect mode of the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponding to the variation time of the special figure, but in this example, the information indicating the variation time determined here and the current gaming state Is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 determines an effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponding to the variation time according to the gaming state.

  The effect forms in the decorative symbol display device 208 include an effect aspect with a reach effect and an effect aspect without a reach effect. “Super-shortening”, “shortening”, “normal”, and “Battle Gase Aori” are production modes that do not involve reach production, and other than these are production modes that involve reach production. Note that “Battle Gase Aori” is an effect mode that expresses what is likely to develop into a reach effect.

  In this example, normal reach and super reach (SP reach) are prepared as reach effects. In normal reach, generally, two symbol display areas (for example, the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c shown in FIG. 3) are displayed in the same manner, and the remaining one symbol display area (for example, the middle symbol display area 208b) is stopped. If the symbol display area that is variably displayed (reach state), that is, if the symbol display area that is variably displayed stops displaying a specific symbol (the symbol that is equal to the symbol display area that is stopped), the predetermined jackpot symbol This is a state in which the combination (“decorative symbol combination 1” or “decorative symbol combination 2” shown in FIG. 5B) is stopped and displayed. Super reach is a type of reach that improves the production effect by adding special variation display to normal reach. In this example, super reach (SP reach) A, super reach (SP reach) B, battle A Battle B is prepared. That is, both Battle A and Battle B are effects accompanied by super reach.

  In addition, long reach, normal reverse reach, double line reach, and the like are known as super reach, and special reach such as special multi-line reach, full rotation reach, special full rotation reach, and the like are also known. In the present specification, the term “reach” means a variation of the decorative pattern including normal reach, super reach, and special reach. This reach is an effect of notifying the player after the success / failure determination and notifying the result of the success / failure determination that the result of the special determination's success / failure determination (lottery) will be the winning determination result. Thus, whether or not to perform reach is determined after determining whether or not to reach. In the case of no reach, the fluctuation time of the special figure is relatively short, in the super reach, the fluctuation time of the special figure is relatively long, and in the normal reach, the fluctuation time of the special figure is the time between no reach and the super reach.

  In addition, “-” shown in FIG. 9D represents a prohibition process, and the effect mode is not originally performed. In other words, if the actual gaming state is different from the default gaming state of the variable time selection table, if the actual gaming state has a performance mode that matches the gaming state, The production is executed, but when the prohibition process is applied in the actual gaming state, the production is executed using the production mode of the default gaming state in the table for selecting the variation time instead.

  Here, the prohibition process in this example will be described in detail.

  First, as a premise, the gaming state, the effect display, and the variation time are in a correspondence relationship in principle. However, since the table for selecting the variation time or the variation time (here, the table set and the tables 1 to 5 correspond to each other, hereinafter simply referred to as a table) is determined prior to the determination of the gaming state. There may occur a case where the variation time or the table does not correspond to the gaming state or the effect display. That is, a special state occurs. At this time, there may be an effect that is not supposed to be performed in the game state and the effect display. The performance time of the production that should not be performed originally is a time during which a prohibition is applied as a variation time corresponding to the gaming state. For example, in the case of losing performance, basically, the combination of different decorative designs is stopped, so there is no problem even if there is a difference in time. Conversely, the difference in time uses the player's uncomfortable feeling. It may be a notification of the special state. Moreover, in the case of reach production, the reach production used in another game state can be performed. In this example, the same kind of production is performed with or without electric support. For example, a reach B that does not appear originally may appear. Even in this case, there is no sense of incongruity of the player as an effect, but on the other hand, there may be a sense of incongruity in that it appears in a gaming state that does not originally appear.

  In this example, although the variation time is the same depending on whether the special figure high probability state or the special figure low probability state, the production mode in the decorative symbol display device 208 may or may not be prohibited. The case where it cancels | releases and an effect aspect may differ may be provided.

  FIG. 10A is a diagram for explaining the table set 1.

  The table set 1 is used when shifting to the probability changing state after the end of the big hit game. After the big hit, until the 99th symbol variation display, the table 3 for the special symbol high probability common symbol high probability state is used, and in the symbol variation display of the 100th symbol, that is, the symbol variation display in the probability variation state and the last electric support state. Table 5 is used. That is, the table 5 is used in the state immediately before the fall when the player's advantage is the second advantage last. When the 101st symbol variation display is started, the state is shifted to the non-probable change state and the non-electric support state, and the table 1 for the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state is used.

  FIG. 10B is a diagram for explaining the table set 2.

  The table set 2 is used when shifting to the electric support state in the non-probable change state after the big hit game is over. After the big hit, until the 49th symbol variation display, the table 2 for the special symbol low probability normal symbol high probability state is used. In the 50th symbol variation display, that is, the symbol variation display at the end of the electric support state, the table 4 Is used. That is, the table 4 is used in the state immediately before the fall when the player's advantage is the first advantage. Note that the above-described second advantage is higher for the player than the first advantage. When the 51st symbol variation display is started, the state is shifted to the non-electric support state, and the table 1 for the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state is used.

  Tables 1 to 5 show a table for determining the variation time of the symbol variation display for which the big hit symbol is stopped, that is, the symbol variation display for which the big hit symbol is stopped, that is, the variation time of the symbol variation display for which the loss symbol is stopped, that is, loses. A table for determination is prepared. In the table for determining the variation time of the symbol variation display that is lost, a plurality of types are prepared according to the number of suspensions when the variation time is determined. In this example, the variation time is determined based on the number of holdings of one of the special figures 1 and 2 (here, special figure 1), but the total number of the holdings of special figures 1 and 2 is determined. The variation time may be determined based on In addition, although a common table is used in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the tables used in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may be divided.

  For the determination of the fluctuation time, a random number value for determining a special figure fluctuation time (a possible numerical range is 0 to 65535) out of one set of random values previously obtained from the reserved storage unit of the RAM 308 is used.

  FIG. 10C to FIG. 10E are diagrams showing the table 1. 10 (c) to 10 (e) show the effects in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 (display means) shown in FIG. 9 (d). Shown for reference.

  FIG.10 (c) is a figure which shows the table 1 for determining the fluctuation | variation time of the symbol fluctuation | variation display which makes a big hit.

  The super shortened big hit of the timer number 1 (1 second) is selected only with a very low probability of 1/65536, and is almost the big hit of the super reach system. That is, the reach A big hit of timer number 7 (35 seconds) is selected with a probability of 19999/65536, and the reach B big hit of timer number 9 (65 seconds) is selected with a probability of 45536/65536.

  FIG.10 (d) is a figure which shows the table 1 for determining the fluctuation | variation time of the symbol fluctuation | variation display which becomes lost when the number of pending | holdings of special figure 1 is 4, The figure (e) is a special figure. It is a figure which shows the table 1 for determining the fluctuation | variation time of the symbol fluctuation | variation display which becomes lost when the holding | holding number of 1 is 0-3.

  In the normal low probability state (during non-electric support), the special figure 1 fluctuates almost (the fluctuation in the special figure 2 has a low probability), so in the table 1 of this example, the fluctuation is based on the number of holdings in the special figure 1 Determine the time. Even when the special figure 1 changes substantially (for example, 99%), the fluctuation time may be determined based on the number of holdings in the special figure 1.

  Note that even if the number of holds in the special figure 1 is “0” and the first special figure starting port 230 has won a prize, the number of holds in the special figure 1 once becomes “1”.

  In the table used when the number of holds in FIG. 1 shown in FIG. 10D is 4, the deviation from the shortening of the timer number 3 (5 seconds) is selected with a considerably high probability (62000/65536), and the hold is made. High-speed digestion is achieved.

  On the other hand, in the table used when the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 0 to 3 shown in FIG. 10E, the normal deviation of the timer number 4 (10 seconds) is selected with a high probability (55000/65536). The

  FIG. 11A to FIG. 11C are diagrams showing the table 2. 11 (a) to 11 (c) show the effects in the special figure low probability normal figure high / low probability state performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 (display means) shown in FIG. 9 (d). Shown for reference.

  FIG. 11A is a diagram showing a table 2 for determining the variation time of the symbol variation display that is a big hit.

  The super shortened big hit of timer number 1 (1 second) is selected only with a low probability of 500/65536, and in many cases it is a big hit of a super reach with a battle. That is, the battle effect is not performed in the usual low probability state, but the battle effect may be performed in the usual high probability state.

  FIG.11 (b) is a figure which shows the table 2 for determining the fluctuation | variation time of the symbol fluctuation | variation display which becomes lost when the number of pending | holdings of special figure 2 is 3 or 4, It is a figure which shows the table 2 for determining the fluctuation | variation time of the symbol fluctuation | variation display which becomes lost when the pending | holding number of special figure 2 is 1 or 2. FIG.

  In the normal figure high probability state (during electric support), the special figure 2 fluctuates substantially. Therefore, in the table 2 of this example, the fluctuation time is determined based on the number of holdings in the special figure 2.

  Further, even when the second figure drawing start port 232 wins in the state where the number of reserved figures in the special figure 2 is “0”, the number of reserved figures in the special figure 2 once becomes “1”.

  In the table used when the number of holds in Fig. 2 is 3 or 4 shown in Fig. 11 (b), the super-shortening of timer number 2 (2 seconds) is selected with a very high probability (63000/65536). And high-speed digestion on hold is achieved.

  On the other hand, in the table used in the case where the number of holds in the special figure 2 is 0 to 2 shown in FIG. 11 (c), the battle number 1 of the timer number 4 (10 seconds) is selected with a high probability (64150/65536). Is done. In the usual high probability state, in the case of losing, there is a case where an effect is given that says that it is likely to develop into a super reach with a battle.

  FIG. 11D to FIG. 11F show the table 3. In these FIG. 11 (d) to FIG. 11 (f), there is an effect mode in the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 (display means) also shown in FIG. 9 (d). Shown for reference.

  FIG. 11D is a diagram showing a table 3 for determining the variation time of the symbol variation display that is a big hit.

  In the special figure high probability state, even if it is a big hit, a super shortened big hit of timer number 1 (1 second) is selected with a considerable probability (30000/65536), and the rest will be a battle of timer number 7 (35 seconds) It will be a big hit with the accompanying super reach.

  FIG. 11 (e) is a diagram showing a table 3 for determining the variation time of the symbol variation display that is lost when the number of holdings in FIG. 2 is 4; FIG. 11 (f) It is a figure which shows the table 3 for determining the fluctuation | variation time of the symbol fluctuation | variation display which becomes lost when the holding | holding number of 2 is 1-3.

  In the table used in the case where the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 4 shown in FIG. 11 (e), the super shortening of the timer number 2 (2 seconds) is selected with a considerably high probability (63000/65536). High-speed digestion on hold is achieved. Further, in addition to the battle gasase tilt 1 of the timer number 4 (10 seconds), the battle A defeat of the timer number 6 (30 seconds) may be selected.

  On the other hand, in the table used when the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0 to 3 shown in FIG. 11 (f), Battle Gaseori 1 with timer number 4 (10 seconds) is selected with high probability (62500/65536). In some cases, a battle A loss of timer number 6 (30 seconds) is also selected.

  FIG. 12A is a diagram showing the table 4 for determining the variation time of the symbol variation display to be a big hit, and FIG. 12B is the variation time of the symbol variation display that is lost regardless of the number of holdings. It is a figure which shows the table 4 for determining. In the diagrams showing these tables 4, the effect mode in the special figure low probability common figure high probability state performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 (display means) shown in FIG. 9D is also shown for reference. Yes.

  As described above, the table 4 is a table for determining the variation time of the symbol variation display at the end of the electric support state after shifting to the electric support state in the non-probable change state.

  In the big hit symbol variation display shown in FIG. 12A, a longer variation time is always selected, and the decorative symbol display device 208 performs super-reach with a battle. On the other hand, in the case of the loss symbol variation display shown in FIG. 12 (b), the battle gaze tilt 2 with the timer number 5 (12 seconds) is always selected. As a result, if it develops into a battle production, it will be a big hit. Therefore, the interest of the game is easily improved by Battle Gase Aori 2.

  FIG. 12C is a diagram showing the table 5 for determining the variation time of the symbol variation display to be a big hit, and FIG. 12B is the variation time of the symbol variation display that is lost regardless of the number of holds. It is a figure which shows the table 5 for determining. The tables showing these tables 5 show, for reference, effects in the special figure high probability common figure high probability state performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 (display means) shown in FIG. 9D. Yes.

  As described above, the table 5 is a table for determining the variation time of the symbol variation display in the probability variation state and the power support state last after the transition to the probability variation state and the power support state.

  In the big hit symbol variation display shown in FIG. 12C, a longer variation time is always selected, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the battle A victory of the timer number 7 (35 seconds) is always selected. On the other hand, in the case of the loss symbol variation display shown in FIG. 12 (d), the battle gaze tilt 2 with the timer number 5 (12 seconds) is always selected. As a result, even if it develops into a battle production here, the big hit is confirmed, and the interest of the game is likely to be improved by the battle gasase 2.

  In this example, there may be an effect that can be selected only by the table 3 or the table 5 used in the table set 1, or an effect that can be selected only by the table 2 or the table 4 used in the table set 2. There may be.

  To summarize the above explanation, in FIG. 1, winning special figure A or special figure B corresponds to an example of establishment of the second game condition. In FIG. 2, winning the big hit corresponds to an example of establishment of the second game condition. In other words, whether the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is won, winning the 15R jackpot corresponds to an example of establishment of the second game condition. When the second game condition is satisfied, the 15th round is awarded as a big hit game. The fifteenth round is a round in which the second variable winning opening 235 (second attacker) is only opened, and when the second variable winning opening 235 is won, the game shifts to a probable change state after the big hit game. Although winning in the second variable winning opening 235 corresponds to an example of establishment of a third gaming condition (in the following description, sometimes referred to as “first condition”), the second variable winning opening 235 For example, if the gaming machine is opened from the first round, the second gaming condition is established by winning a big hit. That is, the second game condition is a precondition for establishing the third game condition, and the third game condition is not established before the second game condition is established, This is a condition that can be satisfied after the game condition is satisfied. In other words, the third game condition is a condition that is more likely to be established after the second game condition is established than before the second game condition is established.

  In the special figure 1, winning the special figure C or the special figure D corresponds to an example of establishment of the first game condition.

  When the second game condition is satisfied and the third game condition (or the first condition) is also satisfied, after the big hit game, 100 symbol variation displays are performed (in the first period). Equivalent), transition to the promiscuous state and the electric support state (corresponding to an example of the second gaming state), and use of the table set 1 (corresponding to an example of the second group) shown in FIG. Is done.

  In this example, the probability variation state lasts only 100 times. However, the probability variation state may be repeated 80 times by increasing the type of jackpot symbol (type of jackpot) or by lottery. There may be cases of times. Further, the number of continuations of the electric support state in the probability variation state may be changed by a big hit symbol or the like or by lottery. For example, if a big hit symbol is a big hit, the probability variation state has a continuation count of 100, while the power support state has a continuation count of 50 times. Any support state may be such that the number of continuations is 100 times. Further, the falling lottery may be performed every time the symbol variation display is performed, and when the falling lottery is won, the probability variation state may be terminated.

  FIG. 13A is a time chart showing an example when the second game condition is satisfied and the third game condition (or the first condition) is also satisfied. In FIG. 13, time elapses from left to right.

  On the other hand, if the second game condition is satisfied but the third game condition (or the first condition) is not satisfied, the game shifts to the electric support state after the big hit game, but remains in an uncertain change state. Yes (corresponds to an example of the first gaming state). However, since the second game condition is satisfied, the table set 1 shown in FIG. 10A (corresponding to an example of the second group) is used until the next big hit. The table set 1 corresponding to an example of the second group is a table set used when the second game condition is satisfied. Here, the electric support state (first game state) is maintained while the symbol variation display is performed 50 times (corresponding to the second period) after the big hit game. In this example, the electric support state lasts only 50 times in the uncertain change state, but the number of times of the electric support state continues 30 times by increasing the type of jackpot symbol (type of jackpot) or by lottery or the like. Or may be 70 times, or may be 120 times. Further, a falling lottery may be performed every time the symbol variation display is performed, and the electric support state may be terminated when the falling lottery is won.

  FIG. 13B is a time chart showing an example when the second game condition is satisfied and the third game condition (or the first condition) is not satisfied.

  The second gaming state and the first gaming state are distinguished by whether or not they are in a promiscuous state regardless of whether they are in the electric support state (short-time state) or not. The correspondence relationship with the gaming state to be changed may be changed so as to be distinguished depending on whether or not it is in the electric support state, regardless of whether or not it is in the probability variation state. That is, if it is an electric support state, whether it is a probability change state or a non-probability change state, it is set as the second gaming state, and if it is a probability change state or a non-probability change state, it is the first case if it is a non-electric support state. It is good also as a game state. In any case, the second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous for the player than the first gaming state. In addition, the following examples are given as the first gaming state and the second gaming state. For example, the non-probability change state and the non-electric support state can be set as the first gaming state, and the probability change state and the electric support state can be set as the second game state. Also, the non-probability change state and the electric support state can be set as the first game state, and the probability change state and the electric support state can be set as the second game state. Further, the non-probability change state and the non-electric support state can be set as the first game state, and the non-probability change state and the electric support state can be set as the second game state. Further, the non-probability and non-electric support state can be set as the first gaming state, and the probability change state and the non-electric support state can be set as the second gaming state. Further, the probability change state and the non-electric support state can be set as the first game state, and the probability change state and the electric support state can be set as the second game state. Furthermore, the first game state and the second game state can also be applied to the following cases. For example, the first gaming state is a non-probability change state and the electric support state and the electric support state is low, and the second game state is the non-probability change state and the electric support state and the electric support state is high. It can be in a gaming state. In addition, a game state in which the number of continuations of the electric support state in the probability change state and the electric support state is small is set as the first game state, and a game state in the probability change state and the electric support state in which the electric support state is continued frequently is the second game state. It can also be.

  When the first game condition is satisfied, the electric support state corresponding to an example of the first game state is displayed while the symbol variation display is performed 50 times after the big hit game (corresponding to an example of the second period). The table set 2 shown in FIG. 10B (corresponding to an example of the first group) is used until the next big hit. The table set 2 corresponding to an example of the first group is a table set used when the first game condition is satisfied.

  FIG.13 (c) is a time chart which shows an example when the 1st game condition is satisfied.

  Here, when the second game condition is satisfied, if the player launches a game ball aiming at the second variable winning opening 235 in the 15th round, in most cases, the third game condition (or The first condition) can be established. However, if the player does not know or forgets that he must aim for the second variable prize opening 235 in the 15th round, the third game condition (or the first condition) ) Is not established, the player expects to shift to a probable state after the big hit game by winning the 15R big hit or entering the 15th round. However, if there is no winning in the second variable winning opening 235, the third game condition (or the first condition) is not established, and the state does not shift to the probability changing state. In this example, when the transition is made to the probability variation state, the electrical support state is maintained during the 100 symbol variation display (first period), and when the transition is not performed to the probability variation state, the transition is made to the electrical support state. Even in this case, the electric support state is maintained only during 50 symbol variation displays (second period). On the other hand, if the 15R jackpot is won, the table set 1 regardless of whether or not the second variable prize opening 235 has been won (the third game condition (or the first condition) is established / not established). Is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 13A and FIG. 13B, in the table set 1, the table 99 is used for the first 99 symbol variation displays after the end of the big hit game. For this reason, in the case of losing in the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, if the special figure 2 hold is full, in most cases, it will be a super-shortened lose and the hold will be digested at high speed. If the hold is not full, in most cases, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the battle gaze tilt 1 that does not develop into the reach state. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 13 (b), the special symbol low probability normal figure high probability state is displayed even in the 50th symbol variation display after the big hit game when the second variable prize opening 235 is not won. 9 (d) and FIG. 11, from FIG. 9 (d) and FIG. 11, if the special figure 2 hold is full, in most cases, it will be a super-shortening loss, and if the special figure 2 hold is not full, most In this case, the effect of Battle Gase Aori 1 is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208. As described above, the table set 1 is used in common regardless of whether or not the second variable winning opening 235 is won (the third game condition (or the first condition) is established / not established). Thus, a player who has confirmed that he has won the 15R jackpot or entered the 15th round will receive the second variable prize opening 235 even if the player has not won the second variable prize opening 235. Just like when you win a prize, you can enjoy the game.

  On the other hand, when the special figure C or the special figure D is won in the special figure 1 (when the first game condition is satisfied), the table set 2 is selected. Some players are delighted only by winning the jackpot and overlook whether they win the 15R jackpot or the 14R jackpot. In particular, if the number of rounds is not significantly different from 15R and 14R as in this example, it tends to be overlooked. As shown in FIG. 13C, in the table set 2, the table 49 is used for the first 49 times after the big hit game ends. For this reason, in the case of a loss in the special figure low-probability high-probability state, if the special figure 2 hold is full, in most cases it will be a super-shortened lose and the hold will be digested at high speed. If the hold is not full, in most cases, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the battle gaze tilt 1 that does not develop into the reach state. That is, in the table 3 in the table set 1 and the table 2 in the table set 2, many of the same variation times are used as the variation times selected in the case of the loss. Here, only the fluctuation time with the highest selection probability may be shared. Strictly speaking, the 60 second variation time of the timer number 8 that is not selected in the table 3 in the table set 1 can be selected in the table 2 in the table set 2. Further, only the fluctuation time with the highest selection probability may be shared. Also, the same variation time is used in Table 3 and Table 2 for the variation time selected in the case of winning. Again, only the fluctuation time with the highest selection probability may be shared. Strictly speaking, the 65 second variation time of the timer number 9 that is not selected in the table 3 in the table set 1 can be selected in the table 2 in the table set 2. As described above, the one or more variation times included in the table set 1 (second group) are the same variation time as the variation time of at least a part of the variation times included in the table set 2 (first group). is there. By doing this, even if the player who missed whether he won the 15R jackpot or the 14R jackpot, the game would be the same regardless of whether it was a 15R jackpot or a 14R jackpot Can have fun.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 13 (c), in the table set 2, the table 4 is used in the 50th symbol variation display after the big hit game ends. For this reason, in the case of losing, the effect of the battle gasase tilt 2 that does not develop into the reach state is performed in the decorative symbol display device 208, which is not much different from the case where the table 3 is used. In Table 4, instead of timer number 5, timer number 4 that is highly likely to be selected in table 3 may be selected 100%. That is, the same variation time may be easily selected. By doing so, it may be possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the variation time. That is, by using similar or the same variation time, even if the relationship between the gaming state and the table for selecting the variation time becomes irregular, it prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable. You may be able to.

  However, in the table 3 in the table set 1, the timer number 6 which is a kind of super reach loss can also be selected. As described above, the table 4 in the table set 2 always has a big hit when it develops to reach presentation. Therefore, if the reach presentation is performed at the 50th symbol variation display after the big hit game ends, A player who thinks that 2 is used may feel uncomfortable and may notice that the table set 1 is being used. In addition, there may be a case where the entertainment of the game can be improved by using the fact that the relationship between the gaming state and the table for selecting the variation time is irregular.

  It should be noted that Table 3 and Table 2 are completely the same table, that is, a table (Table 3) that is used for selecting the variation time of the symbol variation display for the first first number of times (here, 99 times) in the probability variation state after the big hit game ends. ) And the table (table 2) used in the variation time selection of the symbol variation display of the first second number of times (here 49 times) in the non-probability variation state after the big hit game is ended as a common table, You may make it not understand in the change time or the production according to the change time. In addition, even if the variation time is different, the effect pattern on the decorative symbol display device 208 may be the same so that it cannot be understood.

  In addition, the table 3 and the table used in the variation time selection of the symbol variation display at the third number of times (here, the 50th time) in the electric support state after the end of the big hit game, that is, from the electric support state to the non-electric support state. Is different from the table 4 used in the state immediately before falling, whether or not a short variation time (in this case, timer number 1 or timer number 2) can be selected. On the contrary, a short variation time may not be selected in the table 3 as well.

  Furthermore, although the table used for selecting the variation time of the symbol variation display of the first second number of times (here 49 times) in the probability variation state after the end of the big hit game is the table 3, the table number 1 is the third number of times. The table used for selecting the variation time for the first (50th in this case) symbol variation display is the table 4 used immediately before the fall from the electric support state to the non-electric support state in the table set 2, and the following number of times The table used for selecting the variation time of the symbol variation display of the first number from the first (here 51-99) is also Table 3, and the fourth number (here 100th) in the probability variation state after the big hit game is over. Table 5 is a table used for selecting the variation time of the symbol variation display), that is, the table used immediately before the fall from the probability variation state to the non-probability variation state. Ri game end after the third number-th table to be used for (eyes 50 times, for example), may be a table set 2 common table (same table).

  As for the first time and the second time, which are common times, as a modification example, only the reach time may be shared, or only the outlier time may be shared (also in the following description) the same). Further, a time that exists only in one group (table set) may exist only in the other group (table set), or may exist in both groups (table set 1 and table set 2). You may make it (it is the same also in the following description).

  In addition, here, the second gaming state is a probabilistic state and an electric support state, and the first gaming state is a non-probable state and an electric support state, but this is not a limitation (in the following description) The same). That is, it may be in a state in which the presence or absence of probability change, the presence or absence of electric support (short time), the so-called number of STs or the difference in the number of electric support, etc. are arbitrarily combined. Further, a combination of the probability variation state / electric support state and the non-probability variation state / non-electric support state, or the combination of the probability variation state / electric support state / non-probability variation state / electric support state may be set as the second gaming state. The first gaming state may be set. In other words, the second gaming state or the first gaming state may be constituted by a plurality of gaming states including state transition.

  As described above, in both the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231), the variation time in the special figure symbol variation is determined.

  In step S233, which is performed following the special drawing 1 related lottery process in step S231, a command setting transmission process is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Note that the output schedule information transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits in this example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 11 14 is a command type (in this example, basic command, symbol change start command, symbol change stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, per round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, special figure pending increase Command, information that can specify a command type such as a command pending increase command), and bits 0 to 10 are configured by command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes information indicating the special symbol stop symbol, information indicating the control state (information indicating the setting state of the time reduction flag and the probability variation flag), and the special symbol variation time. In the case of a symbol variation stop command, information indicating a special symbol stop symbol (result of determining a special symbol), information indicating a control state, and the like, a winning effect start command and an end effect start are included. In the case of a command, information indicating a control state is included, and in the case of a per-round number designation command, information indicating a control state, a per-round number, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the device information in the command data, the presence / absence of winning at the first special figure starting port 230, the presence / absence of winning at the second special figure starting port 232, the first variable winning port 234 Including the presence or absence of a prize.

  In the general command rotation start setting transmission process described above, information representing the special figure stop symbol (special figure determination result), information representing the control state, and information representing the special figure variation time stored in the RAM 308 as command data. The information indicating the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game that is on hold is set.

  In the general command rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the special figure stop symbol (special figure determination result), information indicating the control state, and the like stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

  In the above-described general command winning effect start setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information and the control state that are stored in the RAM 308 and are output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period. Information indicating the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game that is held is set. The first sub control unit 400 that has received the winning effect start command transmits a winning effect control command to the second sub control unit 500 based on the winning effect start command. The second sub-control unit 500 that has received the winning effect control command causes the decorative symbol display device 208 to display an image for notifying the player that the big hit game is started for a predetermined opening effect period (for example, 3 seconds), The jackpot game starts.

  In the above-described general command end effect start setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information and the control state stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period. Information indicating the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game that is held is set. The first sub control unit 400 that has received the end effect start command transmits an end effect control command to the second sub control unit 500 based on the end effect start command. Receiving the end effect control command, the second sub-control unit 500 causes the decorative symbol display device 208 to display an image for informing the player that the big hit is to be ended for a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds). finish.

  In the general command big prize opening release transmission process described above, information indicating the number of winning rounds stored in the RAM 308, the current number of rounds, information indicating the control state, etc. is set in the command data. In the above-described general command big prize opening closing setting transmission process, the command data, the current round number stored in the RAM 308, information indicating the control state, the first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation held. Information indicating the number of games is set.

  Also, general command special figure hold increase processing is performed. In this general command special figure hold increase processing, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 in the command data of the special figure hold increase command, the control state And information on the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 determined in advance.

  Further, general command usual figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command usual figure hold increase process, information indicating a control state is set in the command data of the general figure hold increase command. In addition, the main control unit 300 also transmits to the first sub-control unit 400 a general map change start command indicating that the normal map display has started (or is) as a general command-related command. In addition, the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 start (do) the common figure change stop command indicating that the change display of the normal figure has stopped (do) or the pair of blade members 2321. An electric chew opening start command indicating that, or an electric chew closing command indicating that the pair of blade members 2321 are closed (to do) may be transmitted.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 acquires the number of remaining rounds until all the rounds are completed based on the number of rounds included in the command and the current number of rounds.

  In this command setting transmission process, a command is also transmitted to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when turned on) in bit 7, and power-on information in bit 6. (In the case of ON, it indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), the current processing type (0-3) for encryption in bits 4-5, and the encrypted processing in bits 0-3 The number of payout requests is indicated.

  Next, in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 7, an external output signal setting process (step S235) is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in the above-described step 205 are read, and the presence or absence of a glass frame opening error or a bottom pan full error is monitored. When the lower pan full error is detected, device information indicating whether or not there is a glass frame opening error or lower pan full error is set in the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. 4 is driven to control the opening and closing of the second special figure starting port 232 and the first variable winning port 234, and the normal symbol display device via the drive circuits 324, 326, and 330. Display data to be output to 210, first special figure display device 212, second special figure display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S239, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on in order to determine whether or not a power supply interruption (power interruption) has been detected. Then, when the low voltage signal is off (when the power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. When the low voltage signal is on (when the power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243.

  In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return.

  On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved as a return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and processing at power-off such as initialization of an input / output port is performed. Then, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.

<Processing of First Sub-Control Unit 400>
Processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, in step S301 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initial setting in step S301 is executed. In this initial setting, initial setting of the I / O port 410 shown in FIG. 4, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305.

  In step S305, 0 is substituted into the timer variable.

  In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300. In this command processing, power recovery sub-side flag setting processing and the like are performed, and details will be described later.

  In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in S307, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated. In this effect control process, a start-side winning sub-side pre-reading notice execution process, a change start sub-side notice execution process, and a power recovery sub-side flag setting process are also performed. Each of these processes will be described later in detail.

  In step S311, when the pressing of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 1 is detected, the effect data updated in step S309 is changed to effect data corresponding to the pressing of the chance button 136.

  In step S313, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S315, if there is a command to the drive circuit 420 for the various lamps 418 in the effect data read in S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S319, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in S309, the control command is set to be output, and the process returns to S303.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S331 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408, and the command reception interrupt process is terminated.

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this example, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Run in cycles.

  In step S341 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub control unit main process shown in FIG. Is stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S343 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, a control command is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 set in step S319, an effect random number value is updated, and the like. Ends.

<Processing of Second Sub-Control Unit 500>
The second sub control unit 500 executes control of the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the control command transmitted from the first sub control unit 400. The second sub-control unit 500 is connected to an image control unit that displays an image on the decorative symbol display device 208. This image control unit has a VRAM (video RAM) and a GPU (graphics processing unit). The GPU reads the picture information and the like stored in the ROM of the second sub-control unit 500 based on the signal from the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500, and uses the display area (work area) of the VRAM to display the display image. The generated image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  More specifically, the CPU of the second sub control unit 500 first issues an image data transfer instruction. Here, first, the designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM is swapped. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU sets ROM coordinates (ROM transfer source address), VRAM coordinates (VRAM transfer destination address) and the like in the GPU attribute register based on the position information table and the like, and then images from the ROM to the VRAM. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The GPU transfers the image data from the ROM to the VRAM based on the instruction set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the GPU outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU.

  Next, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal is input from the GPU. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM based on the image data transferred to the VRAM, the CPU stores information on the image data constituting the display image (VRAM coordinate axes, image size, VRAM coordinates). (Arrangement coordinates, etc.) to the GPU. The GPU sets parameters according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register. On the other hand, when the transfer end interrupt signal from the GPU has not been input, it waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

  Subsequently, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU instructs the GPU to start drawing an image. The GPU starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU.

  When a drawing instruction is performed, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the GPU based on the end of image drawing has been input. If the generation end interrupt signal is not input, the generation end interrupt signal is input. When a generation end interrupt signal is input, the scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1) to finish the process. To do.

  Further, the second sub control unit 500 also executes control of the shielding device 246 based on the control command transmitted from the first sub control unit 400.

<Special figure look-ahead processing>
Next, the special figure prefetching process (step S224) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 7 will be described in detail.

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a flow of processing relating to special figure 2 in special figure prefetching processing.

  The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 refers to the time reduction flag in the RAM 308 and determines whether or not power support is in progress (step S224a). When the time reduction flag is in the off state and the non-electric support is in progress, the process proceeds to step S224i of the processing relating to FIG. 1, and when the time reduction flag is in the on state and the electric support is in progress, the process proceeds to step S224b. . In step S224b, it is determined whether or not there is a winning at the second special figure starting port 232. In this determination, the determination is made by determining whether or not the retention in the retention storage unit of the special map 2 of the RAM 308 has increased. That is, it is determined whether or not there has been a winning at the second special figure starting port 232 that falls within the upper limit number (four in this case) of the reserved storage of the special figure 2. If it is determined in step S224b that there has been a winning (increase in the number of holdings in FIG. 2), the process proceeds to step S224c. If it is determined that there has been no winning, the special figure prefetching process is terminated.

  In step S224c, first, a set of start-up information acquired in the previous winning acceptance process (step S217) is pre-read from the reserved storage unit of FIG. 2 provided in the RAM 308. That is, with the winning of the second special figure starting port 232 as a trigger, the starting information generated based on the winning is prefetched. Therefore, the newest starting information is prefetched before the determination of validity (based on the special figure 2 lottery process) based on the starting information is performed. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that performs this prefetching corresponds to an example of start information prefetching means. In the prefetching here, only the winning portion (holding increment) is prefetched, but all may be prefetched. Note that pre-reading here means that the start information is read first before the validity determination (main lottery), but in the following explanation, the word pre-reading is referred to as the predecessor (result of true / false determination (main lottery)). Sometimes used to mean read.

  In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, a pre-determination high probability table having the same contents as the contents of the high / failure determination probability table shown in FIG. 8C and a low-probability determination probability table shown in FIG. A low probability table for pre-judgment with the same content is prepared. In step S224c, the probability variation flag is referred to, and either one of the high probability table for pre-determination and the low probability table for pre-determination is selected, and the special information of the pre-read start information is selected using the selected table. FIG. 2 Based on the winning random number value, it is determined in advance whether or not the result of the determination is a big hit determination result (a specific determination result). In other words, with the winning of the second special figure starting port 232 as a trigger, it is determined in advance whether or not the winning / failing determination result based on the starting information generated based on the winning becomes the big hit determination result. Therefore, this pre-determination is executed before the determination of success / failure based on the start information (the special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that performs this pre-determination corresponds to an example of a pre-determination unit. Here, the result determined in advance is treated as a result of prior determination in FIG.

  If the result of the preliminary determination is a big hit determination result, the process proceeds to step S224e. On the other hand, if it is not a big hit determination result, the process proceeds to step S224g.

  In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, a special figure prior determination table having the same contents as the special figure determination table shown in FIG. Using the special figure predetermination table, in step S224e, the big hit symbol predetermination is performed based on the big hit special figure 2 random value in the pre-read start information, and in step S224g, the special figure 2 disorder for loss is detected. Based on the numerical value, the losing symbol is determined in advance. The special figure pre-determination in step S224e and step S224g is also executed before the success / failure determination (special figure 2 related lottery process) based on the pre-read start information is performed, and the result of the pre-determination here is the special figure 2 pre-determination result. Are treated as

  Subsequent to step S224e or step S224g, step S224h is executed. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, tables having the same contents as the contents of various tables for determining the variation time of the special drawings shown in FIGS. 9 to 12 are also prepared. Using these tables, in step S224h, the special figure fluctuation time is preliminarily determined based on the special figure 2 fluctuation time determination random value in the pre-read start information. The preliminary determination of the variation time in step S224h is also executed before the determination of whether or not the vehicle is determined (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) based on the pre-read start information, and the result of the preliminary determination here is the special graph 2 variable time preliminary determination result. Be treated. Instead of the variation time, the effect mode (variation pattern) in the decorative symbol display device 208 may be determined in advance. Further, the production mode and the variation time may be grouped, and it may be determined in advance which group belongs.

  As described above, in this example, the variation time of the special figure and the effect mode of the decorative symbol display device 208 are associated one-to-one, and the fact that the variation time is selected means that the variation pattern is selected. You can also see it. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes step S224h corresponds to an example of a pattern selection unit.

  When the execution of step S224h is completed, the process related to special figure 2 ends, and the process proceeds to the process related to special figure 1.

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a flow of processing relating to special figure 1 in special figure prefetching processing.

  The process related to special figure 1 (steps S224i to S224o) is the same as the process related to special figure 2 (steps S224b to S224h), and the description thereof will be omitted. A set of starting information acquired in the previous winning acceptance process (step S217) is pre-read from the holding storage unit, and the special figure 1 pre-determination result, the special figure 1 pre-determination result, and the special figure 1 variable time pre-determination result. Get.

  Special figure 1 or 2 pre-determined result (special figure successful / pre-determined result), special figure 1 or 2 pre-determined result (special figure pre-determined result), and special figure 1 or 2 variation time pre-determined The result (special map variation time preliminary determination result) is stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 308 as the preliminary determination information in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 in the order of the hold in the predetermined upper limit number. The newly stored pre-determined information (special map rejection pre-determined result, special figure pre-determined result, special figure variation time pre-determined result) is pre-determined as special figure 1 or special figure 2 information. It is included in the command data of the increase command and transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400.

  After executing the special figure prefetching process described above, the main control unit 300 executes the special figure related lottery process, and based on the same start information as the prefetched start information targeted in the special figure prefetch process, The determination result, the special figure determination result, and the fluctuation time of the special figure are obtained again.

  In this example, the main control unit 300 has obtained the special figure advance determination result and the special figure variation time preliminary determination result, but the main control unit 300 does not obtain these preliminary determination results, and reads the pre-read start information. A mode in which the command data of the special figure hold increase command is included and transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 obtains the special figure advance determination result and the special figure variation time prior determination result as necessary It may be.

<Sub-side pre-reading notice execution process at start prize>
Next, the start winning time sub-side pre-reading notice execution process executed in the effect control process (step S309) in the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG.

  FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the flow of the sub-side pre-reading notice execution process at the time of starting winning a prize.

  The start side winning side pre-reading notice execution process shown in FIG. 17 is an effect control process (step S309) in the first sub-control unit main process that is determined to have received the special figure hold increase command in the command setting process (step S307). ) Is executed. The RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a pre-reading execution flag. First, in step S3091a, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading execution flag is set to on, and is set to on. If so, the process proceeds to step S3091g, and if it remains off, the process proceeds to step S3091b.

  As described above, the command data of the special figure hold increase command includes the special figure pre-determined result, the special figure pre-determined result, and the special figure variation time pre-determined result as information on the pre-determined special figure 1 or special figure 2. Is included. In step S3091b, it is determined whether or not the special figure change time prior determination result included in the special figure hold increase command determined to have been received in the previous command setting process (step S307) is a predetermined change time. If it is not the variation time, the process proceeds to step S3091h, and if it is the predetermined variation time, the process proceeds to step S3091d. The special figure variation time prior determination result included in the special figure hold increase command is divided into special figure 1 and special figure 2 as the preliminary determination information in the preliminary determination result storage area prepared in the RAM 408, and the above predetermined upper limit number. Are stored only in the pending order.

  FIG. 18A is a diagram showing a pending change pre-reading notice lottery table used in the non-electric support state, and FIG. 18B is a hold change pre-reading notice lottery used in the electric support state. It is a figure which shows a table. Both tables are stored in the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400.

  The predetermined fluctuation time here is the fluctuation time defined in the table shown in FIG. 18A in the non-electric support state, and is 30 seconds, 35 seconds, 60 seconds, and 65 seconds. On the other hand, in the case of the electric support state, the fluctuation time is defined in the table shown in FIG. 18B, which is 10 seconds, 35 seconds, and 65 seconds. In the table shown in FIG. 18, an effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 208 is also shown.

  In this example, special figure 1 hold display is performed on the left side of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and special figure 2 hold display is performed on the right side thereof. These hold displays are displays corresponding to one set of start information stored in the special hold storage unit provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and the number of hold displays corresponds to the number of holds. In this example, the predetermined display mode (default display mode) in the hold display is a mode in which a round graphic is displayed without any pattern and in one color.

  FIG. 18C is a diagram showing a hold display (normal hold) in the default display mode.

  Each time the first sub control unit 400 receives the special figure hold increase command, the first sub control unit 400 transmits a hold increase command to the second sub control unit 500 in step S3091g, which will be described later. Based on the command, the decorative symbol display device 208 is controlled to increase the number of hold displays by one. On the other hand, every time the first sub-control unit 400 receives a symbol variation start command, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a hold reduction command to the second sub-control unit 500, and the second sub-control unit 500 performs decoration based on the hold reduction command. The symbol display device 208 is controlled to reduce the number of pending displays by one. The hold display may be referred to as a hold icon, and the combination of the first sub control unit 400, the second sub control unit 500, and the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponds to an example of the start hold number notifying unit.

  Further, in both the table shown in FIG. 18A and the table shown in FIG. 18B, a random number range is defined for each of the hold notice A and the hold notice B. In this example, a pre-reading notice is performed based on the preliminary determination result performed by the main control unit 300. This pre-reading notice is based on the result of the pass / fail determination performed in the special drawing related lottery process before the special figure related lottery process (steps S229 and S231) shown in FIG. This is a notice for the advance notice. In addition, the notification may be made in advance that a predetermined big hit (for example, a big hit advantageous to the player, more specifically, a big hit of 15R) will be announced. “No change” shown in FIGS. 18A and 18B means that the pre-reading notice using the hold display is not executed, and the display form of the hold display is the default display form shown in FIG. It means that it remains. In addition, “pending notice A” and “pending notice B” shown in FIGS. 18A and 18B change the display mode of the hold display from the default display form to a special display form, and display the hold display. The pre-reading notice is performed by displaying in the special display mode.

  FIG. 18D is a diagram showing a display mode of the hold notice A, and FIG. 18E is a diagram showing a display mode of the hold notice B.

  The display mode of the hold notice A is a long-length character, and the display form of the hold notice B is a character of the main character. The hold display (hold notices A and B) of these display modes, which also serves as a pre-reading notice, may be displayed larger than the default display form shown in FIG.

  In step S3091c shown in FIG. 17, a lottery process using the table shown in FIG. The CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 acquires a dedicated random number (possible range is 0 to 99) from the RAM 408 at the timing of executing step S3091c, and based on the acquired dedicated random number, the gaming state (here, the electric support state) Or lottery according to non-electric support status). The lottery here is a lottery triggered by winning a prize at the special drawing start opening (230, 232). When a lottery of whether or not to perform a pre-reading notice and a pre-reading notice are performed, the lottery is selected from a plurality of types of notices. It will be a lottery to select one type of notice mode.

  In the above description, it has been described that the prefetching notice is a notification for notifying that the result of the determination of success / failure will be a big hit, but this prefetching notification will be a big hit even if the result of the determination of success / failure does not become a big hit. It also includes a fake look-ahead notice that makes a false notice. In other words, the pre-reading notice indicates that the result of the success / failure determination may be a big hit, is a prior notice that suggests to the player, or a prior notice that makes the player expect that the result of the success / failure determination will be a big hit. It can be said that there is.

  In this example, if a change in hold occurs and a battle effect is started with the symbol variation display for the hold represented by the hold display changed in hold, the big hit is confirmed.

  Although the table shown in FIG. 18 is a table irrelevant to the number of holds, the notice execution probability or the notice mode selection probability may be changed according to the number of holds.

  In step S3091d executed subsequent to step S3091c, it is determined whether or not the lottery for the pre-reading notice in step S3091c has been won. The winning here is a lottery for whether or not the pre-reading notice can be executed, and means that the pre-reading notice is won. If it is unsuccessful (no pre-reading notice), the process proceeds to step S3091g. If it is successful (pre-reading notice is made), the number of pre-reading notices is set (step S3091e), and the process proceeds to step S3091f. The pre-reading notice based on the lottery using the table shown in FIG. 18 corresponds to an example of the first notice notice. The pre-reading notice based on the lottery using the table shown in FIG. 18 is a prior notice for notifying that the result of the determination of success / failure based on the predetermined starting information will be a big hit. In this example, the number of executions of the pre-reading notice is set in the symbol variation display unit of one special figure, and here, the same number as the number of holdings is set as the number of executions in the execution number setting area prepared in the RAM 408. More specifically, in the case of the electric support state, the number of holdings in FIG. 2 is set as the number of executions, and in the case of the non-electric support state, the number of holdings in FIG. 1 is set as the number of executions.

  In step S3091f, the pre-reading execution flag prepared in the RAM 408 is set to ON. The pre-reading execution flag is a flag that determines whether or not the pre-reading advance notice is executed based on the lottery using the table shown in FIG. 18, and the state shown in FIG. 18 is used when the pre-reading execution flag is set to ON. This is a state in which a pre-reading notice based on the lottery is performed. In addition, based on the fact that the pre-reading execution flag is set to OFF, the pre-reading notice based on the lottery using the table shown in FIG. 18 is canceled, and in the state where the pre-reading execution flag is still set to OFF, No pre-reading notice based on the lottery using the table shown in FIG. Next, a hold increase command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 (step S3091g), and this start winning sub-side pre-reading notice execution process is ended.

<Sub-notice execution process at the start of change>
Next, the variation start sub-side notice execution process executed in the effect control process (step S309) in the first sub control unit main process shown in FIG.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the flow of the sub-side notice execution process at the start of change.

  19 is executed in the effect control process (step S309) in the first sub-control unit main process determined to have received the symbol change start command in the command setting process (step S307). Is done.

  In step S3092a, it is determined whether the prefetching execution flag prepared in the RAM 408 is set to ON. Here, the state in which the pre-reading execution flag is set to ON is a state in which a pre-reading advance notice is performed in which the display mode of the hold display is changed based on a lottery using the table illustrated in FIG. If the prefetching execution flag remains off, the process proceeds to step S3092e. If the prefetching execution flag is set to on, the process proceeds to step S3092b. In step S3092b, 1 is subtracted from the value of the execution count setting area prepared in the RAM 408, and then it is determined whether or not the value of the execution count setting area has become 0 (step S3092c). If the value of the execution count setting area is 0, the process proceeds to step S3092d, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3092e.

  In step S3092d, the prefetching execution flag is set to OFF, and the process proceeds to step S3092e.

  In step S3092e, a normal notice lottery process is performed, and the process proceeds to step S3092f. In this normal notice lottery process, whether or not the normal notice is executed is determined by lottery, and when it is executed, the notice mode is also determined by lottery. The normal notice here is a notice concerning the symbol variation display started by the symbol variation start command received this time. In other words, the result of determining whether or not the symbol is stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display in which the advance notice is given or the special figure informed in the symbol change display in which the announcement is given is the subject of the announcement. The lottery for whether or not the advance notice is executed or the lottery for the notice mode is performed by obtaining a dedicated random number. As the notice mode of the normal notice, display of a predetermined character, sound output, and a notice form of lamp lighting are prepared.

  In step S3092f, a normal notice command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays a normal notice based on the normal notice command. When the execution of step S3092f is completed, the change start sub-side notice execution process ends.

  The first sub-control unit 400, the second sub-control unit 500, and the decoration that execute the start winning sub-side pre-reading notice execution process shown in FIG. 17 and the change start sub-side notice execution process shown in FIG. A combination of the symbol display device 208 corresponds to an example of a notice means.

  Next, a specific effect example in the pachinko machine of this example will be described.

  FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine of this example. The following diagram shows how the production progresses in numerical order in parentheses.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20A, “decoration 7”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 3”, which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the loss, is stopped and displayed. Further, the first special figure 1 hold display h11 and the second special figure 1 hold display h12, which indicate the hold of the special figure 1, are both displayed in the default display mode. 20 also shows a first special figure display device 212, a first special figure hold lamp 218, a second special figure display device 214, and a second special figure hold lamp 220.

  In FIG. 20 (2), the special figure 1 hold (first hold) is digested and only the first special figure 1 hold display h11 is displayed. In addition, the first special symbol display device 212 shown in FIG. 20 (2) has started the symbol variation display, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started the variation display of the decoration symbol. During the symbol variation display, the first special figure display device 212 repeats blinking in which all of the seven segments are turned on, turned off for a moment, and all of the seven segments are turned on again. Further, at this time, after the hold is digested and the symbol variation display is started, one variation icon corresponding to the symbol variation display may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The display mode of the fluctuation icon may be the same as or different from the display mode of the digested hold display h11, for example. Even in the case where the suspension of special figure 2 to be described later is digested, the variation icon may be displayed in the same manner.

  It should be noted that the special symbol display device (212, 214) may start the symbol variation of the special symbol and reduce the hold display indicating the suspension of the symbol variation at the same time or substantially simultaneously, or may be performed by the decorative symbol display device 208. The start of the decorative symbol variation display and the decrease of the hold display indicating the hold may be performed simultaneously or substantially simultaneously. Further, after the decorative symbol variation display is started, the hold display may disappear, or after the suspension display disappears first, the decoration symbol variation display may be started. Furthermore, at the three timings of the special symbol variation start timing, the decorative symbol variation display start timing, and the hold display disappear timing, the special symbol variation start timing is simultaneously with other timings. It may be the earliest including. The above also applies to the following specific examples.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (3), during the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 started in FIG. It has been reported.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (4) has developed into a reach, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (5) has started a super reach A effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (6), the super reach A effect is continued and the jackpot finalizing effect is displayed.

  FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG.

  In the first special figure display device 212 shown in FIG. 21 (7), the symbol form of the special figure C (see FIG. 5 (a-1)) is stopped and displayed. In addition, on the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of decorative symbols “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4” is stopped and displayed (determined display), and the character display of “big hit” is also displayed. . Some players know that only 14R jackpots were won from the combination of the stop symbol pattern of the first special symbol display device 212 and the decorative symbol display device 208, but the 15R jackpot Some people don't know if they won or won 14R jackpot.

  Eventually, the big hit game is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 of the 12th round is shown in FIG. 21 (8). During the big hit game, the hold display disappears (hidden). The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (8) displays the opening of button effects. The button effect here is an effect that if the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 1 is pressed and a longest character appears, the player proceeds to the 15th round and has a chance to acquire certainty. Since it is an effect to the last and only 14R jackpot is won, the jackpot game ends in 14 rounds without actually proceeding to 15 rounds.

  In FIG. 21 (9), the 13th round is entered, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the pattern 136 a of the chance button 136 and displays the characters “PUSH” prompting the user to press the chance button 136. . In addition, a remaining time display bar 136b representing the remaining time of the acceptance period for pressing the chance button is also displayed.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 21 (10), the player presses the chance button 136. As a result, an old character appears in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (10), and a character display of “sorry” is also displayed. That is, it is reported that the program does not proceed to the 15th round. The button operation timing and the production start timing based on the operation are earlier in the button operation timing (the same applies to the following specific examples).

  In FIG. 21 (11), the player enters the 14th round, which is the final round. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. In other words, in the jackpot game here, there was no winning in the second variable winning opening 235 (second attacker) without going to 15 rounds. In this end effect, the hold display is resumed, and the first special figure 1 hold display h11 is revived and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG.

  Here, the first game condition is established by winning the special figure C, and when the big hit game ends, the symbol change display is performed 50 times (corresponding to an example of the second period). It shifts to the electric support state with the certain change state. Further, until the next big hit, the table set 2 (corresponding to an example of the first group) shown in FIG. 10B is used.

  FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 22 (13), the hold of the special figure 1 represented by the first special figure 1 hold display h11 shown in FIG. 21 (12) is digested, and the first special figure display device 212 has started the symbol variation display. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is started. The variation time of the 49 symbol variation display including this symbol variation display is determined using the table 2 shown in FIGS. 11 (a) to 11 (c). In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, the pachinko machine of this example is provided with a normal start opening (gate) 228 and a second variable winning opening 235 in the right region, and during the electric support and the second variable This is a pachinko machine that needs to be right-handed when aiming at the winning opening 235 (second attacker). When the 14-round jackpot game is over, the game is shifted to the electric support state, and while the electric support state continues, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a character for prompting a right hand and a remaining number display. Also on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Also, the remaining number of times “49 remaining” is displayed. The remaining number of times display represents a period until the player's advantageous state ends. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (13), it is notified that the electric support state continues for another 49 symbol variation displays.

  While the symbol variation display started in FIG. 22 (13) is being executed, the game ball passes through the general diagram start opening (gate) 228, and the electoral determination of the normal diagram is won. There is a three-ball winning at the second special figure starting port 232.

  In FIG. 22 (14), the suspension of special figure 2 has been consumed, the second special figure display device 214 has started the symbol variation display, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started the variation display of the decoration symbol. The symbol variation display here is also a symbol variation display based on Table 2. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (14) includes a first special figure 2 hold display h21 and a second special figure 2 hold display h22 that represent the remaining hold of the special figure 2, respectively. It is displayed in the default display mode. Furthermore, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (14) also displays a character for urging the right hand and displays the remaining number of times “48 times remaining”.

  Even during the execution of the symbol variation display started in FIG. 22 (14), the game ball passes through the general diagram start gate (gate) 228, and the electoration determination is made. There are two or more winnings in the second special figure starting port 232, and the special figure 2 hold is full. In addition to the first special figure 2 hold display h21 and the second special figure 2 hold display h22, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (15) has a third special figure 2 hold display h23 and a fourth special display 2nd display. Each special figure 2 hold display h24 is displayed in the default display mode.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (16), “decoration 0”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 6”, which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the loss, are stopped (determined).

  In FIG. 22 (17), the hold of special figure 2 is digested and the hold display becomes three, the second special figure display device 214 starts the symbol variation display, and the decoration symbol display device 208 also displays the variation display of the decoration symbol. Has been started. The symbol variation display here is also a symbol variation display based on Table 2. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (17) also displays a character for urging the right hand and displays the remaining number of times “47 remaining”.

  In this way, the symbol variation display based on the table 2 is repeatedly performed until the big hit game is started. During the big hit game, since the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the table 1 is used. In this example, after the big hit game shown in FIG. 21, the symbol change display is stopped in 48 symbols change display, and in FIG. 22 (18), the 49th symbol change display is started after the big hit game ends. ing. This symbol variation display corresponds to the last symbol variation display based on Table 2.

  FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (19) does not win even the 49th symbol variation display, and “decoration 0”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 6”, which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the loss, is stopped. Displayed (confirmed display).

  In FIG. 23 (20), the 50th symbol variation display is started after the end of the big hit game. The variation time of the 50th symbol variation display is determined using the table 4 shown in FIGS. 12 (a) and 12 (b). The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (20) displays characters “Last”. The character display of “Last” corresponds to an example of the remaining number display of “Remaining 0 times”.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (21), an effect as if developing into a battle effect is performed. That is, in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, while the decorative symbol continues to be displayed in a variable manner, a girl character appears in the middle symbol display area 208b, and a notification that "Battle starts when reaching reach" is made. Yes.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (22), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbol variation display continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (23), while the decorative symbol continues to be displayed in the middle symbol display area 208 b, the fluctuation variation occurs in the right symbol display area 208 c, and “decoration 4” and “decoration 5” are displayed. There is an effect that either one of them stops. Here, if “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, a reach state is reached and a battle effect is started. As described above, in the 50th symbol variation display, that is, the symbol variation display based on the table 4, if a battle effect, which is a kind of super reach effect, is started, the big hit is confirmed.

  However, in this example, the reach state is not reached, and the decoration symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (24) performs the second stop, and shows that “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Has been. The effects described above in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 23 (21) to (23) are the effects of the battle gasase tilt 2. In this example, in the symbol variation display immediately before the fall, an effect encouraging development to a battle effect (super reach) is always executed.

  FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG.

  In the 50th symbol variation display in this example, the effect of Battle Gase Aori 2 is performed by the decorative symbol display device 208, and since it is in a state immediately before falling, a big hit is expected, but it does not develop to reach, and FIG. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 5, “decoration 5”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 4”, which are combinations of the decorative symbols of the loss, are stopped (determined). The variation time of the 50th symbol variation display is 12 seconds, and even if it is a loss symbol variation, a certain amount of variation time is given compared to the super shortening variation or shortening variation, and the player is in the electric support state. Finally, there are cases where the special figure 2 hold can be full. In this example, one step does not reach the reserved full tank of special figure 2 and the number of holds is three. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Two special figure 2 hold displays h22 and a third special figure 2 hold display h23 are both displayed in the default display mode.

  When the 50th symbol variation display is completed, the gaming state shifts to a non-electric support state. That is, a transition is made from the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state to the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. This special figure low probability normal figure low probability state (normal state) continues until the next jackpot game ends.

  In FIG. 24 (26), the 51st symbol variation display is started after the end of the big hit game. From the 51st symbol variation display, the variation time is determined using the table 1 shown in FIGS. 10 (c) to 10 (e). Since the electric support state has ended, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (26) is displayed with characters that prompt the user to return to the left. The remaining number display is finished and disappears.

  During the execution of the symbol variation display started in FIG. 24 (26), there is one winning at the first special figure starting port 230, and the special figure 1 holding is increased by one. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (27), “decoration 8”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 0”, which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the loss, is stopped (determined). In addition, a first special figure 1 hold display h11 representing the first hold of special figure 1 is displayed.

  The pachinko machine of this example is a special figure 2 priority fluctuation machine in which the symbol fluctuation of special figure 2 is executed in preference to the symbol fluctuation of special figure 1, and the first special figure shown in FIG. 24 (27). The 2 hold display h21 is digested first, and then the second special figure 2 hold display h22 is digested. Due to the transition to the non-electric support state, the electric Chu is not released, the special figure 2 hold is not accumulated, and the special figure 2 hold number becomes zero. On the other hand, while the special figure 2 hold is being digested, there is another winning at the first special figure starting port 230, and the special figure 1 has a hold number of two.

  In FIG. 24 (28), the special figure 2 is no longer on hold, the special figure 1 hold is digested and the hold display becomes one, the first special figure display device 212 starts the symbol variation display, and the decorative symbol display is displayed. In the device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is started. The symbol variation display here is also the symbol variation display based on Table 1, and in the case of a loss, since the suspension of the special diagram 1 is not full, the symbol variation display is almost 10 seconds (timer number 3). .

  During the execution of the symbol variation display started in FIG. 24 (28), there is one winning at the first special figure starting port 230, and the special figure 1 holding is increased by one. As shown in FIG. 24 (29), the hold display indicating the hold in FIG. 1 increased here is displayed in the display mode of the hold notice A after changing the hold. That is, the second special figure 1 hold display h12 is a hold display that also serves as a pre-reading notice.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (30), “decoration 7”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 3”, which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the loss, are stopped (determined).

  FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 25 (31), the suspension of the special figure 1 is exhausted, the first special figure display device 212 starts the symbol variation display, and the decorative symbol display device 208 also starts the variation display of the decoration symbol. The second special figure 1 hold display h12 also serving as a pre-reading notice shown in FIG. 24 (30) shifts and is displayed as the first special figure 1 hold display h11 in FIG. 25 (31). .

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (32), “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 3”, which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the loss, is stopped (determined). The combination of decorative symbols shown in FIG. 25 (32) is a chance to notify that a big hit is near.

  In FIG. 25 (33), the symbol variation display for the hold indicated by the first special figure 1 hold display h11 that also serves as the pre-reading notice shown in FIG. 32 (32) is started, and the decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. In 208, an effect as if developing into a battle effect is performed. That is, in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, while the decorative symbol continues to be displayed in a variable manner, a girl character appears in the middle symbol display area 208b, and a notification is made that “Large chance”.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (35), “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and a reach state is formed. In addition, in the middle symbol display area 208b in which the decorative symbol fluctuating display continues, the characters “Intense heat” are also displayed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (36) develops into super reach. In the super reach state, the “decoration 5” that has been stopped in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c is displayed in a small size in the lower left corner, and the main character appears on the entire screen to announce the start of the game. . Note that the hold display disappears (is not displayed) when the super reach state is entered.

  FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (37), a screen in which the main character defeats the enemy and wins is displayed, and three “decoration 5” are displayed side by side in the upper left corner. The effects described above in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 25 (34) to 26 (37) are the effects of reach B big hit.

  In the first special figure display device 212 shown in FIG. 26 (38), the symbol form of the special figure A (see FIG. 5 (a-1)) is stopped and displayed. In addition, on the decorative symbol display device 208, an odd number of decorative symbol combinations such as “decoration 5”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5” are stopped and displayed (determined display), and a “big hit” character is also displayed. ing. In this example, the stop display of an odd number of decorative symbol combinations such as “decoration 5”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5” can be said to be an example of a first effect. When the super reach state ends, the on-hold display is resumed. Here, there is a winning of three balls at the first special figure starting port 230 during the super reach state, and the decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 208 includes, in addition to the first special figure 1 hold display h11 and the second special figure 1 hold display h12, a third special figure 1 hold display h13 and a fourth special figure 1 hold display h14. It is displayed in the default display mode.

  Eventually, the big hit game is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 of the 12th round is shown in FIG. 26 (39). During the big hit game, the hold display disappears (hidden). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (39), an opening of button effect is displayed. The button effects shown in FIGS. 26 (39) and (40) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 21 (8) and (9), and the chance character 136 shown in FIG. Will appear in the 15th round, and the chance to win a certainty will come. In addition, since 15R big hit is won here, it actually advances to 15 rounds.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 26 (41), the player presses the chance button 136. As a result, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (41), the character of the bancho appears and the character display “Yataze” is also displayed. That is, it is notified that the process proceeds to the 15th round. That is, the display as shown in FIG. 26 (41) is an example of the first effect.

  In Fig. 26 (42), the player enters the 14th round, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Fig. 42 (42) notifies that the attacker is to win a prize in the next round, that is, the 15th round. This notification is a notification for obtaining a probability change, that is, for establishing the third game condition (or the first condition). Note that although only an attacker is notified here, notification that prompts the second attacker (second variable winning opening 235) to win may be performed. Moreover, you may perform the alert | report which encourages a right strike.

  FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG.

  FIG. 27 (43) shows a state of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the 15th round. FIG. 27 (43) also shows a state in which the second attacker (second variable prize opening 235) is opened.

  In FIG. 27 (44), the second attacker (second variable prize opening 235) has won, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is informed that the probability variation has been confirmed. Thus, it can be said that the notification of probability variation acquisition as shown in FIG. 27 (44) is an example of the fifth effect. That is, the fifth effect can be said to be an effect that can at least notify that the second gaming state is reached after the big hit game is finished.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 27 (45), an end effect of the big hit game is performed. Further, in this example, the special figure 1 hold gradually increases from FIG. 25 (35), and at the end of the big hit game, the special figure 1 hold is full. In addition, during the big hit game, 1/100 probability of hitting the normal figure is determined, the electric Chu (second special figure starting port 232) is opened, and the special figure 2 hold is also full. In the end effect of the big hit game, the hold display is resumed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 27 (45) displays the hold display of special figure 1 and the hold display of special figure 2 by four. (H11-h14, h21-h24).

  Here, the second game condition is established by winning the special figure A, and the third game condition ((the second attacker) has also won a prize). Alternatively, the first condition) is also established, and when the big hit game is ended, the display changes to the probability variation state and the electric support state while the symbol variation display is performed 100 times (corresponding to an example of the first period). Further, until the next big hit, the table set 1 (corresponding to an example of the second group) shown in FIG. 10A is used.

  In FIG. 27 (46), since it is a special figure 2 priority change machine, the special figure 2 hold indicated by the first special figure 2 hold display h211 is digested, and the second special figure display device 214 displays the symbol fluctuation display. The decorative symbol display device 208 has also started displaying the decorative symbols in a variable manner. The variation time of the symbol variation display for 99 times including the symbol variation display is determined using the table 3 shown in FIGS. 11 (d) to 11 (f). In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 27 (46) has a character display for urging the right hand, a character display of “probability change” for notifying that the state of probability change is present, and a remaining number display of “99 times remaining”. Has been made. The remaining number display here is informed that the probability variation state (or the power support state) continues for another 99 symbol variation displays.

  Thereafter, the symbol variation display based on the table 3 is repeatedly performed until the big hit game is started. In this example, after the big hit game is finished, the loss symbol is stopped and displayed in 98 symbol variation displays. In (47), the 99th symbol variation display is started after the end of the big hit game. This symbol variation display corresponds to the last symbol variation display based on Table 3. Even in the 99th symbol variation display, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 27 (48) has “decoration 0”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 6”, which are combinations of the decorative symbols of the loss. Stop display (determined display). During the 99th symbol variation display, there is a single winning at the second special figure starting port 232, and the special figure 2 hold is full.

  FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 28 (49), the 100th symbol variation display is started after the end of the big hit game. The variation time of the 100th symbol variation display is determined using the table 5 shown in FIGS. 12 (c) and 12 (d). On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (49), the characters “Last” are displayed. The character display of “Last” corresponds to an example of the remaining number display of “Remaining 0 times”. In addition, there is an effect that seems to develop into a battle effect. That is, in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, while the decorative symbol continues to be displayed in a variable manner, a girl character appears in the middle symbol display area 208b, and a notification that "Battle starts when reaching reach" is made. Yes.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (50), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbol variation display continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (51), while the decorative symbol continues to be variably displayed in the middle symbol display region 208b, shaking fluctuation occurs in the right symbol display region 208c, and “decoration 7” and “decoration 6”. There is an effect that either one of them stops. Here, if “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, a reach state is reached and a battle effect is started. As described above, in the symbol variation display for the 100th time, that is, the symbol variation display based on the table 5, if a battle effect (reach state) which is a kind of super reach effect is started, the big hit is confirmed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (52), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, a reach state is formed, a character display of “battle start” is made, and the big hit is confirmed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (53), a battle effect A is performed, and a samurai character and a Tono-sama character appear. In addition, a character is displayed as “Push out the spear with a button” to press the chance button 136 to perform a battle and urge the spear character to be expelled from the screen. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (54), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the pattern 136a of the chance button 136, and also includes a remaining time display bar 136b indicating the remaining time of the acceptance period of the chance button press. It is displayed.

  FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 29 (55), the player presses the chance button 136. As a result, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (55), the big hit confirmation effect is displayed, “decoration 7” is displayed in large size, and a Tono-like character that performs a peace sign is also displayed. The effect described above in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 28 (49) to 29 (55) is the battle effect A. Note that FIGS. 28 (49) to 28 (51) can be seen as inferior portions of the battle effect, and the battle effect A can be seen as FIGS. 28 (52) to 29 (55).

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (56) shows a state where the third stop is performed and three “decorations 7” are stopped and displayed (confirmed display). The variation time of the 100th symbol variation display is 35 seconds. In addition, on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (56), four special figure 1 hold indications representing the hold of the special figure 1 are displayed (h11 to h14), and the special figure 2 indicating the hold of the special figure 2 is displayed. The hold display is also increased by one and displayed four (h21 to h24).

  Next, a specific example of an effect that rarely occurs in the pachinko machine of this example will be described.

  FIG. 30 is a diagram showing an example of a specific effect that rarely occurs in the pachinko machine of this example.

  In the state shown in FIG. 30 (1), as in the state shown in FIG. 26 (38), the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the symbol form of the special figure A (see FIG. 5 (a-1)). In the decorative symbol display device 208, an odd number of decorative symbol combinations such as “decoration 5”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5” are stopped and displayed (determined display), and a “big hit” character is also displayed. It is in a state. It should be noted that four special figure 1 hold displays representing the hold in special figure 1 are displayed (h11 to h14), and no special figure 2 hold display representing the hold in special figure 2 is displayed.

  Eventually, the big hit game is started, and FIG. 30 (2) to FIG. 30 (6) are the same as FIG. 26 (39) to FIG.

  FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG.

  FIG. 31 (7) shows the state of a 15-round jackpot game. FIG. 31 (7) shows a state immediately before the opened second attacker (second variable prize opening 235) is closed after the opening time has elapsed. That is, in this example, the player wins the second variable prize slot 235 for some reason, such as when the player does not know or forgot that he must aim at the second variable prize slot 235 in the 15th round. This is an example in which the third game condition (or the first condition) is not satisfied. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 31 (7), a character display indicating that the third game condition (or the first condition) has not been established as “what are you doing” along with the character display of the bancho. It has also been made. However, for those who have been alerted to win the attacker in the 15th round in FIG. 30 (5), but who have not noticed this alert at all, or who have missed this alert, this character The display may not make sense. Thus, it can be said that the effect as shown in FIG. 31 (7) is an example of the sixth effect. That is, the sixth effect can be said to be an effect that can at least notify that the first gaming state is reached after the big hit game is finished.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 31 (8), the end effect of the big hit game is performed. In addition, on this decorative symbol display device 208, four special figure 1 hold displays representing the hold of special figure 1 are displayed (h11 to h14), and four special figure 2 hold displays representing the hold of special figure 2 are also displayed. (H21 to h24).

  Here, the second game condition is established by winning the special figure A, but the third game condition (or alternatively, because the second variable winning port 235 (second attacker) has not been won). The first condition) is not established, and when the big hit game is completed, while the symbol variation display is performed 50 times (corresponding to an example of the second period), the electronic support state is shifted to the non-probable variation state. Further, until the next big hit, the table set 1 (corresponding to an example of the second group) shown in FIG. 10A is used. As described above, the second game condition is satisfied, but the third game condition (or the first condition) is not satisfied, so the state shifts to the electric support state with the uncertain change state, and the table is set until the next big hit. The state in which set 1 is used corresponds to the first state.

  In FIG. 31 (9), since it is a special figure 2 priority change machine, the special figure 2 hold indicated by the first special figure 2 hold display h21 is digested, and the second special figure display device 214 displays the symbol fluctuation display. The decorative symbol display device 208 has also started displaying the decorative symbols in a variable manner. The variation time of the symbol variation display for 99 times including the symbol variation display is determined using the table 3 shown in FIGS. 11 (d) to 11 (f). However, even if the big hit game ends, the non-probability change state remains, and the electric support state continues only for 50 symbol variation displays after the big hit game ends. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 31 (9), a character display for urging the right hand and a remaining number display of “49 remaining times” are displayed. The remaining number display here is informed that the electric support state continues for another 49 symbol variation displays. In addition, since it is a non-probability change state, the character display of "probability change" is not made.

  Thereafter, the symbol variation display based on the table 3 is repeatedly performed until the big hit game is started. In this example, after the big hit game is finished, the loss symbol is stopped and displayed in all 48 symbol variation displays. In (11), the 49th symbol variation display is started after the end of the big hit game. This symbol variation display also corresponds to the symbol variation display based on the table 3.

  FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG.

  Even in the 49th symbol variation display, no big hit is made, and the decoration symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (13) has “decoration 0”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 6”, which are combinations of the decorative symbols of the loss. Stop display (determined display). In addition, on this decorative symbol display device 208, four special figure 1 hold displays indicating the hold of special figure 1 are displayed (h11 to h14), and four special figure 2 hold displays indicating the hold of special figure 2 are also displayed. (H21 to h24).

  In FIG. 32 (14), the 50th symbol variation display is started after the end of the big hit game. The variation time of the 50th symbol variation display is also determined using the table 3 as before. However, since it is the symbol variation display in which the power support state is the last, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (14) displays “Last”. The character display of “Last” corresponds to an example of the remaining number display of “Remaining 0 times”. Even in Table 3, in the case of the display of fluctuations in the pattern of the loss, there is a case where the battle gaze tilt 1 is performed, but since the number of holdings of the special figure 2 here is four, the table shown in FIG. In many cases, the timer number 2 (2 seconds) becomes an extremely shortened loss. In this example as well, the variation time of the 50th symbol variation display is 2 seconds, and the effect of Battle Gase Aori 1 is not performed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. "Decoration 5"-"Decoration 5"-"Decoration 4" are stopped and displayed (determined display). The decorative symbol display device 208 displays four special figure 1 hold displays (h11 to h14) representing the special figure 1 hold, and three special figure 2 hold displays representing the special figure 2 hold. (H21 to h23).

  As explained with reference to FIG. 23, if the game is in the electric support state (game nature using the table set 2), the last (change immediately before the fall) symbol variation display is a case of loss. Even battle gasase tilt occurs. However, in the table set 1 based on the special figure A, since the table 3 is used, there is a high probability of producing an uncomfortable effect in which the losing is confirmed by the ultrashort fluctuation of 2 seconds. In some cases, the effect that remains uncomfortable can function as a notification effect for notifying a portion different from the original game performance of a so-called structure probability change machine, in which a probability change state is not given unless a predetermined area is won.

  When the 49th symbol variation display is completed, if the number of reserved figures in the special figure 2 is 3 or less, the table shown in FIG. 11 (f) is used. There is a case where it is possible to perform an effect without a sense of incongruity with a high probability of occurrence.

  FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG.

  When the 50th symbol variation display is completed, the gaming state shifts to a non-electric support state. That is, a transition is made from the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state to the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. This special figure low probability normal figure low probability state (normal state) continues until the next jackpot game ends. However, the variation time of the symbol variation display is still determined using Table 3. However, even when the same table 3 is used, the variation time is the same, but in the electric support state (normal high probability state) and the non-electric support state (normal low probability state), the decorative symbol display device 208 There may be cases where the production mode is different. That is, as shown in FIG. 9 (d), if it is the fluctuation time of timer number 4 (10 seconds), the performance mode of Battle Gaseori 1 is performed in the electric support state (normally high probability state), If it is a support state (ordinary low-probability state), a production mode of deviation is usually performed. Moreover, if it is the fluctuation time of the timer number 6 (30 seconds), the effect mode of battle A defeat is performed in the electric support state (general figure high probability state), but in the non electric support state (general figure low probability state). If there is, a super reach A losing effect mode is performed. Furthermore, if it is the fluctuation time of timer number 7 (35 seconds), the battle A victory effect mode is performed in the electric support state (general figure high probability state), but in the non electric support state (general figure low probability state). If there is, the reach aspect of reach A jackpot is performed.

  In FIG. 33 (16), the 51st symbol variation display is started after the end of the big hit game. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (16), a character display that prompts the user to return to the left is displayed since the non-electric support state has been entered. The remaining number display is finished and disappears. Here, the remaining three special figure 2 holds are digested in order. The 51st symbol variation display is a 10-second variation time of the timer number 4, and the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a normal loss effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (17), the symbol variation display for the last hold of the remaining special figure 2 is finished, and “decoration 0”-“decoration 7”, which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the lost. -“Decoration 6” is stopped (determined). The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (17) does not display any special figure 2 hold display indicating the hold of the special figure 2, but the special figure 1 hold display indicating the hold of the special figure 1 is not displayed. Four are displayed (h11 to h14).

  In FIG. 33 (18), the first special symbol display device 212 has started the symbol variation display, and the ornamental symbol display device 208 has also started the variation display of the ornament symbol. The ornament symbol display device shown in FIG. In 208, “decoration 7”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 3”, which is a combination of the decorative patterns of the loss, is stopped (determined). In the decorative symbol display device 208 here, the special figure 1 hold display is reduced by one and displayed three (h11 to h13).

  In the case of the losing symbol variation display after the 51st time based on the table 3, the variation time of 10 seconds of the timer number 4 is almost all cases, and the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the normal losing effect. In addition, only when the number of holdings in the special map 2 is 4, the timer number 2 is subjected to a super-short fluctuation of 2 seconds, but in this example, one general-purpose start port 228 is provided in the right area. Therefore, the timer number 2 is not selected unless it is intentionally right-handed. When the actual gaming state is the special figure low probability ordinary figure low probability state, the rendering mode corresponding to the timer number 2 is prohibited, so the default gaming state of the table 3 used (the table 3 used) The production is executed using the production mode of the super shortening loss used in the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state) instead.

  FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 34 (20), the 52nd symbol variation display is started, and the decoration symbol display device 208 has “decoration 0”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 6”, which are combinations of the decorative symbols of the loss. The state of the stop display (determined display) is shown.

  In FIG. 34 (21), the 53rd symbol variation display is started, the first special symbol display device 212 has started symbol variation display, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variation symbol display. . Note that there is only one special figure 1 hold display h11.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (22), during the 53rd symbol variation display started in FIG. 21 (21), a girl character is displayed as a normal notice, and may be developed into a reach. Is informed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (23) has developed into a reach, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (24) has started a super reach A effect. The 53rd symbol variation display is a symbol variation display of timer number 6 for 30 seconds. At the stage of FIG. 24 (24), there is a single winning at the first special figure starting port 230, and the number of reserved figures in the special figure 1 becomes two.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (25), the super reach A effect is continued, and the losing confirmation effect is displayed. Even at this stage, there is another winning in the first special figure starting port 230, the special figure 1 is held on the number 3, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displaying the losing effect is displayed. Three displays (h11 to h13) are displayed.

  FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (26) shows a state in which “decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 4”, which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the loss, is stopped and displayed (confirmed display). ing. In addition, there is another one-game winning at the first special figure starting port 230, and four special figure 1 hold displays are displayed (h11 to h14).

  In FIG. 35 (27), the 54th symbol variation display is started, and “decoration 0”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 6”, which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the loss, is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208. The state of the stop display (determined display) is shown.

  In FIG. 35 (28), the 55th symbol variation display is started, the first special symbol display device 212 has started symbol variation display, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variation symbol display. . Note that there are two remaining special figure 1 hold indications h11.

  In the first special figure display device 212 shown in FIG. 35 (29), the design mode of the special figure A (see FIG. 5 (a-1)) is stopped and displayed, and the decorative design display device 208 has no reach effect. Suddenly, an odd number of combinations of decorative symbols such as “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” are stopped and displayed (determined display), and “big hit” characters are also displayed. That is, in the 55th symbol variation display, a super shortened big hit such as 1 second of the timer number 1 is performed based on the table 3 shown in FIG. In the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the table 1 shown in FIG. 10C is originally used, and the selection probability of the super-shortened jackpot of the timer number 1 is 1/65536, but here, FIG. The use of the table 3 shown in d) increases the selection probability to about 45%. Thus, compared with the case where the table 1 is used, in appearance, there is a high probability that it will be a huge hit with overwhelmingly super shortening. That is, there is a case where it is possible to hit a big hit with a very rare change that can hardly be seen in normal times, and it is possible to prevent the game interest from being lost due to missed probability change.

  FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example in which the 100th symbol variation display is reached without making a big hit from the state shown in FIG. 35 (26).

  The 99th symbol variation display is performed, and the first special symbol display device 212 shown in FIG. 36A displays the special symbol F (see FIG. 5A-1) in a stopped manner, and the decorative symbol is displayed. On the display device 208, “decoration 7”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 3”, which are combinations of decorative patterns for losing, are stopped (determined). The 99th symbol variation display is the last symbol variation display based on Table 3. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36A, two special figure 1 hold displays are displayed (h12, h12).

  In FIG. 36 (b), the 100th symbol variation display is started after the end of the big hit game. The variation time of the 100th symbol variation display is determined using the table 5 shown in FIGS. 12 (c) and 12 (d). Even if it is a big hit symbol variation display in which the timer number 7 of 35 seconds is always selected, or a loss variation variation display in which the timer number 5 of 12 seconds is always selected, the special figure low probability ordinary figure low probability In the state, the reach effect is performed as shown in FIG. That is, in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the reach production of super reach A is performed and a big hit is made, or the reach production of normal reach is performed and lost.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36C, a reach state is formed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 7 ”-“ Decoration 4 ”is stopped (determined). That is, in this example, the effect is a normal reach loss. In the table 1 shown in FIG. 10 (d) and FIG. 10 (e), which are originally used in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the normal reach loss of 12 seconds is performed. There are cases where it is possible to prevent a sense of incongruity by changing the production mode according to the gaming state.

  In the case of a big hit, the reach production of Super Reach A shown in FIG. 20 is always performed.

  Here, as long as the time approximates to 12 seconds, it is possible to adopt time adjustment by fluctuation of fluctuation or the like. By shaking fluctuation, it can give a little uncomfortable feeling and can notify that it was in a special state, but it can also be said that the uncomfortable feeling is minimized.

  Next, a second example of a game machine to which the present invention can be applied will be described. Hereinafter, the difference from the items described so far will be mainly described. Further, in the following description, components having the same names as the components described so far will be described with reference numerals used so far.

  FIG. 37 (a-1) shows an example of the stop symbol pattern (first symbol pattern) of FIG. 1 in the pachinko machine of the second example, and FIG. It shows an example of the stop symbol aspect (first symbol aspect) of the special figure 2 in the pachinko machine of the second example.

  In FIG. 37 (a-1) and FIG. 37 (a-2), six types of special drawings from “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure F” are shown as stop symbol forms in the symbol variation display.

  Also in the second example, the stop symbol form of special figure 1 and the stop symbol aspect of special figure 2 are common. In the second example, all the big hits are big hits with 15 rounds of electric support, but in Special Figure 2, the big hit symbols are all big hits (special big hits) scheduled to acquire a probable change. On the other hand, in Special Figure 1, only “Special Figure A” and “Special Figure B” are jackpots (special jackpots) scheduled to be probable, and “Special Figure C” and “Special Figure D” are scheduled to acquire probable changes. There is no jackpot.

  FIG. 37 (b) is a diagram summarizing the actions of the attacker during the jackpot game of FIG.

  The special figure A in the special figure 1 shows that the first variable prize opening 234 (first attacker) is open for 25 seconds from the first round to the 14th round, and the second variable prize opening 235 (second Attacker) opens for 25 seconds.

  The special figure B in the special figure 1 is that the first variable prize opening 234 (first attacker) is opened for 25 seconds from the first round to the 14th round, and the second variable prize opening 235 (second Attacker) first opens for 0.1 seconds, goes through a 3 second closing period and opens for 24.9 seconds.

  In the special figure C and D in the special figure 1, the first variable prize opening 234 (first attacker) is opened for 25 seconds from the first round to the 14th round. (Attacker 2) is only open for 0.1 seconds and there is almost no chance of winning.

  Also in the second example, the third game condition (or the first condition) is established by winning the second variable winning opening 235 (second attacker) in the 15th round. Therefore, in the special figures C and D of the special figure 1, although the possibility of the probability variation acquisition is not 0%, the possibility is very low, and it is a big hit that the probability variation acquisition is not scheduled. On the other hand, in the special figures A and B of the special figure 1, the opening time of the second variable prize opening 235 (second attacker) is sufficient, which is a big hit that is expected to acquire a certain variation.

  Further, the action of the attacker in the case of the special figure A and B in the special figure 2 is the same as the action of the attacker in the case of the special figure A in the special figure 1, and the attacker in the case of the special figures C and D in the special figure 2 The operation of is the same as the operation of the attacker in the case of special figure B in special figure 1. Therefore, all of the jackpot symbols (special charts A to D) in the special figure 2 are the big hits that the second variable winning opening 235 (second attacker) has sufficient time to open and the probability variation is scheduled to be acquired. It should be noted that the operation of the attacker in the case of the special drawings A to D in the special drawing 2 may be the same as the operation of the attacker in the case of the special drawing A in the special drawing 1.

  The table set and each table in the second example are the same as those shown in FIGS.

  FIG. 38 is a diagram showing an example of a specific effect example in the pachinko machine of the second example.

  In the first special figure display device 212 shown in FIG. 38 (1), the symbol form of the special figure C (see FIG. 37 (a-1)) which is a big hit that is not scheduled to be acquired is stopped and displayed. In addition, on the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of decorative symbols “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4” is stopped and displayed (determined display), and the character display of “big hit” is also displayed. . Note that the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (1) displays four special figure 1 hold displays (h11 to h14). In this way, an effect that is not scheduled to acquire a certain variation such that the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4” is stopped (determined display) is equivalent to the second effect. To do.

  Eventually, the big hit game is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 of the 12th round is shown in FIG. 38 (2). The decorative symbol display device 208 displays the opening of the button effect. The button effect here is that if a chance character 136 shown in FIG. 1 is pressed and a longest character appears, the second attacker (second variable prize opening 235) is played for a long time (for example, 25) in 15 rounds. Second or 24.9 seconds), and the chance to win a certainty comes. In addition, since it is an effect to the last, and only the special figure C is won, in fact, the second attacker does not open for a long time (for example, 25 seconds, 24, 9 seconds), and for a short time (here, 0. 0). 1 second) Only open.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 38 (3), the player presses the chance button 136. As a result, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (3), an old character appears, but a character mark “chance” is displayed with a question mark.

  In FIG. 38 (4), the 14th round is entered, and in FIG. 38 (5), the 15th round of the final round is started. FIG. 38 (5) shows a state in which the second attacker (second variable prize opening 235) is opened. The opening time of the second attacker here is a short time of 0.1. It is a second, and it is difficult to expect a prize.

  However, in FIG. 38 (6), it is shown that the second attacker opened by chance for 0.1 second has been won, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Is displayed with a letter indicating that the probability change has been obtained, such as “Probability change”.

  Thus, in this example, it can be said that the third game condition (or the first condition) may be satisfied even when the first effect is not performed.

  FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 39 (7), an end effect of the big hit game is performed. Also, in this example, during the jackpot game, 1/100 probability of hitting the normal figure, the electric Chu (second special figure start port 232) is opened, and the special figure 2 hold increases to full. ing. In the end effect of the big hit game, the hold display is resumed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 39 (7) displays the hold display of special figure 1 and the hold display of special figure 2 by four. (H11-h14, h21-h24).

  Here, assuming that special figure C is won in special figure 1, it is assumed that the second game condition is satisfied, but the third game condition (or the first condition) is not satisfied, and FIG. ) After the big hit game, the table set 2 shown in FIG. 10B is used. In addition, the game state becomes a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state, and the electric support state is maintained while the symbol variation display is performed 50 times after the big hit game. However, in this example, because the third game condition (or the first condition) is also established by chance, the game state after the big hit game becomes a special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state, and the big hit game After that, while the symbol variation display is performed 100 times, the electric support state is maintained. The table set 2 is used as the table set. In this way, after the second performance is performed, the third game condition (or the first condition) is established, so that the state changes to the probability change state and the table set 2 is used until the next big hit. This state corresponds to the fourth state.

  On the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. 38 (6), if the third game condition (or the first condition) is not satisfied because there is no winning for the second attacker, The table set 2 shown in FIG. 10B is used. As described above, after the second performance is performed, the third game condition (or the first condition) is not satisfied, the electric support state is entered, and the table set 2 is used until the next big hit. Such a state corresponds to the third state.

  The pachinko machine of the second example is also a special figure 2 priority change machine, and in FIG. 39 (8), the special figure 2 hold indicated by the first special figure 2 hold display h211 is digested, and the second special figure display device. Reference numeral 214 starts the symbol variation display, and the ornament symbol display device 208 also starts the variation symbol display. Also, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 39 (8) has a character display that prompts the user to make a right stroke, a character display that indicates “probable change”, and a remaining number display that indicates “99 remaining times”. Has been made. The remaining number display here is informed that the probability variation state (or the power support state) continues for another 99 symbol variation displays.

  In addition, the variation time of the 49 symbol variation displays including the symbol variation display is determined using the table 2 shown in FIGS. 11A to 11C.

  Thereafter, the symbol variation display based on the table 2 is repeatedly performed until the big hit game is started. In this example, in the first symbol variation display after the big hit game is finished, as shown in FIG. On the symbol display device 208, “decoration 0”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 6”, which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the loss, is stopped (determined). Also, in the 25th symbol variation display, as shown in FIG. 39 (10), the decorative symbol display device 208 has the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss (here, “decoration 4” − “decoration 0” − “decoration 7”). ) Is stopped (confirmed).

  In FIG. 39 (11), the 26th symbol variation display is started after the end of the big hit game. This symbol variation display is also a symbol variation display based on Table 2. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 39 (12), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbol variation display continues.

  FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (13), while the decorative symbol continues to be displayed in the middle symbol display area 208 b, the fluctuation variation occurs in the right symbol display area 208 c, and “decoration 7” and “decoration 6” are displayed. There is an effect that either one of them stops. Here, if “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, a reach state is reached and a battle effect is started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (14), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, a reach state is formed, and the characters “battle start” are displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (15), it is informed that the battle effect B is started, the Tono-sama character appears, and the bowling battle is started. In this bowling battle, it is also notified that a big hit is confirmed if a strike occurs.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (16), the bowling battle is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The effect described above in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 40 (14) to (17) is the battle effect B. This battle effect B is an effect that does not originally appear in the table 3 of the table set 1. In other words, when the table set is 1, special figure 1 is won when special figure A or special figure B is won and a certain change is obtained as scheduled, it is an effect that does not appear. Most of the players who have seen this battle production B do not feel uncomfortable, but some players who are familiar with this pachinko machine understand that it is a rare value production. May function as a special state notification.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (18), an odd number of combinations of decorative symbols such as “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” are stopped (determined) and “big hit” is displayed. Is also displayed. As described above, in this example, the effect of stopping and displaying (decision display) an odd number of decorative symbol combinations such as “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” determined to be a 15R special big hit is the first. It can be said to be an example of one production.

  In this example, the super reach like the battle effect may be executed only when the reach state is formed by the “decoration 7” in the effect of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2. Alternatively, the super-reach executed when the reach state is formed by the “decoration 7” has a higher degree of reliability than the case where the reach state is formed by other decorative symbols and the super-reach is developed. You may comprise. Alternatively, when the reach state is formed by “decoration 7”, it may be configured to be a big hit.

  FIG. 41 is a diagram showing an example in which the 50th symbol variation display is reached without making a big hit since the end of the big hit game shown in FIG. 39 (7).

  The symbol variation display of the special figure 2 of the 49th time is performed, and the symbol form of the special figure F (see FIG. 37 (a-2)) is stopped and displayed on the second special figure display device 214 shown in FIG. In the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 4”-“decoration 0”-“decoration 7”, which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the loss, is stopped (determined). The 49th symbol variation display is a symbol variation display based on Table 2. In addition, in the 1st special figure display apparatus 212 shown to Fig.41 (a), the symbol aspect of special figure C (refer FIG.37 (3a-1)) is stopped display, and if it is original, an uncertain change state ( It should be a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state), but here it is a probability variation state (special figure high probability normal figure high probability state).

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 41A displays four special figure 1 hold displays (h11 to h14) and four special figure 2 hold displays (h21 to h24).

  In FIG. 41B, the 50th symbol variation display is started after the end of the big hit game. The variation time of the 50th symbol variation display is determined using the table 4 shown in FIGS. 12 (a) and 12 (b). Even if it is a jackpot symbol variation display in which either one of 35 seconds timer number 7 or 65 seconds timer number 9 is always selected, it is a loss symbol variation display in which 12 seconds timer number 5 is always selected. However, as in the special figure low-probability normal figure high-probability state, the reach effect is performed as shown in FIG. In other words, even in the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, the battle reach super-reach is performed to make a big hit, or the battle gaze tilt 2 effect is made to lose. When the actual game state is the special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state, the default game of the table 4 that is the table used is applied because the production mode corresponding to the timer number 9 is prohibited. An effect is executed using the effect mode of battle B victory used in the state (the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state) instead.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 41 (c), an effect as if developing into a battle effect is performed. That is, in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, while the decorative symbol continues to be displayed in a variable manner, a girl character appears in the middle symbol display area 208b, and a notification that "Battle starts when reaching reach" is made. Yes.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 41D, the first stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbol variation display continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 41 (e), while the decorative symbol continues to be variably displayed in the middle symbol display region 208b, shaking fluctuation occurs in the right symbol display region 208c, and “decoration 7” and “decoration 6”. There is an effect that either one of them stops. Here, if “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, the reach state is reached. However, in the ornamental symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 41 (f), the second stop is performed and the right symbol display area 208 “Decoration 6” is stopped and displayed in 208c, and the reach state is not formed. The effect in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 41 (c) to 41 (f) is the effect of the battle gasase tilt 2.

  FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG.

  In the case of the 50th symbol variation display in this example, in the case of a loss, the effect of the battle gasse tilt 2 is always performed by the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. “Decoration 7”-“Decoration 7”-“Decoration 6”, which is a combination of decorative symbols, is stopped (determined).

  In FIG. 42 (h), the symbol variation display of the 51st special drawing 2 is started. From the 51st symbol variation display, the variation time is determined using the table 1 shown in FIGS. 10 (c) to 10 (e). In Table 1, if the suspension of the special figure 1 is full, the symbol fluctuation display of timer number 3 is likely to be a five-second symbol fluctuation display in the case of the loss symbol fluctuation display. On the other hand, when the table 3 is used, if the number of holdings in the special figure 2 is full, the symbol number 2 of the timer number 2 is likely to be changed, and a difference of 3 seconds occurs in the changing time. However, the difference of 3 seconds can be adjusted by fluctuation of shaking. In the first place, in the probability variation state, a long variation time of 65 seconds is not prepared in the table 3, and the symbol variation display of the super-shortening system is repeated probabilistically, so that the hold is quickly digested, and the player is in an advantageous state. Although a special state can be notified by repeating the 5-second symbol variation display of timer number 3 in addition to the regular route probability change state using table set 1 (using table 3). It is also possible that the case) is slightly more advantageous to the player from the standpoint of digestion efficiency than the irregular probability change state using the table set 2 (when using the table 1).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (i), “decoration 4”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 6”, which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the loss, are stopped and displayed.

  If the 100th symbol variation display of the big hit game is lost, when using the table set 1, the timer number 5 is always selected from the table 5, and the decoration symbol display device 208 produces the effect of the battle gasase tilt 2 Is done. On the other hand, even when the table set 2 is used, if the timer number 5 having the same variation time is selected from the table 1, the effect of the battle gasase tilt 2 is performed (see FIG. 9D). If the 100th symbol variation display of the jackpot game is a jackpot, when using the table set 1, the timer number 7 is always selected from the table 5, and the decoration symbol display device 208 produces an effect of battle A victory. Is done. On the other hand, even when the table set 2 is used, if the timer number 7 having the same variation time is selected from the table 1, a battle A victory effect is performed (see FIG. 9D). Furthermore, even when a variable time not selected in Table 5 is selected in Table 1, for example, if timer number 4 is used, the effect of Battle Gaseori 1 is performed, and in other cases, the time is adjusted by the effect. .

  FIG. 43 is a diagram showing an operation example of the attacker when the special figure B is won in the special figure 1 in the pachinko machine of the second example.

  43 (a) to 43 (c) are the same as the examples shown in FIGS. 38 (2) to (3), and thus description thereof is omitted. In FIG. 43 (d), the 15th round of the final round is started. At this stage, the old and middle characters are still displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and there is a strong possibility that the special figure C or the special figure D that is not scheduled to be acquired is likely to be a big hit. In this state, the second attacker (second variable prize opening 235) performs a short opening of 0.1 second once. The opening for 0.1 second here has an effect that makes it seem for a moment that it is the opening of 15 rounds of special drawings C and D in FIG.

  After a short opening of 0.1 second for the second attacker, after a closing period of 3 seconds, the decoration symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Appears and the second attacker (second variable prize opening 235) starts opening for a long time of 24.9 seconds.

  FIG. 43 (f) shows that the second attacker who has opened the game has won a prize, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The characters to be displayed are displayed.

  Next, a third example of a game machine to which the present invention can be applied will be described. Hereinafter, the difference from the items described so far will be mainly described.

  FIG. 44 (a-1) shows an example of the stop symbol pattern (first symbol pattern) of FIG. 1 in the pachinko machine of the third example, and FIG. It shows an example of the stop symbol aspect (first symbol aspect) of the special figure 2 in the pachinko machine of the second example.

  In FIG. 44 (a-1) and FIG. 44 (a-2), six types of special drawings from “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure F” are shown as the stop symbol forms in the symbol variation display.

  Also in the third example, the stop symbol mode of special figure 1 and the stop symbol mode of special figure 2 are common. In the third example as well as the second example, the big hits are all 15 rounds of probable big hits (special big hits), but in Special Figure 2, the big hit symbols are all probable big hits (special special plans) It is the same as the second example. On the other hand, in Special Figure 1, only "Special Figure A" and "Special Figure B" are probable big hits (special big hits) scheduled to acquire electric support, and "Special Figure C" and "Special Figure D" acquire electric support. It is a promising big hit (special jackpot) that is not scheduled.

  FIG. 44 (b) is a diagram summarizing the actions of the attacker during the jackpot game of FIG.

  The special figure A in the special figure 1 shows that the first variable prize opening 234 (first attacker) is open for 25 seconds from the first round to the 14th round, and the second variable prize opening 235 (second Attacker) opens for 25 seconds.

  The special figure B in the special figure 1 is that the first variable prize opening 234 (first attacker) is opened for 25 seconds from the first round to the 14th round, and the second variable prize opening 235 (second Attacker) first opens for 0.1 seconds, goes through a 3 second closing period and opens for 24.9 seconds.

  In the special figure C and D in the special figure 1, the first variable prize opening 234 (first attacker) is opened for 25 seconds from the first round to the 14th round. (Attacker 2) is only open for 0.1 seconds and there is almost no chance of winning.

  In the third example, the third game condition (or the first condition) is established by winning the second variable prize opening 235 (second attacker) in the fifteenth round. A support state (short-time state) is given. Therefore, in the special figures C and D of the special figure 1, the possibility of acquiring electric support is not 0%, but the possibility is extremely low, and it is a big hit that is not scheduled to acquire electric support. On the other hand, in the special figures A and B of the special figure 1, the opening time of the second variable prize opening 235 (second attacker) is sufficient, which is a big hit scheduled to acquire electric support.

  Further, the action of the attacker in the case of the special figure A and B in the special figure 2 is the same as the action of the attacker in the case of the special figure A in the special figure 1, and the attacker in the case of the special figures C and D in the special figure 2 The operation of is the same as the operation of the attacker in the case of special figure B in special figure 1. Therefore, all of the big hit symbols (Special Drawings A to D) in the special figure 2 are the big hits where the second variable winning opening 235 (second attacker) is sufficiently open and the electric support is scheduled to be acquired. It should be noted that the operation of the attacker in the case of the special drawings A to D in the special drawing 2 may be the same as the operation of the attacker in the case of the special drawing A in the special drawing 1.

  FIG. 44 (c) is a diagram showing a table set selection table when a big hit is made in FIG. 1, and FIG. 44 (b) is a diagram showing a table set selection table when a big hit is made in FIG. These tables are also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  Even in the third example, the ordinary drawing lottery wins only with a probability of 1/100 in the ordinary figure low probability state, so the electric Chu is hardly opened, and the probability of winning the second special figure starting port 232 is low. The table shown in FIG. 44C corresponds to a table set selection table that is frequently used in the case of the normal figure low probability (special figure high probability ordinary figure low probability, special figure low probability ordinary figure low probability) state. For reference, FIG. 44 (c) shows a control state after the big hit game corresponding to the stop pattern at the time of the big hit in the special figure 1. A circle mark indicates “added”, and a cross mark indicates “none”.

  On the other hand, in the ordinary high probability state, the electric Chu is almost open, and the big hit in the special figure 2 is more advantageous to the player than the big hit in the special figure 1, so the player aims at the second special figure starting port 232. The table shown in FIG. 44D corresponds to a table set selection table that is often used in the case of the normal figure high probability (special figure high probability normal figure high probability) state. For reference, FIG. 44D shows a control state after the big hit game corresponding to the stop pattern at the time of the big hit in the special figure 2.

  Note that in both FIG. 44C and FIG. 44D, electric support is not provided unless the second variable winning opening 235 opened in the 15th round is won.

  From the table shown in FIG. 44 (c) and the table shown in FIG. 44 (d), when the special figure determination result is a big hit symbol in which the second special figure starting port 232 is opened for a long time, the table set 1 is If it is selected and the special figure determination result is a big hit symbol in which the second special figure starting port 232 is only opened for a short period, the table set 2 is selected.

  FIG. 45A is a diagram for explaining tables used in the table set.

  In the third example, since all the jackpot symbols have certain probability variations, there is no special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. For this reason, there are only three types of tables used in the table set: Table 1, Table 3, and Table 5. Table 3 is a table originally used in the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and table 5 is a table originally used in the state immediately before the fall in the special figure high probability general figure high probability state. In the third example, the table 1 is originally a table used in a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, and is also a table used in a special figure high probability general figure low probability state.

  FIG. 45B is a diagram for explaining timer numbers.

  The diagram shown in FIG. 45 (b) is a diagram obtained by deleting the effect mode of the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state from the diagram shown in FIG. 9 (d). In addition, the rendering mode performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 (display means) according to the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state is decorated according to the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state which is the same non-electric support state. This is the same as the effect mode performed by the symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 45C is a diagram for explaining the table set 1 in the third example.

  The table set 1 in the third example is used when shifting to the electric support state after the big hit game ends. After the big hit, until the 99th symbol variation display, the table 3 for the special symbol high probability common symbol high probability state is used, and in the symbol variation display of the 100th symbol, that is, the symbol variation display in the probability variation state and the last electric support state. Table 5 is used. When the 101st symbol variation display is started, the state is shifted to the non-probable change state and the non-electric support state, and the table 1 for the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state is used.

  FIG. 45D is a diagram for explaining the table set 2 in the third example.

  The table set 2 in the third example is used when the non-electric support state remains after the big hit game ends. That is, when the special figure C or the special figure D is won in the special figure 1, only the table 1 is set, and the table 1 is continuously used until the next big hit game is finished. For this reason, compared with the 1st example and the 2nd example, the production which becomes uncomfortable during a special state increases, or the production is biased.

  Next, a fourth example of a game machine to which the present invention can be applied will be described. Hereinafter, the difference from the items described so far will be mainly described.

  In the first to third examples described above, at the timing when the special figure is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214, it corresponds to the type of special figure to be stopped and displayed. In the example described below, the combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed (determined display) on the decorative symbol display device 208. However, in the example described below, the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special diagram display device 214 is a big hit. When the symbol pattern ("Special Figure A" to "Special Figure D") is stopped and displayed before the special figure is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214. , After temporarily stopping (temporarily stopping) the combination (temporary stop symbol) of any one of a plurality of types of decorative symbols on the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is performed again (re-variation). display Implementation of an effect mode for deriving and displaying a combination of jackpot decorative symbols that are finally stopped and displayed (determined display) when the special figure is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214 A description will be given of what has possible functions.

  In the pachinko machine of the fourth example, the stop symbol mode (first symbol mode) of the special figure 1 is shown in FIG. 37 (a-1) as an example, and the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2 is shown in FIG. An example shown in a-2) will be described below. It should be noted that the first variable winning opening 234 (first attacker) and the second for each big hit in special figure A to special figure D in special figure 1, each big hit in special figure A to special figure D in special figure 2 Since the operation mode of the variable prize opening 235 (second attacker) is as described above in the second example, the description thereof is omitted.

<First sub-control unit decoration design determination process>
Next, the first sub-control unit decoration symbol determination process will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the flow of the decorative symbol determination process of the first sub-control unit 400.

  The first sub-control unit decoration symbol determination process shown in FIG. 46 is an effect in the first sub-control unit main process that is determined to have received the symbol variation start command in the command process (FIG. 14A: step S307). This is a process executed in the control process (step S309).

  First, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 acquires information representing the special symbol stop symbol included in the symbol variation start command described above (step S3093a).

  CPU404 determines whether the information acquired in step S3093a is the information which shows the stop symbol of special figure 2 (step S3093b). When the CPU 404 does not determine that the acquired information is information indicating the stop symbol of the special figure 2, that is, when it is determined that the acquired information is information indicating the stop symbol of the special figure 1 (step S3093b: NO). ), A combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed is determined based on the decorative symbol determination table for special figure 1 (step S3093c).

  FIG. 47A is a diagram showing a special hit determination design table for special figure 1.

  When the stop symbol of the special figure 1 is from “special figure A” to “special figure D”, the CPU 404 refers to the special figure 1 jackpot decorative symbol determination table shown in FIG. The special figure 1 jackpot decoration symbol determination table is stored in the ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400, for example.

  For example, the CPU 404 extracts a dedicated random number value that is stored in the RAM 408 and whose numerical value is updated in the range of 0 to 99, and displays a combination of the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed from the stopped symbol of the special figure 1 and the extracted random number value. decide. For example, when the stop symbol of special figure 1 is “special figure A” or “special figure B”, “decoration 0” − “decoration 0” − “decoration 0” is 8% as a combination of the ornamental symbols. "Decoration 1"-"Decoration 1"-"Decoration 1" is 10%, "Decoration 2"-"Decoration 2"-"Decoration 2" is 8%, "Decoration 3"-"Decoration 3"-"Decoration 3" 15%, "decoration 4"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 4" 8%, "decoration 5"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 5" 10%, "decoration 6"-"decoration 6"-" Decoration 6 is 8%, Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7 is 15%, Decoration 8-Decoration 8-Decoration 8 is 8%, Decoration 9-Decoration 9 ”-“ decoration 9 ”is selected at a rate of 10%. That is, when the special symbol 1 is “Special A” or “Special B”, an odd number of decorations is used rather than a combination of three even numbered decorative symbols (a combination of the first decorative symbols). The combination of three symbols (second decorative symbol combination) is configured to be more easily selected. Further, for example, when the special symbol 1 is “Special C” or “Special D”, 18% of “decoration 0”-“decoration 0”-“decoration 0” are combinations of the ornamental symbols. “Decoration 1” — “decoration 1” — “decoration 1” is 3%, “decoration 2” — “decoration 2” — “decoration 2” is 18%, “decoration 3” — “decoration 3” — “decoration 3” "0%", "decoration 4"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 4" 18%, "decoration 5"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 5" 3%, "decoration 6"-"decoration 6" -"Decoration 6" is 18%, "Decoration 7"-"Decoration 7"-"Decoration 7" is 0%, "Decoration 8"-"Decoration 8"-"Decoration 8" is 18%, "Decoration 9"- “Decoration 9”-“Decoration 9” is selected at a rate of 4%. That is, when the stop symbol of Special Figure 1 is “Special Figure A” or “Special Figure B”, the combination of three odd-numbered decorative symbols is better than the combination of three even-numbered decorative symbols. When the stop symbol of special figure 1 is “special figure C” or “special figure D”, an even number of decorations is used rather than a combination of three odd number of decorative figures. The combination of three symbols is configured to be easily selected. As a result, the player greatly expects that the combination of the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed is a combination of three odd-numbered decorative symbols that the game is a 15R special big hit. On the other hand, even when the combination of decorative symbols that are stopped (determined) is a combination of three even-numbered decorative symbols, the player is expected to lose the expectation of being a 15R special big hit. Can be suppressed. In addition, the combination of decorative patterns (third decorative pattern combination) of “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” and “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” The stop symbols are configured to be selected only in the case of “Special Figure A” and “Special Figure B”. Therefore, the combination of the decoration pattern of “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” and “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” is the second variable prize opening 235 ( It can be said that the third game condition (or the first condition) established by winning the second attacker) is a combination that is easily established. That is, in this example, the third combination of decorative symbols corresponds to the second combination. Further, the combination of the first decorative symbols corresponds to the first combination. Furthermore, the combination of the second decorative symbols and the combination of the decorative symbols other than the third decorative symbol combination corresponds to the first combination.

  In addition, when the stop symbol of Special Figure 1 is “Special Figure E” and “Special Figure F”, that is, when it is a lost symbol, for example, the fluctuation determined as described above in the first example. The combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed is determined in accordance with the time and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  When the combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed (determined display) is determined as described above in step S3093c, the CPU 404 determines the combination of decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped (step S3093d).

  Specifically, it is a combination of decorative symbols in which three combinations of decorative symbols to be stopped are displayed, and “decoration 3” — “decoration 3” — “decoration 3” and “decoration 7” — “decoration 7” — In the case of a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7”, the combination of the decorative symbols at the time of temporary stop is determined as the combination of decorative symbols to be determined and displayed. That is, the combination of the decorative symbols that are temporary stop symbols is set to be the same as the decorative symbols that are finally displayed. In addition, the combination of the decorative symbols at the time of temporary stop may be determined by lottery and may be set so as to be different from the combination of decorative symbols to be confirmed and displayed. In this case, the combination of the decorative symbols at the time of temporary stop is “decoration 3” — “decoration 3” —displayed only when the special symbols 1 are “special symbol A” and “special symbol B”. It is preferable not to use a combination of “decoration 3” and “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7”, but this is not restrictive.

  FIG. 47B is a diagram showing a temporary stop symbol lottery table when “333” and “777” are selected for special figure 1.

  When the combination of the decorative symbols to be confirmed and displayed is a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” and “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7”. The combination of the decorative symbols for temporary stop is determined with reference to the temporary stop symbol lottery table when “333” and “777” for special figure 1 shown in 47 (b) are selected. The temporary stop symbol lottery table at the time of selecting “333” and “777” for the special figure 1 is stored in the ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400, for example.

  For example, the CPU 404 extracts a dedicated random number value that is stored in the RAM 408 and whose numerical value is updated within a range of 0 to 99, and finally stops temporarily from a combination of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed and the extracted random number value. Determine the combination of decorative symbols when For example, when the combination of decorative symbols that are finally stopped and displayed is “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3”, the combination of the decorative symbols when temporarily stopping is “decoration 0”-“ "Decoration 0"-"Decoration 0" is 1%, "Decoration 1"-"Decoration 1"-"Decoration 1" is 2%, "Decoration 2"-"Decoration 2"-"Decoration 2" is 1%, "Decoration" 3 "-" decoration 3 "-" decoration 3 "89%," decoration 4 "-" decoration 4 "-" decoration 4 "1%," decoration 5 "-" decoration 5 "-" decoration 5 "2 %, "Decoration 6"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 6" is 1%, "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" is 0%, "decoration 8"-"decoration 8"-"decoration" “8” is selected at a rate of 1%, and “decoration 9”-“decoration 9”-“decoration 9” is selected at a rate of 2%. Further, for example, when the combination of decorative symbols that are finally stopped and displayed is “decoration 7” − “decoration 7” − “decoration 7”, “decoration 0” is used as the combination of decorative symbols when temporarily stopped. -"Decoration 0"-"decoration 0" is 1%, "decoration 1"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 1" is 2%, "decoration 2"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2" is 1%, “Decoration 3” — “Decoration 3” — “Decoration 3” is 0%, “Decoration 4” — “Decoration 4” — “Decoration 4” is 1%, “Decoration 5” — “Decoration 5” — “Decoration 5” 2%, "decoration 6"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 6" 1%, "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" 89%, "decoration 8"-"decoration 8"- "Decoration 8" is selected at a rate of 1%, and "Decoration 9"-"Decoration 9"-"Decoration 9" are selected at a rate of 2%. In other words, the combination of three odd-numbered decorative symbols (the combination of the second decorative symbols) is tentatively stopped as compared with the case where the temporary stop is performed with the combination of three even-numbered decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol combination). In the case of stopping, the combination of the decorative pattern of “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” or “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” after the third change (third decorative design) It is configured so that it can be confirmed and displayed easily. Thereby, the expectation with respect to the combination of the decoration symbol finally stopped and displayed (determined display) can be varied depending on the type of the temporary stop symbol to be displayed. Also, before the special figure is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214, it becomes a big hit game in which the third game condition (or the first condition) is likely to be established. You can have a sense of expectation about and improve your interest.

  When the CPU 404 determines the combination of decorative symbols when temporarily stopping in step S3093d as described above, the first sub-control unit decorative symbol determining process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines in step S3093b that the acquired information is information indicating the stop symbol of the special figure 2 (step S3093b: YES), the CPU 404 displays the stop based on the decorative symbol determination table for the special figure 2 The combination of decorative symbols to be determined is determined (step S3093e).

  FIG. 47 (c) is a diagram showing a big hit decoration symbol determination table for special figure 2.

  When the stop symbol of special figure 2 is from “special figure A” to “special figure D”, the special figure 2 jackpot decoration symbol determination table shown in FIG. 47C is referred to. The special figure 2 jackpot decoration symbol determination table is stored in the ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400, for example.

  For example, the CPU 404 extracts a dedicated random number value that is stored in the RAM 408 and whose numerical value is updated in the range of 0 to 99, and displays a combination of the decorative pattern that is fixedly displayed from the stop symbol of the special figure 2 and the extracted random number value. decide. In this example, in the special figure 2, any of the "special figure A" to "special figure D" is established by winning the second variable prize opening 235 (second attacker) during the big hit game. Since the 3R game condition (or the first condition) is a stop symbol that is a 15R special big hit, the combination of the decorative symbols to be displayed is “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” It is comprised so that it may become "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7". That is, when the stop symbol of Special Figure 2 is a stop symbol that is a big hit ("Special Figure A" to "Special Figure D"), the combination of the decorative symbols to be displayed for stoppage is always "decoration 3"-"decoration 3". "-" Decoration 3 "or" decoration 7 "-" decoration 7 "-" decoration 7 ". The selection ratio of “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” and “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” is 50%, but the selection ratios are different. You may do it.

  In addition, when the stop symbol of special figure 2 is “special figure E” and “special figure F”, that is, when it is a lost symbol, for example, the fluctuation determined as described above in the first example. The combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed is determined in accordance with the time and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, in the decorative symbol variation display on the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponding to the symbol variation display on the second special symbol display device 214, when the reach state by “decoration 3” or “decoration 7” is reached. Is always configured so that the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” or “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” is fixedly displayed. When the stop symbol of special figure 2 is a lost symbol, the combination of the decorative symbols is determined so that the reach state by “decoration 3” and “decoration 7” is not formed.

  When the combination of the decorative symbols to be confirmed and displayed is determined as described above in step S3093e, the CPU 404 determines the combination of decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped (step S3093f).

  FIG. 47 (d) is a diagram showing a temporary stop symbol lottery table when “333” and “777” for special figure 2 are selected.

  Specifically, the combination of the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed is a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” and “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7”. In this case, the combination of the decorative symbols for temporary stop is determined with reference to the temporary stop symbol lottery table for selecting special symbol “333” and “777” shown in FIG. 47 (d). The temporary stop symbol lottery table at the time of selecting “333” and “777” for the special figure 2 is stored in the ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400, for example.

  For example, the CPU 404 extracts a dedicated random number value that is stored in the RAM 408 and whose numerical value is updated within a range of 0 to 99, and finally stops temporarily from a combination of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed and the extracted random number value. Determine the combination of decorative symbols when For example, when the combination of decorative symbols that are finally stopped and displayed is “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3”, the combination of the decorative symbols when temporarily stopping is “decoration 0”-“ "Decoration 0"-"decoration 0" is 4%, "decoration 1"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 1" is 10%, "decoration 2"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2" is 4%, "decoration" 3 ”-“ decoration 3 ”-“ decoration 3 ”is 50%,“ decoration 4 ”-“ decoration 4 ”-“ decoration 4 ”is 4%,“ decoration 5 ”-“ decoration 5 ”-“ decoration 5 ”is 10% %, "Decoration 6"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 6" is 4%, "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" is 0%, "decoration 8"-"decoration 8"-"decoration" “8” is selected at a rate of 4%, and “decoration 9”-“decoration 9”-“decoration 9” is selected at a rate of 10%. Further, for example, when the combination of decorative symbols that are finally stopped and displayed is “decoration 7” − “decoration 7” − “decoration 7”, “decoration 0” is used as the combination of decorative symbols when temporarily stopped. -"Decoration 0"-"decoration 0" 4%, "decoration 1"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 1" 10%, "decoration 2"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2" 4%, "Decoration 3"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 3" is 00%, "decoration 4"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 4" is 4%, "decoration 5"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 5" 10%, "decoration 6"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 6" 4%, "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" 50%, "decoration 8"-"decoration 8"- "Decoration 8" is selected at a rate of 4%, and "Decoration 9"-"Decoration 9"-"Decoration 9" are selected at a rate of 10%. In other words, the combination of three odd-numbered decorative symbols (the combination of the second decorative symbols) is tentatively stopped as compared with the case where the combination is temporarily stopped by the combination of the three even-numbered decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol combination). In the case of stopping, the combination of the decorative pattern of “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” or “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” after the third change (third decorative design) (Combinations) are easy to stop (determined display).

  In this example, when the reach state is formed by “decoration 3” and “decoration 7” in the variable display of FIG. 2, “decoration 3” — “decoration 3” — “decoration 3” or “decoration 7” is surely formed. -The combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7" is derived and displayed. Therefore, in the case of performing a lost reach effect in the decorative symbol display on the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponding to the symbol variable display on the second special symbol display device 214, other than “decoration 3” and “decoration 7”. It is necessary to form a reach state with the decorative pattern. However, when the stop symbol of Special Figure 2 is a stop symbol that is a big hit, the combination of the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed is always "decoration 3"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 3" or "decoration 7"- It is comprised so that it may become "decoration 7"-"decoration 7". Therefore, in this example, a combination of three decorative patterns, which is a decoration other than “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” and “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7”. The combination of symbols can be set as a temporary stop symbol, and the decorative symbols “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” and “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” By providing a function for deriving and displaying the combination, when the stop symbol of special figure 2 is a lost symbol, the reach state may be formed by a decorative symbol other than “decoration 3” and “decoration 7”. It is possible to perform an effect display that is not necessarily lost, and it is possible to improve the interest in the symbol variation display in the second special symbol display device 214.

  When the CPU 404 determines the combination of decorative symbols when temporarily stopping in step S3093f as described above, the first sub-control unit decorative symbol determining process is terminated.

  In this example, the combination of the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined from the stop symbol of Special Fig. 1 or Special Fig. 2 and the extracted random number value, but the special symbol change time included in the symbol change start command is determined. You may make it determine based on the information to represent.

  In this example, the normal notice lottery process executed in step S3092e of the change start sub-side notice execution process shown in FIG. 19 is used for lottery of whether or not the normal notice is executed and the notice mode when the notice is executed. The notice lottery table is provided. The notice lottery table includes a game state (a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state, a special figure high probability general figure high probability state) and a special figure display device (first display) A plurality of special figure display devices 212 and second special figure display devices 214) are provided.

  FIG. 48A shows the special figure 1 low probability notice lottery table. FIG. 48B is a diagram showing the special figure 2 high-probability notice lottery table. FIG. 49A is a diagram showing a special drawing 2 low probability electric support notice lottery table. FIG. 49B is a diagram showing the special drawing 2 low probability notice lottery table. These notice lottery tables are stored in the ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400, for example.

  The special figure 1 low probability notice lottery table is a table used when the symbol variation display is performed on the first special figure display device 212 in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The special figure 2 high-probability notice lottery table is a table that is used when symbol variation display is performed on the second special figure display device 214 in the special figure high-probability normal figure high-probability state. The special figure 2 low probability electric support notice lottery table is a table used when the symbol variation display is performed on the second special figure display device 214 in the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. The special figure 2 low-probability notice lottery table is a table used when symbol variation display is performed on the second special figure display device 214 in the special figure low-probability normal figure low-probability state.

  In particular, the special figure 2 low-probability lottery table is used less frequently than other notice lottery tables, and the special figure 2 suspension that remains when the electric support state ends is mainly It is used when the symbol variation display is performed after the support state is completed, that is, based on the reserved digest of the special figure 2 in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. In the special figure low-probability normal figure low-probability state, the "normal figure A" which is a hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the universal figure display device 210, and the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 is opened. This is also used when the special figure 2 is put on hold at the second special figure starting port 232 and the symbol variation display is executed based on this. That is, the special figure 2 low-probability notice lottery table can be said to be a notice lottery table that can be used only under specific circumstances.

  For example, the CPU 404 selects a notice lottery table according to the control state and the special-figure display device that is variably displayed, and extracts a dedicated random number value that is stored in the RAM 408 and whose numerical value is updated in the range of 0 to 99. As described above, the symbol variation start command includes information representing the special symbol variation time, and the notice mode (from the timer number specified from the information representing the special symbol variation time and the extracted random number value) Any one of “preliminary notice P” to “preliminary notice S” is selected (or the notice is not selected). Here, the notice mode of “notice P” to “notice S” is a notice of display of a character notice or the like on the decorative symbol display device 208, a sound notice of outputting a notice sound from the speaker 120, or a lamp by blinking of various lamps 418. A notice or a notice by a movable body can be cited as an example, but various kinds of notices can be adopted, and one or a combination of two or more of these may be used. Moreover, the content of the notice mentioned above is an example, and is not limited to these. In the following description, the notice modes of “notice P” to “notice S” will be described as a notice regarding the special figure during the change display (the change notice), but can be applied to a pre-read notice. The contents of the effect on the decorative symbol display device 208 (display means) corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the timer number shown in each notice lottery table in FIG. 48 and FIG. 49 and the game state are shown in FIG. Since it is the same as that described above, a detailed description thereof is omitted here. Here, the fluctuation time of the timer number 7 is set to 5 seconds longer than the fluctuation time of the timer number 6, and the fluctuation time of the timer number 9 is set to 5 seconds longer than the fluctuation time of the timer number 8. This is the time provided for executing the above-described re-variation display after performing the effect corresponding to timer number 6 (or timer number 8) and displaying the temporary stop symbol.

  For example, when symbol variation display is performed on the first special figure display device 212 in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the special figure 1 low probability notice lottery table shown in FIG. 48A is selected. Is done. Then, the notice mode is selected from the timer number and the extracted random number value. Specifically, when a super-short jackpot corresponding to timer number 1 is executed by the symbol variation start command, “notice R” is executed at a rate of 1%, and a normal notice is executed at a rate of 99%. It is decided not to. In addition, when the shortening error corresponding to the timer number 3 is executed, it is determined that the normal notice is not executed at a rate of 100%. Further, when the normal deviation corresponding to the timer number 4 is executed, it is determined that “notice P” is executed at a rate of 40% and that the normal notice is not executed at a rate of 60%. When the normal reach deviation corresponding to the timer number 5 is executed, the “notice P” is executed at a rate of 20%, the “notice Q” is executed at a rate of 3%, and is normally set at a rate of 77%. It is decided not to carry out the notice. When the SP reach A deviation corresponding to the timer number 6 is executed, “notice P” is executed at a rate of 10%, “notice Q” is executed at a rate of 2%, and a rate of 88% In general, it is decided not to execute the advance notice. When SP reach A jackpot corresponding to timer number 7 is executed, “notice P” is executed at a rate of 50%, “notice Q” is executed at a rate of 49%, and “notice R” is executed. Is executed at a rate of 1%. Further, when the SP reach B corresponding to the timer number 8 is executed, “notice P” is executed at a rate of 6%, “notice Q” is executed at a rate of 4%, and a rate of 90% In general, it is decided not to execute the advance notice. When SP reach B jackpot corresponding to timer number 9 is executed, “notice P” is executed at a rate of 70%, “notice Q” is executed at a rate of 29%, and “notice R” is executed. Is executed at a rate of 1%.

  In addition, in the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, when the symbol variation display on the second special figure display device 214 is performed, the special figure 2 high probability notice lottery table shown in FIG. 48B is selected. Is done. Then, the notice mode is selected from the timer number and the extracted random number value. Specifically, when a super-shortening jackpot corresponding to timer number 1 is executed by the symbol variation start command, “notice S” is executed at a rate of 1%, and a normal notice is executed at a rate of 99%. It is decided not to. Further, when the super shortening corresponding to the timer number 2 is executed, it is determined not to execute the normal notice at a rate of 100%. Further, when the battle gasase tilt 1 corresponding to the timer number 4 is executed, it is determined that the normal notice is not executed at a rate of 100%. Further, when the battle gasase tilt 2 corresponding to the timer number 5 is executed, it is determined that the normal notice is not executed at a rate of 100%. When the battle A defeat corresponding to the timer number 6 is executed, “notice P” is executed at a rate of 20%, “notice Q” is executed at a rate of 10%, and at a rate of 70%. It is decided not to execute the normal notice. When a battle A victory corresponding to timer number 7 is executed, “notice P” is executed at a rate of 40%, “notice Q” is executed at a rate of 30%, and “notice S” is set. It is determined that the notification is executed at a rate of 20%, and the normal notice is not executed at a rate of 10%.

  In addition, in the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state, when the symbol variation display is performed on the second special figure display device 214, the special figure 2 low probability electric support notice lottery table shown in FIG. 49 (a). Is selected. Then, the notice mode is selected from the timer number and the extracted random number value. Specifically, when a super shortened jackpot corresponding to timer number 1 is executed by the symbol variation start command, “notice P” is executed at a rate of 1%, and “notice Q” is a rate of 1%. It is determined that “notice S” is executed at a rate of 1%, and the normal notice is not executed at a rate of 97%. In addition, when the super shortening corresponding to the timer number 2 is executed, “notice P” is executed at a rate of 1%, “notice Q” is executed at a rate of 1%, and at a rate of 98%. It is decided not to execute the normal notice. Further, when the battle gasase tilt 1 corresponding to the timer number 4 is executed, it is determined that the normal notice is not executed at a rate of 100%. Further, when the battle gasase tilt 2 corresponding to the timer number 5 is executed, it is determined that the normal notice is not executed at a rate of 100%. When the battle A defeat corresponding to the timer number 6 is executed, “notice P” is executed at a rate of 20%, “notice Q” is executed at a rate of 10%, and at a rate of 70%. It is decided not to execute the normal notice. When a battle A victory corresponding to timer number 7 is executed, “notice P” is executed at a rate of 40%, “notice Q” is executed at a rate of 30%, and “notice S” is set. It is determined that the notification is executed at a rate of 20%, and the normal notice is not executed at a rate of 10%. Further, when the battle B defeat corresponding to the timer number 8 is executed, “notice P” is executed at a rate of 10%, “notice Q” is executed at a rate of 10%, and at a rate of 80%. It is decided not to execute the normal notice. When the battle B victory corresponding to the timer number 9 is executed, “notice P” is executed at a rate of 40%, “notice Q” is executed at a rate of 30%, and “notice S” is set. It is determined that the notification is executed at a rate of 20%, and the normal notice is not executed at a rate of 10%.

  In addition, in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, when the symbol variation display is performed on the second special figure display device 214, the special figure 2 low probability notice lottery table shown in FIG. 49B is selected. Is done. Then, the notice mode is selected from the timer number and the extracted random number value. Specifically, when a super-short jackpot corresponding to timer number 1 is executed by the symbol variation start command, “notice R” is executed at a rate of 1%, and a normal notice is executed at a rate of 99%. It is decided not to. In addition, when the shortening error corresponding to the timer number 3 is executed, it is determined that the normal notice is not executed at a rate of 100%. Further, when the normal deviation corresponding to the timer number 4 is executed, it is determined that “notice P” is executed at a rate of 40% and that the normal notice is not executed at a rate of 60%. Further, when the normal reach deviation corresponding to the timer number 5 is executed, it is determined that “notice P” is executed at a rate of 20% and that the normal notice is not executed at a rate of 80%. Further, when the SP reach A deviation corresponding to the timer number 6 is executed, it is determined that “notice P” is executed at a rate of 10% and that the normal notice is not executed at a rate of 90%. When SP reach A jackpot corresponding to timer number 7 is executed, “notice P” is executed at a rate of 50%, “notice Q” is executed at a rate of 49%, and “notice R” is executed. Is executed at a rate of 1%. When the SP reach B deviation corresponding to the timer number 8 is executed, it is determined that the “notice P” is executed at a rate of 6% and the normal notice is not executed at a rate of 94%. When SP reach B jackpot corresponding to timer number 9 is executed, “notice P” is executed at a rate of 70%, “notice Q” is executed at a rate of 29%, and “notice R” is executed. Is executed at a rate of 1%.

  In this way, in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, when the “notice R” is executed, the jackpot symbol is always stopped and displayed. That is, “Notice R” is a jackpot confirmation notice. Further, the “notice R” is a special notice mode that can be executed only in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. Furthermore, in a normal game, in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, since the symbol variation display on the second special figure display device 214 is hardly performed, the “notice R” is almost always the first special figure. It can be said that this is a special notice mode that can be executed only in the symbol variation display on the display device 212. It should be noted that the “notice R” may be implemented only when the symbol form of the special figure to be stopped becomes “special figure A” and “special figure B” with 15R special jackpots. “Notice R” can be said to correspond to the first effect suggesting that the second state starts after the big hit game. Alternatively, the “notice R” corresponds to a first effect that suggests that the third game condition (first condition) is likely to be satisfied when a game ball wins the second variable prize opening 235. You can also.

  Further, in the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state and the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state, when the symbol change display is performed on the second special figure display device 214, the “notice S” is executed. Always stops and displays the 15R special jackpot symbol. That is, “notice S” is a 15R special jackpot finalizing notice, and can be said to correspond to a first effect that suggests that the second state is started after the jackpot game. Alternatively, the “notice S” corresponds to a first effect that suggests that the third game condition (first condition) is likely to be established when the game ball wins the second variable prize opening 235. You can also. The “notice S” is a special notice mode that can be executed only in the normal high probability state (electric support state).

  In addition, the “notice Q” indicates that the symbol of the 15R special jackpot is always displayed only when the symbol variation display on the second symbol display device 214 is performed in the special symbol low probability low symbol probability state (first situation). The notice mode is displayed in a stopped state. That is, the “notice Q” is a 15R special jackpot finalizing notice in the first situation, and can be said to correspond to a first effect suggesting that the second state is started after the jackpot game. Alternatively, the “notice Q” corresponds to a first effect that suggests that the third game condition (first condition) is likely to be satisfied when the game ball wins the second variable prize opening 235. You can also.

  In this example, the “notice R” is a notice that may be executed in the first gaming state (for example, the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), and the second gaming state (for example, the special figure). This is an example of a first notice that is not executed in a high probability normal figure high probability state or a special figure low probability general figure high probability state.

  Further, the “notice S” is an example of a second notice that may be executed in the second gaming state and is not executed in the first gaming state.

  In this example, in the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state and the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state, the symbol variation display on the first special figure display device 212 is hardly performed. Under the conditions, the lottery of the normal notice using the notice lottery table is not performed, and any notice is not executed, but the notice is executed by performing the lottery of the normal notice using the notice lottery table. You may comprise.

  Further, in this example, the 15R special jackpot notice (so-called premium notice) is configured to be executable, but a 15R jackpot notice other than the 15R special jackpot may be configured to be executable. Further, in this example, the notification can be executed regardless of the type of jackpot, but only the 15R special jackpot notice may be performed, or only the 15R jackpot notice other than the 15R special jackpot may be performed. May be. In this example, the jackpot notice that is not a premium notice may be an example of the second effect.

  Next, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100A used in the fourth example will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko machine 100A used in this example is different in that the configuration of the ball storage tray-equipped door 108A is different from the first example of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first example of the pachinko machine 100, differences will be described in detail, and the other components will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. Needless to say, the pachinko machine 100A of this example is also applicable to the first to third examples described above.

  The door with ball storage tray 108A in this example is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100A so as to have a locking function and be openable and closable. This ball storage tray door 108A is opened by pressing an open lever that can be operated with the front frame door 106 open. Further, a door sensor with a ball storage tray that detects that the door 108A with the ball storage tray is opened is also provided. The door 108A with a ball storage tray is provided with an upper plate 126 in which a plurality of game balls can be stored and a passage for guiding the game ball to the launching device 110 (see FIG. 1 and the like) is provided. A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges the game balls stored in the tray 126 to the game ball collection container, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by the operation of the player is a game area 124 of the game board (see FIG. 3). A ball launching handle 134 for launching to the side, a chance button 136 for changing the production mode of various production devices 206 (see FIG. 2) by the player's operation, and various operation buttons 137 such as a ball rental operation button and a return operation button A content-related operation button 139 for browsing the game history and various contents in the pachinko machine 100A by the player's operation on the decorative symbol display device 208, It includes a touch panel type display device 209, a. Although the door 108A with a ball | bowl storage tray in this example becomes a structure which is not provided with a lower plate, it cannot be overemphasized that a structure provided with the lower plate may be sufficient.

  The content-related operation button 139 includes, for example, up / down / left / right keys, an OK key, and a cancel key, and is electrically connected to the basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 via a sensor circuit or the like. The content-related operation button 139 can instruct the movement of the cursor displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 or the execution of the item indicated by the cursor, for example, by the player's operation.

  The touch panel display device 209 includes an image display device 209a such as a liquid crystal display device, and a touch panel 209b provided so as to cover the entire surface of the display panel of the image display device 209a. For example, it is electrically connected to the basic circuit of the first sub control unit 400. The touch panel type display device 209 detects the position touched by the player by the touch panel 209b, outputs the detection signal to the first sub control unit 400, and displays an image corresponding to an image display instruction from the first sub control unit 400. Can be displayed on the image display device 209a. The image display device 209a can be applied to any display device that can display an image, such as an organic EL, a plasma display, and a projector, in addition to a liquid crystal display device. The touch panel 209b can appropriately employ a known detection method such as a resistance film method or a capacitance method. The touch panel type display device 209 has, for example, a known torque limiter mechanism and is pivotally supported in the horizontal direction with respect to the ball storage tray door 108A, and can be tilted at an arbitrary angle by the player's operation. It may be configured. Further, the various operation buttons 137 and the content related operation buttons 139 may function as alternative operation means for the touch panel display device 209.

  Next, a specific effect example in the pachinko machine of this example will be described.

  FIG. 51 is a diagram showing an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine of this example. The following diagram shows how the production progresses in numerical order in parentheses.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 51 (1), “decoration 4”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 6”, which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the loss, is fixedly displayed. Further, the first special figure 1 hold display h11 and the second special figure 1 hold display h12, which indicate the hold of the special figure 1, are both displayed in the default display mode.

  51 also shows the first special figure display device 212, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure display device 214, and the second special figure hold lamp 220. In FIG. 51 (1), since the number of hold of the variable display in FIG. 1 is two, two lamps in the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit.

  In addition, on the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214, the special symbol “special drawing E” is stopped and displayed. In the upper right corner portion of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 variably displayed corresponding to the display state of the first special symbol display device 212 and the display state of the second special symbol display device 214. The special figure 2 and the 4th symbol t2 variably displayed are displayed. In FIG. 51 (1), the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 correspond to the “special symbol E” that is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 212, for example, the “x” that is a lost symbol is stopped. It is displayed in the displayed state. The special symbol 2 and the fourth symbol t2 are in a state where, for example, the “x” which is a lost symbol is stopped and displayed in correspondence with the “special symbol E” which is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 214. It is displayed. In FIG. 51 and subsequent figures, the special symbol 1 and the 4th symbol t1 and the special symbol 2 and the 4th symbol t2 are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in a manner in which the symbols that are stopped and displayed can be recognized. However, in practice, in order to improve the interest of the game, it is preferable that the symbols that are stopped and displayed are displayed in a manner that is difficult for the player to recognize.

  The touch-sensitive display device 209 has a plurality of touch detection areas set so as to be arranged in a 4 × 6 matrix. In this example, the touch detection area to which the touched position belongs can be determined from the detection result of the touch position by the player. In FIG. 51 (1), for convenience of explanation, numbers 1 to 24 are assigned to the touch detection areas. Note that the touch detection area may not be set.

  In FIG. 51 (2), the special figure 1 hold (first hold) is digested and only the first special figure 1 hold display h11 is displayed. In addition, the first special symbol display device 212 shown in FIG. 51 (2) has started the symbol variation display, and the decoration symbol display device 208 has also started the variation display of the decoration symbol. At this time, the decorative symbols are displayed so that the speed of the variable display gradually increases. During the symbol variation display, the first special figure display device 212 repeats blinking in which all of the seven segments are turned on, turned off for a moment, and all of the seven segments are turned on again. In response to the symbol fluctuation display of the first special symbol display device 212, for example, the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 are also displayed in a manner that the symbol “-” blinks.

  FIG. 51 (3) shows a state during the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 started in FIG. 51 (2). At this time, the decorative symbols displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 are variably displayed at high speed, making it difficult for the player to recognize the decorative symbols.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 51 (4), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbol variation display continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 51 (5), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 8” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the decorative symbol variation display continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 51 (6), the third stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. It should be noted that the symbol variation display of special figure 1 still continues, and the first special figure display device 212 continues the above-described blinking operation of seven segments.

  FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG.

  When the first stop to the third stop of the decorative symbols are performed as described above, as shown in FIG. 52 (7), the symbols are stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively. The displayed decorative design begins to fluctuate.

  Thereafter, at the timing when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 52 (8), the special symbol E, which is a losing symbol, is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 212, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol is displayed. At t 1, “L”, which is a lost symbol, is stopped and displayed in correspondence with “Special Figure E” stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212. Correspondingly, a combination of “decoration 3”-“decoration 2”-“decoration 8” decoration symbols is stopped (determined display) on the ornamental symbol display device 208, and a variable game of one special symbol is displayed. finish. As described above, the effect display in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 51 (1) to 52 (8) shows an example of an effect display that is normally out of order with a variation time of 10 seconds.

  In the following specific effects, explanation will be made on the assumption that the decorative symbol display device 208 performs variable display of decorative symbols in the order shown in FIGS. 51 (1) to 52 (7). Some illustrations may be omitted for convenience.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 52 (9), the hold of the special figure 1 is digested and the hold display disappears, the first special figure display device 212 starts the symbol variation display, and the decorative symbol display device 208 also displays the decorative symbol and the special figure. 1 Fluctuation display of the 4th symbol t1 is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 52 (10), after the variable symbol display on the decorative symbol display device 208 has been displayed at a high speed, the touch panel type display device 209 has a notice that the notice will be started. As a start effect, together with a child panda character with a fan, an image of an elliptical touch button and a character (character information) “Take a notice by touch” to promote touch operation on the touch button are displayed. .

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 52 (11), the decoration symbol display device 208 performs the first stop, and “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. On the other hand, in the touch panel display device 209, a touch effective area TA1 for enabling a touch operation on the touch button is set. Specifically, the 9th to 11th and 15th to 17th touch detection areas shown in FIG. 51A are set as the touch effective area TA1. In FIG. 52 (11), the touch effective area TA1 is surrounded by a broken line. In the example shown in FIG. 52 (11), the shape of the touch effective area TA1 is different from the area where the touch button image is displayed, but the area where the touch button image is displayed. The same shape may be used.

  It should be noted that the stop display of the decorative symbol by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the setting of the touch effective area TA1 in the touch panel display device 209 may be performed simultaneously or substantially simultaneously, or the timing may be changed. Good. In this case, the touch effective area TA1 may be set after the decoration symbol stop display is performed, or the decoration symbol stop display may be performed after the touch effective area TA1 is set. The above also applies to the following specific examples.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 52 (12), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second stop is performed, “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and a reach state is formed. On the other hand, FIG. 52 (12) shows a state in which the player is performing a touch operation on the touch effective area TA1 in the touch panel display device 209. Needless to say, the timing of the touch operation by the player may be the same timing as the timing of the second stop of the decorative symbol or the timing before and after.

  FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 53 (13), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a character (character information) “reach” for notifying that a reach state has been formed. On the other hand, in the touch panel type display device 209, as a result of the touch operation performed on the touch effective area TA1 by the player, the character of the number length is displayed together with the character information suggesting that a chance may come. Is called. The display of the character with the longest length corresponds to an example of the “notice Q” described above.

  It should be noted that the decorative symbol stop display by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the character display on the touch panel display device 209 may be performed simultaneously or substantially simultaneously, or the timing may be changed. In this case, the character may be displayed after the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, or the decorative symbol may be stopped after the character is displayed. The above also applies to the following specific examples.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 53 (14), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a display that develops into super reach. This super reach is, for example, SP reach B. In the super reach state, the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed in a small size in the upper left corner, and the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other. A screen is displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 53 (15), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a cut-in screen on which the main character and the swordsman of the main character confront each other, and the main character tells the start of the game. .

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 53 (16), on the decorative symbol display device 208, a screen is displayed in which the protagonist defeats the enemy swordsman and wins, and in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Decoration 3” scheduled to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the symbol display area 208b, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” is scheduled to be temporarily stopped. The On the other hand, on the touch panel type display device 209, a character (character information) “Yataze” congratulating that three identical decorative symbols will be arranged is displayed. Note that the display timing of the characters “Yataze” on the touch-panel display device 209 may be the same as the winning screen on the decorative symbol display device 208 or may be displayed before and after. Good. In this example, when a temporary stop display is made with a combination of the decoration symbols “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3”, it is promised that a special hit of 15R will be promised as described above. It can be said that the display as shown in 53 (16) corresponds to the first effect suggesting that the second state is started after the big hit game. Or it can correspond to the 1st production which suggests that a game ball wins to the 2nd variable prize opening 235, and the 3rd game condition (1st condition) is easy to be established. The same applies to the case where the temporary stop display is made with a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7”.

  When the first stop to the third stop of the decorative symbols are performed as described above, as shown in FIG. 53 (17), the decorative symbol display device 208 has a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, and The decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c start to fluctuate. On the other hand, the touch panel type display device 209 displays a character (character information) “re-change” which notifies that re-change display is started. It should be noted that the symbol variation display of special figure 1 still continues, and the first special figure display device 212 continues the above-described blinking operation of seven segments. In addition, the display timing of the character “re-change” on the touch panel type display device 209 may be the same as the start timing of the fluctuation variation of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 208, or may be before and after. Good. In this example, it is promised that 15R will be a special big hit by temporarily stopping display with a combination of “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” decoration symbols. As shown, the temporary stop display with the combination of “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” is a first indication that the second state starts after the big hit game. It can be said that it corresponds to production. Or it can correspond to the 1st production which suggests that a game ball wins to the 2nd variable prize opening 235, and the 3rd game condition (1st condition) is easy to be established. The same applies to the case where a temporary stop display is made with a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7”.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 53 (18), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols that have been fluctuated in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c are rapidly changed all at once. The re-variable display to be displayed is started.

  FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG.

  FIG. 54 (19) shows a state where re-variation display is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208. At this time, it is determined in advance that the combination of decorative patterns of “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” or “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” is finally stopped and displayed. If so, the combination of decorative patterns of “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” and “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” is stopped and displayed from the speaker 120. May be issued in advance, such as by outputting a confirmation sound for promoting in advance, or turning off a decorative lamp such as the frame lamp 122 for a certain period of time. As for these promotion confirmation notifications, as a result of the re-variable display, the combination of the decorative patterns of “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” and “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” is stopped When it is scheduled to be performed, it is determined whether or not to execute by lottery, but it may be performed without fail. Further, in addition to notification by sound output and blinking of the lamp, notification by various means such as a notice display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the touch panel type display device 209 is possible. The notification may be executed by a combination of two or more. In this way, the promotion confirmation notification finally displays the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” or “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” (stop display ( Since it is promised that a 15R special jackpot will be announced in advance, it will correspond to the first effect that suggests that the second state will start after the jackpot game. be able to. Or it can correspond to the 1st production which suggests that a game ball wins to the 2nd variable prize opening 235, and the 3rd game condition (1st condition) is easy to be established.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 54 (20), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol “decoration 3” in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. Start fluctuation. On the other hand, in the touch panel type display device 209, as a result of the re-variable display, the decoration pattern of “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” or “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” is displayed. The character “Lucky” (character information) for notifying that the combination of the two is derived and displayed is displayed. In this example, the promotion effect is implemented in this way. It should be noted that the symbol variation display of special figure 1 still continues, and the first special figure display device 212 continues the above-described blinking operation of seven segments. In addition, the display timing of the character “Lucky” on the touch panel type display device 209 may be the same as the start timing of the fluctuation variation of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 208, or may be before or after. In this example, as a result of the re-variable display being performed, a promotion effect in which a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” is derived and displayed is performed, resulting in a 15R special jackpot. Therefore, it can be said that such promotion effect corresponds to the first effect suggesting that the second state is started after the big hit game. Or it can correspond to the 1st production which suggests that a game ball wins to the 2nd variable prize opening 235, and the 3rd game condition (1st condition) is easy to be established. The same applies to the promotion effect in which the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” is derived and displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 54 (21), the special figure display device 212 stops and displays “Special figure A” as a 15R big hit symbol at the timing when the fluctuation time elapses. In the symbol t1, “A”, which is a 15R jackpot symbol, is stopped and displayed in correspondence with the “special symbol A” that is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 212. Correspondingly, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” (determined display), and one special game of variable game is displayed. finish. As described above, the effect display in the decorative symbol display device 208 from FIGS. 52 (9) to 54 (21) shows an example of the effect display of SP reach B jackpot having a variation time of 65 seconds. In this example, when the stop display (decision display) is performed with a combination of the decoration symbols “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3”, it is promised that 15R will be a special big hit. It can be said that the display is equivalent to the first effect suggesting that the second state is started after the big hit game. Or it can correspond to the 1st production which suggests that a game ball wins to the 2nd variable prize opening 235, and the 3rd game condition (1st condition) is easy to be established. The same applies to the case where the display is stopped (determined display) with a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7” − “decoration 7” − “decoration 7”.

  Next, another example of the re-variable display described above will be described. Here, FIGS. 54 (17a) to 54 (20a) show other effects examples corresponding to the effects shown in FIGS. 53 (17) to 54 (20).

  54 (17a), the suspension of the special symbol (first suspension) is digested, and the variation display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 208 is started together with the start of the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212. A state in which the swing variation is performed in a state where three identical decorative symbols are arranged in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c via the reach effect such as SP reach B described above. Is shown. In this production example, “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and after reaching the reach effect, “decoration 4” is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. As shown in FIG. 54 (17a), it is displayed that the vehicle has been temporarily stopped. In the state shown in FIG. 54 (17a), as described above with reference to FIG. 47, it is promised that it will be a big hit, but whether or not it will be a 15R special big hit is still in the promised state. It is not. On the other hand, the touch panel type display device 209 displays a character (character information) “re-variation” for notifying that re-variation display is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 54 (18a), the re-variable display as shown in FIG. 53 (18) and described above is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 54 (20a), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol “decoration 3” in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. Start fluctuation. On the other hand, in the touch panel type display device 209, as a result of the re-variable display, the decoration pattern of “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” or “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” is displayed. The character “Lucky” (character information) for notifying that the combination of the two is derived and displayed is displayed. In this example, the promotion effect can also be implemented in this way. It should be noted that the symbol variation display of special figure 1 still continues, and the first special figure display device 212 continues the above-described blinking operation of seven segments. In this example, as a result of the re-variable display being performed, a promotion effect in which a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” is derived and displayed is performed, resulting in a 15R special jackpot. Therefore, it can be said that such promotion effect corresponds to the first effect suggesting that the second state is started after the big hit game. Or it can correspond to the 1st production which suggests that a game ball wins to the 2nd variable prize opening 235, and the 3rd game condition (1st condition) is easy to be established. The same applies to the promotion effect in which the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” is derived and displayed. After the presentation as shown in FIG. 54 (20a) is performed, the 15R special big hit symbol is displayed on the first special figure display device 212 as shown in FIG. "Special Figure A" is stopped and displayed, and Special Figure 1 4th symbol t1 is a 15R special big hit symbol corresponding to "Special Figure A" stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212. “A” is stopped and displayed. Correspondingly, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” (determined display), and one special game of variable game is displayed. finish.

  In the above-described effect example, it goes without saying that the above-described promotion confirmation notification may be performed during the re-variable display.

  Next, specific examples of effects in the jackpot game of 15R special jackpot will be described. In the following description, an example of an effect in a big hit game that is started when “Special Figure A” is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212 will be described, but “Special Figure B” is displayed on the first special figure display device 212. The same can be applied to the effect in the jackpot game that is started after being stopped.

  FIG. 55 is a diagram illustrating a specific effect example in the big hit game of the 15R special big hit.

  As described above, when "Special Figure A" is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212 and the big hit game is started, as shown in FIG. It is displayed that the game is in the first round, and the player operates the ball launch handle 134 to the maximum extent (rotates) to roll the game ball to the right side of the game area 124 (hereinafter “right-handed”). Is displayed). In the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, a combination of the decorative symbols that have been confirmed is displayed. On the other hand, in the touch panel type display device 209, when a touch effect is generated in the big hit game together with the child panda character having a fan, the second variable winning opening 235 is likely to win a prize in the 15th round (third game condition ( Alternatively, the character information indicating that the chance that the first condition) is likely to be satisfied is reached is displayed.

  When the round progresses as described above and becomes the 12th round, as shown in FIG. 55 (2), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays that it is the 12th round of the big hit game.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 55 (3), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the opening of the Janken game effect. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the bancho character and the panda character are displayed side by side, and if the bancho is a panda and the bancho wins the janken, the second variable prize is received in the 15th round. A display indicating that a great chance to enter the state in which the mouth 235 easily wins (a state in which the third game condition (or the first condition) is likely to be established) has arrived is displayed. At this time, the display for instructing right-handing is continued, but is displayed small on the upper right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. On the other hand, on the touch panel type display device 209, a character (character information) “select by touch” which is an instruction to perform a touch operation on the touch panel 209b to select is displayed. The effect shown in FIG. 55 (3) may be executed when a predetermined time has passed since the 12th round, or may be executed simultaneously with the 12th round. Also good.

  Subsequently, at the 13th round, as shown in FIG. 55 (4), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays that it is the 13th round of the jackpot game. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a character (character information) “Choose with a touch panel”, which is an instruction to perform a touch operation on the touch panel 209b of the touch panel type display device 209, is displayed. On the other hand, the touch panel type display device 209 displays the “goo” janken symbol, the “choki” janken symbol, and the “par” janken symbol, and enables touch operation for each janken symbol. Areas TA2 to TA4 are set. In FIG. 55 (4) and FIG. 55 (5), the touch effective areas TA2 to TA4 are respectively surrounded by broken lines. Specifically, the 13th, 14th, 19th, and 20th touch detection areas shown in FIG. 51 (1) corresponding to the “good” Janken symbol are set as the touch effective area TA2, and “ The touch detection areas of No. 3, No. 4, No. 9, and No. 10 corresponding to the Janken symbol are set as the touch effective area TA3, and No. 17, 18, No. 23, and No. 24 corresponding to the “Par” Janken symbol. No. touch detection area is set as the touch effective area TA4.

  In addition, the display timing of the character information “Choose on the touch panel”, the display timing of each Janken symbol, and the setting timing of the touch effective areas TA2 to TA4 may be the same as the 13th round, It may be the timing after the 13th round. These may be performed all at the same time, may be performed at different timings, or only two of them may be performed at the same time. Further, the order of executing these can be set as appropriate. The same applies to the following description.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 55 (5), the player performs a touch operation on the touch effective area TA4 in the touch panel display device 209. That is, the player performs a touch operation on the touch effective area TA4 in order to select the “par” Janken symbol.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 55 (6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the characters (characters that will win with a par) indicating that the player will compete with the Janken symbol selected by the player (the “Parken” Janken symbol). Information) is displayed. On the other hand, the touch panel type display device 209 displays a large “Jan” symbol of “Par”, which is the Janken symbol selected by the player.

  FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, at the 14th round, as shown in FIG. 56 (7), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays that it is the 14th round of the jackpot game and that the Janken game is started. The characters (character information) are displayed. Note that the longest character and the panda character that were displayed side by side are displayed separately from each other. On the other hand, the touch panel type display device 209 displays a character (character information) indicating a sense of expectation for winning the Janken game together with a child panda character having a fan.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 56 (8), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a character (character information) “HOI” indicating that the Janken game has been executed and is close to the character of the number-long character. The “Par” Janken symbol selected by the player is displayed at the position, and the “Go” Janken symbol defeated by “Par” is displayed at a position close to the panda character. On the other hand, on the touch panel type display device 209, a character (character information) of “win” indicating that the Janken game has been won is displayed. In this example, when an effect that wins Janken is performed, the second variable winning opening 235 is likely to win in the 15th round (a state in which the third game condition (or the first condition) is likely to be established). Therefore, it can be said that such an effect corresponds to the first effect that suggests that the second state starts after the big hit game. Or it can correspond to the 1st production which suggests that a game ball wins to the 2nd variable prize opening 235, and the 3rd game condition (1st condition) is easy to be established.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 56 (9), the decorative symbol display device 208 notifies that the second variable prize opening 235 (second attacker) is awarded in the next round, that is, the fifteenth round. Made. This notification is a notification for obtaining a probability change, that is, for establishing the third game condition (or the first condition). On the other hand, on the touch panel type display device 209, a character (character information) “do not stop firing” is displayed to instruct not to stop the firing of the game ball. As a result, even if the second variable winning opening 235 is in a state where it is easy to win, it is possible to reduce the possibility of incurring the disadvantage of not shifting to the probable state by losing the opportunity to win.

  Thereafter, at the 15th round, as shown in FIG. 56 (10), the second variable winning opening 235 (second attacker) is opened, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is the 15th round of the jackpot game. It is displayed. On the other hand, the touch panel type display device 209 displays a character (character information) of “Make an attacker win a prize” for promoting the winning of the second attacker.

  If there is a prize for the second attacker at the timing shown in FIG. 56 (11), the third game condition (or the first condition) is established, as shown in FIG. 56 (12). The decorative symbol display device 208 displays “V”, which is a notification that the probability variation has been confirmed, together with the long-length character. On the other hand, the touch panel type display device 209 displays a character (character information) of “congratulations” congratulating that the probability change has been confirmed.

  FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG.

  Then, when the fifteenth round is completed, as shown in FIG. 57 (13), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs an end effect of the big hit game. In the above-mentioned big hit game, the third game condition (or the first condition) is established by winning the second attacker in the 15th round, so that the symbol variation display is performed 100 times after the big hit game. In the meantime, it shifts to a probabilistic state (special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state). For this reason, in the end effect of the big hit game, a character (character information) of “probability rushing” to shift to the probability change state is displayed. In this case, the table set used until the next big hit may be determined as described above in the first example, for example.

  When the big hit game is finished as described above, as shown in FIG. 57 (14), the decoration symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with a combination of the decoration symbols “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3”. In this state, the state is shifted to a probable change state (a special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state). At this time, the touch panel type display device 209 displays two child panda characters having a fan and displays the remaining number of times “100 times” together with the characters (character information) of “probability change start” for notifying the start of the probability change. Is made. At this time, since neither the holding of special figure 1 nor the holding of special figure 2 exists, it is in a standby state for waiting for symbol variation display. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “right-handed” characters (character information) prompting right-handing.

  Next, another example of the effect in the jackpot game of 15R special jackpot will be described. In the example of production described below, a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” or “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” is derived and displayed, and 15R special jackpot This is an example of a performance in a jackpot game that may be executed when it is promised.

  FIG. 58 is a diagram illustrating another effect example in the jackpot game of 15R special jackpot.

  58 (1) shows that “Special Figure A” is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212, and “Decorative 3”-“Decoration 3”-“Decoration 3” decorative symbols are displayed on the decorative design display apparatus 208. FIG. The contents of the effect when the jackpot game is started after being stopped and displayed in combination. Here, the difference from the example of production shown in FIG. 55 (1) is that the touch panel type display device 209 promotes the player to win the second attacker in the 15th round, “let the attacker win 15R”. Characters (character information) are displayed. Such an effect display is continued until the 13th round, and the effect of the Janken game described above with reference to FIGS. 55 (3) to 56 (9) is omitted.

  After that, when the game progresses to the 14th round, as shown in FIG. 58 (2), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays that it is the 14th round of the big hit game, and the next character is displayed along with the next character. In the round, that is, the fifteenth round, a character (character information) of “Are you ready” is displayed to urge the second variable winning opening 235 (second attacker) to win a prize. Such a display is a form of notification for obtaining a probability change, that is, for establishing the third game condition (or the first condition). The character information displayed here may be as shown in FIG. 56 (9).

  Thereafter, at the fifteenth round, as shown in FIG. 58 (3), the second variable prize opening 235 (second attacker) is opened, and the decorative symbol display device 208, together with the watchmaster character, plays a big hit game. The 15th round is displayed. On the other hand, the touch panel type display device 209 displays a character (character information) of “Make an attacker win a prize” for promoting the winning of the second attacker. In this production example, the display content displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in FIG. 56 (10) is slightly different, for example, in that a character with a long length is displayed, but in FIG. 56 (10). It may be a display mode as shown.

  59 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG.

  If there is a prize for the second attacker at the timing shown in FIG. 58 (4), the decorative symbol display device 208 notifies that the probability variation has been confirmed, as shown in FIG. 59 (5). “V” is displayed. On the other hand, the touch panel type display device 209 displays a character (character information) of “congratulations” congratulating that the probability change has been confirmed. This effect is the same as that described above with reference to FIG.

  When the fifteenth round is completed, after the big hit game end effect is performed in the mode shown in FIG. 59 (6), the probability change state (the special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state) is performed in the mode shown in FIG. 59 (7). ). This effect is the same as described above with reference to FIGS. 57 (13) and 57 (14).

  Next, another example of the re-variable display described above will be described. FIG. 60 is a diagram illustrating another effect example of re-variation display. Here, FIGS. 60 (17b) to 60 (21b) show other examples of effects corresponding to the effects shown in FIGS. 53 (17) to 54 (21).

  In FIG. 60 (17b), the suspension of the special symbol (first suspension) is digested and the variation display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 208 is started together with the start of the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212. A state in which the swing variation is performed in a state where three identical decorative symbols are arranged in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c via the reach effect such as SP reach B described above. Is shown. In this production example, “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and after reaching the reach effect, “decoration 4” is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. As shown in FIG. 60 (17b), the temporary stop display state is displayed as being stopped. In the state shown in FIG. 60 (17b), as described above with reference to FIG. 47, it is promised that it will be a big hit, but whether or not it will be a 15R special big hit is still a promised state. It is not. On the other hand, the touch panel type display device 209 displays a character (character information) indicating “re-change” informing that re-change display is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 60 (18b), the re-variable display as shown in FIG. 53 (18) and described above is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 60 (20b), the decorative symbol display device 208 causes the decorative symbol “decoration 4” to be displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c. Start fluctuation. On the other hand, in the touch panel type display device 209, as a result of the re-variable display, the decoration pattern of “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” or “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” is displayed. A character (character information) “sorry” for notifying that the combination of the symbols is not derived and displayed is displayed. It should be noted that the symbol variation display of special figure 1 still continues, and the first special figure display device 212 continues the above-described blinking operation of seven segments. As described above, in this effect example, the re-variable display is performed, but the decoration pattern of “decoration 3” − “decoration 3” − “decoration 3” or “decoration 7” − “decoration 7” − “decoration 7”. The combination is not derived and displayed, and the promotion failure effect that the promotion fails is performed, and it is not guaranteed that the 15R special big hit will become a promiscuous state after the big hit game. It is suggested that the state shifts to a support state (a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state). Such a promotion failure effect can be said to correspond to a second effect suggesting that the first state is started after the big hit game. In other words, such a promotion failure effect corresponds to a second effect that suggests that the third game condition (first condition) is difficult to be satisfied.

  Then, after the effect as shown in FIG. 60 (20b) is performed, the special figure 1 is stopped in the first special figure display device 212 as shown in FIG. 60 (21b) at the timing when the variation time elapses. Display is performed. In this effect example, “Special Figure A”, which is a 15R special big hit, is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212. Further, the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 in the decorative symbol display device 208 also have a special 15R special jackpot symbol “A” corresponding to the “special symbol A” stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 212. Stopped display. On the other hand, on the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4” is stopped (determined). In this way, one special variation game is completed. At this time, the touch panel type display device 209 displays a character (character information) of “expected during jackpot” which suggests that the Janken game is executed in the jackpot game.

  In this way, the combination of three decorative symbols is a combination of decorative symbols, which are “decoration 3” — “decoration 3” — “decoration 3” and “decoration 7” — “decoration 7” — “decoration 7”. An effect in which a combination of decorative symbols other than the decorative symbol combination is stopped and displayed is not guaranteed to be a 15R special big hit and will be in a promising state after the big hit game, that is, the electric support state ( It is suggested to shift to a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state). Therefore, such an effect corresponds to a second effect that suggests that the first state is started after the big hit game (or that the third game condition (first condition) is difficult to be established). It can be said.

  Next, another example of the effect in the jackpot game of 15R special jackpot will be described. In the example of the effect described below, a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4” is derived and displayed, but “special diagram A” is stopped and displayed on the first special diagram display device 212. This is an effect example showing a state in which a jackpot game of 15R special jackpot is executed.

  FIG. 61 is a diagram showing another example of the effect in the jackpot game of 15R special jackpot, and FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific example of the effect shown in FIG.

  The effects in the jackpot game shown in FIG. 61 (1) to FIG. 62 (10) are different except that the combination of the decorative symbols displayed in the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 is different. Since it is the same as that described above with reference to FIGS. 55 (1) to 56 (10), description thereof is omitted here. This effect example is a first effect (for example, “decoration 3” − “decoration 3” − “decoration 3”) suggesting that the second state (probability variation state) is started after the big hit game in the symbol variation display. Alternatively, the jackpot game is started without performing the “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” decoration symbol combination display, but in the jackpot game, the first effect (for example, It can be said that it is an example of an effect in which an effect of winning the Janken game is performed. In other words, this effect example suggests that in the symbol variation display, the game ball is awarded to the second variable prize opening 235 and the third game condition (first condition) is likely to be established. The jackpot game is started without performing one effect, but it can be said that the first effect is performed in the jackpot game.

  FIG. 62 (11) shows the state of the big hit game in the 15th round. FIG. 62 (11) shows a state immediately before the opened second attacker (second variable prize opening 235) is closed after the opening time has elapsed. Then, when the second variable winning opening 235 is closed in a state where there is no winning in the second variable winning opening 235, an effect as shown in FIG. 62 (12) is performed. That is, in this example, the player wins the second variable prize slot 235 for some reason, such as when the player does not know or forgot that he must aim at the second variable prize slot 235 in the 15th round. This is an example in which the third game condition (or the first condition) is not satisfied. As shown in FIG. 62 (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “banden” as well as a character length display indicating that the third game condition (or the first condition) is not satisfied. The character (character information) is also displayed. On the other hand, the touch panel type display device 209 also displays a character (character information) “sorry” that rejoices that the third game condition (or the first condition) is not satisfied. In this example, an effect as shown in FIG. 62 (12) may not be performed.

  FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG.

  Then, when the fifteenth round is completed, as shown in FIG. 63 (13), in the decorative symbol display device 208, an end effect of the big hit game is performed. In the jackpot game described above, the third game condition (or the first condition) is not established because the winning of the second attacker in the 15th round is not established, so that 50 after the jackpot game. While the symbol variation display is performed for the first time, the electronic support state (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state) is entered. For this reason, in the end effect of the big hit game, a “short time entry” character (character information) indicating the transition to the electric support state is displayed. In this case, the table set used until the next big hit may be determined as described above in the first example, for example. In addition, although the performance as shown in FIG. 63 (13) was a 15R special big hit, there was no winning in the second variable winning opening 235 (second attacker), so the third game condition (or , The first condition) may not be satisfied, and a dedicated effect that is executed only when the big hit game ends in that state and shifts to the electric support state (irregular time shortening) may be used.

  When the big hit game is finished as described above, as shown in FIG. 63 (14), the decoration symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with a combination of decoration symbols of “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”. In this state, it is shifted to the electric support state (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state). At this time, only one child panda character with a fan is displayed on the touch panel display device 209, and the remaining number of times “50 times” is displayed together with the characters (character information) of “short time start” to notify the start of time reduction. Display is made. At this time, since neither the holding of special figure 1 nor the holding of special figure 2 exists, it is in a standby state for waiting for symbol variation display. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “right-handed” characters (character information) prompting right-handing.

  Next, another example of the re-variable display described above will be described. FIG. 64 is a diagram showing another example of re-variation display. The example of the re-variable display shown in FIGS. 64 (17c) to 64 (21c) is the same as the example shown in FIGS. 60 (17b) to 60 (21c) and described above, but FIG. 64 (21c). As shown in FIG. 5, “Special figure C” which is 15R big hit which is not 15R special big hit is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212, and the special figure 1 fourth figure t1 in the decorative design display device 208 is 15R big hit symbol. The difference is that “C” is stopped and displayed.

  As described above, in this effect example, the re-variable display is performed, but the decoration pattern of “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” or “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” is used. The combination is not derived and displayed, and the promotion failure effect that the promotion fails is performed, and it is not guaranteed that the 15R special big hit will become a promiscuous state after the big hit game. It is suggested that the state shifts to a support state (a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state). Such a promotion failure effect can be said to correspond to a second effect suggesting that the first state is started after the big hit game. In other words, such a promotion failure effect corresponds to a second effect that suggests that the third game condition (first condition) is difficult to be satisfied.

  Also, a combination of three decorative symbols, including “decoration 3” — “decoration 3” — “decoration 3” and “decoration 7” — “decoration 7” — “decoration 7” The effect in which the combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed is not guaranteed to be a 15R special big hit and will be in a promising state after the big hit game, that is, the electric support state (special figure low probability normal figure high after the big hit game) (Probability state) is suggested. Therefore, such an effect corresponds to a second effect that suggests that the first state is started after the big hit game (or that the third game condition (first condition) is difficult to be established). It can be said.

  Next, specific examples of effects in the 15R jackpot game will be described.

  FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a specific effect example in the big hit game of 15R jackpot, and FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. In the following description, an example of an effect in a jackpot game that is started when “Special Figure C” is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212 will be described, but “Special Figure D” is displayed on the first special figure display device 212. The same can be applied to the effect in the jackpot game that is started after being stopped.

  65 (1) to 66 (7), in the jackpot game, the first special chart display device 212 stops and displays “Special Figure C”, which is a 15R jackpot symbol, on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 displayed in the corner, the 15R jackpot symbol “C” is stopped and displayed corresponding to the “special symbol C” stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 212. Except for this point, it is the same as that described above with reference to FIGS. 61 (1) to 61 (7), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In this effect example, after the effect that the Janken game shown in FIG. 66 (7) is started, the Janken game is executed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 66 (8). “Hoi” character (character information) is displayed to the effect, and the “Par” janken symbol selected by the player is displayed at a position that approximates the character of the bancho, and the position that approximates the panda character Next, the “Janken” symbol of “Choki” that wins “Par” is displayed. On the other hand, the touch panel type display device 209 displays the character (character information) of “defeat” indicating that the game is defeated. In this example, if an effect of defeating Janken is performed, the second variable winning opening 235 is not in a state where it is easy to win in the 15th round, so the third game condition (or the first condition) is satisfied. It is difficult, that is, it is suggested that after the big hit game, it shifts to the electric support state (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state). Therefore, such an effect corresponds to a second effect that suggests that the first state is started after the big hit game (or that the third game condition (first condition) is difficult to be established). It can be said.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 66 (9), the notification for prompting the player to win the second attacker is not performed in the 15th round, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays that the player is instructed to make a right turn. On the other hand, on the touch panel type display device 209, the character (character information) of “It was disappointing” that hesitates that the second variable winning opening 235 does not easily enter the winning state in the 15th round is displayed.

  FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, at the fifteenth round, as shown in FIG. 67 (10), the second variable winning opening 235 (second attacker) is opened, but the opening time of the second attacker here is short. It is difficult to expect a prize. However, as shown in FIG. 67 (10), an irregular state in which the player wins the second attacker who is open for 0.1 seconds happens by chance.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 67 (11), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “V”, which is a notification that the probability change has been confirmed, together with the long character. On the other hand, the touch panel type display device 209 displays a character (character information) of “congratulations” congratulating that the probability change has been confirmed.

  When the fifteenth round is completed, a big hit game end effect as shown in FIG. 67 (12) is performed, and then, as shown in FIG. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 67 (12) and 67 (13) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 57 (13) and 57 (14), and a description thereof will be omitted.

(Modification 1)
In the production example described above, since the second attacker's opening time in the fifteenth round is short, it is not easy to win the second attacker. For example, the second attacker as shown in FIG. Although the display for promoting the winning of the second attacker is not performed, such a display may be performed.

(Modification 2)
Moreover, in the production example described above, when a winning to the second attacker occurs, the display as shown in FIG. 67 (11) is performed, but such a display may not be performed.

(Modification 3)
Further, in the above-described effect example, when the 15th round is completed, a display to the effect change state is performed as shown in FIG. 67 (12), but such a display is not performed. May be.

(Modification 4)
In the above-described effect example, after the big hit game is ended, the start of the probability change is notified as shown in FIG. 67 (13), but such notification may not be performed.

  In the production example described above, only one of the productions shown in the first to fourth modifications may be executed, or two or more productions may be executed in combination. Moreover, it may replace with the production | presentation shown in the modifications 1-4, and the special production performed only when the irregular state mentioned above arises may be performed.

  According to the examples described so far, the third game condition (or the first condition) is established when the first effect is performed rather than when the second effect is performed. It can be said that the conditions are easy to do.

  Further, in the examples described so far, for example, when the decoration display of “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” is stopped (determined), or the game is won in a big hit So that the third game condition (or the first condition) is likely to be satisfied (the state in which it is easy to win the second variable prize opening 235) after the first performance is performed. Although configured, the third game condition (or the first condition) may be easily established without performing the first effect.

  Next, a fifth example of a game machine to which the present invention can be applied will be described. Hereinafter, the difference from the items described so far will be mainly described.

  FIG. 68A is a diagram showing a table set selection table when a big hit is made in FIG. 1, and FIG. 68B is a diagram showing a table set selection table when a big hit is made in FIG. These tables are also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  Even in the fifth example, the ordinary drawing lottery wins only with a probability of 1/100 in the ordinary figure low probability state, so the electric Chu is hardly opened, and the probability of winning the second special figure starting port 232 is low. The table shown in FIG. 68 (a) corresponds to a table set selection table that is frequently used in the case of the normal figure low probability (special figure low probability normal figure low probability) state. In FIG. 68 (a), for reference, the winning design at the time of the big hit in the special figure 1 and the winning in the second variable winning opening 235 (second attacker) in the big hit game (hereinafter referred to as "V winning") The control state after the big hit game corresponding to whether or not there is) is shown. In the V-winning column, a circle indicates that there is a V winning, and a cross indicates that there is no V winning. Further, in the column of the control state (probability change, electric support), a circle mark indicates an add and a cross mark indicates no.

  On the other hand, in the ordinary high probability state, the electric Chu is almost open, and the big hit in the special figure 2 is more advantageous to the player than the big hit in the special figure 1, so the player aims at the second special figure starting port 232. The table shown in FIG. 68B corresponds to a table set selection table that is often used in the case of the normal figure high probability (special figure high probability normal figure high probability, special figure low probability normal figure high probability) state. For reference, FIG. 68 (b) shows the control state after the end of the big hit game corresponding to the stop pattern at the time of the big hit in special figure 2 and the possibility of V winning in the big hit game.

  In this example, from the table shown in FIG. 68 (a) and the table shown in FIG. 68 (b), regardless of the special figure determination result, if there is a V prize in the jackpot game, the table set 1 is selected. If there is no V prize in the big hit game, the table set 2 is selected.

  That is, according to this example, after the big hit game, the second gaming state (for example, the probability variation state) is started (or the game ball is won at the second variable prize opening 235 and the third gaming condition ( The first effect (for example, “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” or “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7”) If the third game condition (or the first condition) is not satisfied (for example, winning in the second variable winning opening 235) after the display of the combination of the decorative symbols is performed (for example, the first variable) In the case of the first gaming state (for example, the electric support state (irregular time)) that shifts after the big hit in the second case), the effect corresponding to the first gaming state (the effect using the table set 2: the second effect) ) Is executed.

  Moreover, according to this example, it is suggested that the first gaming state (for example, the electric support state) is started after the big hit game (or that the third gaming condition (first condition) is difficult to be established). The third game condition (or the first condition) after the second presentation (for example, derivation display of the combination of the decoration pattern of “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”) is performed In the second gaming state (for example, the probability variation state (irregular probability variation)) that shifts after the big hit when the game is established (for example, the winning to the second variable prize opening 235) (fourth case), An effect (effect using table set 1: fourth effect) corresponding to the gaming state is executed.

  Further, according to this example, after the big hit game, the second game state (for example, the probability change state) is started (or the game ball is won to the second variable winning port 235 and the third game condition ( If the third game condition (or the first condition) is satisfied after the first performance that suggests that the first condition is likely to be satisfied) In the second game state to be transferred, an effect corresponding to the second game state (effect using table set 1: first effect) is executed.

  Moreover, according to this example, it is suggested that the first gaming state (for example, the electric support state) is started after the big hit game (or that the third gaming condition (first condition) is difficult to be established). In the first gaming state in which the third game condition (or the first condition) is not satisfied after the second performance is performed (the third case), An effect corresponding to the gaming state (effect using table set 2: third effect) is executed.

  Thus, in this example, since the table set selection table is set as described above, it depends on the type of special figure, the possibility of V winning, and the control state (game state) after the big hit game is finished. The variation time (table for determining the variation time) can be determined.

  The contents of the table set, the contents of each table used in the table set, the variable time corresponding to the timer number and the control state performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 (display means) that can be selected from each table. As for the production mode, those described above in the first to third examples can be used as appropriate.

  Further, as described above, there may be an effect that can be selected only by the table 3 or the table 5 used in the table set 1, or an effect that can be selected only by the table 2 or the table 4 used in the table set 2. There may be. In this example, even in the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state that shifts after the big hit game with 15R jackpot, in the special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability state that transitions after the big hit game in the irregular short time (first case) Since the table set 2 is selected, in such a case, an effect corresponding only to the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state may be executed. On the other hand, in this example, for example, even in a special figure high-probability normal figure high-probability state in which a transition is made after a big hit game in the case of winning a V in a big hit game with 15R special big hit (first case) The table set 1 is selected even if the special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability that shifts after the big hit game in the case of (4)). In such a case, the effect corresponding only to the special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability May be executed.

  Next, a sixth example of a game machine to which the present invention can be applied will be described. Hereinafter, the difference from the items described so far will be mainly described.

  FIG. 69A is a diagram showing a table set selection table in the case of big hit in FIG. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  Even in the sixth example, in the low-probability state of the ordinary figure, the ordinary drawing lottery will only win with a probability of 1/100, so the electric chew is hardly opened, and the probability of winning the second special figure starting port 232 is low. The table shown in FIG. 69A corresponds to a table set selection table that is frequently used in the case of the normal figure low probability (special figure low probability common figure low probability) state. In FIG. 69 (a), for reference, it corresponds to whether or not a winning (V winning) in the second variable winning opening 235 (second attacker) in the big hit game and the stop design at the big hit in the special figure 1 is possible. The control state after the big hit game is shown. In the V-winning column, a circle indicates that there is a V winning, and a cross indicates that there is no V winning. Further, in the column of the control state (probability change, electric support), a circle mark indicates an add and a cross mark indicates no.

  In this example, from the table shown in FIG. 69 (a), the special figure determination result is a 15R special jackpot that makes it easy to win (V prize) in the second variable winning slot 235 (second attacker) in the jackpot game. If there is a V win in the jackpot game, the table set 1 is selected, the special figure determination result is 15R special jackpot, and there is no V prize in the jackpot game (Irregular (Short time), the table set 4 is selected, and the special figure determination result is a 15R big hit that does not make it easy for the second variable prize opening 235 (second attacker) to win a prize (V prize) in the big hit game, In addition, when there is a V prize in the big hit game (irregular probability change), the table set 3 is selected, the special figure determination result is 15R big hit, and the big hit If there is no V winning in trick, table set 2 is selected.

  Thus, in this example, since the table set selection table is set as described above, it depends on the type of special figure, the possibility of V winning, and the control state (game state) after the big hit game is finished. The variation time (table for determining the variation time) can be determined. In addition, in this example, a special table set is selected when a situation that is difficult to occur in a normal game, such as the above-mentioned irregular short time and irregular probability change, is selected. In this control state (game state), the player can be given a sense of incongruity or a great deal.

  In this example, only the table set selection table in the case of jackpot in FIG. 1 is shown, but the table set selection table in the case of jackpot in FIG. 2 is also shown in FIG. 69 (a). May be used, or the table set selection table in the first, third and fifth examples may be used. Also, in the case of a big hit in Special Figure 2, all are 15R special big hits, so if there is a V win in the big hit game, table set 1 is selected, and there is no V win in the big hit game ( For irregular time, a table set selection table having a configuration in which the table set 4 is selected may be used.

  FIG. 69B is a diagram for explaining the table set 1, and FIG. 69C is a diagram for explaining the table set 2. The contents of the table set 1 and the table set 2 are the same as those described above with reference to FIGS. 10A and 10B, respectively, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

  FIG. 69D is a diagram for explaining the table set 3, and FIG. 69E is a diagram for explaining the table set 4.

  The table set 3 is used when shifting to the probability variation state after the big hit game which is the irregular probability variation described above. The table 3 for the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state is used until the 99th symbol variation display after the big hit game ends, but in the table set 3, the symbol variation display of the 100th rotation, that is, the probability variation state In addition, the last symbol variation display in the electric support state is characterized in that the configuration is different from the table set 1 in that the table 6 is used. That is, according to the table set 3, the table 6 is used instead of the table 5 in the state immediately before the fall when the player's advantage is the second advantage. When the 101st symbol variation display is started, the state is shifted to the non-probable change state and the non-electric support state, and the table 1 for the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state is used.

  The table set 4 is used when shifting to the electric support state in the non-probability change state after the end of the big hit game, which is the above-mentioned irregular short time. After the big hit, until the 49th symbol fluctuation display, the table 2 for the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state is used, but in the table set 4, the symbol fluctuation display of the 50th rotation, that is, the electric support state The last symbol variation display is characterized in that the configuration is different from the table set 2 in that the table 7 is used. That is, according to the table set 4, the table 7 is used instead of the table 4 in the state immediately before the fall when the player's advantage is the first advantage. When the 51st symbol variation display is started, the state is shifted to the non-electric support state, and the table 1 for the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state is used.

  Thus, in this example, when a situation that is difficult to occur in a normal game occurs, such as the above-mentioned irregular short time and irregular probability change, the advantageous control state falls to a more unfavorable control state. In the immediately preceding symbol variation display, a special table is selected, and as a result, the player can be given a sense of incongruity, a value, etc.

  FIG. 69 (f) is a diagram for explaining tables used in the table set.

  There are seven types of tables 1 to 7 used in the table set of this example. Here, since the tables 1 to 5 are as described above with reference to FIG. 9C, description thereof is omitted here. The table 6 is a table used in the state immediately before the fall in the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state that shifts after the big hit game which is the irregular probability change described above, and the table 7 is the big hit which is the above irregular short time. It is a table used in the state just before falling in the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state that shifts after the game ends.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 9 (d), the effect modes according to the control time performed by the variation time corresponding to the timer number and the decorative symbol display device 208 (display means) that can be selected from each table. used.

  The contents of the tables 1 to 5 used in this example are as described above with reference to FIGS. 10C to 10E, FIG. 11 and FIG.

  FIG. 70 (a) is a diagram showing a table 6 for determining the variation time of the symbol variation display to be a big hit, and FIG. 70 (b) is a table for determining the variation time of the symbol variation display to be lost. FIG. The tables showing these tables 6 show, for reference, effects in the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 (display means) shown in FIG. 9D. Yes.

  As described above, the table 6 is a table for determining the variation time of the symbol variation display in the probability variation state and the last electric support state after the transition to the probability variation state and the electric support state after the end of the big hit game which is an irregular probability variation. It is.

  In the big hit symbol variation display shown in FIG. 70 (a), the super shortened big hit with timer number 1 (1 second) is always selected. In a normal game, the transition to the probability change state is made when there is a V prize at the 15R special jackpot, and in the probability change state that is shifted at this time, the table set 1 is selected. When the symbol variation display at the end of the probability variation state and the power support state (100th rotation) is a big hit, the table 5 for determining the variation time of the big symbol variation display shown in FIG. 12C is selected. The Therefore, in normal cases, the battle A victory with timer number 7 (35 seconds) is always selected. However, in the probability change state after the big hit game, which is an irregular probability change, a different effect is performed. With this, it is possible to produce an effect without any special problem in control while giving a sense of incongruity.

  On the other hand, in the loss symbol variation display shown in FIG. 70B, the battle A defeat of the timer number 6 (30 seconds) is always selected. In the normal game in which the table set 1 is selected, when the symbol variation display in the probability variation state and the last electric support state (100th rotation) is lost, the symbol variation display that results in the loss shown in FIG. The table 5 for determining the variation time is selected. Therefore, under normal circumstances, the battle number 2 of the timer number 5 (12 seconds) is always selected and the reach state is not reached, but the reach state is always reached in the probability change state after the end of the big hit game which is an irregular probability change. As a result, the fluctuation time can be long, and there are cases where more suspensions of the special figure 2 can be generated in the state immediately before the probability variation state and the electric support state are finished.

  FIG. 70 (c) is a diagram showing a table 7 for determining the variation time of the symbol variation display to be a big hit, and FIG. 70 (d) is a table for determining the variation time of the symbol variation display to be lost. FIG. The tables showing these tables 7 show, for reference, effects in the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 (display means) shown in FIG. 9D. Yes.

  As described above, the table 7 is a table for determining the variation time of the last symbol variation display in the electric support state after the transition to the electric support state with the non-probability changing state after the end of the big hit game, which is an irregular short time. is there.

  In the big hit symbol variation display shown in FIG. 70 (c), the super shortened big hit with timer number 1 (1 second) is always selected. In the normal game, the transition to the electric support state is made when the big hit game is completed without winning the V prize at the 15R big hit that is not the 15R special big hit. Since the table set 2 is selected, when the symbol variation display at the end of the electric support state (50th rotation) is a big hit, the variation time of the big hit symbol variation display shown in FIG. 12A is determined. Table 4 is selected. Therefore, normally, super reach with a battle is always performed, but in the electric support state that transitioned after the big hit game that is irregular short-time, a different effect is performed, so while giving a sense of incongruity in the production, It is possible to produce effects without any special problems in control.

  In the loss symbol variation display shown in FIG. 70 (d), the super shortened loss of the timer number 2 (2 seconds) is always selected. In a normal game in which the table set 2 is selected, when the symbol variation display at the end of the electric support state (50th rotation) results in a loss, the variation time of the symbol variation display that results in a loss shown in FIG. The table 4 for determining is selected. For this reason, in the normal case, the battle gasase tilt 2 with the timer number 5 (12 seconds) is always selected, and in the state immediately before the power support state is ended, there are cases where more suspensions of the special figure 2 can be generated. However, in the electric support state shifted after the end of the big hit game, which is an irregular time, the variation time of the symbol variation display at the end of the electric support state is short, so in the state immediately before the end of the electric support state, FIG. Is not likely to occur, and it may be disadvantageous for the player when the game is shifted to the electric support state after the big hit game, which is irregular shortening.

  Next, the hold icon applicable as the hold display displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in the first to sixth examples will be described. FIG. 71 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a hold icon used for the special figure 1 hold display. FIG. 71 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a hold icon used for special figure 2 hold display.

  As shown in FIGS. 71 (a) and 71 (b), the hold icon to be displayed changes according to the control state and the reliability.

  For example, a hold icon as shown in FIG. 71A is used as the hold icon used for the special figure 1 hold display.

  That is, in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, for example, the white circle hold icon is used as the default display mode, the panda character hold icon is used as the low reliability hold notification display mode, and the reliability As the display mode of the high hold notice, the hold icon of the face of the Bancho is used.

  Further, in the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state (electric support state), for example, a white circle hold icon is used as a default display mode, and a child panda character hold icon is used as a low reliability hold notice display mode. Is used, and the hold icon of the longest character is used as the display mode of the hold notification with high reliability. The display mode of the default hold icon in the electric support state is the same display mode as the default hold icon in the special figure low probability normal map low probability state.

  Further, in the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state (probability change state), the hold icon is not displayed.

  Also, in the electric support state transitioned after the big hit game, which is an irregular short time, for example, a white square-shaped hold icon is used as the default display mode, and the display of the hold notification of low reliability is used for The hold icon is used, and the hold icon of the old character is used as the display mode of the hold notice with high reliability.

  In addition, in the probability change state after the end of the big hit game, which is an irregular probability change, a white upward triangle-shaped hold icon is used, and a hold icon of an Afro student character is used as a display form of a low-reliability hold notice. As the display mode of the high-reliability hold notice, the hold icon of the character with the longest broken clothes is used.

  Thus, the special figure 1 hold display uses a hold icon of a different character depending on the reliability of the hold notice.

  Further, for example, as a hold icon used for the special figure 2 hold display, a hold icon as shown in FIG. 71 (b) is used.

  That is, in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, for example, a white parallelogram hold icon is used as a default display mode, and a green parallelogram hold icon is used as a low reliability hold notification display mode. In addition, a red parallelogram-shaped hold icon is used as a display mode of the high-reliability hold notice. In the special 2 hold display, the shape of the hold icon used in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state is made the same, and only the color differs according to the reliability.

  Further, in the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state (electric support state), for example, a white circle hold icon is used as a default display mode, and a child panda character hold icon is used as a low reliability hold notice display mode. Is used, and the hold icon of the longest character is used as the display mode of the hold notification with high reliability. The hold icon used in the electric support state in the special 2 hold display is the same as the hold icon used in the electric support state in the special 1 hold display.

  Further, in the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state (probability change state), the hold icon is not displayed.

  Also, in the electric support state transitioned after the end of the jackpot game, which is an irregular short time, for example, a white diamond-shaped hold icon is used as the default display mode, and turned to the right as a display mode for the low-reliability hold notice The holding icon of the Sabohani character is used, and the holding icon of the Sabohani character facing left is used as a display mode of the holding notice of high reliability. In the electric support state transferred after the end of the big hit game, which is an irregular short time, the display mode of the holding notice is such that the direction of the character is different depending on the reliability.

  In addition, in the probability change state that has been transferred after the end of the jackpot game, which is an irregular probability change, a white downward triangle-shaped hold icon is used, and a hold icon of "Yatsushiro Shogun" is used as a display mode of a low-reliability hold notice The hold icon of the main character is used as the display mode of the hold notice with high reliability.

  In this way, in this example, in the electric support state that has been shifted after the end of the big hit game, which is irregular, and the probability change state, which has been shifted after the end of the big hit game, which is an irregular probability change, The display mode is configured to be changeable.

  In the present embodiment, the high-reliability hold notice icon may be a jackpot confirmed hold notice icon or a 15R special jackpot confirmed hold notice icon. In this case, it can be said that the 15R special jackpot confirmed hold notice icon is an example of the first effect.

  In addition, in this example, a dedicated hold icon is used for this in the electric support state that has been transferred after the end of the big hit game, which is irregular, and the probability change state that has been transferred after the end of the big hit game, which is an irregular probability change. Although it is displayed, such a dedicated hold icon may not be used.

  Further, these hold icons can be used as the above-described variable icons.

  Further, in this example, the common hold icon is used in part for the special 1 hold display and the special 2 hold display, but may be used in common for all, or the special 1 hold display and the special hold display. There is no need to use a common hold icon for the two hold display.

  Moreover, between the special 1 hold display and the special 2 hold display, the law of change of the display mode of the hold icon may be made common or may not be made common.

  Also, in this example, in the jackpot game, when the third game condition (or the first condition) is satisfied, the probability change state is set after the jackpot game is finished. Is configured not to appear.

  In this example, the hold icon is not displayed in the probability change state, but the control state in which the hold icon is not displayed and the control state in which the hold icon is displayed are arbitrarily set. Can do. For example, it is possible not to display the hold icon in the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state, or to display the hold icon in the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. In this example, as described above, the hold icon is not displayed according to the control state. However, the hold icon may be displayed regardless of the control state.

  Further, in this example, when displaying the variation icon, the variation icon corresponding to the control state can be displayed by using the above-described hold icon. It is also possible to set a control state in which no change icon is displayed.

  In this example, the same hold icon may be used in the power support state and the probability change state, or different hold icons may be used for the hold icon according to FIG. .

  Next, a seventh example of a game machine to which the present invention can be applied will be described. Hereinafter, the difference from the items described so far will be mainly described.

  FIG. 72 is a diagram illustrating the front of the attacker unit 2340, and FIG. 73 is a diagram of the attacker unit 2340 as viewed from the back.

  The attacker unit 2340 includes a first variable winning opening 234a as an example of a second variable winning means and a second variable winning opening 235a as an example of a first variable winning means, and is shown in FIG. Instead of the one variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235, for example, it is attached to the lower right of the game area 124 in the game board 200.

  The attacker unit 2340 has, for example, a flat plate shape, and includes an attachment base 2340a for attaching to the front surface of the game board 200, and a decorative member 2340b attached to the front surface of the attachment base 2340a with a predetermined interval. .

  In the mounting base 2340a, a rectangular opening is formed in the approximate center near the upper end, and a plate-like first door member 2341a is attached so as to cover the opening. The lower end of the first door member 2341a is pivotally supported by the mounting base 2340a, and can be opened and closed forward by driving the solenoid SOL1 mounted on the rear side of the mounting base 2340a. The solenoid SOL1 is included in the various solenoids 332 described above and is driven by the drive circuit 334. In this example, the first variable winning opening 234a is configured as described above.

  Further, a second variable prize opening 235a described later is formed between the attachment base 2340a and the decorative member 2340b. Hereinafter, the configuration of the second variable winning opening 235a will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 74 (a) and 74 (b). FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining the internal structure of the second variable winning opening 235a, and FIG. 74 (a) is a diagram showing that the V shutter 2352a as an example of the variable pitching means is in a closed state. FIG. 74B shows that the V shutter 2352a is open. In FIGS. 74 (a) and 74 (b), the decorative member 2340b is shown in a transparent manner in order to easily explain the internal structure of the second variable prize winning opening 235a.

  As shown in FIGS. 74 (a) and 74 (b), the decorative member 2340b has a wall surface having a bottom surface 2340c, an upper surface 2340d, and a side surface 2340e erected rearward from the back surface of the plate surface 2340f. The decoration member 2340b is formed with a first rolling region SP1 and a second rolling region SP2 on which a game ball can roll by a wall surface, and an open portion behind the first rolling region SP1 is closed by the front surface of the mounting base 2340a.

  The upper part of the first rolling region SP1 is open, and a plate-like shutter member 2351a is provided so as to be able to advance and retreat in the depth direction with respect to the mounting base 2340a so as to cover the open part. The shutter member 2351a is configured to be displaceable by driving a solenoid SOL2 (see FIG. 73). The solenoid SOL2 is included in the various solenoids 332 described above, and is driven by the drive circuit 334. In other words, in this example, when the shutter member 2351a is in the forwardly advanced state (closed state) with respect to the mounting base 2340a, the first rolling region SP1 is closed and the first rolling of the game ball is closed. When the entry to the movement area SP1 is blocked and the vehicle is in a backwardly retracted state (open state), the first rolling area SP1 is opened, and the game ball enters the first rolling area SP1. Is acceptable.

  At a position where the first rolling area SP1 and the second rolling area SP2 are communicated with each other, a winning count switch SW1 for detecting the passing of the game ball is disposed, and the first rolling area SP1 is entered. When the played game ball rolls on the bottom surface 2340c and is guided leftward, it passes through the winning count switch SW1. The winning count switch SW1 is included in the various sensors 320 described above, and is configured such that a detection signal is input to the sensor circuit 322, and may be referred to as a sensor, but is referred to as a switch (hereinafter the same). .) In this example, when the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects the passing of a game ball to the winning count switch SW1, it detects a winning to the second variable winning opening 235a and pays out a winning ball based on the winning. Perform the process.

  The game ball that has passed the winning count switch SW1 is guided to the second rolling area SP2. In the second rolling region SP2, a V passage 2340g (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a first region) and a general passage 2340h are juxtaposed in the left-right direction, and the received game ball is placed in one of the passages. It is configured to guide and discharge downward. The V passage 2340g is provided with a V passing switch SW2 as an example of a detecting means, and the game ball guided to the V passage 2340g is configured to pass through the V passing switch SW2. Thus, it can be said that the V passage 2340g is an area provided at a position where at least the game ball that has entered the second variable prize opening 235a can enter. The V-pass switch SW2 is included in the various sensors 320 described above, and is configured such that a detection signal is input to the sensor circuit 322. In this example, when the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects the passing of the game ball to the V pass switch SW2, the third game condition (or the first condition) described above is assumed that the game ball has passed through the V passage 2340g. It can be determined that A plate-like V shutter 2352a is provided so as to be able to advance and retreat in the depth direction with respect to the mounting base 2340a so as to cover the upper portion of the V passage 2340g. The V shutter 23521a is configured to be displaceable by driving a solenoid SOL3 (see FIG. 73). The solenoid SOL3 is included in the various solenoids 332 described above, and is driven by the drive circuit 334. That is, in this example, as shown in FIG. 74 (a), when the V shutter 2352a is in the forwardly advanced state (closed state) with respect to the mounting base 2340a, the game ball to the V passage 2340g The game ball that has been prevented from entering and has entered the second rolling region SP2 rolls on the upper surface of the V shutter 2352a and is guided to the general passage 2340h. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 74 (b), when the V shutter 2352a is in a state of being retracted backward (open state) with respect to the mounting base 2340a, the game ball is allowed to enter the V passage 2340g. The game ball that has entered the second rolling region SP2 is guided to the V passage 2340g. Further, a discharge ball detection switch SW3 is disposed in the general passage 2340h, and a game ball guided to the general passage 2340h is configured to pass through the discharge ball detection switch SW. The discharged ball detection switch SW3 is included in the various sensors 320 described above, and is configured such that a detection signal is input to the sensor circuit 322. In this example, when the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects the passage of the game ball to the discharge ball detection switch SW3, it detects that the game ball has passed through the general passage 2340h.

  In this example, by configuring as described above, for example, the second variable winning of the game ball is determined by the number of game balls passed by the winning count switch SW1 and the number of passes of the V passing switch SW2 and the discharge ball detecting switch SW3. By monitoring in / out to the mouth 235a, it may be possible to monitor illegally passing a game ball to the V passage 2340g. Examples of the illegal act include an act using a ball with a thread or a game ball having a size larger than a regulation (so-called decaball).

  Further, in this example, with the above-described configuration, only a game ball that has entered the second variable prize opening 235a can enter the V passage 2340g, and a game ball that has entered the first variable prize opening 234a is V The passage 2340g is not allowed to enter.

  Subsequently, the first variable winning port 234a (first attacker) and the second variable winning port 235a (second) from the start to the end of one round of the big hit game of the pachinko machine equipped with the above-described attacker unit 2340 The operation timing of the attacker and the V shutter 2352a will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 75 is a timing chart showing the operation timings of the first variable winning port 234a, the second variable winning port 235a, and the V shutter 2352a from the start to the end of one round of the big hit game.

  First, the operation timing of the first variable winning opening 234a in the round in which the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) opens and closes will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 75 (a), when the round is started, the solenoid SOL1 is turned ON at the timing t0, and the first door member 2341a is opened from the closed state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the fifth state). Displacement to a state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a sixth state). Thereafter, when the above-described round end condition is satisfied, the solenoid SOL1 is turned OFF at the timing of t4, and the first door member 2341a is displaced from the open state to the closed state. At this time, a closing time after the round (first closing time: for example, 1.5 seconds) is set. Thereafter, the round ends when the closing time elapses after the round and the timing of t6 is reached. Since the first variable prize winning opening 234a is not provided with a V shutter, the operation relating to the V shutter is not performed as shown in FIG. 75 (b).

  Next, a round in which the second variable prize opening 235a (second attacker) opens and closes, and the second variable prize opening 235a is opened for a long time (for example, a maximum of 25 seconds is opened: long is opened) ( For example, the operation timings of the second variable prize opening 235a and the V shutter 2352a in the above-described 15R special big hit 15th round) will be described.

  As shown in FIGS. 75 (c) and 75 (d), when the round starts, the solenoid SOL2 is turned ON at the timing t0, and the shutter member 2351a is sometimes closed (hereinafter referred to as a first state). ) To the open state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the second state), and the solenoid SOL3 is turned on to open the V shutter 2352a from the closed state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the third state). Displacement to a state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a fourth state). At this time, a first V opening time (for example, 0.1 second) is set. When the first V opening time elapses and the timing becomes t1, the solenoid SOL3 is turned OFF and the V shutter 2352a is displaced from the open state to the closed state. At this time, a first V closing time (for example, 3 seconds) is set. When the first V closing time elapses and the timing becomes t3, the solenoid SOL3 is turned ON again, and the V shutter 2352a is displaced from the closed state to the open state. Thereafter, when the above-described round end condition is satisfied, the solenoid SOL2 is turned OFF at the timing of t4, and the shutter member 2351a is displaced from the open state to the closed state. At this time, a first V opening time (for example, 0.1 second) is set, and a post-round closing time (first closing time) is set. When the first V opening time elapses and the timing becomes t5, the solenoid SOL3 is turned OFF and the V shutter 2352a is displaced from the open state to the closed state. Thereafter, the round ends when the closing time elapses after the round and the timing of t6 is reached. The above-described opening / closing operation of the V shutter 2352a is performed based on the first opening pattern data stored in the ROM 406 of the main control unit 300, for example.

  Next, in the round in which the second variable prize opening 235a (second attacker) is opened and closed, the second variable prize opening 235a is opened for a short time (for example, maximum 0.1 second opening: short opening). The operation timings of the second variable winning opening 235a and the V shutter 2352a in a round (for example, the 15th round in the 15R big hit described above) will be described.

  As shown in FIGS. 75 (e) and 75 (f), when the round starts, the solenoid SOL2 is turned on at the timing t0, the shutter member 2351a is displaced from the closed state to the opened state, and the solenoid SOL3 is turned on. Thus, the V shutter 2352a is displaced from the closed state to the open state. At this time, the first V opening time described above is set. When the first V opening time elapses and the timing becomes t1, the solenoid SOL3 is turned OFF and the V shutter 2352a is displaced from the open state to the closed state, but the opening time of the second variable winning opening 235a is also set. Since it is 0.1 second, the solenoid SOL2 is turned off at the same time t1, and the shutter member 2351a is displaced from the open state to the closed state. At this time, a post-round closing time (first closing time) is set. Thereafter, when the closing time after the round has passed and the timing of t2 is reached, the round ends. Also in this case, the opening / closing operation of the V shutter 2352a is performed based on the first opening pattern data described above. However, as shown by the chain line in the timing chart shown in FIG. 75 (f), the round ends at the timing t2 before the V shutter 2352a is opened again, so that the game ball to the V passage 2340g. The chance to pass is only a very short period of the first V opening time immediately after the start of the round. In this way, even if the game ball wins the second variable winning opening 235a in the round in which the second variable winning opening 235a is short-opened, the gaming ball to the V passage 2340g as described above. Is difficult to pass, and the transition to an unintended control state is suppressed. On the other hand, even when the second variable prize opening 235a is short-opened, the V shutter 2352a is opened, so that an opportunity for the game ball to pass through the V passage 2340g is secured. In addition, the same opening pattern data is used as data for determining the opening / closing pattern of the V shutter 2352a regardless of whether the second variable winning opening 235a is a round that opens long or short round. For example, the control burden such as switching the data to be used is reduced depending on whether or not it is a special big hit.

  The operation timing described above is applied to a pachinko machine provided with two variable winning openings. For example, only one variable winning opening having a V passage is provided like the second variable winning opening 235a. In the pachinko machine provided, for example, with regard to the round for determining whether or not the third game condition (first condition) is satisfied by allowing passage through the V passage, FIG. 75 (c) and (d) ) Or the operations shown in FIGS. 75 (e) and (f), and the other functions are performed for the other rounds by performing the operations shown in FIGS. 75 (a) and (b). Can be realized.

  In the first to seventh example pachinko machines described above, the relationship between the gaming state and the table set (data used to determine the variation time) becomes irregular due to partial diversion of the variation time. Even so, both the effect of reducing the sense of incongruity and the effect of showing an interesting behavior even when becoming irregular, which is the opposite of the effect, are exhibited.

  That is, there may be a case where it is possible to prevent a sense of discomfort due to the variation time. More specifically, by using a part of the variation time, even if the relationship between the gaming state and the table set becomes irregular, it may be possible to produce an effect without a sense of incongruity. On the other hand, it may be possible to improve the interest of the game by using the fact that the relationship between the game state and the table set is irregular for the production.

  Further, since the big hit symbol is related to the gaming state, the big hit symbol can be associated with the table set. In some cases, the game can be sharpened by selecting an irregular table set. Further, during the big hit gaming state, the game ball is being fired in order for the attacker to win the game ball. Therefore, the third condition (or the first condition) may be easily established.

  In the above example, a dedicated table (for example, the table 5 or the table 4) is used before the gaming state is switched. However, the timing for using the dedicated table can be arbitrarily set. A dedicated table may be used for the first rotation when the game state is switched by setting.

  Further, although the description has been given taking the effect by the decorative symbol display device 208 (effect display means) as an example, the present invention may be applied to an effect by a movable body, a lamp, or sound.

  Moreover, you may make it perform the production | presentation which can alert | report that it is a special state, eliminating the sense of incongruity about a change time using a dedicated sub production | presentation mode.

  Further, the operation probability of the movable body may be refrained from being in the irregular state, or conversely, the irregularity state may be notified by increasing the appearance rate. In other words, it may be set with priority given to either the effect of eliminating the uncomfortable feeling or intentionally notifying.

  Also, if the jackpot symbol without power support is stopped, if the gaming state before the big hit game is a special low-probability normal figure low-probability state, even after the big hit game ends ( (Non-electric support state) is maintained, and if the game state before the big hit game is a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state (electric support state), it will shift to the normal figure high probability state. May be. In addition, the jackpot symbol that does not have the electric support may be a symbol that is not selected in the special figure 2 that is mainly drawn in a high probability state. In this case, the game state after the big hit game is determined according to the big hit symbol and the game state at the time of the big hit (which may vary as a result), and the variable time group (table set) after the big hit is decided. May be.

  Furthermore, you may comprise so that irregularity may not arise reliably. For example, in the second example, the third condition is satisfied (the winning of Special Figure C or D in Special Figure 1), and the first condition is also satisfied (the second variable winning opening 235 (second attacker)) The special state (irregular state) in which the second variable prize opening 235 (predetermined winning area) cannot win under the first condition (for example, does not open or reaches 15 rounds) Or not).

  In each example, in the 15th round, the second variable prize opening 235 (second attacker) is opened, but this second attacker is abolished and the first variable prize opening 234 (first attacker) is released. It is good only as well. In this case, right-handing is not necessary, and the third condition is established by winning the first variable winning opening 234 in the 15th round. On the contrary, the first attacker may be abolished and only the second variable prize opening 235 (second attacker) may be used. In this case, it is always necessary to be right-handed during the big hit game, and the third condition is established by winning the second variable winning opening 235 in the 15th round.

  In the above example, the first variable prize opening 234 (first attacker) is opened in the first to fourteenth rounds, and the second variable prize opening 235 (second attacker) is opened in the fifteenth round. However, it is possible to appropriately set which variable winning opening is opened in which round. For example, the round that opens the second variable winning opening 235 may be a round other than the last round. . Moreover, it may be configured to determine which variable winning opening is to be opened in which round according to the type of the big hit symbol.

  In the above example, the opening time of the second variable winning opening 235 (second attacker) is set to a time that can be easily won (for example, 25 seconds) depending on the type of jackpot symbol, and it is extremely difficult to win. The decision was made to select a short time (for example, 0.1 second), but the opening time of each round of the first variable winning opening 234 (first attacker) depends on the type of jackpot symbol Alternatively, it may be determined whether the time is sufficient for easy winning or the extremely short time for which winning is difficult. For example, the opening time of the first variable winning opening 234 is made extremely short (for example, 0.1 second) in all rounds in which the first variable winning opening 234 (first attacker) is opened due to the jackpot symbol. The opening time of the second variable winning opening 235 (second attacker) is set to a time sufficient for easy winning (for example, 25 seconds), and the number of balls in the big hit game is suppressed to shift to a probable change state. It is possible to make specifications, etc., and game design can be performed freely.

  Further, in the above example, an error notification may be made when a winning is made to the second variable winning opening 235 (second attacker) that has almost no possibility of winning in the 15R big hit that is not the 15R special big hit. As a result, for example, when an illegal winning is made, it becomes possible to easily notify a store clerk or the like of the game hall.

  Also, in the above example, the first special figure starting port 230 and the second special figure starting port 232 have different entry routes, so that in normal games, only up to four can be reserved. Although it was applied to the configured pachinko machine, for example, it is configured so that the entrance is common, and the subsequent route is alternately distributed between the first special figure starting port 230 and the second special figure starting port 232, Even in the normal gaming state, a total of eight variable games can be held for the first special figure and the second special figure, and the above-mentioned winning order fluctuation is executed on that basis. The present invention can also be applied to a piece-holding winning order variation machine (so-called 8-chance machine).

  Moreover, although the thing of the structure which performs a 1st effect and a 2nd effect was shown in the said example, it is good also as a structure which does not perform a 2nd effect but performs only a 1st effect.

  In the above example, for example, the number of consecutive big hits (number of consecutive games) that do not go through the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 or the like. Good. Moreover, it is also possible to change the display mode of the number of consecutive resorts displayed when a big hit is made in the gaming state (probability changing state or electric support state) shifted from the above-mentioned irregular short time or irregular probability change to a special display mode. . Further, the number of consecutive resorts may not be displayed in such a special display mode.

  Further, in the above example, a tutorial effect which is a display for explaining the contents of the effect may be performed, and this tutorial effect can be functioned as a notice. In this case, the tutorial effect can be an example of the first effect and the second effect. For example, when a content such as “V Attacker is easy to open after a big hit at 777” or a content such as “Reach 7 is super hot” is displayed, this is the case when the 15R special big hit This display can be adopted as the first effect. Further, by combining these displays and other effects, it is possible to function as the first effect and the second effect. For example, if the first notice and the second notice are each executed independently, the jackpot is not confirmed, but if both the first notice and the second notice are executed, the 15R special jackpot is confirmed. In such a case, it can be said that these first notice and second notice correspond to an example of the first effect. In addition, for example, the third notice and the fourth notice will not be a big hit if they are executed independently, but if both the third notice and the fourth notice are executed, the 15R special big hit If the 15R big hit is not confirmed, it can be said that the third notice and the fourth notice correspond to an example of the second effect. Of course, it is also possible to combine three or more notices into the first effect or the second effect.

  Next, the game characteristics in the pachinko machine provided with the attacker unit shown in FIG. 72 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 76 is a diagram for describing game characteristics in the pachinko machine provided with the attacker unit shown in FIG.

  Specifically, FIG. 76 (a) shows, for example, a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4” on the ornamental symbol display device 208 as described in the above examples. After the first effect A is executed, which suggests that it is difficult to establish the third game condition during the big hit game, such as stop display (determined display), the second display shown in FIG. The big hit game ends (the first requirement is satisfied) without the game ball passing through the V passing switch SW2 provided in the probability variation area in the variable winning opening 235a (the third game condition is satisfied) (first game) This shows the situation when the first condition is satisfied. In the following description, the same applies to the embodiment in which the third game condition is established when the second variable winning slot 235 shown in FIG. 3 is won. Needless to say. In this example, the V pass switch SW2 may be referred to as a probability change region switch.

  In such a case, the effect of transitioning to the first game state (electric support state: special figure low probability normal figure high probability state) after the big hit game is executed as the end effect of the big hit game (FIG. 76 (a ), After the first effect B is executed), the big hit game is finished and the state shifts to the first game state. Here, an effect such as represented by the first effect B that at least suggests that the game will shift to the first game state after the big hit game may be referred to as the first effect. The same applies to the following description.

  In other words, with respect to FIG. 76 (a), after an effect related to the probability variation area non-passing open pattern is executed, if there is no passage of the game ball to the probability variation area, the effect is to shift to a non-probability gaming state. It can be said that after (first production) is performed, the concept of shifting to an uncertain gaming state is shown. In this example, the probability variation region may be referred to as a high probability variation determination region, and may be referred to as a probability variation function operation region.

  FIG. 76 (b), for example, as described in the previous examples, stops display on the decorative symbol display device 208 with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7”. After the second effect A is executed, which suggests that the third game condition is likely to be satisfied during the big hit game, such as (determined display), the game ball passes through the V-pass switch SW2 (third game condition Shows the situation when the big hit game is over. Note that the second effect A may be an effect in a mode of explicitly notifying that the third game condition is easily established during the big hit game.

  In such a case, the effect of transitioning to the second game state (probability change state: special figure high probability normal figure high probability state) after the big hit game is executed as the end effect of the big hit game (FIG. 76 (b)). In (2), after the second effect B is executed), the big hit game is finished and the state shifts to the second game state. Here, an effect that at least suggests that the game is shifted to the second gaming state after the big hit game, as represented by the second effect B, may be referred to as a second effect. The same applies to the following description. Note that the second effect may be an effect representing transition to the second game state after the big hit game.

  In other words, in FIG. 76 (b), when the game ball passes into the probability variation area after the performance related to the probability variation area passage opening pattern is executed, the game state is changed to the probability variation. It can be said that the concept of shifting to a probable gaming state after the production (second production) is performed is shown.

  FIG. 76C shows, for example, a stop display with a combination of “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4” decoration symbols on the ornamental symbol display device 208 as described in the previous examples. After the first effect A is executed, which at least suggests that it is difficult to establish the third game condition during the big hit game, such as (determined display), the game ball passes through the V pass switch SW2 (the third game The game condition is established) (satisfying the second requirement) and the second condition is established by the end of the big hit game. The first effect A may be an effect indicating that it is difficult to satisfy the third game condition during the big hit game.

  Even in such a case, as the end effect of the big hit game, an effect (first effect) to shift to the first gaming state after the big hit game is executed (in FIG. 76 (c), the first effect B is Executed).

  In other words, with respect to FIG. 76 (c), after the performance related to the probability variation area non-passing release pattern is executed, the game state is shifted to the non-probability game state even when the game ball has passed to the probability variation area. It can be said that the concept that the effect of the effect is performed and then the game state is shifted to a certain game state is shown.

  When the concept shown in FIG. 76 (c) is realized, for example, in a big hit game in which the third game condition is difficult to be established, so-called care for passing the game ball by hand with respect to the V-pass switch SW2. If a fraudulent act such as a goth act using a ball with a thread or a game ball larger than a prescribed size (deca ball) is performed, the third game condition is established for a player who has cheated Sometimes it can make you think it has failed. Alternatively, it may be possible for a player who has performed fraud to make a player think that fraud has been detected. As a result, the deterrence of fraudulent acts works, and in some cases, it may be possible to prevent the disadvantages of the game shop.

  Hereinafter, some examples applicable to the game characteristics described above with reference to FIG. 76 will be described.

  Next, an eighth example of a game machine to which the present invention can be applied will be described. Hereinafter, the difference from the items described so far will be mainly described. In addition, although the pachinko machine 100 in this example is described as an example provided with the attacker unit 2340 shown in FIG. 74, of course, it is applicable to the pachinko machine 100 provided with the game board 200 as shown in FIG. You can also.

  FIG. 77 (a-1) shows an example of the stop symbol pattern (first symbol pattern) of FIG. 1 in the eighth example of the pachinko machine. FIG. 77 (a-2) It shows an example of the stop symbol aspect (first symbol aspect) of the special figure 2 in the pachinko machine of the second example.

  77 (a-1) and FIG. 77 (a-2) also show six types of special drawings from “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure F” as stop symbol forms in the symbol variation display.

  Also in the eighth example, the stop symbol form of special figure 1 and the stop symbol aspect of special figure 2 are common. In the eighth example, all the big hits are big hits with 16 rounds of electric support, but in Special Figure 2, the big hit symbols are all big hits (special big hits) that are scheduled to be probable. On the other hand, in Special Figure 1, only "Special Figure A" and "Special Figure C" are jackpots (special jackpots) scheduled to change, and "Special Figure B" and "Special Figure D" are scheduled to acquire probability changes. There is no jackpot. In this way, "Special Figure A" and "Special Figure C" in Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 in "Special Figure" will be special special jackpots where the second jackpot gaming state that is likely to shift to the second gaming state is started. A "to" Special Figure D "may be referred to as the second symbol, and the jackpot at which the first jackpot gaming state is not started (that is, it is difficult to shift to the second gaming state) is not scheduled to acquire the probability variation. “Special figure B” and “Special figure D” in special figure 1 may be referred to as a first symbol.

  FIG. 77 (b-1) shows an example of the action of the attacker during the jackpot game of FIG. 1 and the game state to be transferred after the jackpot game. FIG. 77 (b-2) An example of the operation of the attacker during the jackpot game of 2 and the game state to be transferred after the jackpot game are shown.

  In the jackpot game to which the special figure A is displayed in the special figure 1 and transferred, the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is opened for 29.0 seconds from the first round to the 15th round, and in the 16th round, The second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) is opened for 29.0 seconds. That is, the special figure A in the special figure 1 is a pattern indicating that a large number of game balls are 16 round big hits that can enter the variable winning opening in any round from 1 round to 16 rounds.

  In the jackpot game to which the special figure B is displayed in the special figure 1 and is transferred, the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is opened for 29.0 seconds from the first round to the 15th round, and in the 16th round, The second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) is opened for only 0.1 second. In other words, Special Figure B in Special Figure 1 shows that many game balls can enter the variable prize opening in any round from 1 to 15 rounds, but in the 16th round, it is possible to enter the variable prize opening. It is a pattern which shows that it is a substantial 15 round jackpot with almost no possibility of a sphere.

  In the jackpot game to which the special figure C is displayed in the special figure 1 and is transferred, the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is opened for 29.0 seconds from the first round to the fourth round, but the fifth round is Until the 15th round, the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is opened only for 0.1 second. In the 16th round, the second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) is opened for 29.0 seconds. That is, the special figure C in the special figure 1 is that a lot of game balls can enter the variable winning opening in any round from 1 round to 4 rounds and 16 rounds, but variable from 5 rounds to 15 rounds. It is a pattern which shows that it is a real 5 round big hit that there is almost no possibility of entering a winning opening.

  In the jackpot game to which the special figure D is displayed in the special figure 1 and transferred, the first variable winning opening 234a (the first attacker) is opened for 29.0 seconds from the first round to the fourth round, but the fifth round is started. Until the 15th round, the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is opened only for 0.1 second. Further, in the 16th round, the second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) is opened only for 0.1 second. That is, the special figure D in the special figure 1 is that from 1 round to 4 rounds, many game balls can enter the variable prize opening in any round, but from 5 rounds to 16 rounds to the variable prize opening. It is a pattern which shows that it is a real 4 round jackpot with almost no possibility of entering.

  In the jackpot game to which the special figure A to D is displayed in the special figure 2 and transferred, the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is released for 29.0 seconds from the first round to the 15th round, and the 16th round Then, the second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) is opened for 29.0 seconds. That is, special figures A to D in special figure 2 are symbols indicating that 16 game rounds are a big hit that allows a lot of game balls to enter the variable winning opening in any round from 1 round to 16 rounds.

  In this example, in any jackpot game with any of the above-mentioned symbols, there are 16 rounds, and a game ball that is entered while the second variable prize opening 235a is opened is provided in the probability variation area in the second variable prize opening 235a. When the V passing switch SW2 is passed, the probability variation operating region is turned ON, and after the big hit game is finished, while the symbol variation display is performed 150 times, the special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state which is an example of the second game state Is maintained. On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the V passing switch SW2 in the big hit game, the probability variation operation region is not turned ON (the probability variation operation region remains OFF), and after the big hit game ends, 100 symbols. While the variable display is performed, the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state which is an example of the first gaming state is maintained.

  In the eighth example, the third game condition is satisfied when the game ball passes through the V passing switch SW2 of the second variable prize opening 235a (second attacker) in the 16th round. Therefore, the big hit by the special figures B and D of the special figure 1 is not a 0% possibility of the probability variation acquisition, but the possibility is very low and it can be said that the jackpot is not scheduled to acquire the probability variation. On the other hand, the big hit by the special figures A and C of the special figure 1 has a sufficient opening time of the second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker), and the possibility of passing the game ball to the V passage switch SW2 It is high, and it can be said that it is a big hit scheduled to get a certain change.

  Further, the operation of the attacker in the jackpot game to which the special illustrations A to D are displayed in the special illustration 2 is the same as the operation of the attacker in the special illustration A in the special illustration 1. Accordingly, any of the big hits by the special winning symbols (Special Drawings A to D) of the special figure 2 has a sufficient opening time for the second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker), and the game to the V pass switch SW2 The possibility of passing the sphere is high, and it can be said that it is a big hit scheduled to acquire certainty. It should be noted that the operation of the attacker in the big hit according to the special figures A to D in the special figure 2 may be different from the operation mode of the attacker in the big hit according to the special figure A in the special figure 1.

  Thus, the jackpot gaming state in which the third gaming condition is difficult to be satisfied may be referred to as the first jackpot gaming state, and the third gaming condition is likely to be satisfied, and the second game is more than the first jackpot gaming state. The jackpot gaming state where the state is likely to start may be referred to as a second jackpot gaming state.

  FIG. 78A is a diagram schematically showing the external configuration of the first variable winning opening 234a and the second variable winning opening 235a, and FIG. 78B shows the first variable winning opening 234a and the second variable winning opening 234a. It is the figure which represented roughly the internal structure of the 2nd variable prize winning opening 235a. FIG. 78C schematically shows that the V shutter 2352a is in an open state, and FIG. 78D schematically shows that the V shutter 2352a is in a closed state. FIG. FIG. 78 (e) is a diagram schematically showing the external appearance of another embodiment of the first variable prize winning opening and the second variable prize winning opening.

  As shown in FIGS. 78 (a) and 78 (b), a winning count switch SW4 for detecting a game ball that has entered the first variable winning opening 234a is provided in the first variable winning opening 234a. It has been. The game ball that has passed the winning count switch SW4 is guided to the discharge passage and discharged out of the pachinko machine 100. The winning count switch SW4 is included in the various sensors 320 described above, and is configured such that a detection signal is input to the sensor circuit 322. In this example, when the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects the passing of the game ball to the winning count switch SW4, it detects a winning to the first variable winning opening 234a and pays out a winning ball based on the winning. Perform the process. Note that the internal configuration of the second variable prize opening 235a is the same as that described in the seventh example, so the same reference numerals are used and description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 78 (c), when the V shutter 2352a is in the open state, the second variable winning opening 235a is allowed to enter the game ball into the V passage 2340g, and the winning count switch SW1 is turned on. The game ball that has passed and entered the second rolling region SP2 passes through the V-pass switch SW2 and is guided to the V-path 2340g. Further, as shown in FIG. 78 (d), the second variable winning opening 235a is prevented from entering the game ball into the V passage 2340g when the V shutter 2352a is closed, and a winning count switch The game ball that has passed through SW1 and entered the second rolling region SP2 rolls on the upper surface of the V shutter 2352a, passes through the discharge ball detection switch SW3, and is guided to the general passage 2340h.

  In this example, the first variable winning opening and the second variable winning opening are configured as described above. However, as shown in FIG. 78 (e), as the first variable winning opening and the second variable winning opening, The first variable prize winning opening 234b and the second variable prize winning opening 235b may be applied.

  A first passage detection switch SW5 and a second passage detection switch SW6 for detecting a game ball that has entered the first variable prize opening 234b are provided inside the first variable prize opening 234b. The game ball that has entered the first variable winning opening 234b passes through one of the first passage detection switch SW5 and the second passage detection switch SW6 and is discharged out of the pachinko machine 100. Yes.

  Inside the second variable winning opening 235b, there are provided a third passing detection switch SW7 and a fourth passing detecting switch SW8 for detecting a game ball that has entered the second variable winning opening 235b. The game ball that has entered the second variable winning opening 235b passes through one of the third passage detection switch SW7 and the fourth passage detection switch SW8 and is discharged out of the pachinko machine 100. Yes.

  The first passage detection switch SW5 to the fourth passage detection switch SW8 can function as follows.

  That is, for example, (1) a game that causes the first passage detection switch SW5 to the fourth passage detection switch SW8 to function as a winning count switch and that has passed through the first passage detection switch SW5 and the third passage detection switch SW7. For example, FIG. 78 (c) and FIG. 78 (d) show the game balls that pass through the second passage detection switch SW6 and the fourth passage detection switch SW8 while guiding the ball to the general passage. It is good also as a structure guided to any one of V passage and a general passage by such an internal structure. Note that at least one of the second passage detection switch SW6 and the fourth passage detection switch SW8 is configured to guide the general passage, and the other is as shown in FIGS. 78 (c) and 78 (d). It is good also as a structure guided to any one of V channel | path and a general channel | path by this internal structure.

  (2) The first passage detection switch SW5 and the third passage detection switch SW7 function as a winning count switch, and the second passage detection switch SW6 and the fourth passage detection switch SW8 function as a V passage switch. A configuration may be adopted. In this case, a V shutter as described above is provided that can be changed between a state that prevents passage to the second passage detection switch SW6 and the fourth passage detection switch SW8 that function as a V passage switch and a state that allows passage. May be. In addition, for example, a state in which one or a plurality of game balls that have entered the first variable winning opening 234b or the second variable winning opening 235b are retained upstream of the passage detection switch that functions as a V passing switch. You may make it provide the retention member which can change to the state which cancels | releases the retention of a sphere. For example, the stay member may be configured to make it easy to pass through the V-pass switch or make it difficult to pass through by appropriately setting the timing of releasing the stay of the game ball. Moreover, you may comprise so that a game ball may be retained in order to accelerate | stimulate the passage to V passing switch. Also, in order to promote the passage to the fourth passage detection switch SW8 functioning as a V passage switch, a retention member for retaining one or more game balls that have entered the second variable winning opening 235b is provided. You may make it provide. One of the second passage detection switch SW6 and the fourth passage detection switch SW8 may function as a winning count switch instead of the V passage switch. Further, any one of the first passage detection switch SW5 and the third passage detection switch SW7 may function as a V passage switch instead of a winning count switch.

  (3) The first passage detection switch SW5 to the fourth passage detection switch SW8 may all function as a winning count switch and may not have a configuration such as a V path. In such a configuration, for example, as described above, the present invention is applied to the pachinko machine 100 in which the third game condition is established by winning a game ball in the second variable winning opening 235c (second attacker). be able to. Note that all of the first passage detection switch SW5 to the fourth passage detection switch SW8 may function as a V passage switch.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 79, the operation timings of the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker), the second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker), and the V shutter 2352a in this example will be described. While explaining.

  FIG. 79A is a timing chart showing an example of the operation timing in the big hit game when the special figure B is displayed in the special figure 1 and the big hit (15R big hit) is obtained, and FIG. FIG. 79 is a timing chart showing an example of the operation timing in the jackpot game when the special figure A is displayed in FIG. 1 and a big hit (16R special big hit) is obtained. FIG. 79 (c) is a special chart B in FIG. It is a timing chart which shows an example of operation timing in a big hit game when it is displayed and it becomes a big hit (15R big hit). Here, A, B and C in the figure respectively indicate the types of gaming states, A is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, B is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state, C is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state.

  First, the operation timing in the big hit game when special figure B is displayed in special figure 1 and the big hit (15R big hit) will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 79 (a), when the big hit game starts at the timing of t1, the big hit start effect is executed. Thereafter, the first round is started at the timing t2, the solenoid SOL1 is turned ON, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is displaced from the closed state to the open state. Here, a part or all of the period from t1 which is the start timing of the big hit game to t2 which is the timing when the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is opened in the first round. Is sometimes called a big hit start state. Thereafter, when the above-described round end condition is satisfied, the solenoid SOL1 is turned OFF and the first door member 2341a is displaced from the open state to the closed state, and the post-round closing time (first closing time: for example, 1.5 Second) is set. Thereafter, when the closing time elapses after the round, the first round is finished, and then the second round is started. Thereafter, the same operation is repeated until the 15th round is completed. Note that the operation relating to the V shutter 2352a is not performed from the first round to the fifteenth round. Here, the first round to the fifteenth round in which the first variable winning opening 234a is opened may be referred to as the second round.

  When the 15th round is completed and the 16th round is started at the timing t3, the solenoid SOL2 is turned on and the shutter member 2351a is displaced from the closed state to the opened state, and the solenoid SOL3 is turned on and the V shutter 2352a is turned on. Displace from the closed state to the open state. At this time, a first opening time (for example, 0.1 second) as an opening time of the second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) and a first V opening time as an open state of the V shutter 2352a. (For example, 0.1 second) is set. In the following description, this first opening time may be referred to as a first period. In addition, in this way, the 16th round in which the second variable prize opening 235a is opened may be referred to as the first round. Further, although not shown, a V passing effective period is set as a period in which the passing of the game ball to the V passing switch SW2 is treated as being effective (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a first area effective state). Is done. Here, the first region effective state may be referred to as a high probability variation determination region effective state. The V passing effective period is, for example, a time slightly longer than the first opening time (for example, a time longer by 0.1 second than the first opening time). Such a V passage effective period may be referred to as a first detection period. Thus, in this example, it can be said that the first detection period at least partially overlaps the first period. The V passing effective period is not limited to that described above, and for example, a period during which the special electric accessory (the first variable winning opening 234a and the second variable winning opening 235a) is open may be set as the V passing effective period. . Also, for example, during the opening of the special electric accessory and the closing period (or the effective period for processing the winning balls of the first variable winning opening 234a and the second variable winning opening 235a in the closing period) It is good also as a V passage effective period. Further, the period during which the big hit game is executed may be set as the V passing effective period. When the first opening time and the first V opening time elapse and the timing of t4 is reached, the solenoid SOL3 is turned OFF, the V shutter 2352a is displaced from the open state to the closed state, and the solenoid SOL2 is turned OFF. Thus, the shutter member 2351a is displaced from the open state to the closed state. At this time, a post-round closing time (first closing time) indicated by a period D in the figure is set. At this time, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 determines whether or not a game ball has passed to the V pass switch SW2 during the V pass effective period (that is, whether or not the second requirement is satisfied). Note that it may be determined whether or not a game ball has passed to the V pass switch SW2 in the V pass effective period at a timing t5 described later. Thereafter, when the closing time after the round has passed and the timing of t5 comes, the 16th round ends. The post-round closing time set in the 16th round may be the same time as the post-round closing time of other rounds, or may be a different time. As described above, in the big hit game in which the operation shown in FIG. 79A is performed, the opening time of the second variable winning opening 235a is extremely short and the opening time of the V shutter 2351a is also very short. Therefore, even if a game ball enters the second variable winning opening 235a, in most cases, the V shutter 2351a is closed before reaching the V passage 2340g to prevent entry of the game ball. Therefore, the transition to an unintended control state can be suppressed. On the other hand, even when the second variable prize opening 235a is short-opened, the V shutter 2352a is opened, so that an opportunity for the game ball to pass through the V passage 2340g is secured. In this example, a V passing effective period is set corresponding to the opening time of the V shutter 2352a, and at least a timing other than the V passing effective period enters the game ball into the V passage 2340g (that is, the V passing switch SW2). If there is a detection of the passing of a game ball to (), an error may be determined. Here, the V passage effective period may be set so as to overlap at least partly with the opening time of the shutter member 2351a, or may be set so as not to overlap.

  Then, when the closing time after the round elapses and the timing becomes t5, the jackpot end effect time indicated by the period E in the figure is set. In the jackpot end effect time, for example, the first effect B described above with reference to FIG. 76 is executed as the jackpot end effect.

  Thereafter, the big hit game ends at the timing of t6, and the game state shifts. In this example, the third requirement is satisfied by the end of the jackpot game. In the example shown in FIG. 79 (a), in the big hit game, since there was no detection of the passing of the game ball to the V pass switch SW2, at the timing of t6, the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state (first Transition to one gaming state).

  Here, part or all of the period D and the period E in the figure may be called a big hit end state.

  Next, the operation timing in the big hit game when the special figure A is displayed in the special figure 1 and a big hit (16R special big hit) will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 79 (b), when the big hit game starts at the timing of t1, the big hit start effect is executed. Thereafter, the first round is started at the timing t2, the solenoid SOL1 is turned ON, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is displaced from the closed state to the open state. Thereafter, when the above-described round end condition is satisfied, the solenoid SOL1 is turned OFF and the first door member 2341a is displaced from the open state to the closed state, and the post-round closing time (first closing time: for example, 1.5 Second) is set. Thereafter, when the closing time elapses after the round, the first round is finished, and then the second round is started. Thereafter, the same operation is repeated until the 15th round is completed. Note that the operation relating to the V shutter 2352a is not performed from the first round to the fifteenth round.

  When the 15th round is completed and the 16th round is started at the timing t3, the solenoid SOL2 is turned on and the shutter member 2351a is displaced from the closed state to the opened state, and the solenoid SOL3 is turned on and the V shutter 2352a is turned on. Displace from the closed state to the open state. At this time, the first V opening time (for example, 0.1 second) is set together with the second opening time (for example, 29.0 seconds; long time opening (long opening)). When the first V opening time elapses and the timing becomes t4a, the solenoid SOL3 is turned OFF and the V shutter 2352a is displaced from the open state to the closed state. At this time, a first V closing time (for example, 3 seconds) is set. On the other hand, since the second variable winning opening 235a is set to the second opening time, the shutter member 2351a remains in the open state even after the V shutter 2352a is closed. In the following description, this second opening time may be referred to as a second period. When the first V closing time elapses, the solenoid SOL3 is turned ON again, and the V shutter 2352a is displaced from the closed state to the open state. Thereafter, for example, when the game ball that has entered the second variable prize opening 235a passes the V-pass switch SW2 at the timing of S2, a detection signal is output from the V-pass switch SW2. That is, the third game condition is established. Thereafter, when the above-described round end condition is satisfied, the solenoid SOL2 is turned OFF at the timing of t4b, and the shutter member 2351a is displaced from the open state to the closed state. At this time, a first V opening time (for example, 0.1 second) is set, and a post-round closing time (first closing time) indicated by a period D in the figure is set. In the jackpot game shown in FIG. 79 (b), the V passage effective period (second detection period) is set corresponding to the opening time of the V shutter 2352a. The second detection period is longer than the first detection period. When the first V opening time elapses and the timing becomes t4c, the solenoid SOL3 is turned OFF and the V shutter 2352a is displaced from the open state to the closed state. At this time, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 determines whether or not a game ball has passed to the V pass switch SW2 during the V pass effective period (that is, whether or not the second requirement is satisfied). In addition, it may be determined whether or not a game ball has passed to the V pass switch SW2 in the V pass effective period at a timing t5a described later. Thereafter, when the closing time after the round has passed and the timing of t5a is reached, the 16th round ends. Thus, in this example, the period during which the second variable winning opening 235a set to be opened for a long time (long opening) is in an open state may be referred to as a second period. It can be said that this second period is at least longer than the first period described above.

  Then, when the closing time after the round elapses and the timing becomes t5a, the jackpot end effect time indicated by the period E in the figure is set. In the jackpot end effect time, for example, the second effect B described above with reference to FIG. 76 is executed as the jackpot end effect.

  Thereafter, the big hit game ends at the timing of t6a, and the game state shifts. In this example, the third requirement is satisfied by the end of the jackpot game. In the example shown in FIG. 79 (b), since the passing of the game ball to the V passing switch SW2 was detected in the big hit game, at the timing of t6a, the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state (first (Second gaming state). On the other hand, in the big hit game, when the passing of the game ball to the V pass switch SW2 is not detected, that is, the game is not detected that the game ball has entered the V passage 2340g at least in the second detection period. If the condition is satisfied, a transition from the big hit gaming state to the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state (first gaming state) is made.

  Next, the operation timing in the big hit game when the special figure B is displayed in the special figure 1 and the big hit (15R big hit) will be described with reference to FIG. 79 (c). FIG. 79 (c) shows an example of the operation timing when the passing of the game ball to the V pass switch SW2 is detected in the big hit game, unlike FIG. 79 (a). Hereinafter, the description of the same operation as that in FIG. 79A will be omitted, and a different operation will be described.

  In the example shown in FIG. 79 (c), the 15th round ends and the 16th round starts at the timing t3, and the shutter member 2351a and the V shutter 2352a are displaced from the closed state to the open state as described above. Thereafter, the passage of the game ball to the V pass switch SW2 is detected at the timing of S1 until the shutter member 2351a and the V shutter 2352a are changed from the open state to the closed state. That is, the third game condition is established. In other words, the jackpot game shown in FIG. 79 (c) is a jackpot game that is an irregular probability change. As described above, the V passage effective period (first detection period) is set while the V shutter 2352a is displaced to the open state at least. During this period, the detection of the game ball to the V passage switch SW2 is performed. If there is, the second requirement will be satisfied.

  Thereafter, the jackpot end effect time indicated by the period E in the figure is set at the timing t5, and the jackpot end effect is executed in the period E, but the game state is shifted to the second game state after the jackpot game ends. First, the first effect B, which is an effect indicating the transition to the first gaming state, is executed as the jackpot end effect. In this example, for example, the first effect B is executed as the jackpot end effect corresponding to “Special Figure B” which is a 15R jackpot symbol. That is, the first effect B is not an effect that is executed on condition that the second requirement is satisfied. In other words, the execution condition of the first effect B does not include that the second requirement is satisfied. Alternatively, the first effect B executed during the big hit big hit game with the 15R big hit symbol (for example, “Special Figure B”) is based on information on whether or not the game ball has passed to the V pass switch SW2 (directly). (E.g., indirectly or indirectly), for example, based on information on the jackpot symbol. Note that the first effect B is an effect that may be executed when the second requirement is satisfied in the jackpot game with 15R jackpot (for example, the jackpot in “Special Figure B”). Good.

  Thereafter, the big hit game ends at the timing of t6 (that is, the third requirement is satisfied), and the gaming state shifts, but unlike the example shown in FIG. 79 (a), in the big hit game, the V pass switch SW2 is switched to. Since the passing of the game ball is detected, the big hit game state is shifted to the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state (second game state) at timing t6.

  Next, an example of the operation timing of the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) and the second variable winning opening 235a between rounds will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 80 (a) shows a state where the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is opened in the next round after the second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) is closed. FIG. 80B is a timing chart showing a first example of the timing of the first variable prize in the next round after the second variable prize opening 235a (second attacker) is closed. It is a timing chart which shows the 2nd example of the timing until the opening | mouth 234a (1st attacker) becomes an open state. FIG. 80 (c) shows the opening / closing of the second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) when the second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) opens and closes in at least two rounds in the big hit game. It is a timing chart explaining an example of a pattern. Here, A, B and C in the figure respectively indicate the types of gaming states, A is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, B is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state, C is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state.

  First, the second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) is closed until the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is opened in the next round. One example will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 80 (a), when a round in which the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is opened at the timing of t1 starts, the solenoid SOL1 is turned ON and the first variable winning opening 234a ( The first door member 2341a of the first attacker is displaced from the closed state to the open state. At this time, an effective period (attacker 1 effective period) for winning a prize to the first attacker for surely detecting a game ball that has entered the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is set. Is done. Thereafter, when the above-described round end condition is satisfied, the solenoid SOL1 is turned OFF at the timing t2, and the first door member 2341a is displaced from the open state to the closed state. At this time, a post-round closing time (second closing time: for example, 0.9 seconds) indicated by a period F in the figure is set, and the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) in the open state is set. In order to surely detect the game ball that entered the ball, the valid period for winning the first attacker is extended by a third time (for example, 1 second). In this example, the third time is set longer than the second closing time, but the third time may be set shorter than the second closing time, or the same time May be set. The second closing time and the third time can be set to arbitrary times.

  Subsequently, after the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is closed, when the second closing time elapses and the timing of t3 comes, the next round starts and the solenoid SOL2 is turned on. The shutter member 2351a is turned on and displaced from the closed state to the opened state, and the solenoid SOL3 is turned on and the V shutter 2352a is displaced from the closed state to the opened state. At this time, an effective period (Attacker 2 effective period) for winning the second attacker to surely detect a game ball that has entered the second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker), and V A V passing effective period is set as a period for treating the passing of the game ball to the passing switch SW2 as being effective. At this time, the first V opening time (for example, 0.1 second) described above is set. When the first V opening time elapses and the timing becomes t4, the solenoid SOL3 is turned OFF and the V shutter 2352a is displaced from the open state to the closed state. At this time, a first V closing time (for example, 3 seconds) is set. Further, at this time, the V passing effective period is extended by a fourth time (for example, 0.1 second) so that the game ball passed while the V shutter 2352a is in the open state can be reliably detected. The On the other hand, at the timing of t4, the above-described attacker 1 valid period ends. Needless to say, the valid period of the attacker 1 may not be the same as the timing of the displacement of the V shutter 2352a to the closed state. Then, when the fourth time elapses and the timing of t5 comes, the V passing effective period ends. On the other hand, since the second variable prize opening 235a is set to open for a long time (long open) with an open time of 29.0 seconds, the shutter continues even after the V shutter 2352a is closed. Member 2351a remains open.

  Thereafter, when the first V closing time elapses and the timing becomes t6, the solenoid SOL3 is turned ON again, and the V shutter 2352a is displaced from the closed state to the open state. At the same time, a V passage effective period is set. After that, for example, when the game ball that has entered the second variable prize opening 235a passes the V pass switch SW2 at the timing of t7, a detection signal is output from the V pass switch SW2. That is, the third game condition is established. Thereafter, when the above-described round end condition is satisfied, the solenoid SOL2 is turned OFF at the timing of t8, and the shutter member 2351a is displaced from the open state to the closed state. At this time, a post-round closing time (third closing time: for example, 0.9 seconds) indicated by a period G1 in the figure is set, and the second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) in the open state is set. In order to surely detect the game ball that entered the ball, the valid period for winning the second attacker is extended by a third time (for example, 1 second). In addition, the second V opening time (for example, 1.1) is set so that the game ball that has entered the second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) in the open state can pass through the V passing switch SW2. Second) is set. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 80 (a), the second V opening time is set so as to end 0.1 seconds after the second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) is closed. ing. Further, the V passing effective period is extended by a fifth time (for example, 1.2 seconds) so that a game ball passed while the V shutter 2352a is open can be reliably detected. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 80A, the V passage effective period is set so as to end 0.1 seconds after the V shutter 2352a is closed. In this example, the second closing time and the third closing time are set to the same time, but may be set to different times.

  Then, after the second variable prize winning opening 235a (second attacker) is closed, when the third closing time elapses and the timing becomes t9, the next round starts and the solenoid SOL1 is turned on. Thus, the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is displaced from the closed state to the open state. At this time, the valid period of the attacker 1 is set as described above.

  On the other hand, when the third time elapses and the timing becomes t10, the above-described attacker 2 effective period ends. Thereafter, when the second V opening time set as described above elapses and the timing becomes t11, the solenoid SOL3 is turned OFF and the V shutter 2352a is displaced from the open state to the closed state. Subsequently, when the fifth time has elapsed and the timing of t12 is reached, the V passing effective period ends.

  In this way, in the example shown in FIG. 80A, the timing from t10 to t12 is the timing after the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is in the open state, and between the rounds. In some cases, the closing time of the attacker can be shortened to reduce the loss of game balls due to so-called waste.

  Next, the timing at which the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is opened in the next round after the second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) is closed is shown. A second example will be described. This example is the same as the first example shown in FIG. 80 (a) except that the closing time after round set at the timing of t8 is different as shown in FIG. 80 (b). Only points will be described, and description of the same points will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 80 (b), in the second example, a post-round closing time (fourth closing time: for example, 1.3 seconds) indicated by a period G2 in the drawing is set at the timing t8, and thereafter When the fourth closing time has elapsed and the timing of t13 is reached, the next round starts, the solenoid SOL1 is turned ON, and the first door member of the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) 2341a is displaced from the closed state to the open state. At this time, the valid period of the attacker 1 is set as described above.

  In this way, in the example shown in FIG. 80 (b), the next round starts after the timing of t10 to t12, and the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is set to the open state. ing. Therefore, after the processing related to the first round in which the second attacker is released can be completed, the processing of the second round executed following the first round can be started. May be mitigated.

  FIG. 80 (c) shows a second variable winning opening when the second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) is opened and closed in at least two rounds (for example, the 14th and 16th rounds) in the jackpot game. It is an example of the opening / closing pattern of 235a (2nd attacker).

  In this example, the opening / closing pattern of the second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) in the first V opening round (14th round) and the second variable in the second V opening round (16th round). The opening / closing pattern of the winning opening 235a (second attacker) is different, but the opening / closing pattern of the V shutter 2352a is the same in both the first V opening round and the second V opening round.

  Next, the operation from the start of the variation display of the special figure that becomes a big hit until the end of the big hit game will be described.

  FIG. 81 is a timing chart showing an example of the operation from the start of the variation display of the special figure that is a big hit until the end of the big hit game. This example shows the operation when special figure B is displayed in special figure 1 and a substantial 15R big hit is achieved. Here, A, B and C in the figure respectively indicate the types of gaming states, A is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, B is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state, C is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state.

  As shown in FIG. 81, when the variation display start condition in FIG. 1 is satisfied, the variation in FIG. 1 is started at the timing t1. At this time, the gaming state is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. Thereafter, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is stopped at the timing t2, and the display result (for example, the special figure B) is derived. Subsequently, after the big hit game is started at the timing of t3 and the big hit start effect is executed, the first round is started at the timing of t4 and the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is in the closed state. Displaces to the open state. Thereafter, when the round end condition is satisfied, the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is displaced from the open state to the closed state at the timing of t5, and the inter-round effect is executed. Subsequently, at the timing of t6, when the second round starts and the first variable prize opening 234a (first attacker) is displaced from the closed state to the open state, and the round end condition is satisfied, at the timing of t7. The first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is displaced from the open state to the closed state, and the inter-round effect is executed. The above-described operation is repeated until the 15th round is completed. Thereafter, when the 16th round starts at the timing of t8, the second variable prize opening 235a (second attacker) is displaced from the closed state to the open state, and the V shutter 2352a is also displaced from the closed state to the open state. In this example, since the second attacker is open for a short time (for example, 0.1 seconds), there is almost no possibility of winning a game ball to the second attacker. After that, at the timing of t9, the second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) and the V shutter 2352a are both displaced from the open state to the closed state, and the big hit game end effect is executed. Thereafter, the big hit game ends at the timing of t10, the gaming state is shifted, and the variable display of FIG. 1 is started. At this time, when the start of the variable display of the special figure 2 is suspended, the variable display of the special figure 2 is started in preference to the special figure 1. In this example, there is no passing of the game ball to the V passing switch SW2 in the big hit game, so after the big hit game, the state shifts to the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state.

  In this example, a series of effects can be executed in the period indicated by H in the figure. As a series of effects, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 20 to 36, the effects shown in FIGS. 38 to 43, the effects shown in FIGS. 51 to 67, and FIGS. 82 to 87 described later. 90-95, examples shown in FIGS. 98-100, examples shown in FIGS. 103-106, examples shown in FIG. 108, etc. are applicable. It is.

  Next, a specific effect example in the pachinko machine of this example will be described.

  FIG. 82 is a diagram showing an example of a specific effect example in the eighth example of the pachinko machine. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 82 (a), “decoration 3” — “decoration 4” — “decoration 1”, which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the loss, is fixedly displayed. Also, any one of the first special figure 1 hold display h11, the second special figure 1 hold display h12, the third special figure 1 hold display h13, and the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. Are also displayed in the default display mode.

  82 also shows a first special figure display device 212, a first special figure hold lamp 218, a second special figure display device 214, and a second special figure hold lamp 220. In FIG. 82A, since there are four variable display hold numbers in FIG. 1, four lamps in the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit.

  In addition, on the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214, the special symbol “special drawing E” is stopped and displayed. In the upper right corner portion of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 variably displayed corresponding to the display state of the first special symbol display device 212 and the display state of the second special symbol display device 214. The special figure 2 and the 4th symbol t2 variably displayed are displayed. In FIG. 82A, the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 correspond to the “special symbol E” that is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 212, for example, a white circle that is a lost symbol is stopped. It is displayed in the displayed state. The special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is in a state in which, for example, a white square mark that is a lost symbol is stopped and displayed in correspondence with the “special figure E” that is stopped and displayed on the second special figure display device 214. It is displayed. In FIG. 82 and subsequent figures, the special symbol 1 and the 4th symbol t1 and the special symbol 2 and the 4th symbol t2 are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in such a manner that the symbols that are stopped and displayed can be recognized. However, in actuality, the symbols that are stopped and displayed are displayed in a manner that is difficult for the player to recognize. In addition, the special figure 1 4th symbol t1 and the special figure 2 4th symbol t2 may be displayed in a manner recognizable to the player.

  In FIG. 82 (b), the special figure 1 hold (first hold) is digested, and only the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the third special figure 1 hold display h13 are displayed. In addition, the first special symbol display device 212 shown in FIG. 82 (b) has started the symbol variation display, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started the variation display of the decorative symbols. Note that various effects are possible in the decorative symbol variation display, and such an effect executed during the decorative symbol variation display is an example of a third effect. The third effect is not limited to display on the decorative symbol display device 208, but can also be executed by outputting sound from the speaker 120, blinking various lamps 418, or the like. Further, the third effect may include a pre-reading notice effect, a notice effect in the change, and the like. During the symbol variation display, the first special figure display device 212 repeats blinking in which all of the seven segments are turned on, turned off for a moment, and all of the seven segments are turned on again. In response to the symbol fluctuation display of the first special symbol display device 212, for example, the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 are also displayed in a manner that the colors shown in the circles change into a plurality of types.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 82 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first stop and the second stop are performed, and “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c, respectively. And a reach state is formed. At this time, you may make it perform the effect which alert | reports that it became the reach state. The effect of informing that such a reach state has been reached is an example of a third effect.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 82 (d), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a display that develops into super reach. In the super reach state, the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed small in the upper left corner. Such an effect in super reach is an example of a third effect.

  Thereafter, when super reach is finished, as shown in FIG. 82 (e), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the third stop, and “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The symbol begins to fluctuate. In other words, a temporary stop display is made with a combination of decorative patterns of “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 82 (f), the special figure A, which is the 16R jackpot symbol, is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212, and the first special figure 1 is displayed in the fourth figure t1. A black circle symbol corresponding to “Special Figure A” that is stopped and displayed on the figure display device 212 is stopped and displayed. Correspondingly, the decoration symbol display device 208 displays the combination of the decoration symbols of “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4” in a stopped manner (determined display), and one special game of variable game is played. finish.

  When “Special Figure A” is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212, the big hit game is started, and the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 executes a big hit start effect as shown in FIG. 82 (g). At this time, a display for instructing right-handed is also performed.

  Thereafter, when the big hit start effect is finished and the process proceeds to the first round, as shown in FIG. 82 (h), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays that it is the first round of the big hit game. In the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, a combination of the decorative symbols that have been confirmed is displayed. In addition, the number of consecutive resorts is displayed in the lower left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. Since the big hit game this time is the first big hit game that has shifted from the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state (normal game state), a display to that effect is displayed in the lower left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. "First time" is displayed. In the lower center part of FIG. 82 (h), the control state in the main control unit 300 is shown, indicating that the control state is the first round of the big hit game.

  FIG. 82 (i) shows the contents of the effect in the fourth round. As shown in FIG. 82 (i), in the decorative symbol display device 208, in the 16th round, whether or not there is a great chance that the second variable winning opening 235a is open for a long time and is easy to pass V. As a result, the contents of the effect that succeeded in the promotion effect are executed. That is, it is notified that the game is a big hit game in which the third game condition is easily established. As shown in FIG. 82 (i), the main control unit 300 is in the control state of the fourth round.

  Thereafter, when the big hit game progresses and the 15th round is reached, an effect as shown in FIG. 82 (j) is executed. That is, as shown in FIG. 82 (j), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays that it is the 15th round of the big hit game, and allows V to pass in the next round, that is, the 16th round. “Aim at V at next R” is displayed. As a result, the player may be able to reliably pass V. As shown in FIG. 82 (j), the main control unit 300 is in the control state of the 15th round.

  Thereafter, at the 16th round, the second variable prize opening 235a is opened, and the V shutter 2352a is opened so that V can be easily passed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, FIG. As shown in (), a display indicating that it is the 16th round is performed, and a display “V Aim” that promotes the passage of V is performed. As shown in FIG. 82 (k), the main control unit 300 is in the control state of the 16th round.

  If there is a game ball passing (V passing) to the V passing switch SW2 in the second variable prize winning opening 235a at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (l), as shown in FIG. The symbol display device 208 displays “V”, which is a notification that the probability variation has been confirmed. That is, the display of “V”, which is a notification that the probability change has been confirmed, is displayed based on the fact that V has passed.

  Thereafter, when the 16th round is completed, a big hit game end effect is performed in a manner as shown in FIG. 82 (n). In the jackpot game described above, the third game condition is established by passing V in the 16th round, so 150 symbols of change display are made after the jackpot game is over (after the third requirement is satisfied). While it is being performed, it shifts to a probable change state (special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state). Therefore, in the end effect of the big hit game, the “Yoshimune mode entry” display (second effect) indicating the transition to the probable change state is performed.

  When the big hit game is finished as described above, the state shifts to a probability change state (special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state), and as shown in FIG. 82 (o), the decorative symbol display device 208 is in a probability change state. The “Yoshimune Mode” effect is executed, and “Defeat the enemy and hit the jackpot” is explained to explain the contents of the jackpot display. At this time, since there was no hold of the variable display of the special figure 2 and there were three hold of the variable display of the special figure 1, the hold (the first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested, and the first special figure display device The symbol variation display 212 is started, and the decoration symbol display device 208 also starts the variation display of the decoration symbol. The decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner at the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the remaining number of symbol variation displays in which the probability variation state can be executed is displayed at the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is decremented by one each time symbol variation display is started. Further, on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special figure 2 hold display h21, the second special figure 2 hold display h22, the third special figure 2 hold display h23, and the fourth special figure 2 hold display are displayed. Although h24 is displayed, since there is no hold of the variable display of the special figure 2, it is displayed that both are blank. In addition, the display of the number of consecutive resorts and the display for instructing the right-hand hit, which have been displayed in the big hit game, are continued.

  Thereafter, during the execution of the symbol fluctuation display of the first special figure display device 212, if there are at least four game balls winning in the second special figure start port 232, the fluctuation display of the four special figures 2 is suspended. Then, as shown in FIG. 82 (p), all four holding lamps in the second special figure holding lamp 220 are lit. In addition, in the first special figure 2 hold display h21 to the fourth special figure 2 hold display h24, the hold display in the default display mode is performed.

  FIG. 83 is a diagram showing an example of a specific effect example in the eighth example of the pachinko machine. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 83 (a) to 83 (e) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 82 (a) to 82 (e) and described above, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

  In the example shown in FIG. 83 (f), the decoration symbol display device 208 displays the combination of the decoration symbols “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4” stopped (determined display). The special display B, which is a 16R big hit symbol, is stopped and displayed on the graphic display device 212, and the special graphic B is stopped and displayed on the first special graphic display device 212 in the special graphic 1 and the fourth graphic t1. The corresponding blue circle symbol is stopped and displayed.

  When “Special Figure B” is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212, the big hit game is started, and the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 executes a big hit start effect as shown in FIG. 83 (g). Note that the effects shown in FIG. 83 (g) and FIG. 83 (h) are the same as those shown in FIG. 82 (g) and FIG. 82 (h), and will not be described here.

  Thereafter, in the fourth round, the production contents as shown in FIG. 83 (i) are executed. That is, as shown in FIG. 83 (i), the decorative symbol display device 208 executes the contents of the effect that failed in the promotion effect as a result of the promotion effect described above. That is, it is informed that the game is a big hit game in which the third game condition is difficult to be established. Such a failure effect is continued until the 15th round, as shown in FIG. 83 (j).

  After that, when the big hit game progresses and becomes the 16th round, the second variable winning opening 235a is opened and the V shutter 2352a is opened, both of which are open for a very short time. Therefore, it is extremely difficult to pass V. In the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 83 (k), the above-described failure effect is continuously performed even in the 16th round.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 83 (l), there is no passing of the game ball to the V pass switch SW2, and as shown in FIG. 83 (m), when the 16th round is completed, as shown in FIG. 83 (n). The end effect of the big hit game is performed in such a manner. In the jackpot game described above, the third game condition was not satisfied because there was no V pass in the 16th round, so 100 games after the jackpot game ended (after satisfying the third requirement). While the symbol variation display is performed, the electronic support state (the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state) is entered. In the end effect of the big hit game, a “search mode entry” display (first effect) indicating that the state is shifted to the electric support state is performed.

  When the big hit game is finished as described above, the state shifts to the electric support state (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state), and in the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. An effect of “search mode” to a certain extent is executed, and a display of “big hit with princess discovery” explaining the contents of the effect display that is a big hit is performed. At this time, since there was no hold of the variable display of the special figure 2 and there were three hold of the variable display of the special figure 1, the hold (the first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested, and the first special figure display device The symbol variation display 212 is started, and the decoration symbol display device 208 also starts the variation display of the decoration symbol. The decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner at the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the remaining number of symbol variation displays that can execute the electric support state is displayed at the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is decremented by one each time symbol variation display is started. Further, on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special figure 2 hold display h21, the second special figure 2 hold display h22, the third special figure 2 hold display h23, and the fourth special figure 2 hold display are displayed. Although h24 is displayed, since there is no hold of the variable display of the special figure 2, it is displayed that both are blank. In addition, the display of the number of consecutive resorts and the display for instructing the right-hand hit, which have been displayed in the big hit game, are continued.

  Thereafter, during the execution of the symbol fluctuation display of the first special figure display device 212, if there are at least four game balls winning in the second special figure start port 232, the fluctuation display of the four special figures 2 is suspended. Then, as shown in FIG. 83 (p), all four holding lamps in the second special figure holding lamp 220 are lit. In addition, in the first special figure 2 hold display h21 to the fourth special figure 2 hold display h24, the hold display in the default display mode is performed.

  In the probability variation state or the electric support state, even in the big hit game that is transferred when the third game condition such as special figure B in FIG. There is a case. Or in such a case, you may perform the specific production different from this production example.

  FIG. 84 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect example in the eighth example of the pachinko machine. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. The effects shown in FIGS. 84 (a) to 84 (h) are the same as those described with reference to FIGS. 82 (a) to 82 (h) and will not be described here.

  FIG. 84 (i) shows the contents of the effect in the fourth round. That is, as shown in FIG. 84 (i), in the decorative symbol display device 208, as a result of the promotion effect described above, the content of the effect that failed in the promotion effect is executed. That is, at this time, it is suggested that the game is a big hit game in which the third game condition is hardly established.

  However, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 84 (j), in the fourteenth round, the resurrection effect is performed, and the effect contents indicating that the promotion effect is successful is executed in the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, it is informed that the game is a big hit game in which the third game condition is easily established.

  Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 84 (k) to 84 (q) are performed. These effects are the same as those described above with reference to FIGS. 82 (j) to 82 (p).

  Note that, as in this production example, for example, the opening pattern of the second variable prize opening 235a is different between the jackpot game where the revival effect is performed after the failure effect and the jackpot game where the success effect is performed. In addition, as a result, it may be possible to differentiate the profit by changing the number of balls in the jackpot game.

  FIG. 85 is a diagram showing an example of a specific effect example in the eighth example of the pachinko machine. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. The effects shown in FIGS. 85 (a) to 85 (k) are the same as those described above with reference to FIGS. 83 (a) to 83 (k), and the description thereof is omitted here.

  FIG. 85 (l) shows a state in which a game ball has passed (V passage) to the V passage switch SW2, unlike the example shown in FIG. 83 (l). Then, as shown in FIG. 85 (m), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “V”, which is a notification that the probability variation has been confirmed. In this case, “V” may not be displayed. Further, a unique display other than the display of “V” may be performed. Further, instead of displaying “V”, notification may be performed by other notification means (for example, output of sound, blinking of a lamp, etc.) other than the display. Further, when the notification that the probability variation has been confirmed is executed by a plurality of types of means (for example, a notification means by voice output and a notification means by display), the notification may be executed only by some means. .

  Then, when the 16th round is finished, a big hit game finish effect is performed in a manner as shown in FIG. 85 (n). In this production example, although there was a V pass in the 16th round, it occurred in a big hit game in which the third game condition is difficult to be satisfied (that is, an irregular V pass), so that the transition to the probability change state is made. “Yoshimune mode entry” is not displayed (second effect), but “search mode entry” is displayed (first effect) indicating that the mode is shifted to the electric support state, as shown in FIG. 85 (n). ) Is performed. In this case, you may make it display that the period which is an electric support state is until symbol change display of 100 times is performed. In this example, whether or not to display “search mode entry” is determined based on, for example, the type of jackpot symbol, and is not displayed based on whether or not there is a V pass. Absent. In addition, regarding whether or not to display “search mode entry”, it is a big hit game that has made a big hit with a big hit symbol (for example, “special figure B”) indicating that it is a big hit that the third game condition is difficult to be established. In the state, the determination may be made based on the presence of V passage.

  When the big hit game is completed as described above, the state shifts to the probability change state (special figure high probability normal figure high probability state), and the effects as shown in FIGS. 85 (o) and 85 (p) are executed. The effects shown in FIG. 85 (o) and FIG. 85 (p) are the same as those shown in FIG. 82 (o) and FIG. 82 (p), and will not be described here.

  In the above-described effect example, one kind of effect in the probability variation state and one effect in the electric support state are shown, but there may be a plurality of kinds, for example, different depending on the type of the special figure that is stopped and displayed. It may be. Also, one type of each of the first effect and the second effect is shown, but there may be a plurality of types. For example, in the first effect, the effect of displaying the above-mentioned “search mode entry”. In addition, as shown in FIG. 85 (q), an effect of displaying “adventure mode entry” may be executed. The same applies to the second performance.

  In the probability variation state or the electric support state, even in the big hit game that is transferred when the third game condition such as special figure B in FIG. There is a case.

  FIG. 86 is a diagram showing an example of a specific effect example in the eighth example of the pachinko machine. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. The effects shown in FIGS. 86 (a) to 86 (k) are the same as those described with reference to FIGS. 82 (a) to 82 (k) and will not be described here.

  In FIG. 86 (l), unlike the example shown in FIG. 82 (l), there is no passing of the game ball (V passage) to the V passage switch SW2, and the state where the 16th round is completed is shown. Then, as shown in FIG. 86 (m), a “search mode entry” display (first effect) indicating the transition to the electric support state is performed. In this production example, the game is in the second big hit game state that is likely to be shifted to the probable change state, but because the third game condition is not satisfied due to the absence of V passing in the 16th round (that is, by the irregular This indicates that the first effect is being performed (because V has not passed).

  When the big hit game is finished as described above, the state shifts to the electric support state (the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state), and the effects as shown in FIGS. 86 (n) and 86 (o) are executed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 86 (n) and 86 (o) are the same as those described above with reference to FIGS. 83 (o) and 83 (p), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In addition, in the production example described above, the case where there is no V passage after the success production is performed is shown. However, as shown in FIG. 84, the revival production is performed after the failure production, and then V passes. The same effect is also performed when there is no. Here, when the revival effect is performed after the failure effect, and there is no V passage after that, for example, an effect having a content different from that shown in FIG. 86 (m) may be performed as the first effect. Good. Further, the effect in the electric support state may be different from the “search mode”.

  FIG. 87 is a diagram showing an example of a specific effect example in the eighth example of the pachinko machine. The effect example shown in FIG. 87 is different from the effect example shown in FIG. 86 except that the effect shown in FIG. 86 (m) is different from the effect shown in FIG. 87 (m). Only the point will be described, and the description of other points will be omitted.

  In FIG. 87 (m), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 86 (m), a “Yoshimune mode entry” display (second effect) indicating that the state is to be changed to the probability change state is performed. In this production example, in the second jackpot gaming state that is likely to be shifted to the probability variation state, even if the third gaming condition is not satisfied due to the absence of V passage in the 16th round, the state is shifted to the electric support state. The second effect is performed without displaying the “search mode entry” indicating “the first effect”. In this case, for example, the second effect is to determine whether or not to display based on the type of jackpot symbol without determining whether or not to display based on whether or not V has passed. Alternatively, it may be determined whether or not to display based on whether or not V has passed.

  In this example, in the second big hit game state, when the irregular V is not passed, only one of the effect example shown in FIG. 86 and the effect example shown in FIG. 87 is executed. You may make it perform both.

  Next, a ninth example of a game machine to which the present invention can be applied will be described. Hereinafter, the difference from the items described so far will be mainly described. The pachinko machine 100 in this example is described as an example provided with the attacker unit 2340 shown in FIG. 74. Of course, this example is also applied to the pachinko machine 100 provided with the game board 200 as shown in FIG. Can also be applied.

  FIG. 88 (a-1) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect (first symbol aspect) of the special figure 1 in the ninth example of the pachinko machine. FIG. 88 (a-2) It shows an example of the stop symbol aspect (first symbol aspect) of the special figure 2 in the pachinko machine of the second example.

  In FIG. 88 (a-1) and FIG. 88 (a-2), five types of special drawings from “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure E” are shown as stop symbol forms in the symbol variation display.

  Also in the ninth example, the stop symbol form of special figure 1 and the stop symbol aspect of special figure 2 are common. In the ninth example, there are 16 round big hits and 4 round big hits, both of which are big hits with electric support. Specifically, in Special Figure 2, the jackpot symbols are all jackpots (special jackpots) that are expected to be probable, and “Special Figure A” and “Special Figure B” are 16 round jackpots. "C" is a big hit for 4 rounds. On the other hand, in Special Figure 1, only “Special Figure A” and “Special Figure B” are jackpots (special jackpots) scheduled to be probable, and “Special Figure C” is a jackpot that is not scheduled to acquire a probable change, “Special Figure A” is a big hit for 16 rounds, and “Special Figure B” and “Special Figure C” are a big hit for 4 rounds. In this way, "Special Figure A" and "Special Figure B" in Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 in Special Figure, which are special jackpots where the second jackpot gaming state that is likely to shift to the second gaming state is started. A "to" Special Figure C "may be referred to as the second symbol, and the jackpot at which the first jackpot gaming state is not started (that is, it is difficult to shift to the second gaming state) is not scheduled to acquire the probability variation. “Special figure C” in special figure 1 is sometimes referred to as a first symbol.

  FIG. 88 (b-1) shows an example of the action of the attacker during the jackpot game of FIG. 1 and the game state to be transferred after the jackpot game. FIG. 88 (b-2) shows the special chart. An example of the operation of the attacker during the jackpot game of 2 and the game state to be transferred after the jackpot game are shown.

  In the jackpot game to which the special figure A is displayed in the special figure 1 and transferred, the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is opened for 29.0 seconds from the first round to the third round, and in the fourth round, The second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) is opened for 29.0 seconds, and the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is opened for 29.0 seconds from the 5th round to the 16th round. That is, the special figure A in the special figure 1 is a pattern indicating that a large number of game balls are 16 round big hits that can enter the variable winning opening in any round from 1 round to 16 rounds.

  In the jackpot game to which the special figure B is displayed in the special figure 1 and is transferred, the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is opened for 29.0 seconds from the first round to the third round, and in the fourth round, The second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) is opened for 29.0 seconds. That is, the special figure B in the special figure 1 is a pattern indicating that a large number of game balls can be put into the variable winning opening in any round from 1 round to 4 rounds.

  In the jackpot game to which the special figure C is displayed in the special figure 1, the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is opened for 29.0 seconds from the first round to the third round. The second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) is opened only for 0.1 second. That is, in the special figure C in the special figure 1, from 1 to 3 rounds, many game balls can enter the variable winning opening in any round, but in the 4th round, entering the variable winning opening. It is a design showing that it is a real 3 round jackpot with almost no possibility of.

  In the jackpot game to which the “Special Figure A” and “Special Figure B” are displayed in the special figure 2, the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is 29.0 from the first round to the third round. The second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) is opened for 29.0 seconds in the 4th round, and the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is opened from the 5th round to the 16th round. Release for 29.0 seconds. In other words, special figure A and special figure B in special figure 2 are symbols indicating that 16 gaming rounds are possible to enter a variable winning opening in any round from 1 round to 16 rounds. is there.

  In the jackpot game to which the transition is made with “Special Figure C” displayed in the special figure 2, the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is opened for 29.0 seconds from the first round to the third round, and the fourth round Then, the second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) is opened for 29.0 seconds. That is, the special figure C in the special figure 2 is a pattern indicating that a large number of game balls can be placed in the variable winning opening in any round from 1 round to 4 rounds.

  In this example, in any jackpot game with any of the above-mentioned symbols, there are four rounds, and a game ball that is entered while the second variable winning opening 235a is opened is provided in the probability variation area in the second variable winning opening 235a. When the V passing switch SW2 is passed, the probability variation operating region is turned ON, and after the big hit game is finished, while the symbol variation display is performed 150 times, the special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state which is an example of the second game state Is maintained. On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the V passing switch SW2 in the big hit game, the probability variation operation region is not turned ON (the probability variation operation region remains OFF), and after the big hit game ends, 100 symbols. While the variable display is performed, the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state which is an example of the first gaming state is maintained.

  In the ninth example, the third game condition is satisfied when the game ball passes through the V passing switch SW2 of the second variable prize opening 235a (second attacker) in the fourth round. Therefore, the big hit by special figure C of special figure 1 is not 0%, but the possibility is very low, and it can be said that it is a big hit that is not scheduled to be acquired. On the other hand, the big hit by special figures A and B of special figure 1 has a sufficient opening time of the second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker), and the possibility of passing the game ball to the V passage switch SW2 It is high, and it can be said that it is a big hit scheduled to get a certain change.

  Also, the action of the attacker in the jackpot game to which the special figure A and B are displayed in the special figure 2 is the same as the action of the attacker in the special figure A in the special figure 1. Also, the action of the attacker in the jackpot game to which the special figure C is displayed in the special figure 2 is the same as the action of the attacker in the special figure B in the special figure 1. Therefore, any of the big hits by the special winning symbols (special illustrations A to C) of the special figure 2 has a sufficient opening time of the second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker), and the game to the V pass switch SW2 The possibility of passing the sphere is high, and it can be said that it is a big hit scheduled to acquire certainty. It should be noted that the operation of the attacker in the big hit according to the special figures A to C in the special figure 2 may be different from the operation mode of the attacker in the big hit according to the special figure A or the special figure B in the special figure 1.

  In this way, the big hit gaming state in which the third gaming condition is difficult to be satisfied is called the first big hit gaming state, as in the big hit game with the four round big hit that is displayed and transferred in the special figure C in the special figure 1. Yes, special figure A in special figure 1 and special figure A and special figure B in special figure 2 are displayed and the big hit game by 16 round big hits, special figure B in special figure 1 and special figure in special figure 2 The jackpot gaming state in which the third gaming condition is more likely to be established and the second gaming state is easier to start than the first jackpot gaming state, as in the jackpot gaming by the four round jackpot in which C is displayed and transferred. There is a second big hit game state.

  Next, the operations of the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) and the second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) in the jackpot game in this example will be described with reference to FIG. .

  FIG. 89 (a) is a diagram for explaining the operations of the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) and the second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) in a big round of four rounds (substantially three rounds). FIG. 89 (b) is a diagram for explaining the operations of the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) and the second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) in the special round-win of four rounds. FIG. 89 (c) is a diagram for explaining the operations of the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) and the second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) in the 16 round special jackpot. 89 (d) shows the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) and the second variable winning opening 235a (second attack) in 16 rounds (substantially 3 rounds) of big hit. ) Is a diagram for describing the operation of the.

  In this example, the round in which the second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) is opened is the fourth round in any big hit. In other words, in any big win, the second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) is opened in the same round, and V passage can occur.

  Next, a specific effect example in the pachinko machine of this example will be described.

  FIG. 90 is a diagram illustrating a specific effect example in the jackpot game of 4R special jackpot. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  As described above, when “Special Figure B” is stopped and displayed in the first special figure display device 212 and the big hit game is started, as shown in FIG. A message indicating that the game is in the first round is displayed, and a display for instructing the player to make a right turn is performed. In the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, a combination of the decorative symbols that have been confirmed is displayed. In addition, the number of consecutive resorts is displayed in the lower left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this big hit game, since it is the first big hit game that has shifted from the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state (normal game state), the display of the number of consecutive games is “first”.

  In this effect example, when the big hit game is started, an effect is made in which it is difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the 16th round big hit is executed up to the 16th round. That is, at the start of the big hit game, the performance is performed in a manner in which it is difficult to recognize whether it is a big hit of 4 rounds or a big hit of 16 rounds.

  FIG. 90B shows the contents of the effect in the second round. As shown in FIG. 90 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, in the fourth round, whether or not there is a great chance that the second variable winning opening 235a is open for a long time and is easy to pass V. As a result, the contents of the effect that succeeded in the promotion effect are executed. That is, it is notified that the game is a big hit game in which the third game condition is easily established.

  Thereafter, in the third round, as shown in FIG. 90 (c), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays that it is the third round of the jackpot game, and in the next round, that is, the fourth round. The message “Aim at V at next R” is displayed to prompt the user to pass V. As a result, the player may be able to reliably pass V.

  Thereafter, in the fourth round, the second variable prize opening 235a is opened, and the V shutter 2352a is opened so that V can be easily passed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, FIG. ), A display indicating that the current position is the fourth round is displayed, and “V Aim” is displayed to promote the passage of V.

  If there is a game ball passing (V passing) to the V passing switch SW2 in the second variable prize winning opening 235a at the timing shown in FIG. 90 (e), as shown in FIG. The symbol display device 208 displays “V”, which is a notification that the probability variation has been confirmed.

  In this example effect, an effect for notifying whether or not the fifth round or later (extra round) is executed during the big hit game may be performed. In this case, for example, a failure effect may be performed to notify that the fifth and subsequent rounds are not executed.

  Thereafter, when the fourth round is completed, a big hit game end effect is performed in a manner as shown in FIG. 90 (g). In the jackpot game described above, the third game condition is satisfied by passing V in the fourth round, so the probability variation state (special high probability map) is displayed while the symbol variation display is performed 150 times after the jackpot game. (High probability state). In the end effect of the big hit game, a “Yoshimune mode entry” display (second effect) indicating the transition to the probable change state is performed.

  FIG. 91 is a diagram illustrating a specific effect example in the jackpot game of 16R special jackpot. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  As described above, when "Special Figure A" is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212 and the big hit game is started, as shown in FIG. A message indicating that the game is in the first round is displayed, and a display for instructing the player to make a right turn is performed. In the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, a combination of the decorative symbols that have been confirmed is displayed. In addition, the number of consecutive resorts is displayed in the lower left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this big hit game, since it is the first big hit game that has shifted from the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state (normal game state), the display of the number of consecutive games is “first”.

  Also in this production example, when the big hit game is started, an effect is made in which it is difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the 16 round big hit is executed up to the 16th round. That is, at the start of the big hit game, the performance is performed in a manner in which it is difficult to recognize whether it is a big hit of 4 rounds or a big hit of 16 rounds.

  Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 91 (b) to 91 (f) are performed. These effects are the same as those described above with reference to FIGS. 90 (b) to 90 (f).

  In this production example, following the notification that there is a V passage and the probability variation acquisition is confirmed as shown in FIG. 91 (f), the fifth and subsequent rounds (extra round) as shown in FIG. 91 (g). An effect of displaying “extra round get” to be executed is performed. That is, it is notified that it is a 16 round special big hit. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “SUPER” characters indicating that it is a 16-round special big hit below the decorative symbol combination displayed in the upper left corner.

  In this production example, the notification that the extra round is executed after the notification that the probability variation has been confirmed (display of “V”) is performed, but the extra round is executed. After the display, the notification that the probability variation acquisition is confirmed may be performed, or these may be performed simultaneously. Further, in this effect example, the indication that the extra round is executed is the V passage timing, but it may be displayed at a timing other than the V passage. For example, at the end of the fourth round, It may be executed when the first notification time has elapsed since the start of the round.

  Thereafter, up to the 16th round, after the big hit effect as shown in FIG. 91 (h) is executed, the end effect of the big hit game is performed in the manner shown in FIG. 91 (i). In the jackpot game described above, the third game condition is satisfied by passing V in the fourth round, so the probability variation state (special high probability map) is displayed while the symbol variation display is performed 150 times after the jackpot game. (High probability state). In the end effect of the big hit game, a “Yoshimune mode entry” display (second effect) indicating the transition to the probable change state is performed.

  FIG. 92 is a diagram showing another example of specific effects in the jackpot game of 16R special jackpot. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. Unlike the effect example shown in FIG. 91, this effect example is an effect in which an effect in a state in which it has been notified that it is a 16-round special jackpot since the jackpot game is started is executed.

  As described above, when “Special Figure A” is stopped and displayed in the first special figure display device 212 and the big hit game is started, as shown in FIG. A message indicating that the game is in the first round is displayed, and a display for instructing the player to make a right turn is performed. In the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, a combination of the decorative symbols that have been confirmed is displayed. Here, “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” are stopped and displayed as a combination of the decorative symbols, and further below that “SUPER” indicates that it is a 16-round special jackpot Is displayed. In other words, the combination of the decorative pattern of “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” is stopped and displayed, so that the second variable prize opening 235a is opened for a long time and passes V in the fourth round. It is notified in advance that a great chance of becoming an easy state is reached, and by displaying the letters “SUPER”, it is notified in advance that the extra round will be executed. In this example, when the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” is stopped and displayed, the characters “SUPER” are always displayed at the start of the big hit game. The execution of the extra round is notified in advance, but the character “SUPER” is not displayed even when the combination of the decoration pattern “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” is stopped. It may be difficult to recognize whether it is a 4-round big hit or a 16-round big hit at the start of the big hit game. In the lower left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of consecutive resorts is displayed. In this big hit game, since it is the first big hit game that has shifted from the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state (normal game state), the display of the number of consecutive games is “first”.

  Thereafter, until the second round, the big hit effect as shown in FIG. 92 (b) is continuously performed. In this production example, when the big hit game is started, it is informed that the second variable prize winning opening 235a is opened for a long time in the fourth round, and a great chance to easily pass V is reached. No promotion will be performed. In addition, the combination of the decorative pattern of “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” is stopped and displayed, and in the fourth round, the second variable winning opening 235a is open for a long time and easily passes V. Even if it is notified in advance at the start of the jackpot game that a big chance to come, the promotion effect may be performed during the jackpot game.

  Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 92 (c) to 92 (f) are performed. These effects are the same as those described above with reference to FIGS. 91 (c) to 91 (f).

  In this production example, as described above, it is informed in advance that the extra round will be executed at the start of the big hit game, so that notification that the probability variation acquisition has been confirmed (display of “V”) has been performed. A display indicating that the extra round will be executed later is not performed, and the above-mentioned jackpot effect is executed as shown in FIG. This jackpot effect is executed until the end of the 16th round, as shown in FIG. 92 (h). Also in this effect example, an effect of displaying that the extra round is executed may be executed in the manner as shown in FIG. 91 (g).

  In this way, after the big hit effect is executed up to the 16th round, the big hit game end effect is performed in the manner shown in FIG. 92 (i). In the jackpot game described above, the third game condition is satisfied by passing V in the fourth round, so the probability variation state (special high probability map) is displayed while the symbol variation display is performed 150 times after the jackpot game. (High probability state). In the end effect of the big hit game, a “Yoshimune mode entry” display (second effect) indicating the transition to the probable change state is performed.

  FIG. 93 is a diagram showing a specific effect example in the big hit game of 4R big hit (substantially 3R big hit). The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  As described above, when “Special Figure C” is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212 and the big hit game is started, as shown in FIG. A message indicating that the game is in the first round is displayed, and a display for instructing the player to make a right turn is performed. In the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, a combination of the decorative symbols that have been confirmed is displayed. In addition, the number of consecutive resorts is displayed in the lower left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this big hit game, since it is the first big hit game that has shifted from the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state (normal game state), the display of the number of consecutive games is “first”.

  In this production example, when the big hit game is started, the player makes it difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the 16th round big hit is executed up to the 16th round. That is, at the start of the big hit game, the performance is performed in a manner in which it is difficult to recognize whether it is a big hit for four rounds (or a big hit for three rounds) or a big hit for 16 rounds.

  FIG. 93B shows the content of the effect in the second round. As shown in FIG. 93 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the above-described promotion effect is performed, and as a result, the effect content that failed in the promotion effect is executed. That is, it is informed that the game is a big hit game in which the third game condition is difficult to be established.

  Thereafter, in the third round, as shown in FIG. 93 (c), the above-described jackpot effect is executed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, in the fourth round, the second variable prize opening 235a is opened and the V shutter 2352a is opened. However, since both are open for a very short time, it is extremely difficult to pass V. It has become. In the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 93 (d), the above-mentioned jackpot effect is continuously performed even in the fourth round.

  FIG. 93 (e) shows a state where the game ball has passed (V pass) to the V pass switch SW2 in the fourth round. Then, as shown in FIG. 93 (f), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “V”, which is a notification that the probability variation has been confirmed.

  When the fourth round is completed, a big hit game end effect is performed in the manner shown in FIG. 93 (g). In this production example, there was a V pass in the fourth round, but it occurred in a big hit game in which the third game condition was difficult to be satisfied (that is, an irregular V pass), so that the transition to the probability change state is made. “Yoshimune mode entry” is not displayed, but as shown in FIG. 93 (g), “search mode entry” is displayed (first effect) indicating the transition to the electric support state.

  FIG. 94 is a diagram showing another example of specific effects in the jackpot game of 16R special jackpot. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. The effects shown in FIGS. 94 (a) to 94 (d) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 91 (a) to 91 (d) and are not described here.

  FIG. 94 (e) is different from the example shown in FIG. 91 (e), and there is no passing of the game ball (V passing) to the V passing switch SW2, and the state where the fourth round is completed is shown. Then, at the timing when the second variable prize opening 235a is displaced from the open state to the closed state, as shown in FIG. An effect to display is performed. That is, it is notified that it is a 16 round special big hit. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “SUPER” characters indicating that it is a 16-round special big hit below the decorative symbol combination displayed in the upper left corner.

  In this production example, the indication that the extra round is executed at the timing when there is no V passage and the second variable prize opening 235a is closed is performed, but the extra round is executed. The display timing is not limited to this.

  Thereafter, up to the 16th round, after the big hit effect as shown in FIG. 94 (g) is executed, the end effect of the big hit game (indicating that the state shifts to the electric support state) is performed as shown in FIG. 94 (h). “Search mode entry” is displayed (first effect). In this production example, the second big hit gaming state that is easily shifted to the probable change state is entered, but the third gaming condition is not satisfied because there is no V passing in the fourth round (that is, by the irregular This indicates that the first effect is being performed (because V has not passed).

  The example of the effect is applicable even when the effect is executed in a mode in which it is informed that it is a 16-round special jackpot since the jackpot game is started, as shown in FIG. 92, for example. Needless to say, in such a case, an effect that the extra round is executed at the timing shown in FIG. 94 (f) may be further performed.

  FIG. 95 is a diagram showing an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine of this example. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. The example of the effect shown in FIG. 95 is an example of the effect that is executed when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the special figure 1 and the jackpot game is started in the probability variation state described above.

  FIG. 95A shows a state in which the symbol variation display is performed by the second special figure display device 214 during the production of the “Yoshimune mode” indicating that the probability variation state is described above. Correspondingly, the decorative symbol is displayed in the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the special symbol 2 and the fourth symbol t2 are also displayed in a plurality of types, for example, in the square mark. Fluctuation display is performed in a changing manner. At this time, the fluctuation display of the two special figures 1 is held, and the two lamps in the first special figure holding lamp 218 are lit. In this example, the first special figure 1 hold display h11, the second special figure 1 hold display h12, and the third special figure 1 hold display representing the hold in FIG. Although h13 and the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are not displayed, these hold displays may be performed. On the other hand, in the probability variation state, the first special figure 2 hold display h21, the second special figure 2 hold display h22, the third special figure 2 hold display h23, and the fourth special display are displayed on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold display h24 of FIG. 2 is displayed. Here, since there is no suspension of the variable display of the special figure 2, a display indicating that both are blank is made.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 95 (a), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays that the remaining number of symbol variation displays that can execute the probability variation state is 39. In addition, at this time, since the first jackpot game is executed from the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, and then the probability change state after the two big hit games are executed in the probability change state or the electric support state, In the lower left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the “third time” is displayed.

  Thereafter, when the symbol variation display by the second special symbol display device 214 is finished, as shown in FIG. 95 (b), the “special diagram D” indicating the first loss symbol is displayed on the second special symbol display device 214. At the same time, the decoration symbol display device 208 stops the display (decision display) of the combination of the decoration symbols “decoration 6”-“decoration 2”-“decoration 3” and notifies that it is a loss.

  Subsequently, since there is no hold of the variable display of FIG. 2 and there are two hold of the variable display of FIG. 1, as shown in FIG. 95 (c), the hold (first hold) of FIG. As a result of the digestion, the symbol variation display of the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 also starts the variation display of the decorative symbol and the special symbol first symbol fourth symbol t1. At this time, the display of the remaining number of times on the decorative symbol display device 208 is decremented by 1 to 38 times.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 95 (d), the special figure A, which is the 16R big hit symbol, is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212, and the first special figure 4 has a first special figure t1. A black circle symbol corresponding to “Special Figure A” that is stopped and displayed on the figure display device 212 is stopped and displayed. In accordance with this, the decoration symbol display device 208 displays the combination of the decoration symbols of “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4” in a stopped manner (determined display), and the special-game variable game ends.

  Then, when “Special Figure A” is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212, the big hit game is started, and the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 executes the big hit start effect as shown in FIG. 95 (e). The

  Thereafter, when the big hit start effect is finished and the process proceeds to the first round, as shown in FIG. 95 (f), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays that it is the first round of the big hit game. In this production example, in the probability variation state or the electric support state, since the big hit game in the special figure 1 is shifted to the big hit game in the special figure 1, the display of the number of consecutive resorts is reset to “first time”. Yes. It should be noted that the number of consecutive games may not be reset even in the case of the big hit in FIG.

  Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 95 (g) to 95 (m) are performed. These effects are the same as those described above with reference to FIGS. 82 (i) to 82 (o).

  In this production example, the number of consecutive games is reset when a big hit is made in the special figure 1 in the probability variation state or the electric support state. For example, when there is an irregular V passage, The number of times may be reset. Further, even when there is an irregular V passage, the number of consecutive resorts may be incremented without being reset. In addition, when there is an irregular V passing, the number of consecutive resorts may not be incremented and may not be updated while maintaining the current state.

  Next, a tenth example of a game machine to which the present invention can be applied will be described. Hereinafter, the difference from the items described so far will be mainly described. The pachinko machine 100 in this example is described as an example provided with the attacker unit 2340 shown in FIG. 74. Of course, this example is also applied to the pachinko machine 100 provided with the game board 200 as shown in FIG. Can also be applied.

  FIG. 96 (a-1) shows an example of the stop symbol pattern (first symbol pattern) of FIG. 1 in the tenth example pachinko machine. FIG. It shows an example of the stop symbol aspect (first symbol aspect) of the special figure 2 in the pachinko machine of the second example.

  In FIG. 96 (a-1) and FIG. 96 (a-2), five types of special drawings from “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure E” are shown as the stop symbol forms in the symbol variation display.

  Even in the tenth example, the stop symbol form of special figure 1 and the stop symbol aspect of special figure 2 are common. In the tenth example, all of the big hits are big hits with 16 rounds of electric support, but in Special Figure 2, the big hit symbols are all big hits (special big hits) that are scheduled to be probable. On the other hand, in Special Figure 1, only “Special Figure A” and “Special Figure B” are jackpots (special jackpots) that are scheduled to change with certainty, and “Special Figure C” is a jackpot that is not scheduled to acquire certain changes. In this way, "Special Figure A" and "Special Figure B" in Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 in Special Figure, which are special jackpots where the second jackpot gaming state that is likely to shift to the second gaming state is started. A "to" Special Figure C "may be referred to as the second symbol, and the jackpot at which the first jackpot gaming state is not started (that is, it is difficult to shift to the second gaming state) is not scheduled to acquire the probability variation. “Special figure C” in special figure 1 is sometimes referred to as a first symbol.

  FIG. 96 (b-1) shows an example of the action of the attacker during the jackpot game of FIG. 1 and the game state to be transferred after the jackpot game. FIG. 96 (b-2) shows the special chart. An example of the operation of the attacker during the jackpot game of 2 and the game state to be transferred after the jackpot game are shown.

  In the jackpot game to which the special figure A is displayed in the special figure 1 and transferred, the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is opened for 29.0 seconds from the first round to the 13th round, and in the 14th round, The second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) is opened for 29.0 seconds, and in the 15th round, the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is opened for 29.0 seconds, and in the 16th round, The second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) is opened for 29.0 seconds. That is, the special figure A in the special figure 1 is a pattern indicating that a large number of game balls are 16 round big hits that can enter the variable winning opening in any round from 1 round to 16 rounds.

  In the jackpot game to which the special figure B is displayed in the special figure 1 and is transferred, the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is opened for 29.0 seconds from the first round to the 13th round, but in the 14th round The second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) is opened only for 0.1 second. In the 15th round, the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is released for 29.0 seconds, and in the 16th round, the second variable winning opening 325a (second attacker) is released for 29.0 seconds. To do. That is, the special figure B in the special figure 1 is that many game balls can enter the variable winning opening in any of the rounds 1 to 13 and 15 to 16 but variable in the 14th round. It is a pattern which shows that it is a substantial 15 round big hit with almost no possibility of entering a winning opening.

  In the jackpot game to which the special figure C is displayed in the special figure 1 and transferred, the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is opened for 29.0 seconds from the first round to the 13th round, but in the 14th round The second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) is opened for only 0.1 seconds, and in the 15th round, the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is opened for only 0.1 seconds. In the 16th round, the second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) is opened only for 0.1 second. That is, in the special figure C in the special figure 1, from 1 round to 13 rounds, many game balls can enter the variable prize opening in any round, but from 14 rounds to 16 rounds, to the variable prize opening. It is a pattern which shows that it is a substantial 13 round big hit with almost no possibility of entering.

  In the jackpot game to which the special figures A to C are displayed in the special figure 2 and transferred, the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is opened for 29.0 seconds from the first round to the 13th round, and 14 rounds Then, the second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) is released for 29.0 seconds, and in the 15th round, the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is released for 29.0 seconds, and 16 rounds. Then, the second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) is opened for 29.0 seconds. That is, the special drawings A to C in the special drawing 2 are symbols indicating that 16 game rounds can be made in any number of rounds from 1 round to 16 rounds in which a lot of game balls can enter the variable winning opening.

  In this example, in the jackpot game with any of the above-mentioned symbols, the number of game balls entered while the second variable winning opening 235a is opened becomes 14 rounds or 16 rounds, and the probability change in the second variable winning opening 235a is changed. When the V passing switch SW2 provided in the area is passed, the probability variation operation area is turned ON, and after the big hit game is completed, the symbol variation display is performed 150 times. A high probability state is maintained. On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the V passing switch SW2 in the big hit game, the probability variation operation region is not turned ON (the probability variation operation region remains OFF), and after the big hit game ends, 100 symbols. While the variable display is performed, the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state which is an example of the first gaming state is maintained.

  In the tenth example, the third game condition is satisfied when the game ball passes through the V passing switch SW2 of the second variable prize opening 235a (second attacker) in the 14th or 16th round. Therefore, the big hit by special figure C of special figure 1 is not 0%, but the possibility is very low, and it can be said that it is a big hit that is not scheduled to be acquired. On the other hand, the big hit by special figures A and B of special figure 1 has a sufficient opening time of the second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker), and the possibility of passing the game ball to the V passage switch SW2 It is high, and it can be said that it is a big hit scheduled to get a certain change.

  Also, the action of the attacker in the jackpot game to which the special figures A to C are displayed in the special figure 2 is the same as the action of the attacker in the special figure A in the special figure 1. Therefore, any of the big hits by the special winning symbols (special illustrations A to C) of the special figure 2 has a sufficient opening time of the second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker), and the game to the V pass switch SW2 The possibility of passing the sphere is high, and it can be said that it is a big hit scheduled to acquire certainty. Note that the operation of the attacker in the jackpot according to the special figure A to C in the special figure 2 may be different from the operation mode of the attacker in the big hit according to the special figure A in the special figure 1, for example, the special figure A in the special figure 2 The operation mode of some or all of the big hits by ~ C may be the same as the operation mode of the attacker by big hits by the special figure B in FIG.

  Thus, in this example, the big jackpot game state in which the third game condition is difficult to be satisfied, such as the big hit game with 16 round jackpots, which is transferred with the special figure C in the special figure 1 being displayed, is changed to the first jackpot game. The third game condition is established, such as a big hit game with 16 round big hits, which is displayed and transferred to the special figures A and B in the special figure 1 and the special figures A to C in the special figure 2. The jackpot gaming state in which the second gaming state is likely to start more easily than the first jackpot gaming state may be referred to as a second jackpot gaming state.

  Further, in the jackpot game to which the special figure A is displayed in the special figure 1 and is transferred, the operation mode of the attacker is the same in the 14th round and the 16th round, but it may be different. It is good also as an operation | movement aspect shown by 96 (c). FIG. 96 (c) is a diagram illustrating an example of the operation mode of the attacker in the 14th round of the jackpot game to which the special figure A is displayed and shifted in the special figure 1. FIG.

  That is, in the 14th round, the second variable prize opening 235a (second attacker) is operated in such a manner that it is closed once after 0.1 seconds are released, and then is opened again for 29.0 seconds after 3 seconds have passed as an interval. Let

  FIG. 97 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a table set selection table in the case of a big hit in FIG. 1, and FIG. 97 (b) is another example of the table set selection table in the case of a big hit in FIG. FIG.

  In this example, in the ordinary figure low probability state, the ordinary drawing lottery is only hit with a probability of 1/100, so the electric Chu is hardly opened and the probability of winning the second special figure starting port 232 is low. The tables shown in FIGS. 97A and 97B correspond to a table set selection table that is frequently used in the case of the normal figure low probability (special figure low probability normal figure low probability) state.

  The table set selection table shown in FIG. 97 (a) is configured so that the type of table set used differs depending on the type of special figure that is stopped and whether or not the probability variation operation area is ON. That is, when the big hit is made in the special figure A and the probability changing operation area is turned ON, the table set 1A is used in the gaming state (the probability changing state) in which the big hit game is finished and shifted. When the big hit is made in the special figure A and the probability variation operation area is OFF, the table set 1B is used in the gaming state (electric support state) in which the big hit game is finished and shifted. Further, when the big hit is made in the special figure B and the probability changing operation area is turned ON, the table set 2A is used in the gaming state (the probability changing state) in which the big hit game is finished and shifted. Further, when the big hit is made in the special figure B and the probability variation operation region is OFF, the table set 2B is used in the game state (electric support state) in which the big hit game is finished and shifted. Further, when the big hit is made in the special figure C and the probability changing operation region is turned ON, the table set 3A is used in the gaming state (the probability changing state) in which the big hit game is finished and shifted. Further, when the big hit in the special figure C and the probability variation operating region is OFF, the table set 3B is used in the game state (electric support state) in which the big hit game is finished and shifted.

  The table set selection table shown in FIG. 97 (b) is different from the table set selection table shown in FIG. 97 (a). When the probability change operation area is turned on in the big hit game, the big hit game is ended. The table set used in the probability change state to be transferred is configured to be different depending on the type of special figure that is stopped and displayed. However, if the probability change operation area is OFF, the big hit game is terminated and the table is transferred. The table set used in the electric support state is configured to be the same regardless of the type of special figure displayed in a stopped state. Specifically, when the big hit is made in the special figure A and the probability changing operation area is turned ON, the table set 1A is used in the gaming state (the probability changing state) in which the big hit game is finished and shifted. When the big hit is made in the special figure A and the probability variation operation area is OFF, the table set 1B is used in the gaming state (electric support state) in which the big hit game is finished and shifted. Further, when the big hit is made in the special figure B and the probability changing operation area is turned ON, the table set 2A is used in the gaming state (the probability changing state) in which the big hit game is finished and shifted. Further, when the big hit is made in the special figure B and the probability variation operation area is OFF, the table set 1B is used in the gaming state (electric support state) in which the big hit game is finished and shifted. Further, when the big hit is made in the special figure C and the probability changing operation region is turned ON, the table set 3A is used in the gaming state (the probability changing state) in which the big hit game is finished and shifted. Further, when the big hit in the special figure C and the probability variation operating region is OFF, the table set 1B is used in the gaming state (electric support state) in which the big hit game is finished and shifted.

  FIG. 98 is a diagram showing a specific effect example in the big hit game of 16R big hit (substantial 13R big hit). The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  As described above, when “Special Figure C” is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212 and the big hit game is started, as shown in FIG. A message indicating that the game is in the first round is displayed, and a display for instructing the player to make a right turn is performed. In the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, a combination of the decorative symbols that have been confirmed is displayed. In addition, the number of consecutive resorts is displayed in the lower left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this big hit game, since it is the first big hit game that has shifted from the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state (normal game state), the display of the number of consecutive games is “first”.

  Thereafter, at the fourth round, the contents of the effect as shown in FIG. 98 (b) are executed. That is, as shown in FIG. 98 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, in the 14th and 16th rounds, the second variable winning opening 235a is open for a long time and is in a state of being easy to pass V. The promotion effect suggesting whether or not will arrive is performed, and as a result, the content of the effect that failed in the promotion effect is executed. That is, it is informed that the game is a big hit game in which the third game condition is difficult to be established. Such a failure effect is continued until the 13th round as shown in FIG. 98 (c).

  After that, when the big hit game progresses and becomes the 14th round, the second variable prize opening 235a is opened and the V shutter 2352a is opened, both of which are open for a very short time. Therefore, it is extremely difficult to pass V. In the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 98 (d), the above-described failure effect is continuously performed even in the 14th round.

  FIG. 98 (e) shows a state in which the game ball has passed the V pass switch SW2 (V pass) in the 14th round. Then, as shown in FIG. 98 (f), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “V”, which is a notification that the probability variation has been confirmed.

  FIG. 98 (g) shows the effect contents when the 14th round is completed. In this example, the number of game balls that have passed the winning count switch SW1 and the number of game balls that have passed the V-pass switch SW2 and the discharge ball detection switch SW3 are counted, and the numbers differ at the end of the round. In this production example, since a big prize opening error has occurred in the 14th round, as shown in FIG. 98 (g), it is determined that a big prize opening error has occurred. A “big prize opening error” is displayed over the display. For example, in the 14th round, such an error occurs when the winning pass switch SW1 is not passed and the V passing switch SW2 is passed by an illegal act such as care. This “big prize opening error” is displayed continuously until the power is turned off, for example. It should be noted that the period during which the “big prize opening error” is displayed can be set as appropriate. For example, it may be terminated when the big hit game ends. In this example, the display of “V” and the display of “big prize opening error” are started at different timings, but the display may be started at the same timing. In this example, the “big prize opening error” is displayed over the “V” display, but the “V” display may be overlaid on the “large prize opening error” display. Good. In this example, the fact that a big prize opening error has occurred is notified by displaying the fact on the decorative symbol display device 208, but it may be notified by voice output or blinking of a lamp. Good.

  Thereafter, when the 16th round ends, a big hit end effect is performed in a manner as shown in FIG. 98 (h). In this production example, there was a V pass in the 14th round, but it occurred in a big hit game in which the third game condition was difficult to be satisfied (that is, an irregular V pass), so that the transition to a probable change state was made. “Yoshimune mode entry” is not displayed, but as shown in FIG. 98 (h), “search mode entry” is displayed (first effect) indicating the transition to the electric support state. At the same time, the above-described “Large Winner Error” is continuously displayed. This “big prize opening error” display is superimposed on the “search mode entry” display. It should be noted that “search mode entry” may be displayed on top of the “big prize opening error” display.

  When the big hit game is finished as described above, the state shifts to a probability change state (special figure high probability normal figure high probability state), and as shown in FIG. 98 (i), the decorative symbol display device 208 is in a probability change state. Production of “Yoshimune mode” is performed. At this time, since there was no hold of the variable display of the special figure 2 and there were three hold of the variable display of the special figure 1, the hold (the first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested, and the first special figure display device The symbol variation display 212 is started, and the decoration symbol display device 208 also starts the variation display of the decoration symbol. Also at this time, the above-mentioned “Large Winner Error” is continuously displayed. The “big prize opening error” is displayed so as to overlap the “Yoshimune mode” effect.

  In this production example, if V does not pass in the 14th round, the failure production is continued until the big hit game is finished. It can be said that it is an example of the 1st production showing the shift to the electric support state.

  FIG. 99 is a diagram showing an example of a specific effect example in the tenth example of a pachinko machine.

  As described above, when “Special Figure A” is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212 and the big hit game is started, the big hit effect is started as shown in FIG. 99 (a). In this effect example, the number of prize balls acquired by winning an attacker is displayed above the display of the number of consecutive resorts on the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 99 (a), the winning ball number is displayed as “00000” since there is no winning for the attacker yet. In this example, the number of winning balls acquired by winning the first variable winning opening 234a and the second variable winning opening 235a is 15. However, the number of winning balls other than 15 may be used. Further, the number of winning balls acquired by winning the first variable winning opening 234a may be the same as or different from the number of winning balls acquired by winning the second variable winning opening 235a. .

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 99 (b), in the first round, ten game balls are won in the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker), and the display of the number of winning balls is “00150”. It has become. In this production example, when 10 game balls are won by the attacker, the round end condition is satisfied and the attacker is displaced from the open state to the closed state, and the round is ended. As shown in FIG. 99 (d), when another game ball wins the first variable winning opening 234a in a state where the attacker has shifted from the open state to the closed state, Is displayed as “00165” and an over winning sound is output from the speaker 120. At this time, the number of prize balls may be highlighted as shown in FIG. 99 (d). In addition, although an effect indicating that there has been an overwinning is realized by voice output, it may be effected by display on the decorative symbol display device 208, blinking of a lamp, or the like. In addition, the effect related to the over-winning may be executed together with the display of “V” described above. In this example, there is a case where it is possible to make the player feel the feeling obtained by performing the effect that there has been an overwinning in this way. In this example, the round end condition is satisfied if there is a winning of 10 game balls to the attacker, but the number of game balls that are awarded to the attacker that satisfies the round end condition may be 9 or less, It is good also as 11 or more.

  Further, another production example will be described. As described above, when “Special Figure A” is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212 and the big hit game is started, as shown in FIG. 99 (e). The big hit production is started.

  FIG. 99 (f) shows a situation when the second round is entered. Then, as shown in FIG. 99 (g), when the first variable prize opening 234a (first attacker) is displaced from the closed state to the open state in the second round, as shown in FIG. 99 (h). The second round is displayed and a round start sound is output from the speaker 120. In addition, although the effect which alert | reports the start of a round was implement | achieved by the audio | voice output, you may make it produce by the display in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, blink of a lamp, etc. In addition, the effect related to the start of the round may be executed together with the display of “V” described above.

  Further, another example of the production will be described. For example, in the big hit game in which “Special Figure B” is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212, when the 16th round is reached, the second variable prize opening 235a is displayed. In addition to being in the open state, the V shutter 2352a is in the open state so that the V passage is easy, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays that it is the 16th round as shown in FIG. 99 (i). At the same time, “V Aim” is displayed to promote the passage of V.

  If there is a game ball passing (V passing) to the V passing switch SW2 in the second variable prize opening 235a at the timing shown in FIG. 99 (j), as shown in FIG. The symbol display device 208 displays “V”, which is a notification that the probability variation has been confirmed. In this effect example, V winning sound is output from the speaker 120 together with the display of “V”. In this example, the V winning effect is executed in this way. The output timing of the V winning sound may be simultaneous with the display of “V”, the V winning sound may be output after the display of “V”, or after the V winning sound is output. “V” may be displayed. Alternatively, only the V winning sound may be output without displaying “V”.

  FIG. 100 is a diagram showing an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine of this example.

  Further, another production example will be described. For example, in the big hit game in which “Special Figure B” is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212, when the 16th round is reached, the second variable prize opening 235a is displayed. In addition to being in the open state, the V shutter 2352a is in the open state so that the V passage is easy, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays that it is the 16th round as shown in FIG. At the same time, “V Aim” is displayed to promote the passage of V.

  If there is a passing of a game ball (V passing) to the V passing switch SW2 in the second variable prize opening 235a at the timing shown in FIG. 100 (b), as shown in FIG. In the symbol display measure 208, a hold continuous tone is output from the speaker 120 together with a display of “VV” which is a notification that the probability variation has been confirmed. The display of “VV” is executed when the symbol variation display of the reserved special figure 1 is pre-read and a symbol variation display that is a big hit is included. In this embodiment, the pre-reading notice effect is configured as described above. It should be noted that, even if a symbol variation display that is a big hit is included as a result of the prefetching, “VV” may be displayed without displaying “VV”. Further, even when the symbol variation display that is a big hit is not included, “VV” may be displayed as a false prefetch notice. The output timing of the hold continuous tone may be simultaneous with the display of “VV”, the hold continuous tone may be output after the display of “VV”, or after the hold continuous tone is output. “V” may be displayed. Alternatively, only the hold continuous tone may be output without displaying “VV”. Further, only the pre-reading of the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure 2 that is put on hold may be performed and the pre-reading regarding the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure 1 may not be performed, or any of the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may be performed. You may make it read ahead about.

  Further, another example of the effect will be described. For example, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212 and the big hit game is started, as shown in FIG. 100 (d), the big hit effect is started. The In this effect example, the number of prize balls acquired by winning an attacker is displayed above the display of the number of consecutive resorts on the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 100 (d), the winning ball number is displayed as “00000” since there is no winning for the attacker yet. In this example, the number of winning balls acquired by winning the first variable winning opening 234a and the second variable winning opening 235a is 15. However, the number of winning balls other than 15 may be used.

  FIG. 100 (e) shows the contents of effects in the seventh round. At the timing shown in FIG. 100 (e), the display of the number of prize balls is “00990”. In this state, as shown in FIG. 100 (f), when one game ball is won in the first variable winning opening 234a, the display of the number of winning balls is updated to “01005” as shown in FIG. 100 (g). In addition to the display, “GET1000pt” indicating that 1000 prize balls have been acquired is displayed below the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. At this time, the winning sound 1000 acquired sound is output from the speaker 120. In addition, although the effect that 1000 prize balls were acquired is realized by the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sound output from the speaker 120, only one of them may be implemented. Further, the output timing of the winning ball 1000 acquisition sound may be simultaneously with the display of “GET1000pt”, the winning ball 1000 acquisition sound may be output after the display of “GET1000pt”, or the winning ball 1000 acquisition “GET1000pt” may be displayed after the sound is output. In addition, the effect that 1000 prize balls have been acquired may be executed together with the display of “V” described above. Moreover, in this production example, when 1000 prize balls were acquired, notification to that effect was made. However, the number of winning balls to be notified is not limited to this. For example, 500, 1500, 2000, 10,000 You may make it alert | report when a prize ball is acquired. Further, the number of notifications is not limited to one, but may be performed a plurality of times.

  FIGS. 100 (h) to 100 (k) illustrate an example of an effect example when the first variable winning opening 234b and the second variable winning opening 235b described above with reference to FIG. 78 (e) are applied. FIG.

  In the example shown in FIG. 100 (h), the first passing detection switch SW5 of the first variable winning opening 234b functions as a winning count switch, the second passing detection switch SW6 functions as a round continuation switch, and the second The third passing detection switch SW7 of the variable winning opening 235b functions as a winning count switch, and the fourth passing detection switch SW8 functions as a round continuation switch. In this production example, the player can move to the next round on condition that the game ball passes to the round continuation switch while the attacker opens, and if there is no game ball passing to the round continuation switch, the round The big hit game is configured to end. In this production example, the first variable winning opening 234b and the second variable winning opening 235b are each provided with a round continuation switch. However, only one of them may be provided. In this case, for example, in a round in which an attacker that is not provided with a round continuation switch is opened, it is necessary to make a transition to the next round, and in a round in which an attacker that is provided with a round continuation switch is opened. The game may be configured to shift to the next round on condition that the game ball passes to the round continuation switch. Further, in such a configuration, for example, an attacker who is not provided with a round continuation switch in the first round may be opened, and the transition to the second round may be performed without fail.

  With the pachinko machine having such a configuration, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212 and the big hit game is started, the big hit effect is started as shown in FIG. The variable winning opening 234b is opened and the first round starts. When the game ball passes through the second passing detection switch SW6 that functions as a round continuation switch at the timing of FIG. 100 (j) and wins the first variable winning opening 234b, as shown in FIG. 100 (k). In addition, “continuation” indicating that the condition for shifting to the next round is satisfied is displayed at the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a continuation sound is output from the speaker 120. In addition, although the effect of continuing the round indicating that the condition for shifting to the next round is satisfied is realized by the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sound output from the speaker 120, even if only one of them is performed Good. Further, the output timing of the continuous sound may be simultaneously with the display of “continuation”, the continuous sound may be output after the display of “continuation”, or “continuation” after the continuous sound is output. May be displayed. In addition, the effect of continuing the round may be executed together with the display of “V” described above.

  In this example, the above-mentioned “big prize opening error” display, an effect indicating that there has been an overwinning, an effect related to the start of the round, a V winning effect, a pre-reading notice effect, an effect indicating that 1000 winning balls have been won, and Two or more effects among the effects of continuing the round may be performed simultaneously.

  Next, various configurations applicable to this example will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 101 (a) is a front view for explaining an example of the start winning device, FIG. 101 (b) is a perspective view for explaining another example of the start winning device, and FIG. 101 (c). FIG. 101 is a front view for explaining an example of a jackpot generator, and FIG. 101D is a diagram for explaining an example of a lamp module for performing various displays controlled by the main control unit.

  In the above-described example, instead of the first special figure start port 230 and the second special figure start port 232, for example, a start winning device 2300 shown in FIG. 101 (a) can be applied.

  The start winning device 2300 includes a ball entrance 2301 into which a game ball can enter at the upper end, a first guide passage 2303 and a second guide passage 2304 through which game balls entered from the ball entrance 2301 flow down, A rotating body 2302 that distributes a game ball entered from the ball opening 2301 to one of a first guide passage 2303 and a second guide passage 2304 is provided.

  The rotating body 2302 has three blades 2302a, 2302b, 2302c standing rearward on the back surface of the disk-shaped main body, and these three blades 2302a, 2302b, 2302c are centered on the main body at equal intervals. Are arranged radially toward the outer periphery. When the rotating body 2302 rotates in the clockwise direction (CW direction), the blade 2302a abuts against the inner wall of the second guide passage 2304 and restricts the rotation of the rotating body 2302 beyond a certain level. At this time, the first ball receiving portion 2305a formed by the blades 2302b and 2302c is directed upward to be able to receive the game ball. Further, the blade 2302c abuts against the inner wall of the first guide passage 2303 when the rotating body 2302 rotates counterclockwise (CCW direction), and restricts the rotation of the rotating body 2302 beyond a certain level. At this time, the second ball receiving portion 2305b formed by the blades 2302a and 2302b is directed upward to be able to receive the game ball.

  The first guide passage 2303 communicates with a first special figure starting port (not shown), and the game balls guided by the first guide passage 2303 win a prize at the first special figure starting port. Further, the second guide passage 2304 communicates with a second special figure start port (not shown), and the game ball guided by the second guide passage 2304 wins the second special figure start port.

  Since the start winning device 2300 is configured as described above, for example, as shown in FIG. 101A, the blade 2302a abuts against the inner wall of the second guide passage 2304 and the first ball receiving portion 2305a. When the game ball enters from the entrance port 2301 while the player faces upward, the game ball is received by the first ball receiving portion 2305a. Then, the rotating body 2302 rotates counterclockwise due to the weight of the game ball. The rotating body 2302 stops rotating when the blade 2302c comes into contact with the inner wall of the first guide passage 2303. The first ball receiving portion 2305a faces the first guide passage 2303, and the game ball received by the first ball receiving portion 2305a flows down the first guide passage 2303 and wins the first special figure starting port. To do.

  In this state, since the second ball receiving portion 2305b faces upward, at this time, when a game ball enters from the entrance port 2301, the game ball is received by the second ball receiving portion 2305b. Then, the rotating body 2302 rotates clockwise by the weight of the game ball. The rotating body 2302 stops rotating when the blade 2302a abuts against the inner wall of the second guide passage 2304. The second ball receiving portion 2305b faces the second guide passage 2304, and the game ball received by the second ball receiving portion 2305b flows down the second guide passage 2304 and wins the second special figure starting port. To do.

  In this way, the start winning device 2300 can alternately win the first special figure starting port and the second special figure starting port.

  Further, for example, a start winning device 2300A shown in FIG. 101 (b) can be applied.

  The start winning device 2300A includes a ball entrance 2301A, a first guide passage 2303A, a second guide passage 2304A, and a rotating body 2302A. Since the entrance 2301A, the first guide passage 2303A, and the second guide passage 2304A are the same as the start winning device 2300 shown in FIG. 101 (a), the specific configuration of the rotating body 2302A will be described here. Description of the other is omitted.

  The rotating body 2302A is provided with three blades (not shown) like the rotating body 2302 of the start winning device 2300, but the rear end of the rotating shaft is connected to the motor M1. That is, the rotating body 2302A can be rotated counterclockwise and clockwise by driving the motor M1. For example, since the motor M1 can change the position of the rotating body 2302A periodically or randomly, the first special figure start opening and the second special figure start opening at the timing when the game ball enters the entrance 2301. A game ball can be distributed to either of them.

  In the example described above, for example, a big hit generator 2500 as shown in FIG. 101 (c) may be provided. The jackpot generating device 2500 is a device for starting a jackpot game by passing after stopping display (definite stop) with a jackpot symbol as a result of the symbol variation display in the special figure 1 or the special figure 2.

  The big hit generating device 2500 has an entrance 2501 through which a game ball can enter at the upper end, a first guide passage 2503 and a second guide passage 2504 through which the game ball entered from the entrance 2501 flows down, A distribution member 2502 is provided that distributes the game balls that have entered from the ball opening 2501 to one of the first guide passage 2503 and the second guide passage 2504.

  The distribution member 2502 is formed in a plate shape, and is configured to be rotatable with one end connected to a rotation shaft. For example, the rotation shaft is connected to a motor. As a result, the distribution member 2502 periodically or randomly connects the entrance port 2501 and the first guide passage 2503, and connects the entrance port 2501 and the second guide passage 2504. It is possible to change to

  The first guide passage 2503 is provided with a first big hit generation switch SW11 for generating a big hit, so that a game ball flowing down the first guide passage 2503 can be detected. The game ball that has passed through the first big hit generation switch SW11 is, for example, discharged from the lower end and returned to the game area 124 of the game board 200.

  The second guide passage 2504 is provided with a second big hit generation switch SW12 for generating a big hit, so that a game ball flowing down the second guide passage 2504 can be detected. The game ball that has passed through the second big hit generation switch SW12 is, for example, discharged from the lower end and returned to the game area 124 of the game board 200.

  In the above-described example, by using the jackpot generator 2500, for example, a jackpot game can be started and the number of rounds that can be executed in the jackpot game can be determined. For example, when a game ball passes through the first jackpot generating switch SW11, a 10-round jackpot game is started, whereas when a game ball passes through the second jackpot generating switch SW12, a 4-round jackpot game is started. Either a game or a 16-round jackpot game is drawn, and a jackpot game of the number of rounds won is started.

  In the above-described example, for example, the first special figure display device, the second special figure display device, the normal symbol display device, the normal symbol hold lamp, the first special figure hold lamp, the second special figure hold lamp, and the round number display A lamp module 2000 in which a lamp, a status display lamp, etc. are arranged on one module can be provided, for example, outside the game area 124 of the game board 200.

  More specifically, the lamp module 2000 includes a first special figure display lamp 2212, a second special figure display lamp 2214, a round number display lamp 2328, a normal symbol display lamp 2210, a normal symbol hold lamp 2216, A first special figure holding lamp 2218 and a second special figure holding lamp 2220 are provided.

  The first special figure display lamp 2212 is composed of eight LEDs, and the stop symbol of the special figure 1 can be specified by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of these LEDs.

  The 2nd special figure display lamp 2214 is comprised by eight LED, The stop symbol of special figure 2 can be pinpointed by the combination of lighting and extinction of these LED.

  The round number display lamp 2328 is configured by eight LEDs, and the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game can be specified by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of these LEDs.

  The normal symbol display lamp 2210 is constituted by four LEDs, and the stop symbol of the normal symbol can be specified by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of these LEDs.

  The normal symbol hold lamp 2216 includes four LEDs, and the number of usual variable display holds can be represented by the number of LEDs lit.

  The first special figure hold lamp 2218 is composed of four LEDs, and the number of fluctuation displays held in the special figure 1 can be represented by the number of lighted LEDs.

  The second special figure holding lamp 2220 is composed of four LEDs, and the number of fluctuation displays held in the special figure 2 can be expressed by the number of lighting LEDs.

  FIG. 102 is a diagram showing an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine of this example.

  FIG. 102 (a) shows an example of effects that can be realized in the pachinko machine 100 using the start winning device 2300 shown in FIG. 101 (a) or the start winning device 2300A shown in FIG. 101 (b), for example. ing. In this production example, the special symbol variation display is started in the winning order regardless of whether the first special figure starting port or the second special figure starting port is won, not the special figure 2 priority changing machine. This is applied to a piece-holding winning order variation (8-holding order) machine.

  As shown in FIG. 102 (a), the first special symbol display device 212 starts the variable symbol display of the special symbol 1, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the variable symbol variation correspondingly. It has been broken. In FIG. 102 (a), since the number of holdings of the variable display in FIG. 1 is one, one holding lamp in the first special figure holding lamp 218 is lit, and the number of holdings of the variable display in FIG. Therefore, the two holding lamps in the second special figure holding lamp 220 are lit.

  On the other hand, in this effect example, the suspended display of the symbol variation on the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed without distinguishing between the special diagram 1 and the special diagram 2. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 includes the first special figure hold display h01, the second special figure hold display h02, the third special figure hold display h03, the fourth special figure hold display h04, and the fifth special figure hold display h04. A figure hold display h05, a sixth special figure hold display h06, a seventh special figure hold display h07, and an eighth special figure hold display h08 are displayed. Since the fluctuation display of one special figure 1 and the fluctuation display of two special figures 2 are held, the first special figure holding display h01 to the third special figure holding display h03 are respectively in the default display mode. It is displayed. In either case, it is displayed in a form in which it is difficult to specify whether it is the hold display of FIG. 1 or the hold display of FIG. On the other hand, the fourth special figure hold display h04 to the eighth special figure hold display h08 are all displayed blank. In the effect example shown in FIG. 102A, the variation icon h00 is displayed side by side with the first special figure hold display h01. The variation icon has, for example, a display form related to the special figure hold display, and is displayed in the same display form as the hold display. For example, the change icon can execute a notice about the display result of the change display (the change notice) according to the display mode. The variation icon is deleted when the variation display ends. Note that the erasure timing of the variation icon is not limited to this, and for example, the variation icon may be erased during the variation display.

  FIG. 102 (b) performs the same effect display as FIG. 102 (a), but is displayed in a manner in which it is possible to specify whether the display is the hold display of FIG. 1 or the hold display of FIG. ing. Specifically, the second special figure hold display h02 indicates the hold display of the special figure 1, and the first special figure hold display h01 and the third special figure hold display h03 are the hold of the special figure 2. The display is shown. Further, the fluctuation icon h00 indicates that the fluctuation display of FIG.

  102 (a) and FIG. 102 (b), for example, in the decorative symbol variation display executed together with the symbol variation display of Special Fig. 1, "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-" When a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 7” is displayed, it is possible to notify that the third game condition is likely to be established as a special jackpot, while the jackpots of special figure 2 are all the third game condition. If it is a special big hit that is likely to be established, and it is a big hit in the symbol variation display of Special Figure 2, it is always displayed with a combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” (confirmed) In the case of (display), the reach state may be formed by a decorative symbol other than “decoration 7” to enhance the interest of the game. In this case, for example, three decorative symbols other than “decoration 7” are arranged and temporarily stopped and then displayed again, and then stopped by a combination of “decoration 7”, “decoration 7” and “decoration 7”. It is conceivable to produce effects such as displaying.

  Further, the same effect may be performed by the decorative symbol variation display executed together with the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 and the decorative symbol variation display performed together with the symbol variation display of the special symbol 2. At this time, for example, the probability of reaching the “decoration 7” may be different between the symbol variation display of FIG. 1 and the symbol variation display of FIG. Also, the same effect is produced by the decorative symbol variation display executed together with the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 and the decorative symbol variation display performed together with the symbol variation display of the special symbol 2, but the symbol variation of the special symbol 1 is performed. The time may be set longer than the symbol variation time of the special figure 2 by the time for performing the re-variation display.

  Further, for example, the contents of the performance in the big hit game may be different depending on whether the big hit is in the special figure 1 or the big hit in the special figure 2. Further, for example, the probability of notifying that the third game condition is likely to be established at the start of the big hit may be different depending on whether the big hit in FIG. 1 or the special hit in FIG. Specifically, when a big hit is made in FIG. 2, a notification that the third game condition is likely to be established is notified with a probability of 100% at least at the start of the big hit game. When a big hit is made, the notification may be made only with a probability of 90% at the start of the big hit game, which is a special big hit.

  FIG. 102 (c) shows an example of effects that can be realized in the pachinko machine 100 including the jackpot generator 2500 shown in FIG. 101 (c), for example. In this production example, any of the special figure 2 priority changing machine and the 8-sequential ordering machine is applicable.

  FIG. 102 (c) corresponds to the symbols that are stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 in the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 while the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 212. The fourth symbol of the mode is stopped and displayed. In accordance with this, on the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4” is stopped (determined).

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 102 (c), even if the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212, the big hit game is not started, and after the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, The big hit game is started by the passing of the game ball to the first big hit generation switch SW11 or the second big hit generation switch SW12, and any of the first big hit generation switch SW11 and the second big hit generation switch SW12 The number of rounds executed in the jackpot game is determined by the passing of the game ball.

  For this reason, in the effect example shown in FIG. 102 (c), a display indicating that the game ball is launched aiming at the big hit generating device 2500 is performed at the timing when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212.

  FIG. 102 (d) displays the same effect as in FIG. 102 (c), but due to the passing of the game ball to the first jackpot generation switch SW11 or the second jackpot generation switch SW12. It is shown that the display showing that there is a high possibility that the transferred jackpot game is a jackpot game in which the third game condition is likely to be established is executed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the example of production shown in FIG. 102 (c) and FIG. 102 (d), when the game ball passes to the first jackpot generation switch SW11 or the second jackpot generation switch SW12, the third game You may make it perform the production | presentation which suggests that the big hit game in which conditions are easy to be satisfied is started.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 that can start the small hit game, for example, when the big hit symbol and the small hit symbol are stopped and displayed in the special figure 1 (or special figure 2), before the symbol variation display is finished. Alternatively, an effect as shown in FIG. 102 (c) or FIG. 102 (d) may be performed. Thereby, for example, by passing the game ball to the first jackpot generating switch SW11 or the second jackpot generating switch SW12, the player is expected to start the jackpot game or the small jackpot game. You may be able to have it. In this case, the small hit game can be started without passing the game ball to the first big hit generation switch SW11 or the second big hit generation switch SW12 after the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 102 (e) shows an example of an effect that can be realized in the pachinko machine 100 that can start the above-described small hit game, for example. In this example, for example, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special graphic display device 214 and the small winning symbol is reached, the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is 0. A small hit game is executed in which an operation that is opened for only one second is performed a plurality of times (for example, three times). Note that the number of times the attacker opens and closes is not limited to 3, and may be 1 or 2 or 4 or more times. Further, the opening time of the attacker at the small hit is not limited to 0.1 seconds, and may be set to a time sufficient for allowing one or more game balls to win a prize (for example, 1.0 second). . Also, in the big hit game, after performing the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) in the first round, for example, several times (for example, three times) to open for 0.1 seconds, An operation for releasing 29.0 seconds is performed. This operation may be executed only in some jackpot games.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 102 (e), the symbols are stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 212, and the special symbols 1 and the fourth symbol t1 are stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 212. The fourth symbol of the aspect corresponding to the symbol is stopped and displayed. In accordance with this, on the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4” is stopped (determined).

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 102 (e), the decorative symbol display device 208 simply stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”. It is difficult for the player to recognize whether it is a big hit or a small hit.

  Therefore, in the production example shown in FIG. 102 (e), an “attacker” indicating that attention is paid to the operation of the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) that performs the opening / closing operation in the transition to the big hit game or the small hit game. "Long open and big hit" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereby, the player pays attention to the opening / closing operation of the first variable prize opening 234a (first attacker), for example, after confirming the opening for a long time after opening and closing for a short time three times, In some cases, it can be recognized that the game has started.

  FIG. 102 (f) performs the same effect display as FIG. 102 (e). However, in the case of shifting to the big hit game, there is a possibility that the third big game condition is likely to be established. Is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Next, an example of notification of information relating to the game history executed in this example will be described.

  FIG. 102 (g) shows a standby state in which the fluctuation display of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 is not suspended. At this time, as shown in FIG. 102 (h), when a predetermined operation is performed, a game history as shown in FIG. 102 (i) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 102 (h), an operation for displaying the game history is performed by rotating the dial of the setting switch 161 so that the management information is displayed, and then pressing the chance button 136. This is done by pressing. The operation method is not limited to this. For example, in the pachinko machine 100 that does not include the setting switch 161, the operation method may be performed by a predetermined number of operations of the chance button 136. In this case, the chance button 136 may be operated once or plural times.

  When the operation for displaying the game history is performed as described above, as shown in FIG. 102 (i), for example, the number of times the third game condition is established or not established in the jackpot game is the type of jackpot game. Each is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Information regarding other game histories may be displayed.

  In the example described so far, the general start port 228 is arranged on the right side of the game area 124, and in the normal game state where the probability change state and the electric support state are not present, the French start port 228 is mostly placed in the game ball. However, the usual figure change game is rarely executed, but the usual figure start game 228 is also provided on the left side of the game area 124 so that the usual figure change game can be executed even in the normal game state. It may be executed. In this case, for example, it is possible to set a plurality of types of hitting symbols of the usual drawing so that the time during which the second special figure starting port 232 is in the open state varies depending on the type of the winning symbol. Further, for example, when the symbol variation of the special symbol 2 is performed in the normal gaming state, for example, a special effect such as displaying a character on the decorative symbol display device 208 may be performed.

  Next, an example of a series of effects executed in the pachinko machine of this example will be described. The production example described below is executed during a period (for example, a period indicated by H in FIG. 81) until the special figure is stopped and displayed, or until the big hit game ends. It is a possible production. In addition, the effect example demonstrated below is an effect which may be performed irrespective of whether the 3rd game condition was satisfied.

  FIG. 103 shows an example of a series of effects. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 103 (a) displays the appearance of a hero with a sword on the left side of the display screen.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 103 (b), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a display of “swordsman visit” and the appearance of the enemy swordsman.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 103 (c), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen where the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 103 (d), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen where the main character shouts “She is a game” informing the start of the game.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 103 (e), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen showing how the main character and the enemy swordsman are moving toward each other.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 103 (f), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen for expecting which of the protagonist and the enemy swordsman will win as a result of the game.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 103 (g), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen on which the game has been decided. In this case, a screen that suggests that the hero's lord won the game is displayed by expressing the appearance of the hero's lord defeating the enemy swordsman. On the other hand, it may represent a situation where the enemy swordsman defeated the protagonist.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 103 (h), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a state in which the enemy swordsman has exhausted and the hero's lord has completely won.

  Next, another example of a series of effects will be described.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 103 (i), while the hero's lord sprints, it is a condition for shifting to an advantageous situation such as a big hit, "Find Princess or Princess Chibi" Is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 103 (j), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a state in which the main character, Tono-sama, finds a spear that the princess or Chibi princess seems to be hiding behind.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 103 (k), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen for expecting whether or not a princess starts to open and whether the princess or the little princess is on the other side of the heel.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 103 (l), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs an effect display that the princess appears when the eyelids open and the state shifts to an advantageous situation. In this case, there is a case where a little princess appears instead of the princess and a transition is made to an advantageous situation. Display may be performed.

  Needless to say, the series of effects described above are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited thereto.

  Next, a specific effect example that can be executed in the pachinko machine of this example will be described.

  FIG. 104 is a diagram showing a specific effect example in the symbol variation that becomes a big hit. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  Note that in the effect example described with reference to FIG. 104, the sub effect display device 208 </ b> A is disposed adjacent to the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The sub effect display device 208A can employ various display means having a size smaller than that of the decorative symbol display device 208, for example, and an LCD is used in FIG. The sub effect display device 208A is connected to an actuator such as a motor via a link member, for example, and is driven by the second sub control unit 500 to have a first position that does not overlap the decorative symbol display device 208, It is configured to be able to be displaced to a second position that overlaps the decorative symbol display device 208. In this case, a part of the sub effect display device 208 </ b> A may overlap the decorative design display device 208, or all of the sub effect display device 208 </ b> A may overlap the decorative design display device 208. Good.

  FIG. 104 (a) shows a state in which a display that changes to super reach is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 after the symbol variation display is started on the first special symbol display device 212.

  Here, since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 is 3, the three lamps in the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit. Corresponding to this, the first special figure 1 hold display h11, the second special figure 1 hold display h12, and the third special figure 1 hold display h13 are all displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 as a default display mode. The fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 is displayed as blank. On the other hand, since there is no hold of the variable display of the special figure 2, none of the second special figure hold lamps 220 is lit.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed small in the upper left corner. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 perform the variable display in the manner as described above corresponding to the symbol variable display of the first special symbol display device 212.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 104 (b), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the pattern of the chance button 136 that prompts the user to press the chance button 136 and the characters “press”. The sub-effect display device 208A displays the characters “Yoshimune”. According to this effect, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the player may be given a sense of expectation that a jackpot confirmation display may be performed.

  When the chance button 136 is pressed at the timing shown in FIG. 104 (c), the sub effect display device 208A is displaced from the first position to the second position as shown in FIG. 104 (d). In the sub-effect display device 208A, a display for changing the color of the background on which the character display of “Yoshimune” is performed is performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 104 (e), after the decorative symbol “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 4” — “decoration 4” — “decoration 4” To start swinging. At this time, the sub effect display device 208A is displaced from the second position to the first position.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 104 (f), the decorative symbol display device 208 is expected to see whether or not the display is changed to a decorative symbol combination promised to be a 16R special jackpot by performing re-variable display. Promotional performance is performed. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c that are fluctuating are displayed again in the upper left corner. A “promotion challenge” message indicating that a promotion effect is performed, a symbol of the chance button 136 prompting the user to press the chance button 136, and a character display “press” are displayed.

  When the chance button 136 is pressed at the timing shown in FIG. 104 (g), the sub effect display device 208A is displaced from the first position to the second position as shown in FIG. 104 (h). In the sub-effect display device 208A, a display for changing the color of the background on which the character display of “Yoshimune” is performed is performed. Thereby, it can be informed that it will be confirmed that the display will be changed to the combination of decorative symbols promised to be a 16R special jackpot by performing re-variable display.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 104 (i), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol that has fluctuated is changed to a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 7” − “decoration 7” − “decoration 7”. The At this time, the sub effect display device 208A is displaced from the second position to the first position.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 104 (j), the special special symbol winning symbol 16R is stopped and displayed on the first special graphic display device 212, and the first graphic t1 of the special graphic 1 includes the first graphic t1. The black circle symbol corresponding to “Special Figure A” that is stopped and displayed on the special figure display device 212 is stopped and displayed. Correspondingly, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” is stopped and displayed (determined display), and the variable game of the special symbol is ended.

  Thereafter, the big hit game is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 executes the big hit start effect as shown in FIG. At this time, a display for instructing right-handed is also performed.

  Thereafter, when the big hit start effect is finished and the first round is started, as shown in FIG. 104 (l), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays that it is the first round of the big hit game. In the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, a combination of the decorative symbols that have been confirmed is displayed. In addition, the number of consecutive resorts is displayed in the lower left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. Since the big hit game this time is the first big hit game that has shifted from the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state (normal game state), a display to that effect is displayed in the lower left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. "First time" is displayed. Thereafter, the jackpot game proceeds in the same manner as the examples described so far.

  FIG. 105 is a diagram showing another example of a specific effect example in the symbol variation that becomes a big hit. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. The effects shown in FIGS. 105 (a) to 105 (g) are the same as those described above with reference to FIGS. 104 (a) to 104 (g), and a description thereof will be omitted here.

  In FIG. 105 (h), unlike in FIG. 104 (h), the sub effect display device 208A does not move in the first position even though the chance button 136 is pressed. Thereby, it is notified that the display is not changed to the combination of the decorative symbols promised to be the 16R special jackpot by performing the re-variable display.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 105 (i), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the shaking fluctuation is continuously performed with the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 4” − “decoration 4” − “decoration 4”.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 105 (j), “Special Figure A”, which is the 16R special jackpot symbol, is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212, and the first figure 4 includes the first symbol The black circle symbol corresponding to “Special Figure A” that is stopped and displayed on the special figure display device 212 is stopped and displayed. In accordance with this, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4” is stopped and displayed (determined display), and the special-game variable game ends. In this production example, the jackpot game to be started is a 16R special jackpot that easily satisfies the third game condition, but it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the jackpot game to be started is a 16R special jackpot. It has become.

  Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 105 (k) to 105 (l) are performed. These effects are the same as those described above with reference to FIGS. 104 (k) to 105 (l).

  FIG. 106 is a diagram showing a specific effect example in the big hit game. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  As described above, when "Special Figure A" is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212 and the big hit game is started, as shown in FIG. A start effect is executed. Note that the jackpot game started this time is a jackpot game started after the stop display (determined display) with the combination of the decoration pattern of “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”. However, it is difficult to recognize whether or not it is a 16R special big hit.

  Thereafter, when the big hit start effect is finished and the process proceeds to the first round, as shown in FIG. 106 (b), the decorative symbol display device 208 executes the big hit effect and displays that it is the first round of the big hit game. Is done. Further, the sub effect display device 208A is arranged at the first position, and the characters “Yoshimune” are displayed.

  FIG. 106C shows the contents of the effect in the fourth round. As shown in FIG. 106 (c), in the 14th round, there is a promotion effect that suggests whether or not there is a great chance that the second variable prize opening 235a is open for a long time and easily passes V. Is called. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 106 (c), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a letter “press” together with the pattern of the chance button 136 that prompts the user to press the chance button 136, and accepts the pressing of the chance button. A remaining time display bar indicating the remaining time of the period is also displayed. The sub-effect display device 208A displays the characters “Yoshimune”. According to this effect, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the player feels that the current jackpot game may be notified that the third game condition is likely to be a 16R special jackpot. May be able to have.

  When the chance button 136 is pressed at the timing shown in FIG. 106 (d), as shown in FIG. 106 (e), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the contents of the effect that has been successfully promoted are executed. The effect display device 208A is displaced from the first position to the second position. In the sub-effect display device 208A, a display for changing the color of the background on which the character display of “Yoshimune” is performed is performed. As a result, it is notified that the current big hit game is a 16R special big hit that is likely to satisfy the third game condition.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 106 (f), the sub effect display device 208A is displaced from the second position to the first position. Thereafter, the jackpot game proceeds in the same manner as the examples described so far.

  Further, another example of the production will be described. When “Special Figure C” is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212 and the big hit game is started, as shown in FIG. At 208, a big hit start effect is executed. Note that the jackpot game started this time is a jackpot game started after the stop display (determined display) with the combination of the decoration pattern of “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”. However, it is difficult to recognize whether or not it is a 16R special big hit. The jackpot game started this time is a jackpot game started by stopping and displaying “Special Figure C”, which is a 16R (substantially 13R) jackpot symbol in which the third game condition is difficult to be established.

  Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 106 (h) to 106 (j) are performed. These effects are the same as those described above with reference to FIGS. 106 (b) to 106 (d).

  106 (k) to 106 (l), unlike FIGS. 106 (e) to 106 (f), the decorative design display device 208 executes the content of the effect that failed in the promotion effect, and the sub effect display device. 208A does not move in the first position. As a result, it is notified that the current big hit game is a 16R big hit that is unlikely to satisfy the third game condition. In this production example, in the subsequent jackpot game, for example, the above-mentioned revival presentation is performed. If it is a 16R special jackpot, the revival presentation is successfully performed. If it is a 16R jackpot that is not a 16R special jackpot, a revival presentation is performed. You may make it perform further the production which fails.

  In this production example, after that, when the big hit game progresses and becomes the 14th round, the second variable winning opening 235a is opened and the V shutter 2352a is opened. In this open state, it is very difficult to pass V. In the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 106 (m), the failure effect is continuously performed even after the 14th round.

  FIG. 106 (n) shows a state in which the game ball has passed through the V pass switch SW2 (V pass) in the 14th round. Then, as shown in FIG. 106 (o), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “V”, which is a notification that the probability variation has been confirmed. At this time, the display of “V” is superimposed on the display of the failure effect.

  Further, another example of the production will be described. When the big hit game progresses and becomes the 14th round, the second variable winning opening 235a is opened and the V shutter 2352a is opened. Since it is in an open state for only a short time, it is very difficult to pass V. In the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 106 (p), the failure effect is continuously performed even after the 14th round.

  FIG. 106 (q) shows a state in which the game ball has passed the V pass switch SW2 (V pass) in the 14th round. In this production example, at this time, as shown in FIG. 106 (r), the decorative symbol display device 208 does not display “V”, which is a notification that the probability variation has been confirmed, and only the failure production continues. Has been done. That is, in this production example, in the big hit game in which the third game condition is difficult to be established, even if there is a V pass, the player recognizes that it will shift to a probable change state after the big hit game ends. It can be difficult.

  Next, the visual recognition state (degree of visibility) in the decorative symbol display device 208 will be described. FIG. 107 is a diagram for explaining a visual recognition state on the decorative symbol display device 208. Here, the “object” in the figure means a tangible or intangible object that can change the visual recognition state (degree of visibility) of the decorative symbol display device 208, for example, an image (for example, a hold icon, Fluctuating icons, texture images that constitute reserved animation, various images used for production, images used for notice, character images), movable bodies (eg, production movable bodies, shielding devices), glass or resin The transparent plate member or the like is included.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 1A and 1A, a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the first object ob1, so that at least the first of the display regions of the decorative symbol display device 208 is the first. The display area covered by the object ob1 is not visible from the front (or difficult to see). Further, in this example, by covering a part of the display area of the decorative design display device 208 and a part of the first object ob1 with the second object ob2, the display area of the decorative design display device 208 is The display area covered only by the second object ob2 is also invisible (or difficult to see) from the front, and the part of the first object ob1 covered by the second object ob2 is also from the front. Visible (or difficult to see).

  That is, in this example, a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is obscured by the first object ob1 and the second object ob2, and a part of the first object ob1 is also covered by the second object ob2. Covered. Although not shown, after the display is performed so that the first object ob1 and the second object ob2 do not overlap with each other in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, they are shown in FIGS. Thus, a part of the first object ob1 is obscured by the second object ob2, and all the first objects ob1 are covered by the second object ob2, as shown in FIGS. The cover-up display may be executed continuously.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 2A and 2B, a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the first object ob1, and the entire first object ob1 is covered with the second object ob2. As a result, among the display areas of the decorative symbol display device 208, at least the display area covered by the second object ob2 is made invisible (or difficult to view) from the front. In addition, the example shown in FIGS. 6A and 6C is the same as that shown in FIGS. 6A and 6B in that the display area covered by the second object ob2 is invisible (or difficult to view) from the front. ), But the range that is not visible (or difficult to view) is expanded by the second object ob2 as compared with the example shown in FIGS. In this way, the outside of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be invisible (or difficult to see). In other words, in the example shown in FIGS. 3A and 3C, the second object ob2 has a part of a side of the decorative symbol display device 208 invisible (or difficult to see). it can.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 2B and 2B, the positional relationship between the first object ob1 and the second object ob2 shown in FIGS. In this example, by covering a part of the display area of the decorative design display device 208 with the second object ob2, the display area covered with at least the second object ob2 in the display area of the decorative design display device 208. However, it cannot be visually recognized from the front (or difficult to see). Further, in this example, by covering a part of the display area of the decorative design display device 208 and a part of the second object ob2 with the first object ob1, the display area of the decorative design display device 208 is The display area covered only by the first object ob1 is also invisible (or difficult to see) from the front, and the portion of the second object ob2 covered by the first object ob1 is also from the front. Visible (or difficult to see).

  In other words, in this example, a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is obscured by the first object ob1 and the second object ob2, and a part of the second object ob2 is also covered by the first object ob1. Covered.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 3C and 1C, the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 with the first object ob1 and the third object ob3. Among these, the display area covered by at least the first object ob1 and the third object ob3 is not visible (or difficult to see) from the front. In this example, a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the first object ob1, and a part of the third object ob3 are further covered with the second object ob2, thereby decorating the decoration. Of the display area of the symbol display device 208, the display area covered only by the second object ob2 is also not visible (or difficult to see) from the front, and the first object ob1 and the third object ob3 are not visible. Of these, the portion covered with the second object ob2 is also not visible (or difficult to view) from the front.

  That is, in this example, a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is obscured by the first object ob1, the second object ob2, and the third object ob3, and the first object ob1 and the third object ob3. A part of the object ob3 is also obscured by the second object ob2.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 2C and 2C, the position of the third object ob3 is changed from the example shown in FIGS. In this example, a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is obscured by the first object ob1, the second object ob2, and the third object ob3 as shown in FIGS. Although it is the same as an example, since the position of the 3rd object ob3 is moved to the range which is not covered with the 2nd object ob2, the 3rd object ob3 is made visible from the front.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 3C and 3C, the position of the third object ob3 is changed from the examples shown in FIGS. In this example, a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is obscured by the first object ob1, the second object ob2, and the third object ob3 (c) (1), ( 2) Although the same as the example shown in 2), since the position of the third object ob3 is moved to a position covering the first object ob1, the third object ob3 is visible from the front. Part of the first object ob1 is obscured by the third object ob3.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 4C and 4C, the position of the third object ob3 is changed from the examples shown in FIGS. In this example, a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is obscured by the first object ob1, the second object ob2, and the third object ob3. 3) Although it is the same as the example shown in 3), since the position of the third object ob3 is moved to a position covering the second object ob2, the third object ob3 is visible from the front side. Part of the second object ob2 is obscured by the third object ob3.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 5C and 5C, the position of the third object ob3 is changed from the examples shown in FIGS. In this example, a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is obscured by the first object ob1, the second object ob2, and the third object ob3. 4), but since the position of the third object ob3 is moved to a position covering the first object ob1 and the second object ob2, the third object ob3 is visible from the front. On the other hand, a part of the first object ob1 and the second object ob2 is obscured by the third object ob3.

  FIG. 6D is a diagram showing variations in the shape of the second object ob2. The second object ob2 may have a rectangular shape as shown in FIGS. 4 (d) and (1), or an opening may be formed in a part thereof as shown in FIGS. 2 (d) and (2). Therefore, the rear may be configured to be visible through the opening. Further, as shown in FIGS. 3D and 3C, a notch portion may be formed in a part of the outer edge so that the rear side can be visually recognized through the notch portion. As shown in 4), both the opening and the notch may be formed.

  FIG. 108 is a diagram showing an example of a specific effect in the tenth example of a pachinko machine. In this production example, the first variable prize winning opening 234b and the second variable prize winning opening 235b shown in FIG. 78 (e) are used as the first variable winning prize opening and the second variable winning prize opening. In the following description, it is assumed that the fourth passage detection switch SW8 provided in the second variable prize winning opening 235b functions as a V passage switch.

  For example, when “Special Figure C”, which is a 16R jackpot symbol, is stopped and displayed on the first special chart display device 212, as shown in FIG. 108 (a), the jackpot effect is executed and the jackpot game is started. In this effect example, the number of prize balls acquired by winning an attacker is displayed above the display of the number of consecutive resorts on the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 108 (a), the winning ball number is displayed as “00000” since there has not yet been a prize for the attacker. In this example, although the number of prize balls acquired by winning the first variable prize opening 234b and the second variable prize opening 235b is 14, the number of prize balls other than 14 may be used.

  FIG. 108 (b) shows the content of the effect in the fourth round. At the timing shown in FIG. 108 (b), the display of the number of prize balls is “00504”. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a failure effect that failed in the promotion effect described above. This failure effect continues until the end of the 16th round.

  FIG. 108 (c) shows the contents of the effect at the end of the 15th round. At the timing shown in FIG. 108 (c), the display of the number of prize balls is “01988”.

  After that, at the 16th round, the second variable winning opening 235b is in an open state. However, since it is in an open state for a very short time, it is very difficult to pass V. In the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 108 (d), the above-described failure effect is continuously performed even in the 16th round.

  FIG. 108 (e) shows a state where one game ball has won a prize in the second variable prize opening 235b in the 16th round. Then, as shown in FIG. 108 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of the number of prize balls is updated to “2002”, and 2000 prize balls are acquired below the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The message “GET2000pt” is displayed. At this time, the winning ball 2000 acquisition sound is output from the speaker 120. In addition, although the effect that 2000 prize balls were acquired is realized by the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sound output from the speaker 120, only one of them may be implemented. The output timing of the winning ball 2000 acquired sound may be simultaneous with the display of “GET2000pt”, the winning ball 2000 acquired sound may be output after the display of “GET2000pt”, or the winning ball 2000 is acquired. “GET2000pt” may be displayed after the sound is output.

  FIG. 108 (g) shows a state in which the game ball that has won the second variable winning opening 235b has passed through the fourth passage detection switch SW8 that functions as a V passage switch. Then, as shown in FIG. 108 (h), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “V”, which is a notification that the probability variation has been confirmed, and outputs a V winning sound from the speaker 120. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “V” superimposed on the above-described “GET2000pt” display. Note that “GET2000pt” may be displayed on top of “V”. Further, in this production example, the notification that the probability variation has been confirmed is realized by the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sound output from the speaker 120, but only one of them may be implemented. The V winning sound may be output simultaneously with the display of “V”, the V winning sound may be output after the display of “V”, or after the V winning sound is output. “V” may be displayed.

  In this example, the effect that the winning ball has been acquired and the notification that the probability variation has been confirmed are overlapped, but these are only described as an example of a combination of effects. The combinations of effects that can be executed are not limited to those described above. In addition, among a plurality of types of effects, a certain effect combination (for example, a first effect combination) may not be executed redundantly. In addition, for example, when a combination of certain effects (for example, a combination of the first effects) is executed according to the game conditions, a combination of certain effects (for example, a combination of the first effects) is overlapped. For example, in a big hit game in which the third game condition is difficult to be established, the effect that the prize ball has been won and the notification that the probability change has been confirmed overlap. In a jackpot game that is not executed and the third game condition is likely to be established, the effect that the winning ball has been acquired and the notification that the probability variation has been confirmed may be executed in an overlapping manner.

  Next, an eleventh example of a game machine to which the present invention can be applied will be described. Hereinafter, the difference from the items described so far will be mainly described. The pachinko machine 100 in this example is described as an example provided with the attacker unit 2340 shown in FIG. 74. Of course, this example is also applied to the pachinko machine 100 provided with the game board 200 as shown in FIG. Can also be applied. In the above description, the second variable winning opening 235 and the V passage 2340g are defined as examples of the first area, but in the following description, the second variable winning opening 235 and the V passage 2340g are described. Will be described as an example of the second region.

  With reference to FIGS. 109 to 111, an example of operation timings of the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) and the second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) between rounds will be described.

  FIG. 109 (a) is a timing chart showing an example of the operation in the case of releasing the long in all four consecutive rounds, and FIG. 109 (b) is the first round of the four consecutive rounds. FIG. 109C is a timing chart showing an example of an operation when only a long opening is performed and a short opening is performed in other rounds, and FIG. 109C is set when a round in which the second variable winning opening 235a is opened is started. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the operation pattern of the probability change operation area | region solenoid made, and the period which is a probability change operation area effective state. Here, in any case of FIG. 109 (a) to FIG. 109 (c), the big hit game is indicated, and the signal indicating the special game is continuously in the ON state. Note that the four consecutive rounds described below may include the final round, may include the first round, and includes both the final round and the first round. It may be not included, and may include both the last round and the first round. The same applies to the case of three consecutive rounds and the case of two consecutive rounds.

  First, with reference to FIG. 109 (a), an example of the operation in the case of releasing long in all four consecutive rounds will be described. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 109 (a), the first attacker long-releases in the first round of the four consecutive rounds, the second attacker long-releases in the second round, It is shown that the first attacker is long open in the third round and the second attacker is long open in the fourth round. The operation pattern shown in FIG. 109 (a) is an operation pattern that may be executed with a big hit (special big hit) scheduled to acquire probability variation. The jackpot game including the operation pattern shown in FIG. 109 (a) is an example of a third jackpot game.

  As shown in FIG. 109 (a), when a round (round RA) in which the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is opened at the timing of a01 starts, the solenoid SOL1 is turned ON to be the first variable. The first door member 2341a of the winning opening 234a (first variable winning means) is displaced from the closed state (first state) to the open state (second state). That is, the first variable prize winning opening 234a is configured to be able to change between a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter at least and an open state in which a game ball can enter at least. At this time, for example, the big prize opening 1 opening signal and the big prize opening 1 operating signal output from the main control unit 300 are turned ON, and the period of the big prize opening 1 valid state is set. Here, the special winning opening 1 opening signal is a signal indicating the operating state of the solenoid SOL1. That is, the special winning opening 1 opening signal indicates whether the first attacker is in an open state or a closed state. The special winning opening 1 opening signal may be a drive signal for the solenoid SOL1, or the large winning opening 1 opening signal may not be output. The signal indicating that the winning prize opening 1 is operating is a signal indicating whether or not it is a period for detecting the game ball that has entered the first attacker with the winning count switch SW4, and will be described later after the round starts. It shows the period until the interval between rounds is started. Further, the period in which the winning opening 1 is in an effective state corresponds to the above-described attacker 1 effective period shown in FIG. 80, and indicates a period in which a game ball passing through the winning count switch SW4 is treated as being effective. is there. It should be noted that the period in which the grand prize opening 1 is valid can be arbitrarily set. For example, the period in which the big prize opening 1 is valid may be set after the power is turned on until the power is turned off. The jackpot game may be set from the start to the end, or may be set in at least a part of the period when the second attacker is in the open state. Further, a game ball passing through the winning count switch SW4 may be handled as valid even outside the valid period of the attacker 1. In this case, it may be invalid while the second attacker is open. In the following description, the winning count switch SW4 may be referred to as an example of a first area.

  Thereafter, when the above-described round end condition is satisfied, the solenoid SOL1 is turned OFF at the timing of a02, and the first door member 2341a is displaced from the open state to the closed state. At this time, the special winning opening 1 release signal is also turned OFF. After that, when a predetermined post-round closing time (for example, 1.9 seconds) elapses and the timing becomes a03, the special winning opening 1 operating signal is turned OFF and the round RA ends. Here, the period from a02 to a03 may be referred to as a remaining sphere detection period. By providing this remaining ball detection period, it may be possible to prevent the game ball that has entered the attacker from being detected by the winning count switch after the next round is started. In this example, it is defined that the round ends at the timing of starting the interval time between rounds to be described later (for example, timing of a03), but the timing of starting the next round (for example, timing of a04) It may be defined that the round ends. Moreover, you may define that a round is complete | finished at the timing (for example, timing of a02) when solenoid SOL1 turned OFF and the 1st door member 2341a displaced to the closed state. In other words, it may be defined that a part of the period in which the attacker is closed between rounds is not included in the round, or the entire period in which the attacker is closed between rounds is included in the round. You may define it as not. Further, the period during which the attacker is closed between rounds may be defined as belonging to any one of the rounds.

  When a predetermined interval time (for example, 0.1 second) elapses after the timing of a03, the next round (round RB) starts at the timing of a04. At this time, the period of the grand prize opening 1 valid state ends, and the solenoid SOL2 is turned ON, and the shutter member 2351a of the second variable prize opening 235a (second variable prize winning means) is closed (first state). ) To an open state (second state). In other words, the second variable winning opening 235a is configured to be able to change between a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter at least and an open state in which a game ball can enter at least. The period in which the winning opening 1 is valid ends at the timing when the next round is started, but may be ended after the next round is started. Further, the period in which the big winning opening 1 is valid may be continued until the big hit game is ended after being set once. At this time, the solenoid SOL3 (probability change operation region solenoid) is turned ON, and the V shutter 2352a is displaced from the closed state to the open state. At this time, for example, the big prize opening 2 opening signal and the big prize opening 2 operating signal output from the main control unit 300 are turned ON, and the period of the big prize opening 2 valid state and the period of the probability change operation region valid state are set. Is set. Here, the special winning opening 2 opening signal is a signal indicating the operating state of the solenoid SOL2. That is, the special winning opening 2 opening signal indicates whether the second attacker is in an open state or a closed state. The signal indicating that the winning opening 2 is in operation is a signal indicating whether or not it is a period for detecting the game ball that has entered the second attacker with the winning count switch SW1. It shows the period until the interval starts. Further, the period in which the special winning opening 2 is in an effective state corresponds to the period in which the attacker 2 is effective as shown in FIG. 80, and indicates a period in which a game ball passing through the winning count switch SW1 is treated as being effective. is there. It should be noted that the period in which the special winning opening 2 is valid can be arbitrarily set. For example, the period in which the special winning opening 2 is valid may be set after the power is turned on until the power is shut off. The jackpot game may be set from the start to the end, or may be set in at least a part of the period when the first attacker is in the open state. Further, the period in which the probability changing operation area is in an effective state corresponds to the above-described V passage effective period shown in FIG. 80, and a game ball passing through the V passage switch SW2 (second area) is treated as being effective. Indicates the period. In the following description, the probability variation operating region effective state may be referred to as a second region effective state. Note that the period during which the probability change operation region is valid can be arbitrarily set. For example, the period of the probability change operation region valid state may always be set after the power is turned on until the power is turned off. It may be set from the start to the end of the game. After the V shutter 2352a is opened at the timing a04, the V shutter 2352a is once closed when a predetermined first shutter opening time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses, and then the predetermined first shutter is closed. When the time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, it is operated so as to be opened again. The operation pattern and operation time of the V shutter 2352a can be set as appropriate.

  Thereafter, when the above-described round end condition is satisfied, the solenoid SOL2 is turned OFF at the timing of a05, and the shutter member 2351a is displaced from the open state to the closed state. At this time, the special winning opening 2 release signal is also turned OFF. In the following description, for example, a period in which the second variable prize opening 235a is in an open state, such as a period from a04 to a05, may be referred to as a first period. Thereafter, when the closing time after the round described above has elapsed and the timing becomes a06, the special winning opening 2 operating signal is turned OFF and the round RB ends. At this time, the solenoid SOL3 is turned OFF and the V shutter 2352a is displaced from the open state to the closed state, and the period of the probability changing operation region valid state is also ended. Here again, the period from a05 to a06 is the remaining sphere detection period. In the following description, the round RB may be an example of a first round including at least a first period.

  When the above-described interval time between rounds elapses after the timing of a06, the next round (round RC) starts at the timing of a07. At this time, the period of the special winning opening 2 valid state ends, and the solenoid SOL1 is turned ON, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a is displaced from the closed state to the open state. At this time, the special winning opening 1 release signal and the special winning opening 1 in-operation signal are turned ON, and the period of the special winning opening 1 valid state is set. Hereinafter, the operations performed at the timings indicated by a08 to a13 are the same as the operations performed at the timings indicated by a02 to a07, respectively. When the round RD is the final round, the big hit game end effect may be started at the timing a12. Further, the interval time between rounds may elapse after the timing of a12, and the big hit game end effect may be started at the timing of a13. When the round RD is not the final round, the next round may be started when the interval time between rounds has passed after the timing of a12 and the timing of a13 is reached. In the following description, for example, as in the period from a07 to a08, the second variable winning opening 235a is closed and the first variable winning opening 234a is opened. Sometimes called a period. Further, in the following description, for example, a period in which the second variable prize opening 235a is in an open state, such as a period from a10 to a11, may be referred to as a third period. In the following description, the round RC may be referred to as an example of a second round including at least a second period, and the round RD may be referred to as an example of a third round including at least a third period. There is. As described above, the second period can be said to be a period that starts after the first period, and the third period is a period that starts after the second period. It can be said that. In the following description, for example, a period in which the second variable winning opening 235a is in an open state, such as a period from a04 to a05 or a period from a10 to a11, may be referred to as a sixth period.

  As described above, in the operation pattern shown in FIG. 109A, in the round RB and the round RD, the second attacker is opened long, and the game ball can easily enter the V-pass switch SW2. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 109 (b), an example of an operation in the case where only the first round of the four consecutive rounds is opened long and the other rounds are opened short will be described. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 109 (b), the first attacker in the first round of the four consecutive rounds is long open, the second attacker in the second round is short open, In the third round, the first attacker is short-opened, and in the fourth round, the second attacker is short-opened. The operation pattern shown in FIG. 109 (b) is an operation pattern that may be executed with a big hit that is not scheduled to be acquired. The jackpot game including the operation pattern shown in FIG. 109 (b) is an example of a first jackpot game.

  As shown in FIG. 109 (b), when the round (round RA) in which the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is opened at the timing of b01 starts, the solenoid SOL1 is turned ON and the first variable is achieved. The first door member 2341a of the winning opening 234a is displaced from the closed state to the open state. At this time, the special winning opening 1 release signal and the special winning opening 1 operating signal are turned ON, and the period of the special winning opening 1 valid state is set.

  Thereafter, when the above-described round end condition is satisfied, the solenoid SOL1 is turned OFF at the timing of b02, and the first door member 2341a is displaced from the open state to the closed state. At this time, the special winning opening 1 release signal is also turned OFF. Thereafter, when the closing time after the round has elapsed and the timing of b03 is reached, the signal indicating that the special winning opening 1 is in operation is turned OFF, and the round RA ends. Here again, the period from b02 to b03 is the remaining sphere detection period.

  When the above-described interval time between rounds has elapsed after the timing of b03, the next round (round RB) starts at the timing of b04. At this time, the period of the big winning opening 1 valid state is ended, and the solenoid SOL2 is turned ON, and the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a is displaced from the closed state to the open state. At this time, the solenoid SOL3 (probability change operation region solenoid) is turned ON, and the V shutter 2352a is displaced from the closed state to the open state. At this time, for example, the big prize opening 2 release signal and the big prize opening 2 operating signal are turned ON, and the period for the big prize opening 2 valid state and the period for the probability variation operating area valid state are set.

  Since the round RB is a short open round, the open time of the attacker in the round RB is shorter than the long open round (short open time) (for example, 0.5 seconds). Therefore, when the short opening time has elapsed from the start of the round RB, the round end condition is satisfied at the timing of b05, the solenoid SOL2 is turned OFF, and the shutter member 2351a is changed from the open state to the closed state. Therefore, the round RB can be said to be a round in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second attacker. Here, after the solenoid SOL3 (probability changing operation solenoid) for driving the V shutter 2352a is opened at the timing of b04 as shown by the broken line in FIG. 109 (c), the first shutter opening described above is performed. After the time has elapsed, the drive setting is performed so that the first shutter is closed and then the first shutter closing time described above is opened again. In the short open round, the first shutter is set. Since the round end condition is satisfied at the timing when the opening time elapses (or before the first shutter closing time elapses), the round is ended without performing the subsequent driving operation. The same applies to the period during which the probability variation operating region is valid. Accordingly, it can be said that in the round RB, it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second attacker and it is also difficult to enter the V-pass switch SW2. In this way, the period from b04 to b05 can be regarded as an example of the first period. The short opening time of the second attacker may be the same time as the short opening time of the first attacker or may be a different time. In this case, the short opening time of the second attacker may be longer, or the short opening time of the first attacker may be longer.

  Thereafter, when the closing time after the round described above elapses and the timing becomes b06, the special winning opening 2 operating signal is turned OFF and the round RB ends. At this time, since the solenoid SOL3 remains OFF, the V shutter 2352a also remains closed, while the period of the probability variation operating region valid state ends at this timing. Here again, the period from b05 to b06 is the remaining sphere detection period.

  When the above-described inter-round interval time elapses after the timing of b06, the next round (round RC) starts at the timing of b07. At this time, the period of the special winning opening 2 valid state ends, and the solenoid SOL1 is turned ON, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a is displaced from the closed state to the open state. At this time, the special winning opening 1 release signal and the special winning opening 1 operating signal are turned ON, and the period of the special winning opening 1 valid state is set.

  Since the round RC is also a short opening round, the attacker's opening time in the round RC is the short opening time described above. Therefore, when the short opening time elapses from the start of the round RC, the round end condition is satisfied at the timing b08, the solenoid SOL1 is turned off, and the first door member 2341a is changed from the open state to the closed state. Therefore, it can be said that the round RC is a round in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the first attacker. In this manner, the period from b07 to b08 can be regarded as an example of the second period.

  Thereafter, when the closing time after the above-described round passes and the timing becomes b09, the signal indicating that the winning prize opening 1 is in operation is turned OFF, and the round RC ends. Here again, the period from b08 to b09 is the remaining sphere detection period.

  When the above-described interval time between rounds elapses after the timing of b09, the next round (round RD) starts at the timing of b10. Thereafter, the operations performed at the timings indicated by b10 to b13 are the same as the operations performed at the timings indicated by b04 to b07, respectively. Therefore, it can be said that in the round RD, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second attacker and it is also difficult to enter the V-pass switch SW2. When the round RD is the final round, the big hit game end effect may be started at the timing of b12. Alternatively, the interval time between rounds may elapse after the timing of b12, and the big hit game end effect may be started at the timing of b13. When the round RD is not the final round, the next round may be started when the inter-round interval time elapses after the timing b12 and the timing b13.

  Thus, the period from b10 to b11 can be said to be an example of the third period. Further, in the following description, for example, a period in which the first variable winning opening 234a is in an open state, such as a period from b01 to b02 or a period from b07 to b08, may be referred to as a fourth period. For example, a period in which the second variable winning opening 235a is in an open state, such as a period from b04 to b05 or a period from b10 to b11, may be referred to as a fifth period.

  FIG. 110 (a) is a timing chart showing an example of an operation when only the second round of the four consecutive rounds is short-released and the other rounds are long-open, and FIG. 110 (b) is a timing chart. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing an example of an operation in a case where only the second round of the four consecutive rounds is opened short and the other rounds are opened long. Here, in both cases of FIG. 110 (a) and FIG. 110 (b), the big hit game is shown, and the signal indicating the special game is continuously in the ON state.

  With reference to FIG. 110 (a), an example of the operation in the case where only the second round of the four consecutive rounds is short-released and the other rounds are long-released will be described. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 110 (a), the first attacker in the first round of the four consecutive rounds is long open, the second attacker in the second round is short open, It is shown that the first attacker is long open in the third round and the second attacker is long open in the fourth round. The operation pattern shown in FIG. 110 (a) is an operation pattern that may be executed with a big hit (special big hit) scheduled to acquire probability variation. In the following description, the jackpot game including the operation pattern shown in FIG. 110A may be referred to as an example of a second jackpot game.

  As shown in FIG. 110 (a), when a round (round RA) in which the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is opened at the timing of c01 starts, the solenoid SOL1 is turned ON and the first variable The first door member 2341a of the winning opening 234a is displaced from the closed state to the open state. At this time, the special winning opening 1 release signal and the special winning opening 1 in-operation signal are turned ON, and the period of the special winning opening 1 valid state is set.

  Thereafter, when the above-described round end condition is satisfied, the solenoid SOL1 is turned OFF at the timing of c02, and the first door member 2341a is displaced from the open state to the closed state. At this time, the special winning opening 1 release signal is also turned OFF. Thereafter, when the above-described closing time after the round has passed and the timing becomes c03, the signal for operating the special winning opening 1 is OFF and the round RA ends. Here again, the period from c02 to c03 is the remaining sphere detection period.

  When the above-described interval time between rounds elapses after the timing of c03, the next round (round RB) starts at the timing of c04. At this time, the period of the big winning opening 1 valid state is ended, and the solenoid SOL2 is turned ON, and the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a is displaced from the closed state to the open state. At this time, the solenoid SOL3 (probability change operation region solenoid) is turned ON, and the V shutter 2352a is displaced from the closed state to the open state. At this time, for example, the big prize opening 2 release signal and the big prize opening 2 operating signal are turned ON, and the period for the big prize opening 2 valid state and the period for the probability variation operating area valid state are set.

  Since the round RB is a short opening round, the opening time of the attacker in the round RB is a short opening time. Here, the operations performed at the timings indicated by c04 to c07 related to the round RB are the same as the operations performed at the timings indicated by b04 to b07 in FIG. 109 (b), respectively. Accordingly, it can be said that in the round RB, it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second attacker and it is also difficult to enter the V-pass switch SW2. Thereafter, the operations performed at the timings indicated by c07 to c13 are the same as the operations performed at the timings indicated by a07 to a13 in FIG. 109 (a), respectively.

  As described above, in the operation pattern shown in FIG. 110A, in the round RD, the second attacker is opened long, and the game ball can easily enter the V-pass switch SW2. When the round RD is the final round, the big hit game end effect may be started at the timing of c12. Alternatively, the interval time between rounds may elapse after the timing of c12, and the big hit game end effect may be started at the timing of c13. When the round RD is not the final round, the next round may be started when the inter-round interval time elapses after the timing of c12 and the timing of c13 is reached.

  As described above, the period from c04 to c05 can be referred to as an example of the first period, the period from c07 to c08 can be referred to as an example of the second period, and the period from c10 to c11 can be referred to as an example of the third period. It can be said. In this example, the third period (c10 to c11 period) can be said to be longer than the first period (c04 to c05 period), and the second period (c07 to c08). It can be said that (period) is a period longer than the first period (period from c04 to c05). The period from c01 to c02, the period from c07 to c08 can be referred to as an example of the fourth period, the period from c04 to c05, and the period from c10 to c11 can be referred to as an example of the fifth period.

  The specific opening may be constituted by the short opening of the second attacker and the long opening of the second attacker. This specific release may be constituted by a plurality of rounds or may be constituted by the same round.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 110 (b), an example of an operation in a case where only the second round of the four consecutive rounds is short-opened and the other rounds are long-opened will be described. The example shown in FIG. 110B is the same as the example shown in FIG. 110A except that the operation in the round RD is different. That is, the operation pattern shown in FIG. 110 (b) is an operation pattern that may be executed with a big hit (special big hit) scheduled to acquire probability variation. The jackpot game including the operation pattern shown in FIG. 110 (b) can be regarded as an example of a second jackpot game.

  As shown in FIG. 110 (b), the operations performed at the timings indicated by d01 to d10 are the same as the operations performed at the timings indicated by c01 to c10 in FIG. 110 (a), respectively. In this effect example, as in the period from d04 to d05, the period during which the second variable prize opening 235a is in the open state (short open) may be referred to as the first period.

  When the round RD is started at the timing of d10, the period of the large winning opening 1 valid state is ended, and the solenoid SOL2 is turned on to open the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a from the closed state. Displace to the state. At this time, the solenoid SOL3 (probability change operation region solenoid) is turned ON, and the V shutter 2352a is displaced from the closed state to the open state. At this time, the special prize opening 2 release signal and the special prize opening 2 operating signal are turned ON, and the period for the special prize opening 2 valid state and the period for the probability variation operating area valid state are set. Here, after the shutter member 2351a is opened at the timing of d10, the shutter member 2351a is temporarily closed when a predetermined attacker 2 opening time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses, and then the predetermined attacker 2 closing time. When (for example, 2 seconds) elapses, it is operated so as to be opened again. Here, the attacker 2 closing time may be the same as the period from when the round end condition is satisfied and the attacker is in the closed state until the next round is started and the attacker is in the open state, The attacker 2 closing time may be longer, or the attacker 2 closing time may be shorter. In addition, the time from when the second attacker is in the closed state in the round in which the second attacker is short-opened to the time in which the second attacker is in the open state in the round in which the second attacker is long-opened, and the attacker 2 The closing time may be the same time or a different time. At this time, the closing time of the attacker 2 may be longer, or after the second attacker is in the closed state in the round in which the second attacker is short-opened, the second in the round in which the second attacker is long-opened The time until the attacker becomes an open state may be longer. Further, the attacker 2 opening time may be the same time as the opening time (short opening time) of the second attacker in the round RB, or may be a different time. In other words, the time for performing the short opening in the round in which the second attacker performs the short opening and the long opening and the opening time of the attacker in the round in which only the short opening is performed may be the same time or different times. It may be. At this time, the opening time of the attacker 2 may be longer, or the short opening time of the second attacker may be longer. On the other hand, the operation pattern of the V shutter 2352a is the same as that shown in FIG. In the operation pattern shown in FIG. 110 (b), in the round RD, the second attacker performs a short release and performs a long release operation after closing for a certain period of time. When I was disappointed that it was not a game, after that the second attacker opened a long game and found that it was a special big hit, so that I could increase my expectation for the gaming state to move to after the big hit game There is. In this example, the above-described attacker 2 closing time (for example, 2 seconds) is shorter than the above-described first shutter closing time (for example, 3 seconds), but may be the same time. However, the attacker 2 may be closed for a longer time.

  Thereafter, when the above-described round end condition is satisfied, the solenoid SOL2 is turned OFF at the timing of d11, and the shutter member 2351a is displaced from the open state to the closed state. At this time, the special winning opening 2 release signal is also turned OFF. Thereafter, when the closing time after the above-described round has elapsed and the timing of d12 is reached, the signal indicating that the special winning opening 2 is in operation is turned OFF, and the round RD ends. At this time, the solenoid SOL3 is turned OFF and the V shutter 2352a is displaced from the open state to the closed state, and the period of the probability changing operation region valid state is also ended. Here again, the period from d11 to d12 is the remaining sphere detection period. As described above, in this effect example, the period from the time when the second attacker is opened at the timing of d10 to the time when the above-described attacker 2 opening time elapses and is closed (short opening) is the first period. It can be said that it is an example of a period, and the period from the time when the second attacker 2 is closed to the time when the attacker 2 closing time elapses until it is opened again can be called the second period. The period from the time when the attacker is in the open state to the time when it is closed at the timing of d11 can be called a third period. Here, either or both of the above-described period from d04 to d05 and the timing from d10 to the time when the second attacker opens and the time when the attacker 2 opening time elapses to the closed state are set as the first. It can also be said that the period. When round RD is the final round, the big hit game end effect may be started at the timing of d12. Further, the interval time between rounds may elapse after the timing of d12, and the big hit game end effect may be started at the timing of d13. When the round RD is not the final round, the next round may be started when the inter-round interval time elapses after the timing of d12 and reaches the timing of d13.

  In this effect example, another period may be interposed between the first period, the second period, and the third period. For example, in the case of (1) short opening- (2) long closing- (3) short opening- (4) short closing- (5) long opening operation for the second attacker, the first period is (1 ) In the case of short opening, the second period can be either (2) long closing or (4) short closing.

  FIG. 111 (a) is a timing chart showing an example of the operation when the first attacker opens long in all two consecutive rounds, and FIG. 111 (b) shows one of the three consecutive rounds. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing an example of an operation when the first attacker opens long for only the first round and the second attacker opens short for the other rounds. FIG. Here, in both cases of FIG. 111 (a) and FIG. 111 (b), the big hit game is shown, and the signal indicating the special game is continuously in the ON state.

  First, with reference to FIG. 111 (a), an example of an operation when the first attacker opens long in all two consecutive rounds will be described. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 111 (a), the first attacker is long open in the first round of two consecutive rounds, and the first attacker is long open in the second round. The situation is shown. The operation pattern shown in FIG. 111 (a) is an operation pattern that may be executed in both the big hit (special big hit) scheduled to acquire probability variation and the big hit not scheduled to acquire probability variation.

  As shown in FIG. 111 (a), when a round (round RE) in which the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is opened at the timing of e01 is started, the solenoid SOL1 is turned on to be the first variable. The first door member 2341a of the winning opening 234a is displaced from the closed state to the open state. At this time, the special winning opening 1 release signal and the special winning opening 1 operating signal are turned ON, and the period of the special winning opening 1 valid state is set.

  Thereafter, when the above-described round end condition is satisfied, the solenoid SOL1 is turned OFF at the timing of e02, and the first door member 2341a is displaced from the open state to the closed state. At this time, the special winning opening 1 release signal is also turned OFF. Thereafter, when the above-described closing time after the round elapses and the timing becomes e03, the signal indicating that the winning prize opening 1 is in operation is turned OFF, and the round RE ends. Again, the period from e02 to e03 is the remaining sphere detection period.

  When the above-described interval time between rounds elapses after the timing of e03, the next round (round RF) starts at the timing of e04. At this time, the solenoid SOL1 is turned ON, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable prize winning opening 234a is displaced from the closed state to the open state. At this time, the special winning opening 1 release signal and the special winning opening 1 operating signal are turned ON. On the other hand, the period in which the special winning opening 1 is valid continues without ending.

  Thereafter, when the above-described round end condition is satisfied, the solenoid SOL1 is turned OFF at the timing of e05, and the first door member 2341a is displaced from the open state to the closed state. At this time, the special winning opening 1 release signal is also turned OFF. Thereafter, when the closing time after the round described above elapses and the timing becomes e06, the signal indicating that the special winning opening 1 is in operation is turned OFF and the round RF is ended. Here again, the period from e05 to e06 is the remaining sphere detection period.

  When the interval time between rounds described above elapses after the timing of e06, the period of the special winning opening 1 valid state ends at the timing of e07. When the round RF is the final round, the big hit game end effect may be started at the timing of e07. The big hit game end effect may be started at the timing of e06. When the round RF is not the final round, the next round may be started when the interval time between rounds elapses after e06 timing and e07 timing is reached.

  Next, referring to FIG. 111 (b), in the case where the first attacker opens long only in the first round of three consecutive rounds, and the second attacker opens short in other rounds. An example of the operation will be described. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 111 (b), the first attacker in the first round of the three consecutive rounds is long open, the second attacker in the second round is short open, In the third round, the second attacker is shown short open. The operation pattern shown in FIG. 111 (b) is an operation pattern that may be executed with a big hit that is not scheduled to be acquired.

  As shown in FIG. 111 (b), when a round (round RG) in which the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is opened at the timing of f01 is started, the solenoid SOL1 is turned on and the first variable is received. The first door member 2341a of the winning opening 234a is displaced from the closed state to the open state. At this time, the special winning opening 1 release signal and the special winning opening 1 operating signal are turned ON, and the period of the special winning opening 1 valid state is set.

  Thereafter, when the above-described round end condition is satisfied, the solenoid SOL1 is turned OFF at the timing of f02, and the first door member 2341a is displaced from the open state to the closed state. At this time, the special winning opening 1 release signal is also turned OFF. Thereafter, when the closing time after the round has elapsed and the timing of f03 is reached, the signal indicating that the special winning opening 1 is in operation is turned OFF and the round RG ends. Similarly, the period from f02 to f03 is the remaining sphere detection period.

  When the above-described interval time between rounds has elapsed after the timing of f03, the next round (round RH) starts at the timing of f04. At this time, the period of the big winning opening 1 valid state is ended, and the solenoid SOL2 is turned ON, and the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a is displaced from the closed state to the open state. At this time, the solenoid SOL3 (probability change operation region solenoid) is turned ON, and the V shutter 2352a is displaced from the closed state to the open state. At this time, the special prize opening 2 release signal and the special prize opening 2 operating signal are turned ON, and the period for the special prize opening 2 valid state and the period for the probability variation operating area valid state are set.

  Since the round RH is a short opening round, the opening time of the attacker in the round RH is the short opening time described above. Therefore, when the short opening time has elapsed from the start of the round RH, the round end condition is satisfied at the timing f05, the solenoid SOL2 is turned OFF, and the shutter member 2351a is changed from the open state to the closed state. Therefore, it can be said that in the round RH, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second attacker and it is also difficult to enter the V-pass switch SW2.

  Thereafter, when the above-described closing time after the round elapses and the timing becomes f06, the signal for operating the winning prize opening 2 is turned OFF and the round RH ends. At this time, since the solenoid SOL3 remains OFF, the V shutter 2352a also remains closed, while the period of the probability variation operating region valid state ends at this timing. Similarly, the remaining ball detection period is from f05 to f06.

  When the above-described inter-round interval time elapses after the timing of f06, the next round (round RI) starts at the timing of f07. At this time, the solenoid SOL2 is turned ON, and the shutter member 2351a of the second variable prize winning opening 235a is displaced from the closed state to the open state. At this time, the solenoid SOL3 (probability change operation region solenoid) is turned ON, and the V shutter 2352a is displaced from the closed state to the open state. At this time, the special prize opening 2 release signal and the special prize opening 2 operating signal are turned ON, and the period of the probability variation operating region valid state is set. On the other hand, the period in which the special winning opening 2 is valid continues without ending.

  Since the round RI is also a short opening round, the attacker's opening time in the round RI is the short opening time described above. Therefore, when the short opening time has elapsed from the start of the round RI, the round end condition is satisfied at the timing f08, the solenoid SOL2 is turned OFF, and the shutter member 2351a is changed from the open state to the closed state. Therefore, it can be said that in the round RI, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second attacker and it is also difficult to enter the V-pass switch SW2.

  Thereafter, when the above-described closing time after the round has passed and the timing becomes f09, the signal indicating that the special winning opening 2 is in operation is turned OFF, and the round RI ends. At this time, since the solenoid SOL3 remains OFF, the V shutter 2352a also remains closed, while the period of the probability variation operating region valid state ends at this timing. Similarly, the remaining ball detection period is from f08 to f09.

  After the timing of f09, when the above-described interval time between rounds has elapsed, the period of the big winning opening 2 valid state ends at the timing of f10. When the round RI is the final round, the big hit game end effect may be started at the timing of f10. Also, the big hit game end effect may be started at the timing of f09. When the round RI is not the final round, the next round may be started when the inter-round interval time elapses after the timing f09 and the timing becomes f10.

  Thus, in the effect example shown in FIG. 111B, the period from f04 to f05 can be referred to as an example of the first period, the period from f05 to f07 can be referred to as an example of the second period, and f07. To f08 can be considered as an example of a third period.

  Next, an example of operation timings of the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) and the second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) between rounds will be described with reference to FIG. In the example described so far, when the game ball passes through the V passing switch SW2 in the big hit game, it is configured to shift to a probable change state after the big hit game ends. However, in the example shown in FIG. During the execution of a round game that is opened by the attacker, the game ball can be shifted to the next round on condition that the game ball passes through the V passing switch SW2 provided in the second attacker. That is, the V pass switch SW2 functions as a continuation area. In this example, when the above-described round end condition is satisfied, the round game is ended, and when the game ball passes through the V passing switch SW2 in the round game, the game proceeds to the next round. When the game ball passes through the V passing switch SW2 during execution of the round game, the round game may be terminated and the next round may be started. In any case, the example shown in FIG. 112 shows that the game ball does not pass through the V pass switch SW2 during execution of a round game in which at least the second attacker (the attacker with the V pass switch SW2) is opened. When the round game is finished, the big hit game is finished without shifting to the next round.

  FIG. 112 (a) is a timing chart showing an example of the operation in the case of releasing the long in all four consecutive rounds, and FIG. 112 (b) is the first round of the four consecutive rounds. 6 is a timing chart showing an example of an operation when only a long opening is performed and a short opening is performed in other rounds. Here, in both cases of FIG. 112 (a) and FIG. 112 (b), the big hit game is indicated, and the signal indicating the special game is continuously ON. In this example, at least during the big hit game, the duration of the continuous area valid state is set. The period of the continuous area valid state indicates a period in which the game ball passing through the V pass switch SW2 is treated as valid. The duration of the continuous area valid state may be set even in a gaming state other than the big hit game, may be set only during the operation of the second variable winning opening 235a, or the big winning opening 2 It may be set only while the operating signal is ON.

  First, with reference to FIG. 112 (a), an example of the operation in the case of long release in all four consecutive rounds will be described. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 112 (a), the first attacker in the first round of the four consecutive rounds is long open, the second attacker in the second round is long open, It is shown that the first attacker is long open in the third round and the second attacker is long open in the fourth round.

  As shown in FIG. 112 (a), when a round (round RJ) in which the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is opened at the timing of g01 starts, the solenoid SOL1 is turned on to be the first variable. The first door member 2341a of the winning opening 234a is displaced from the closed state to the open state. At this time, the special winning opening 1 release signal and the special winning opening 1 in-operation signal are turned ON, and the period of the special winning opening 1 valid state is set.

  Thereafter, when the above-described round end condition is satisfied, the solenoid SOL1 is turned OFF at the timing of g02, and the first door member 2341a is displaced from the open state to the closed state. At this time, the special winning opening 1 release signal is also turned OFF. Thereafter, when the closing time after the round elapses and the timing of g03 is reached, the signal for operating the winning prize opening 1 is turned OFF and the round RJ is completed. Here again, g02 to g03 are the remaining sphere detection period.

  When the above-described interval time between rounds elapses after the timing of g03, the next round (round RK) starts at the timing of g04. At this time, the period of the big winning opening 1 valid state is ended, and the solenoid SOL2 is turned ON, and the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a is displaced from the closed state to the open state. At this time, the solenoid SOL3 (in this example, the continuation region solenoid) is turned ON, and the V shutter 2352a is displaced from the closed state to the open state. At this time, the special winning opening 2 release signal and the special winning opening 2 operating signal are turned ON, and the period of the special winning opening 2 valid state is set. After the V shutter 2352a is opened at the timing of g04, the V shutter 2352a is temporarily closed when the first shutter opening time described above has elapsed, and then is again opened when the first shutter closing time described above has elapsed. It works to be. The operation pattern of the V shutter 2352a is determined in advance. For example, the V shutter 2352a may be operated in a predetermined operation pattern from the start of the big hit game, or the second attacker opens. The operation of the V shutter 2352a may be started with an operation pattern predetermined at the timing. Further, when the round in which the second attacker opens long is started as in round RK, the decorative symbol display device 208 may be displayed to indicate that the continuation area is aimed.

  Thereafter, when the above-described round end condition is satisfied, the solenoid SOL2 is turned OFF at the timing of g05, and the shutter member 2351a is displaced from the open state to the closed state. At this time, the special winning opening 2 release signal is also turned OFF. Thereafter, when the closing time after the round has passed and the timing of g06 is reached, the signal indicating that the winning prize opening 2 is in operation is turned OFF and the round RK is completed. At this time, the solenoid SOL3 is turned OFF and the V shutter 2352a is displaced from the open state to the closed state. Similarly, the period from g05 to g06 is the remaining sphere detection period.

  After the time of g06, when the above-mentioned interval time between rounds has elapsed and the timing of g07 is reached, the period of the big winning opening 2 valid state is over and the game ball has passed through the V pass switch SW2 in the round RK. It is determined whether or not. If it is determined that the game ball has passed through the V passing switch SW2 in the round RK, the next round (round RL) is started. On the other hand, if it is not determined that the game ball has passed through the V pass switch SW2 in the round RK, that is, if the game ball has not passed through the V pass switch SW2 in the round RK, the big hit game without shifting to the round RL. An end effect is executed, and then the big hit game ends.

  When the round RL is started, the solenoid SOL1 is turned ON, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a is displaced from the closed state to the open state. At this time, the special winning opening 1 release signal and the special winning opening 1 in-operation signal are turned ON, and the period of the special winning opening 1 valid state is set. Thereafter, the operations performed at the timings indicated by g08 to g13 are the same as the operations performed at the timings indicated by g02 to g07, respectively. When the round RM is the final round, the big hit game end effect may be started at the timing of g12. Further, the interval time between rounds may elapse after the timing of g12, and the big hit game end effect may be started at the timing of g13. When the round RM is not the final round, the following condition is satisfied on the condition that the round interval RM has passed the V-pass switch SW2 when the interval time between rounds has elapsed and the timing of g13 is reached after the timing of g12. The round may be started.

  As described above, in the operation pattern shown in FIG. 112A, in the round RK and the round RM, the second attacker is opened long, and the game ball can easily enter the V-pass switch SW2. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 112 (b), an example of the operation in the case where only the first round of the four consecutive rounds is opened long and the other rounds are opened short will be described. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 112 (b), the first attacker in the first round of the four consecutive rounds is long open, the second attacker in the second round is short open, In the third round, the first attacker is short-opened, and in the fourth round, the second attacker is short-opened. In the operation pattern shown in FIG. 112 (b), in most cases, it is difficult to pass the game ball to the V pass switch SW2 in the second round (round RK). The big hit game will end. That is, the operation pattern shown in FIG. 112 (b) is an operation pattern in which the big hit game is substantially ended in round RJ.

  As shown in FIG. 112 (b), when the round (round RJ) in which the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is opened at the timing of h01 starts, the solenoid SOL1 is turned ON and the first variable The first door member 2341a of the winning opening 234a is displaced from the closed state to the open state. At this time, the special winning opening 1 release signal and the special winning opening 1 in-operation signal are turned ON, and the period of the special winning opening 1 valid state is set.

  Thereafter, when the above-described round end condition is satisfied, the solenoid SOL1 is turned OFF at the timing of h02, and the first door member 2341a is displaced from the open state to the closed state. At this time, the special winning opening 1 release signal is also turned OFF. Thereafter, when the above-described closing time after the round elapses and the timing becomes h03, the signal indicating that the winning prize opening 1 is in operation is turned OFF and the round RJ ends. Here again, the period from h02 to h03 is the remaining sphere detection period.

  When the above-described interval time between rounds elapses after the timing of h03, the next round (round RK) starts at the timing of h04. At this time, the period of the big winning opening 1 valid state is ended, and the solenoid SOL2 is turned ON, and the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a is displaced from the closed state to the open state. At this time, the solenoid SOL3 (continuation area solenoid) is turned ON, and the V shutter 2352a is displaced from the closed state to the open state. At this time, for example, the special winning opening 2 release signal and the special winning opening 2 operating signal are turned ON, and the period of the special winning opening 2 valid state is set.

  Since the round RK is a short opening round, the opening time of the attacker in the round RK is a short opening time. Therefore, when the short opening time has elapsed from the start of the round RK, the round end condition is satisfied at the timing of h05, the solenoid SOL2 is turned OFF, and the shutter member 2351a is changed from the open state to the closed state. Therefore, it can be said that in the round RK, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second attacker and it is also difficult to enter the V-pass switch SW2.

  After that, when the closing time after the round described above has elapsed and the timing of h06 is reached, the signal indicating that the special winning opening 2 is in operation is turned OFF, and the round RK ends. At this time, since the solenoid SOL3 remains OFF, the V shutter 2352a also remains closed. Here again, the period from h05 to h06 is the remaining sphere detection period.

  After the time of h06, when the above-mentioned interval time between rounds has passed and the timing of h07 is reached, the period of the big winning opening 2 valid state is over and the game ball has passed through the V pass switch SW2 in the round RK. It is determined whether or not. If it is determined that the game ball has passed through the V passing switch SW2 in the round RK, the next round (round RL) is started. On the other hand, if it is not determined that the game ball has passed through the V pass switch SW2 in the round RK, that is, if the game ball has not passed through the V pass switch SW2 in the round RK, the big hit game without shifting to the round RL. An end effect is executed, and then the big hit game ends.

  When the round RL is started, the solenoid SOL1 is turned ON, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a is displaced from the closed state to the open state. At this time, the special winning opening 1 release signal and the special winning opening 1 in-operation signal are turned ON, and the period of the special winning opening 1 valid state is set.

  Since the round RL is also a short opening round, the attacker's opening time in the round RL is the short opening time described above. Therefore, when the short opening time elapses from the start of the round RL, the round end condition is satisfied at the timing of h08, the solenoid SOL1 is turned off, and the first door member 2341a is changed from the open state to the closed state. Therefore, it can be said that the round RL is a round in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the first attacker.

  Thereafter, when the closing time after the round described above elapses and the timing becomes h09, the winning prize 1 operating signal is turned OFF and the round RL ends. Here again, the period from h08 to h09 is the remaining sphere detection period.

  When the inter-round interval time described above elapses after the timing of h09, the next round (round RM) starts at the timing of h10. Thereafter, the operations performed at the timings indicated by h10 to h13 are the same as the operations performed at the timings indicated by h04 to h07, respectively. Accordingly, it can be said that in the round RM, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second attacker and it is also difficult to enter the V-pass switch SW2. If the round RM is the final round, the big hit game end effect may be started at the timing of h12. Alternatively, the interval time between rounds may elapse after the timing of h12, and the big hit game end effect may be started at the timing of h13. If the round RM is not the final round, the following condition is satisfied on the condition that the round interval RM has passed through the V-pass switch SW2 when the interval time between rounds has elapsed and the timing of h13 has been reached after the timing of h12. The round may be started.

  In this example, the round opened by the attacker (second attacker) having the continuation area is the second and subsequent rounds, but may be the first round.

  Also, in this example, one or a plurality of rounds for short-opening an attacker (first attacker) that does not have a continuation area are executed so as to make it difficult for the player to know the number of rounds. May be.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 113, an example of the operation timing of the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) in the small hit game and the big hit game will be described. FIG. 113 (a) is a timing chart showing an example of the operation in the small hit game, and FIG. 113 (b) is a timing chart showing an example of the operation in the big hit game. In this example, when the game ball passes through the V passing switch SW2 in the big hit game, it is configured to shift to a probable change state after the big hit game ends. In this example, the general discharge passage (also referred to as the first discharge passage) for discharging the game ball that has entered the first variable winning opening 234a and passed through the winning count switch SW4 is referred to as a general discharge passage. An effect area that is provided with another effect discharge passage (sometimes referred to as a second discharge passage) and is displaceable between a state that allows the game ball to enter the effect discharge passage and a state that prevents entry. A shutter is provided. The effect area shutter is configured to be displaceable, for example, by driving an effect area solenoid, and the effect area solenoid is configured to be driven and controlled by the first sub-control unit 400, for example.

  First, an example of the operation in the small hit game will be described with reference to FIG. That is, the example shown in FIG. 113 (a) shows a state where the first attacker opens shortly a plurality of times (for example, twice) when the small hit game is started.

  As shown in FIG. 113 (a), when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214, the small hit game is started at the timing of i01. At this time, a signal indicating a special game is turned ON, and, for example, a small hit game start effect is started.

  Thereafter, when the small hit game start effect ends and the timing of i02 is reached, the solenoid SOL1 is turned ON, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a is displaced from the closed state to the open state. At this time, the special winning opening 1 release signal and the special winning opening 1 in-operation signal are turned ON, and the period of the special winning opening 1 valid state is set. After the first door member 2341a is opened at the timing of i02, the first door member 2341a is temporarily closed when a predetermined first big winning opening 1 opening time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses, and thereafter When the first grand prize winning opening 1 closing time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses, the open state is resumed. After that, when a predetermined second big winning opening 1 opening time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses, it is closed at the timing of i03. In addition, the 1st big winning opening 1 opening time and the 2nd big winning opening 1 opening time may be the same time, and may be different time. Further, the first closing time 1 closing time may be the same time as the first closing time 1 opening time or may be a different time. Further, the first closing time 1 closing time may be the same time as the second closing time 1 opening time or may be a different time.

  On the other hand, when a predetermined production area solenoid drive start time (for example, 0.1 seconds) elapses from the timing i02, the production area solenoid is driven and the production area shutter allows the game ball to enter the production discharge passage. Displace to the state. The effect area shutter maintains a state in which the game ball is allowed to enter the effect discharge passage until a predetermined effect area release time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses. It shifts to a state that prevents the game ball from entering the discharge passage. Since the effect area shutter operates as described above, in the small hit game, even if the game ball enters the first variable winning opening 234a, before the game ball enters the effect discharge passage. The effect area shutter is in a state of preventing entry into the effect discharge passage.

  After the timing of i03, when the post-round closing time described above elapses and the timing of i04 is reached, the special winning opening 1 operating signal is turned OFF. The closing time after the round in the small hit game may be the same time as the closing time after the round in the big hit game, or may be a different time. Again, the period from i03 to i04 is the remaining sphere detection period.

  After the timing of i04, when a predetermined small hit end interval time (for example, 0.1 second) elapses and the timing of i05 is reached, the period of the big winning opening 1 valid state ends. At this time, for example, a small hit game end effect is started.

  Thereafter, at the timing of i06, the small hit game end effect ends, and the small hit game ends. At this time, the signal indicating the special game is turned off.

  Next, an example of the operation in the big hit game will be described with reference to FIG. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 113 (b), when the big hit game is started, the first attacker opens shortly a plurality of times (for example, twice) and then opens long. Yes.

  As shown in FIG. 113 (b), when the big win symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special display device 212 or the second special display device 214, the big hit game is started at the timing of j01. At this time, a signal indicating a special game is turned ON, and, for example, a big hit game start effect is started. Here, the content of the big hit game start effect to be started may be the same as, for example, the above-described small hit game start effect. You may be able to improve your interest by having a sense of expectation.

  Thereafter, when the big hit game start effect is finished and the timing of j02 is reached, the first round (round RN) starts, the solenoid SOL1 is turned ON, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a is closed. Displace from the state to the open state. At this time, the special winning opening 1 release signal and the special winning opening 1 in-operation signal are turned ON, and the period of the special winning opening 1 valid state is set. After the first door member 2341a is opened at the timing of j02, it is once closed when the above-mentioned first big prize opening 1 opening time has elapsed, and then the first big prize opening 1 described above. When the closing time elapses, it is opened again. After that, when the above-mentioned second grand prize opening 1 opening time elapses, the timing becomes j03 and the closed state is reached. At the timing of j04, the open state is resumed.

  On the other hand, when the above-described effect area solenoid drive start time elapses from the timing of j02, the effect area solenoid is driven and the effect area shutter is shifted to a state in which the game ball is allowed to enter the effect discharge passage. When the above-described effect area release time elapses, the effect area shutter is temporarily closed, and then when the above-described effect area solenoid drive start time elapses after the first attacker is opened at the timing of j04, The effect area solenoid is driven, and the effect area shutter is again displaced to allow the game ball to enter the effect discharge passage.

  Thereafter, when the above-described round end condition is satisfied, the solenoid SOL1 is turned OFF at the timing of j05, and the first door member 2341a is displaced from the open state to the closed state. At this time, the special winning opening 1 release signal is also turned OFF. Thereafter, when the closing time after the round described above elapses and the timing becomes j06, the signal indicating that the winning prize opening 1 is in operation is turned OFF, and the round RN ends. Similarly, the period from j05 to j06 is the remaining sphere detection period. On the other hand, when a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 second) elapses from the timing of j06, the effect area shutter is turned off so that the effect area solenoid is turned off and the game ball is prevented from entering the effect discharge passage.

  After the timing of j06, when the above-described interval time between rounds has elapsed, j07 is reached and the next round (round RO) starts. At this time, the period of the big winning opening 1 valid state is ended, and the solenoid SOL2 is turned ON, and the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a is displaced from the closed state to the open state. At this time, the special winning opening 2 release signal and the special winning opening 2 operating signal are turned ON, and the period of the special winning opening 2 valid state is set.

  As described above, in the example shown in FIG. 113 (b), the effect area shutter operates as described above. Therefore, in the big hit game, the game ball that has entered the first variable winning opening 234a enters the effect discharge passage. For example, it is possible to execute an effect of notifying that a big hit has been triggered by the passage of the game ball to the effect V passing switch provided in the effect discharge passage.

  In the description of FIGS. 109 to 113, the period between timings such as ON / OFF of each signal is not limited to that illustrated. For example, the length of one of the above periods may be the same as the length of another period other than the one period, or may be longer than the other period other than the one period. There may be a shorter period than other periods other than the one period. Each timing may be included in one period and other periods other than the one period.

  Next, a twelfth example of a game machine to which the present invention can be applied will be described. Hereinafter, the difference from the items described so far will be mainly described. The pachinko machine 100 in this example is described as an example provided with the attacker unit 2340 shown in FIG. 74. Of course, this example is also applied to the pachinko machine 100 provided with the game board 200 as shown in FIG. It can also be applied.

  FIG. 114 (a) shows an example of the special symbol jackpot stoppage pattern and the action pattern of the attacker for each round in the twelfth example pachinko machine, and FIG. 114 (b) shows a big hit in the jackpot game. An example of the specific operation | movement pattern of a winning opening (variable winning opening) is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 114 (a), the jackpot symbols in the 12th example pachinko machine are “symbol 1” to “symbol 9”, “symbol A”, “symbol C”, “symbol E” and “symbol F”. ]. Among them, the jackpot symbols of Special Figure 1 are “symbol 1” to “symbol 9”, “symbol A”, “symbol C”, “symbol E”, and “symbol F”. , “Design 1”. In this example, the action pattern of the big winning opening in the big hit game differs depending on the big hit symbol. In addition, both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can display a lost symbol or a small hit symbol. In addition, you may not provide a small hit. In addition, the jackpot symbol of the special symbol 2 may be able to display symbols other than “symbol 1”.

  As shown in FIG. 114 (b), nine types of action patterns of the special winning opening are prepared, and the operation of the special winning opening for each round is based on any one of these operation patterns.

  In the case of a big hit with “symbol 1”, the first variable prize opening 234a (first attacker) is opened for a maximum of 29 seconds in the first to thirteenth and fifteenth rounds, and then the closing time after the round (closing) It closes for 1.9 seconds as state 1), and then closes for 0.1 seconds as interval time between rounds (closed state 2) (pattern 6). In the 14th and 16th rounds, after the second variable prize opening 235a (second attacker) is opened for 29 seconds, it is closed for 1.9 seconds after the round, and thereafter, the interval time between rounds is 0. Close for 1 second (Pattern 9). In other words, “symbol 1” is a symbol indicating that a large number of game balls are 16 round big hits that can be entered into the variable winning opening in any round from 1 round to 16 rounds. In addition, in the 14th and 16th rounds, the second attacker becomes long open, and it becomes easy for the game ball to pass through the V passing switch SW2, so that “symbol 1” indicates that it is a big hit that is expected to acquire a certain probability change. It is a design. In this example, the jackpot game started by displaying “symbol 1” can be said to be an example of a third jackpot game.

  In the case of a big hit with “symbol 2”, the attacker operates according to the pattern 6 described above in the first to thirteenth and fifteenth rounds. In the 14th round, the second variable prize opening 235a (second attacker) opened for 0.5 seconds, closed for 3 seconds, and opened for 28 seconds, and then closed for 1.9 seconds as the closing time after the round. After that, it is closed for 0.1 seconds as an interval time between rounds (pattern 8). In the sixteenth round, the attacker operates according to the pattern 9 described above. In other words, “symbol 2” is a symbol indicating that a large number of game balls are a 16-round big hit that can be entered into the variable winning opening in any round from 1 round to 16 rounds. In addition, since the second attacker is long open in the 14th and 16th rounds, and the V passing switch SW2 is easy to pass, “symbol 2” is a symbol indicating that it is a big hit scheduled to acquire probability variation. .

  In the case of a big hit with “symbol 3”, the attacker operates according to the pattern 6 described above in the first to thirteenth and thirteenth rounds. In the 14th round, after the second variable prize opening 235a (second attacker) is opened for 0.5 seconds, it is closed for 1.9 seconds as the closing time after the round (closed state 1). It closes for 0.1 second as an interval time (closed state 2) (pattern 7). In the sixteenth round, the attacker operates according to the pattern 9 described above. In other words, “symbol 3” is a symbol indicating that a large number of game balls is a big hit of 15 rounds that can be entered into the variable winning opening in rounds 1 to 13, 15 and 16 rounds. In addition, in the 16th round, the second attacker becomes long open, and the V passing switch SW2 becomes easy to pass through. Therefore, “symbol 3” is a symbol indicating that it is a big hit scheduled to acquire probability variation. In this example, the jackpot game started by displaying “symbol 3” can be said to be an example of a second jackpot game.

  In the case of a big hit with “symbol 4”, the attacker operates according to the pattern 6 described above in the first to thirteenth rounds. In the fourteenth and sixteenth rounds, the attacker operates according to the pattern 7 described above. In the fifteenth round, after the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is opened for 0.5 seconds, it is closed for 1.9 seconds as the closing time after the round (closed state 1), and thereafter, the interval between rounds The time (closed state 2) is closed for 0.1 second (pattern 1). In other words, “symbol 4” is a symbol indicating that a large number of game balls can be placed in the variable winning opening in the first to thirteenth rounds and is a big hit of 13 rounds. In addition, since the second attacker is short open in both the 14th round and the 16th round, and the V passing switch SW2 becomes difficult to pass through, the “symbol 4” is a big hit that is not scheduled to be acquired. It is a pattern which shows. In this example, the jackpot game started by displaying “symbol 4” can be said to be an example of the first jackpot game.

  In the case of a big hit with “symbol 5”, the attacker operates according to the pattern 6 described above in the first and second rounds. In the third to twelfth to twelfth rounds and the fifteenth round, the attacker operation according to the pattern 1 described above is performed. In the 13th round, after the first variable prize opening 234a (first attacker) is opened for 0.5 seconds, it is closed for 1.9 seconds as the closing time after the round (closed state 1), and thereafter, the interval between rounds The time (closed state 2) is closed for 8.1 seconds (pattern 3). In the fourteenth round, the operation of the attacker by the pattern 8 described above is performed. In the sixteenth round, the attacker operates according to the pattern 9 described above. In other words, “symbol 5” is a symbol indicating that a large number of game balls are a big hit of 4 rounds that can be entered into the variable winning opening in 1 round, 2 rounds, 14 rounds, and 16 rounds. In addition, since the second attacker is long open in the 14th and 16th rounds, and the V passing switch SW2 is easy to pass through, the “symbol 5” is a symbol indicating that it is a big hit that is expected to acquire a probable change. .

  In the case of a big hit with “symbol 6”, the attacker operates according to the pattern 6 described above in the first to sixth rounds. In the seventh to eleventh rounds and the fifteenth round, the attacker operation according to the pattern 1 described above is performed. In the twelfth round, after the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is opened for 0.5 seconds, it is closed for 1.9 seconds as the closing time after the round (closed state 1), and thereafter, the interval between rounds The time (closed state 2) is closed for 4.1 seconds (pattern 2). In the thirteenth round, the attacker operation according to the pattern 3 described above is performed. In the fourteenth round, the operation of the attacker by the pattern 8 described above is performed. In the sixteenth round, the attacker operates according to the pattern 9 described above. In other words, “symbol 6” is a symbol indicating that a lot of game balls can win a variable winning opening in 1 round to 6 rounds, 14 rounds, and 16 rounds, and that is a big hit of 8 rounds. In addition, since the second attacker becomes long open in the 14th round and the 16th round, and the V passing switch SW2 easily passes, the “symbol 6” is a symbol indicating that it is a big hit that is expected to acquire a probability variation. .

  In the case of a big hit with “symbol 7”, the attacker operates according to the pattern 6 described above in the first to sixth rounds. In the seventh to eleventh rounds and the fifteenth round, the attacker operation according to the pattern 1 described above is performed. In the twelfth round, after the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is opened for 0.5 seconds, it is closed for 1.9 seconds as the closing time after the round (closed state 1), and thereafter, the interval between rounds The time (closed state 2) is closed for 20.1 seconds (pattern 5). In the thirteenth round, the attacker operation according to the pattern 3 described above is performed. In the fourteenth round, the operation of the attacker by the pattern 8 described above is performed. In the sixteenth round, the attacker operates according to the pattern 9 described above. That is, “symbol 7” is a symbol indicating that a large number of game balls can win a variable winning opening in 1 to 6 rounds, 14 rounds, and 16 rounds. In addition, since the second attacker is long open in the 14th and 16th rounds, and the V passing switch SW2 is easy to pass, “symbol 7” is a symbol indicating that it is a big hit that is expected to acquire a probability change. .

  In the case of a big hit with “symbol 8”, the attack operation according to the pattern 6 described above is performed in the first to sixth rounds, the thirteenth round, and the fifteenth round. In the seventh to twelfth rounds, the attacker operation according to the above-described pattern 1 is performed. In the fourteenth round, the attacker operates according to the pattern 7 described above. In the sixteenth round, the attacker operates according to the pattern 8 described above. That is, “symbol 8” is a symbol indicating that a large number of game balls can be put into a variable winning opening in 9 to 13 rounds, 13 rounds, 15 rounds, and 16 rounds, and is a big hit of 9 rounds. In addition, since the second attacker becomes long open in the 16th round and the V passing switch SW2 is easy to pass, “symbol 8” is a symbol indicating that it is a big hit scheduled to acquire probability variation.

  In the case of a big hit with “symbol 9”, the attack operation according to the pattern 6 described above is performed in the first to sixth rounds, the thirteenth round, and the fifteenth round. In the seventh to twelfth rounds, the attacker operation according to the above-described pattern 1 is performed. In the fourteenth and sixteenth rounds, the attacker operates according to the pattern 7 described above. That is, “symbol 9” is a symbol indicating that a large number of game balls can win a variable winning opening in 1 to 6 rounds, 13 rounds, and 15 rounds. In addition, since the second attacker is short open in both the 14th round and the 16th round, and the V passing switch SW2 becomes difficult to pass through, the “symbol 9” is a big hit that is not scheduled to be acquired. It is a pattern which shows.

  In the case of a big hit with “symbol A”, the attacker operates according to the above-described pattern 6 in the first to eighth rounds. In the ninth to thirteenth and fifteenth rounds, the above-described attacker operation according to pattern 1 is performed. In the fourteenth round, the operation of the attacker by the pattern 8 described above is performed. In the sixteenth round, the attacker operates according to the pattern 9 described above. That is, “symbol A” is a symbol indicating that a large number of game balls can be put into a variable winning opening in 10 to 16 rounds in 1 to 8 rounds, 14 rounds, and 16 rounds. In addition, since the second attacker is long open in the 14th and 16th rounds, and the V passing switch SW2 is easy to pass through, the “symbol A” is a symbol indicating that it is a big hit that is expected to acquire a probability variation. .

  In the case of a big hit with “symbol C”, the attack operation according to the above-described pattern 1 is performed in the first to eleventh and fifteenth rounds. In the twelfth round, after the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is opened for 0.5 seconds, it is closed for 1.9 seconds as the closing time after the round (closed state 1), and thereafter, the interval between rounds The time (closed state 2) is closed for 12.1 seconds (pattern 4). In the thirteenth round, the attacker operation according to the pattern 3 described above is performed. In the fourteenth round, the operation of the attacker by the pattern 8 described above is performed. In the sixteenth round, the attacker operates according to the pattern 9 described above. In other words, “symbol C” is a symbol indicating that a large number of game balls can be placed in the variable winning opening in 14 rounds and 16 rounds, and that is a big hit of 2 rounds. In addition, since the second attacker becomes long open in the 14th and 16th rounds, and the V passing switch SW2 is easy to pass, the “symbol C” is a symbol indicating that it is a big hit that is expected to acquire a probability variation. .

  In the case of a big hit with “symbol E”, the attack operation according to the above-described pattern 1 is performed in the first to thirteenth and fifteenth rounds. In the fourteenth and sixteenth rounds, the attacker operates according to the pattern 7 described above. That is, “symbol E” is a symbol indicating that all rounds of 1st to 16th rounds are short-opened and are substantially a big hit of 0 rounds. Also, in both rounds 14 and 16, the second attacker is short open and the V-pass switch SW2 becomes difficult to pass, so “symbol E” is a big hit that is not scheduled to be acquired. It is a pattern which shows.

  In the case of a big hit with “symbol F”, the attacker operates according to the pattern 6 described above in the first to eighth rounds. In the ninth to thirteenth and fifteenth rounds, the above-described attacker operation according to pattern 1 is performed. In the fourteenth round, the operation of the attacker by the pattern 8 described above is performed. In the sixteenth round, the attacker operates according to the pattern 9 described above. In other words, “symbol F” is a symbol indicating that a large number of game balls can be put into the variable winning opening in 10 to 16 rounds in 1 to 8 rounds, 14 rounds, and 16 rounds. In addition, since the second attacker is long open in the 14th and 16th rounds, and the V passing switch SW2 is easy to pass through, the “symbol F” is a symbol indicating that it is a big hit scheduled to acquire a probability variation. .

  Thus, in this example, the symbol variation display according to the special figure 1 can be referred to as the symbol variation display in which the second jackpot game is easier to start than the symbol variation display according to the special figure 2, and The variation display can be said to be a symbol variation display in which the third big hit game is easier to start than the symbol variation display according to FIG.

  FIG. 115 (a) shows an example of the effect pattern in the jackpot game executed by the 12th example pachinko machine, and FIG. 115 (b) shows an example of the effect content for each round. Is.

  As shown in FIG. 115 (a), the pachinko machine 100 of the twelfth example has nine effect patterns of pattern 01 to pattern 09, and any one of these patterns is executed in the big hit game. It is configured to be. Which production pattern is selected is based on, for example, jackpot symbols and lottery.

  The effect pattern of pattern 01 is an effect pattern that may be executed in a jackpot game that has been transferred with a special figure indicating that it is a jackpot that is not scheduled to be acquired.

  When the effect pattern of pattern 01 is executed, for example, a combination of decorative symbols promised to be a special jackpot (for example, “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”) in the variation display of the ornamental symbol that is a big hit -A combination of decorative symbols other than "decoration 3" decorative symbols: a combination of probable big hit symbols) (for example, "decoration 4"-"decoration 4"-a combination of decorative symbols of "decoration 4": non-probable) Temporary stop display at a combination of jackpot symbols) ((1) decorative symbol temporary stop effect). After that, the promotion effect as described above is executed as the effect content of “buzz 1” ((2) turn 1 (design promotion) effect). After that, as a result of the promotion effect, a stop display (determined display) is performed again with the combination of the non-probable change big hit symbol ((3) chance 1 (promotion success / failure) effect).

  In the pattern 01, after the big hit start effect is first executed ((4) big hit start effect), the offense / defense effect in which the ally character and the enemy character confront each other is performed as the effect content of “Burn 2” ((5 ) Skill 2 (offense and defense) production). After that, as a result of the offense / defense effect, the enemy character is attacked by the enemy character, and the effect of losing the defense and defeating is performed ((6) chance 2 (win / loss) effect). Thereafter, as the contents of the production of “Ruri 3”, a survival restoration effect is produced that directs whether or not the defeated ally character succeeds in survival ((7) Brilliance 3 (Rebirth) production). Thereafter, as a result of the revival effect, an effect in which the ally character fails to revive is performed ((8) chance 3 (success / failure success) effect). After that, the effect of 1 during the big hit is performed as the effect during the big hit ((9) effect during the big hit). The content of the effect during the big hit can be an appropriate content, but in this example, for example, the content of the effect indicates that there is a high possibility that the game will be in an uncertain change state after the big hit game. After that, the jackpot end effect 1 is performed as the jackpot game end effect executed after the jackpot game ends ((15) jackpot end effect). The content of the performance at the end of the jackpot 1 can be an appropriate content, but in this example, for example, an effect of notifying that the transition to the electric support state (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state) after the jackpot game ends. It is a content.

  The effect pattern of pattern 02 is an effect pattern that may be executed in a jackpot game that has been transferred with a special figure indicating that it is a jackpot that is not scheduled to be acquired.

  When the effect pattern of pattern 02 is executed, for example, a temporary stop display with a combination of non-probable change big hit symbols is performed in the variation display of the decorative symbol that is a big hit ((1) decorative symbol temporary stop effect). After that, the promotion effect as described above is executed as the effect content of “buzz 1” ((2) turn 1 (design promotion) effect). After that, as a result of the promotion effect, a stop display (determined display) is performed again with the combination of the non-probable change big hit symbol ((3) chance 1 (promotion success / failure) effect).

  In the pattern 02, after the big hit start effect is first executed ((4) big hit start effect), the above-mentioned attack / defense effect is performed as the effect content of “Ruri 2” ((5) Beat 2 (offense / defense) effect) ). After that, as a result of the offense / defense effect, the enemy character is attacked by the enemy character, and the effect of losing the defense and defeating is performed ((6) chance 2 (win / loss) effect). Thereafter, the above-described effect 1 during the big hit is performed as the effect during the big hit ((9) effect during the big hit). Thereafter, the jackpot end 1 effect described above is performed as the jackpot game end effect executed after the jackpot game ends ((15) jackpot end effect).

  The effect pattern of pattern 03 is an effect pattern that may be executed in a jackpot game that has been transferred with a special figure indicating that it is a jackpot scheduled to be acquired with certainty.

  When the effect pattern of pattern 03 is executed, a temporary stop display is performed with a combination of non-probable big hit symbols, for example, in the variation display of the decorative symbol that is a big hit ((1) decorative symbol temporary stop effect). After that, the promotion effect as described above is executed as the effect content of “buzz 1” ((2) turn 1 (design promotion) effect). After that, as a result of the promotion effect, a stop display (determined display) is performed again with the combination of the non-probable change big hit symbol ((3) chance 1 (promotion success / failure) effect).

  In pattern 03, after the jackpot start effect is first executed ((4) jackpot start effect), the above-described attack / defense effect is performed as the effect content of “Burn 2” ((5) Beat 2 (offense / defense) effect) ). After that, as a result of the offense / defense effect, the enemy character is attacked by the enemy character, and the effect of losing the defense and defeating is performed ((6) chance 2 (win / loss) effect). After that, the above-mentioned survival return effect is performed as the content of the “Ruri 3” effect ((7) Ruri 3 (survival) effect). Thereafter, as a result of the revival effect, an effect in which the ally character fails to revive is performed ((8) chance 3 (success / failure success) effect). Thereafter, the above-described effect 1 during the big hit is performed as the effect during the big hit ((9) effect during the big hit). Thereafter, a resurrection character appearance effect that a resurrection character appears and a chance is obtained is performed ((10) chance 4 (resurrection character) effect). When the revival character effect is performed, the player may be able to recognize that the big hit game being executed is a special big hit game. After that, the acquisition display indicating that the chance has been acquired is continuously displayed until the round in which the second attacker is long open ((11) chance acquisition effect). After that, in the round immediately before the first round in which the second attacker becomes long open, as an instruction content of “Instruction 1”, an instruction is given to instruct the game ball to pass through the V passage 2340g in the next round. An effect is executed ((12) hitting instruction 1 effect). Thereafter, in the round in which the second attacker is first released long, the effect of instructing the game ball to pass through the V path 2340g is executed as the content of the “instruction 2” ((13) strike Direction instruction 2). Thereafter, when the game ball passes through the V passing switch SW2, an effect indicating that the V prize has been won is executed ((14) V winning effect). Thereafter, as a jackpot game end effect executed after the jackpot game is ended, a jackpot end 2 effect is performed ((15) jackpot end effect). The content of the effect of the big hit end 2 can be an appropriate content, but in this example, for example, the content of the effect that informs that the game will shift to a probable change state (special figure high probability normal figure high probability state) after the big hit game ends. It has become.

  The effect pattern of pattern 04 is an effect pattern that may be executed in a jackpot game that has been transferred with a special figure indicating that it is a jackpot scheduled to be acquired with certainty.

  In the case where the effect pattern of pattern 04 is executed, temporary stop display with a combination of non-probable big hit symbols, for example, is performed in the variation display of the decorative symbol that is a big hit ((1) decorative symbol temporary stop effect). After that, the promotion effect as described above is executed as the effect content of “buzz 1” ((2) turn 1 (design promotion) effect). After that, as a result of the promotion effect, a stop display (determined display) is performed again with the combination of the non-probable change big hit symbol ((3) chance 1 (promotion success / failure) effect).

  In the pattern 04, after the jackpot start effect is first executed ((4) jackpot start effect), the above-described attack / defense effect is performed as the effect content of “Ruri 2” ((5) Beat 2 (offense / defense) effect) ). After that, as a result of the offense / defense effect, the enemy character is attacked by the enemy character, and the effect of losing the defense and defeating is performed ((6) chance 2 (win / loss) effect). Thereafter, the above-described effect 1 during the big hit is performed as the effect during the big hit ((9) effect during the big hit). Thereafter, the above-mentioned resurrection character appearance effect is performed ((10) chance 4 (resurrection character) effect). After that, the above-described acquisition display is continuously displayed until the second attacker opens a long round ((11) Chance acquisition effect). After that, in the round immediately before the first round in which the second attacker becomes long open, as an instruction content of “Instruction 1”, an instruction is given to instruct the game ball to pass through the V passage 2340g in the next round. An effect is executed ((12) hitting instruction 1 effect). Thereafter, in the round in which the second attacker is first released long, the effect of instructing the game ball to pass through the V path 2340g is executed as the content of the “instruction 2” ((13) strike Direction instruction 2). Thereafter, when the game ball passes through the V passing switch SW2, an effect indicating that the V prize has been won is executed ((14) V winning effect). Thereafter, as a jackpot game end effect executed after the jackpot game is ended, a jackpot end 2 effect is performed ((15) jackpot end effect).

  The effect pattern of pattern 05 is an effect pattern that may be executed in a jackpot game that has been transferred with a special figure indicating that it is a jackpot scheduled to be acquired with certainty.

  When the effect pattern of pattern 05 is executed, a temporary stop display with a combination of non-probable big hit symbols is performed, for example, in the variation display of the decorative symbol that is a big hit ((1) decorative symbol temporary stop effect). After that, the promotion effect as described above is executed as the effect content of “buzz 1” ((2) turn 1 (design promotion) effect). After that, as a result of the promotion effect, a stop display (determined display) is performed again with the combination of the non-probable change big hit symbol ((3) chance 1 (promotion success / failure) effect).

  In pattern 05, after the jackpot start effect is first executed ((4) jackpot start effect), the above-described attack / defense effect is performed as the effect content of “buzz 2” ((5) hit 2 (attack / defense) effect ). After that, as a result of the offense / defense effect, the enemy character is attacked by the enemy character, and the effect of losing the defense and defeating is performed ((6) chance 2 (win / loss) effect). After that, the above-mentioned survival return effect is performed as the content of the “Ruri 3” effect ((7) Ruri 3 (survival) effect). Thereafter, as a result of the revival effect, an effect that the ally character succeeds in revival is performed ((8) chance 3 (success / failure success) effect). After that, the effect of 2 during the big hit is performed as the effect during the big hit ((9) during the big hit). The content of the performance during the big hit 2 can be an appropriate content, but in this example, for example, the content of the performance indicates that there is a high possibility that the game will be in a probable state after the big hit game. It should be noted that the production of the big hit 1 and the production of the big hit 2 may be the same production contents or different production contents. After that, the above-described acquisition display is continuously displayed until the round in which the second attacker is long open ((11) Chance acquisition effect). After that, in the round immediately before the first round in which the second attacker becomes long open, as an instruction content of “Instruction 1”, an instruction is given to instruct the game ball to pass through the V passage 2340g in the next round. An effect is executed ((12) hitting instruction 1 effect). Thereafter, in the round in which the second attacker is first released long, the effect of instructing the game ball to pass through the V path 2340g is executed as the content of the “instruction 2” ((13) strike Direction instruction 2). Thereafter, when the game ball passes through the V passing switch SW2, an effect indicating that the V prize has been won is executed ((14) V winning effect). Thereafter, as a jackpot game end effect executed after the jackpot game is ended, a jackpot end 2 effect is performed ((15) jackpot end effect).

  The effect pattern of pattern 06 is an effect pattern that may be executed in a jackpot game that has been transferred with a special drawing indicating that it is a jackpot scheduled to be acquired with certainty.

  When the effect pattern of pattern 06 is executed, for example, a temporary stop display with a combination of non-probable big hit symbols is performed in the variation display of the decorative symbol that is a big hit ((1) decorative symbol temporary stop effect). After that, the promotion effect as described above is executed as the effect content of “buzz 1” ((2) turn 1 (design promotion) effect). After that, as a result of the promotion effect, a stop display (determined display) is performed again with the combination of the non-probable change big hit symbol ((3) chance 1 (promotion success / failure) effect).

  In the pattern 06, first, after the big hit start effect is executed ((4) big hit start effect), the above-mentioned offense and defense effect is performed as the effect content of the “buzz 2” ((5) hit 2 (offense and defense) effect. ). Thereafter, as a result of the attack / defense effect, the teammate character is attacked by the enemy character, and a defense success effect is obtained to the effect that the defense has succeeded and the chance has been acquired ((6) Chance 2 (win / lose) effect). By performing this defense success effect, the player may be able to recognize that the big hit game being executed is a special big hit big hit game. Thereafter, the above-described effect 2 during the big hit is performed as the effect during the big hit ((9) effect during the big hit). After that, the above-described acquisition display is continuously displayed until the round in which the second attacker is long open ((11) Chance acquisition effect). After that, in the round immediately before the first round in which the second attacker becomes long open, as an instruction content of “Instruction 1”, an instruction is given to instruct the game ball to pass through the V passage 2340g in the next round. An effect is executed ((12) hitting instruction 1 effect). Thereafter, in the round in which the second attacker is first released long, the effect of instructing the game ball to pass through the V path 2340g is executed as the content of the “instruction 2” ((13) strike Direction instruction 2). Thereafter, when the game ball passes through the V passing switch SW2, an effect indicating that the V prize has been won is executed ((14) V winning effect). Thereafter, as a jackpot game end effect executed after the jackpot game is ended, a jackpot end 2 effect is performed ((15) jackpot end effect).

  The effect pattern of pattern 07 is an effect pattern that may be executed in a jackpot game that has been transferred with a special figure indicating that it is a jackpot that is scheduled to be acquired.

  When the effect pattern 07 is executed, for example, temporary stop display with a combination of non-probable big hit symbols is performed in the variation display of the decorative symbol that is a big hit ((1) decorative symbol temporary stop effect). After that, the promotion effect as described above is executed as the effect content of “buzz 1” ((2) turn 1 (design promotion) effect). After that, as a result of the promotion effect, a stop display (determined display) is performed again with the combination of the non-probable change big hit symbol ((3) chance 1 (promotion success / failure) effect).

  In the pattern 07, after the big hit start effect is first executed ((4) big hit start effect), the above-mentioned attack / defense effect is performed as the effect content of “Ruri 2” ((5) Beat 2 (offense / defense) effect) ). Thereafter, as a result of the offense / defense production, a teammate character attacks the enemy character, and a successful attack production is performed to the effect that the attack has succeeded and the opportunity has been obtained ((6) Chance 2 (win / loss) production). By performing this successful attack presentation, the player may be able to recognize that the big hit game being executed is a special big hit game. Thereafter, the above-described effect 2 during the big hit is performed as the effect during the big hit ((9) effect during the big hit). After that, the above-described acquisition display is continuously displayed until the round in which the second attacker is long open ((11) Chance acquisition effect). After that, in the round immediately before the first round in which the second attacker becomes long open, as an instruction content of “Instruction 1”, an instruction is given to instruct the game ball to pass through the V passage 2340g in the next round. An effect is executed ((12) hitting instruction 1 effect). Thereafter, in the round in which the second attacker is first released long, the effect of instructing the game ball to pass through the V path 2340g is executed as the content of the “instruction 2” ((13) strike Direction instruction 2). Thereafter, when the game ball passes through the V passing switch SW2, an effect indicating that the V prize has been won is executed ((14) V winning effect). Thereafter, as a jackpot game end effect executed after the jackpot game is ended, a jackpot end 2 effect is performed ((15) jackpot end effect).

  The effect pattern of pattern 08 is an effect pattern that may be executed in a jackpot game that has been transferred with a special figure indicating that it is a jackpot scheduled to be acquired with certainty.

  When the effect pattern of pattern 08 is executed, a temporary stop display with a combination of non-probable big hit symbols is performed, for example, in the variation display of the decorative symbol that is a big hit ((1) decorative symbol temporary stop effect). After that, the promotion effect as described above is executed as the effect content of “buzz 1” ((2) turn 1 (design promotion) effect). After that, as a result of the promotion effect, stop display (determined display) is performed with a combination of probability variation jackpot symbols ((3) chance 1 (promotion success / failure) effect).

  In the pattern 08, after the big hit start effect is first executed ((4) big hit start effect), three big hit results are performed as the big hit effect ((9) big hit effect). The content of the performance during the big hit 3 can be an appropriate content, but in this example, for example, the content of the performance indicates that there is a high probability that the game will be in a probable state after the end of the big hit game. It should be noted that the effect of the big hit 3 and the effect of the big hit 2 may be the same effect content or different effect contents. Further, the effect of 3 in the big hit and the effect of 1 in the big hit may be the same effect contents or different effect contents. Further, the above-described acquisition display is continuously displayed until the second attacker has a long open round ((11) Chance acquisition effect). After that, in the round immediately before the first round in which the second attacker becomes long open, as an instruction content of “Instruction 1”, an instruction is given to instruct the game ball to pass through the V passage 2340g in the next round. An effect is executed ((12) hitting instruction 1 effect). Thereafter, in the round in which the second attacker is first released long, the effect of instructing the game ball to pass through the V path 2340g is executed as the content of the “instruction 2” ((13) strike Direction instruction 2). Thereafter, when the game ball passes through the V passing switch SW2, an effect indicating that the V prize has been won is executed ((14) V winning effect). Thereafter, as a jackpot game end effect executed after the jackpot game is ended, a jackpot end 2 effect is performed ((15) jackpot end effect).

  The effect pattern of pattern 09 is an effect pattern that may be executed in a jackpot game that has been transferred with a special figure indicating that it is a jackpot scheduled to be acquired with certainty.

  When the effect pattern of pattern 09 is executed, a temporary stop display with a combination of probability variation big hit symbols is performed, for example, in the variation display of the decorative symbol that is a big hit ((1) decorative symbol temporary stop effect). After that, the promotion effect as described above is executed as the effect content of “buzz 1” ((2) turn 1 (design promotion) effect). After that, as a result of the promotion effect, a stop display (definite display) is again performed with the combination of the probable big hit symbols ((3) Chance 1 (promotion success / failure) effect).

  In pattern 09, after the big hit start effect is first executed ((4) big hit start effect), four big hit results are performed as the big hit effect ((9) big hit effect). The content of the effect during the big hit 4 can be an appropriate content, but in this example, for example, the content of the effect indicates that there is a high possibility that the game will be in a probable state after the end of the big hit game. It should be noted that the effect of 4 in the big hit and the effect of 3 in the big hit may be the same effect contents or different effect contents. Further, the effect of 4 in the big hit and the effect of 2 in the big hit may be the same effect contents or different effect contents. Further, the effect of 4 in the big hit and the effect of 1 in the big hit may be the same effect contents or different effect contents. Further, the above-described acquisition display is continuously displayed until the second attacker has a long open round ((11) Chance acquisition effect). After that, in the round immediately before the first round in which the second attacker becomes long open, as an instruction content of “Instruction 1”, an instruction is given to instruct the game ball to pass through the V passage 2340g in the next round. An effect is executed ((12) hitting instruction 1 effect). Thereafter, in the round in which the second attacker is first released long, the effect of instructing the game ball to pass through the V path 2340g is executed as the content of the “instruction 2” ((13) strike Direction instruction 2). Thereafter, when the game ball passes through the V passing switch SW2, an effect indicating that the V prize has been won is executed ((14) V winning effect). Thereafter, as a jackpot game end effect executed after the jackpot game is ended, a jackpot end 2 effect is performed ((15) jackpot end effect).

  As shown in FIG. 115 (b), the effect content for each round is determined by the pattern selected from the patterns 01 to 09.

  When the pattern 01 is selected, the (5) turn 2 (offense and defense) effect is executed in the first to third rounds, the (6) chance 2 (win / loss) effect is executed in the fourth round, and the fifth round (7) Brill 3 (survival) production and (8) Chance 3 (survival success or failure) production are executed, and (9) Big hit production is executed in the 6th to 16th rounds.

  When pattern 02 is selected, (5) turn 2 (offense and defense) effects are executed in the first to third rounds, and (6) chance 2 (win / loss) effects are executed in the fourth and fifth rounds. Then, during the 6th to 16th rounds, (9) a big hit effect is executed.

  When pattern 03 is selected, (5) turn 2 (offense and defense) effects are executed in the first to third rounds, and (6) chance 2 (win / loss) effects are executed in the fourth round. In the eyes, the (7) roll 3 (survival) production and (8) chance 3 (survival success / failure) production are executed, the (9) big hit effect is executed in the 6th to 14th rounds, and the (10) ) Chance 4 (resurrection character) effect and (12) hitting instruction 1 effect are executed and (11) chance acquisition effect is started, and (13) hitting instruction 2 effect is executed in the 16th round, passing V When the switch SW2 passes, (14) V winning effect is executed.

  When the pattern 04 is selected, the (5) turn 2 (offense and defense) effect is executed in the first to third rounds, and the (6) chance 2 (win / loss) effect is executed in the fourth and fifth rounds. In the sixth to fourteenth rounds, (9) a big hit effect is executed, and in the fifteenth round, (10) chance 4 (resurrection character) effect and (12) hitting instruction 1 effect are executed (11 ) The chance acquisition effect is started, and in the 16th round, (13) the hitting instruction 2 effect is executed, and (14) the V winning effect is executed when the V passing switch SW2 is passed.

  When the pattern 05 is selected, the (5) turn 2 (offense and defense) effect is executed in the first to third rounds, and the (6) chance 2 (win / loss) effect is executed in the fourth round. In the eyes, the (7) roll 3 (survival) production and the (8) chance 3 (survival success / failure) production are executed, and the (11) chance acquisition production is started, and the (9) big hit in the 6th to 12th rounds An effect is executed, (12) a hitting instruction 1 effect is executed in the 13th round, and (13) a hitting instruction 2 effect is executed in the 14th round. (14) V winning effect is executed. Note that (13) the hitting instruction 2 effect is continuously performed regardless of the transition of the round until the V passing switch SW2 passes.

  When the pattern 06 is selected, the (5) turn 2 (attack and defense) effect is executed in the first to third rounds, and the (6) chance 2 (win / loss) effect is executed in the fourth round ( 11) The chance acquisition effect is started, the (9) big hit effect is executed in the 5th to 12th rounds, the (12) hitting instruction 1 effect is executed in the 13th round, and (13) in the 14th round A hitting instruction 2 effect is executed, and if there is a passage of the V pass switch SW2, the (14) V winning effect is executed up to the 16th round.

  When pattern 07 is selected, (5) turn 2 (offense and defense) effects are executed in the first to third rounds, and (6) chance 2 (win / loss) effects are executed in the fourth round ( 11) The chance acquisition effect is started, the (9) big hit effect is executed in the 5th to 12th rounds, the (12) hitting instruction 1 effect is executed in the 13th round, and (13) in the 14th round A hitting instruction 2 effect is executed, and if there is a passage of the V pass switch SW2, the (14) V winning effect is executed up to the 16th round.

  When the pattern 08 is selected, the (9) big hit effect is executed in the first to twelfth rounds, the (12) hitting instruction 1 effect is executed in the thirteenth round, and (13 ) A hitting instruction 2 effect is executed, and when there is a passage of the V pass switch SW2, (14) V winning effect is executed up to the 16th round.

  When the pattern 09 is selected, the (9) big hit effect is executed in the first to twelfth rounds, the (12) hitting instruction 1 effect is executed in the thirteenth round, and (13 ) A hitting instruction 2 effect is executed, and when there is a passage of the V pass switch SW2, (14) V winning effect is executed up to the 16th round.

  Next, a specific effect example in the pachinko machine of this example will be described.

  FIG. 116 is a diagram showing an example of a specific effect example in the twelfth example of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 117 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 116 to 117 show an example of the effect pattern of pattern 01 among the nine effect patterns shown in FIG. The following diagram shows how the production progresses in numerical order in parentheses.

  In FIG. 116 (1), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is started, and “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c, respectively. Later, a display that evolved into super reach was made. In the super reach state, the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed small in the upper left corner. In FIG. 116, the first special figure display device 212 and the first special figure holding lamp 218 as the first symbol display means, and the second special figure display device 214 and the second special symbol display means 218 as the second symbol display means. A special figure hold lamp 220 is also shown. In FIG. 116 (1), since there are three variable display suspensions in FIG. 1, three lamps in the first special diagram retention lamp 218 are lit. On the other hand, since the variable display hold in FIG. 2 is 0, none of the second special figure hold lamps 220 is lit. In addition, the first special figure display device 212 performs the variable display as described above, and the second special figure display device 212 stops and displays the lost symbol. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special figure 1 hold display h11, the second special figure 1 hold display h12 and the third special figure 1 indicating the hold of the special figure 1 corresponding to the number of the special figure 1 hold. The special figure 1 hold display h13 is displayed in the default display mode, and the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 is displayed as blank. In addition, a special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 and a special symbol 2 fourth symbol t2 are provided in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. In response to the symbol fluctuation display of the first special symbol display device 212, the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1, for example, are subjected to variable display in such a manner that the color represented in a circle changes into a plurality of types. The special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is displayed in a state in which, for example, a white square mark which is a lost symbol is stopped and displayed corresponding to the lost symbol which is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 214. Yes. In this example, a sub-effect display device 208A is arranged adjacent to the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The sub effect display device 208A is in a position (first position) that does not overlap the decorative symbol display device 208 in a state where “Yoshimune” is displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 116 (2), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the picture of the chance button 136 prompting the user to press the chance button 136 and the characters “press”.

  When the chance button 136 is pressed at the timing shown in FIG. 116 (3), the sub effect display device 208A overlaps the decorative design display device 208 from the first position as shown in FIG. 116 (4). Displace to the position (second position). In the sub-effect display device 208A, a display for changing the color of the background on which the character display of “Yoshimune” is performed is performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 116 (5), after the decorative symbol “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 4” — “decoration 4” — “decoration 4” To start swinging. At this time, the sub effect display device 208A is displaced from the second position to the first position.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 116 (6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, whether or not the display is changed to a combination of decorative symbols (probability variable symbols) that are displayed again and promised to be a 16R special jackpot. Promotional production that makes you expect about is performed. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c that are fluctuating are displayed again in the upper left corner. A “promotion challenge” message indicating that a promotion effect is performed, a symbol of the chance button 136 prompting the user to press the chance button 136, and a character display “press” are displayed.

  Then, although the chance button 136 is pressed at the timing shown in FIG. 116 (7), the sub effect display device 208A does not move in the first position as shown in FIG. 116 (8). Thereby, it is notified that the change is not changed to the combination of probability variation symbols promised to be the 16R special jackpot by performing the re-variation display.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 116 (9), the decoration symbol display device 208 continuously performs fluctuation fluctuation with the combination of the decoration symbols of “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 116 (10), “symbol 4” which is a substantial 13-round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 212, and the first symbol t4 in the special diagram 1 includes the first symbol A blue circle symbol corresponding to “symbol 4” stopped on the special symbol display device 212 is stopped and displayed. In accordance with this, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4” is stopped and displayed (determined display), and the special-game variable game ends. In this production example, the jackpot game to be started is a 16R jackpot (substantial 13 round jackpot) in which the third game condition is difficult to be satisfied, but the player has a third jackpot game to be started. It is difficult to recognize whether it is a big hit that is likely to be established. The final stop timing of the decorative symbol and the special symbol may be simultaneous, the decorative symbol may be earlier than the special symbol, or the special symbol may be earlier than the decorative symbol. The final stop timing may be early.

  Thereafter, the big hit game is started, and the big symbol start effect as shown in FIG. 116 (11) is executed on the decorative symbol display device 208. At this time, a display for instructing right-handed is also performed. The start timing of the big hit start effect may be the same as the start timing of the right hit instruction display, the start timing of the big hit start effect may be earlier than the start timing of the right hit instruction display, The start timing of the instruction display may be earlier than the start timing of the big hit start effect.

  Thereafter, when the big hit start effect is finished and the first round is entered, as shown in FIG. 116 (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays that the first round of the big hit game. In the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, a combination of the decorative symbols that have been confirmed is displayed. In addition, the number of consecutive chunks is displayed in the lower left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. Since the big hit game this time is the first big hit game that has shifted from the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state (normal game state), a display to that effect is displayed in the lower left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. "First time" is displayed. In this example, the above-described attack / defense effect is performed. The start timing of the attack / defense effect may be the same as the start of the first round, may be before the start of the first round, or may be after the start of the first round. Good.

  FIG. 116 (13) shows the contents of the effect in the third round. As shown in FIG. 116 (13), in the decorative symbol display device 208, as part of the offense and defense effect, the second variable prize opening 235a is long open in the 14th or 16th round and passes V. There will be a performance that suggests whether or not there will be a great chance to become easy. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 116 (13), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a letter “Let's hit repeatedly” together with a picture of the chance button 136 that prompts the chance button 136 to be repeatedly hit, and the success of the hits is shown. And a remaining time display bar representing the remaining time of the acceptance period of pressing the chance button. In the production of the pattern 01, this indicator is not displayed to the maximum. According to this effect, there is a case where the player can have a sense of expectation that the result of the offense and defense may be a successful result by continuously hitting the chance button 136 and displaying the indicator to the maximum. The start timing of the effect display that prompts the chance button 136 to be struck may be the same as the start of the third round, may be before the start of the third round, or the start of the third round It may be later.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 116 (14), after the chance button 136 is continuously hit by the player, at the timing shown in FIG. 116 (15), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the remaining time display bar expires. Is displayed. At this time, the indicator shows that the achievement degree of repeated hits is 3/5.

  FIG. 116 (16) shows the contents of the effect in the fourth round. As shown in FIG. 116 (16), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the teammate character is attacked by the enemy character, and the effect of defeating the defense failure is executed. At this time, the sub effect display device 208A does not move in the first position. Thereby, it is notified that there is a high possibility that the current big hit game is a big hit in which the third game condition is hardly established. It should be noted that the start timing of the content of the defeat due to failure of defense may be at the same time as the start of the fourth round, may be before the start of the fourth round, It may be after the start.

  FIG. 116 (17) shows the contents of the effect in the fifth round. As shown in FIG. 116 (17), the above-mentioned survival effect is executed in the decorative symbol display device 208. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 116 (17), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a letter “press and revive” together with a picture of the chance button 136 that prompts the user to press the chance button 136. A remaining time display bar indicating the remaining time of the reception period is also displayed. According to this effect, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the player feels that the current jackpot game may be informed that the third game condition is likely to be a special jackpot. You may be able to have it. It should be noted that the start timing of the effect that prompts the user to press the chance button 136 may be simultaneously with the start of the fifth round, may be before the start of the fifth round, or the start of the fifth round It may be later.

  When the chance button 136 is pressed at the timing shown in FIG. 116 (18), as shown in FIG. 117 (19), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the effect of the content that fails to survive. Thereby, it is notified that there is a high possibility that the current big hit game is a big hit in which the third game condition is hardly established.

  Thereafter, in the sixth to sixteenth rounds, as shown in FIGS. 117 (20) to 117 (24), one big hit effect is performed as a big hit effect. This effect during the jackpot is actually an effect that is executed when the jackpot game is started, and is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 until the timing of FIG. 117 (20). The second sub-control unit 500 is controlled so that the contents of the effect progress. Then, at the timing of FIG. 117 (20), one effect during the big hit is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 with the contents of the effect after progress. That is, it can be said that the video in one production during the big hit is progressing behind the scenes. By being configured in this way, for example, in the first to third rounds, one effect is performed during the big hit, and in the fourth round and thereafter, promotion effects such as an offense and defense effect and a survival effect are executed, while the big hit 1 It is also possible to cause the production to proceed internally, and then to resume one production during the big hit with the content of the production after the eighth round. It should be noted that one effect during the big hit may be started at the timing of FIG. 117 (20). The same applies to the 2 effects during the big hit, which will be described later. In this example, when the second variable prize opening 235a is in the 14th round, which is short-opened, it is displayed in the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208 up to the 13th round as shown in FIG. 117 (22). The round number display is cleared. In the following description, the round number display corresponds to the first effect. Here, it can be said that the display of the number of rounds is an example of an effect related to the big hit round. Then, as shown in FIGS. 117 (22) to 117 (24), the round number display is continuously erased until the big hit game is completed. In this example, by eliminating the round number display in the round in which the second variable prize opening 235a is short-opened, it is possible to obscure the rounds with the possibility of passing V. For example, a revival effect is performed. There is a case where interest can be improved by giving expectation to V passing. The round number display may be erased only in the 14th and 16th rounds opened by the second attacker, and the round number may be displayed in the 15th round. Further, the round number display may not be deleted. Further, the round number display may not be deleted.

  When the 16th round is completed, as shown in FIG. 117 (25), the above-mentioned effect of the big hit end 1 is performed. In the jackpot game described above, the third game condition was not satisfied because there was no V passing in the 14th or 16th round. In addition, while the symbol variation display is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), the electronic support state (the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state) is entered.

  Thus, according to this example, it can be said that the first effect is an effect that can be executed at least in the fourth period, and the first effect is an effect that is not executed at least in the fifth period. It can be said that. It can also be said that the first effect is an effect executed in at least a part of the fourth period.

  The first effect is not limited to the display of the number of rounds, and various effects related to the big hit round may be applied. For example, the effect may be an audio output at the start of the round. Further, only one of the effects related to the multiple types of big hit rounds may be the first effect, or two or more of the effects related to the multiple types of big hit rounds may be set as the first effect. All of the effects related to the type of big hit round may be the first effects.

  118 is a diagram showing an example of a specific effect example in the twelfth example pachinko machine, and FIG. 119 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. The effect examples shown in FIGS. 118 to 119 show an example of the effect pattern of the pattern 05 among the nine effect patterns shown in FIG. 115. The following diagram shows how the production progresses in numerical order in parentheses. The effects shown in FIGS. 118 (1) to 118 (18) are the same as those described above with reference to FIGS. 116 (1) to 116 (18), and thus description thereof is omitted here. In the example of production shown in FIGS. 118 (1) to 118 (18), as shown in FIG. 118 (10), “symbol 1”, which is a 16-round big hit symbol, is displayed on the first special figure display device 212. It is different from the example effects shown in FIGS. 116 (1) to 116 (18) in that the jackpot game is started after being stopped.

  When the chance button 136 is pressed at the timing shown in FIG. 118 (18) during execution of the above-mentioned survival effect, the main character of the main character is cut in the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 119 (19). The effect of the content displayed by IN is executed, and then, as shown in FIG. 119 (20), the decorative symbol display device 208 executes the effect display indicating that the survival was successful. In addition, when an effect display indicating that the survival is successful is started, the above-described acquisition display is displayed in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. This acquisition display is continued until the 14th round is started, as shown in FIGS. 119 (20) to 119 (23). Thereby, it is notified that the current big hit game is a big hit where the third game condition is likely to be established. In addition, the display start timing of the acquisition display may be simultaneous with the start timing of the effect display that the survival is successful, or may be after the start of the effect display that the survival is successful, It may be before the start of the effect display indicating that the survival was successful.

  Thereafter, in the sixth round to the twelfth round, as shown in FIGS. 119 (21) to 119 (22), two effects during the big hit are performed. Note that the start timing of the big hit effect may be simultaneous with the start of the round (for example, the sixth round), or may be after the start of the round.

  Thereafter, when the big hit game progresses and becomes the 13th round, as shown in FIG. 119 (23), the above-described hitting instruction 1 effect is executed. In other words, as shown in FIG. 119 (23), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays that it is the 13th round of the jackpot game, and allows V to pass in the next round, that is, the 14th round. “Aim at V at next R” is displayed. This may allow the player to reliably pass the V in the next round. Note that the start timing of the hitting instruction 1 production may be the same as the start of the 13th round, may be before the start of the 13th round, or after the start of the 13th round. There may be.

  Thereafter, when the 14th round is reached, the second variable prize opening 235a is opened long and the V passage is easy, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is the 14th round as shown in FIG. 119 (24). Is displayed, and a hitting instruction 2 effect “V Aim” for promoting the passage of V is executed. In addition, the start timing of the hitting instruction 2 production may be simultaneous with the start of the 14th round, may be before the start of the 14th round, or after the start of the 14th round. There may be. In this example, when the 14th and 16th rounds are long open, the display of the number of rounds is not erased, so it may be possible to reliably notify the player of the current number of rounds. . The round number display may be deleted after the 14th round.

  When there is a game ball passing (V passing) to the V passing switch SW2 in the second variable winning opening 235a at the timing shown in FIG. 119 (25), as shown in FIG. 119 (26), V An effect of winning a prize is executed. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “V”, which is a notification that the probability variation has been confirmed. As shown in FIGS. 119 (26) to 119 (28), this effect is continuously performed until the 16th round is completed. In this example, if there is a V passage at the 14th round, the two effects during the big hit may be resumed at the 15th and 16th rounds.

  When the 16th round is completed, as shown in FIG. 119 (29), the above-described effect of the big hit end 2 is performed. In the jackpot game described above, the third game condition is satisfied because V passed in the 14th round. Therefore, after the jackpot game ends (after the third requirement is satisfied), a predetermined number of times (for example, , 150 times) while the symbol variation display is performed, the state changes to the probability variation state (special figure high probability normal figure high probability state).

  Thus, according to this example, it can be said that the first effect is an effect that can be executed at least in the sixth period.

  In the production example shown in FIG. 121, for example, when there is a V passage in the 14th round in which the second variable prize opening 235a is short-opened, the above-described production of winning the V prize is not performed. In the 16th round, the above-mentioned direction-of-play instruction 2 effect is executed, and when the V variable is passed in the 16th round when the second variable prize opening 235a is long open, the effect that the V prize is won is performed for the first time. Also good. Further, for example, when V passes in the 14th round in which the second variable winning opening 235a is short-opened, an effect that the V winning is performed is performed, but the direction instruction 2 effect is further executed in the 16th round. It may be.

  120 is a diagram showing an example of a specific effect example in the twelfth example of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 121 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 120 to 121 show an example of the effect pattern of the pattern 03 among the nine effect patterns shown in FIG. The following diagram shows how the production progresses in numerical order in parentheses. The effects shown in FIGS. 120 (1) to 121 (22) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 116 (1) to 117 (22) and are not described here. 120 (1) to 121 (22), as shown in FIG. 120 (10), the first special figure display device 212 is a symbol 15 which is a big hit symbol “symbol 3”. Is displayed in a stopped state and the big hit game is started, which is different from the production examples shown in FIGS. 116 (1) to 117 (22). Also in this production example, when the second variable prize opening 235a becomes the 14th round when the short opening is made, the round number display displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 until the 13th round is erased, and the big hit game ends. Continue until

  FIG. 121 (23) shows the contents of the effect in the 15th round. As shown in FIG. 121 (23), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the above-described resurrection character effect is executed, and then, for example, a hitting instruction 1 effect as shown in FIG. 119 (23) is executed. The start timing of the resurrection character production may be the same as the start of the 15th round, may be before the start of the 15th round, or after the start of the 15th round. Also good.

  Thereafter, at the 16th round, the second variable winning opening 235a is opened long and the V passing is easy, and the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 2 productions are performed.

  When the game ball passes (V pass) to the V pass switch SW2 in the second variable prize opening 235a at the timing shown in FIG. 121 (25), as shown in FIG. 121 (26), V An effect of winning a prize is executed. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “V”, which is a notification that the probability variation has been confirmed. This effect is continued until the 16th round is completed. In this example, the round number display is also erased in the 15th and 16th rounds when the attacker opens long, but the round number display is erased in the 14th round, and the 15th and 16th rounds are erased. Then, you may make it display the number of rounds again.

  When the 16th round is completed, as shown in FIG. 121 (27), the effect of the big hit end 2 described above is performed. In the jackpot game described above, the third game condition is satisfied due to the passing of V in the 16th round. Therefore, after the jackpot game ends (after the third requirement is satisfied), a predetermined number of times (for example, , 150 times) while the symbol variation display is performed, the state changes to the probability variation state (special figure high probability normal figure high probability state).

  Thus, according to this example, it can be said that the first effect is an effect that can be executed at least in the fourth period, and the first effect is an effect that is not executed at least in the fifth period. It can be said that. It can also be said that the first effect is an effect executed in at least a part of the fourth period.

  122 is a diagram showing an example of a specific effect example in the twelfth example of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 123 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 122 to 123 show an example of the effect pattern of pattern 05 among the nine effect patterns shown in FIG. The following diagram shows how the production progresses in numerical order in parentheses. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 122 (1) to 123 (24) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 118 (1) to 119 (24) and described above, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

  FIG. 123 (24) shows the contents of the effect in the 14th round. As shown in FIG. 123 (24), at the 14th round, the second variable winning opening 235a is opened long and the V passage is easy, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown in FIG. 123 (24). As described above, the display indicating that it is the 14th round is performed, and the above-described hitting instruction 2 effect is executed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 123 (25), when there is no game ball passing through the V pass switch SW2 and the 14th round is completed, the process proceeds to the 15th round as shown in FIG. 123 (26). However, the hitting instruction 2 effect described above is continuously performed. In this example, for at least some of the effects of the plurality of types, the contents of the effects are switched using the fact that the round is switched as a trigger. This is an example of what does not change the production contents with this as a trigger.

  FIG. 123 (27) shows the contents of the effect in the 16th round. As shown in FIG. 123 (27), at the 16th round, the second variable prize opening 235a is opened long, and the V passage is easy. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, even when the 16th round is entered, the above-described hitting instruction 2 effect continues to be performed.

  Then, when there is a passing of a game ball (V passing) to the V passing switch SW2 in the second variable winning opening 235a at the timing shown in FIG. 123 (28), as shown in FIG. 123 (29), V An effect of winning a prize is executed. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “V”, which is a notification that the probability variation has been confirmed. This effect is continued until the 16th round is completed.

  When the 16th round is completed, as shown in FIG. 123 (30), the above-mentioned effect of the big hit end 2 is performed. In the above jackpot game, there was no V pass in the 14th round, but the V game pass in the 16th round resulted in the third gaming condition, so after the jackpot game ended (third requirement ) Is satisfied, while the symbol variation display is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 150 times), the state changes to the probability variation state (special figure high probability normal figure high probability state).

  FIG. 124 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect in the 12th example of a pachinko machine. The effect example shown in FIG. 124 shows an example of the effect pattern pattern 07 of the nine effect patterns shown in FIG. The following diagram shows how the production progresses in numerical order in parentheses. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 124 (1) to 124 (11) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 118 (1) to 118 (11) and are not described here.

  FIG. 124 (12) shows the contents of the effects in the first round. That is, when the big hit start effect is finished and the process proceeds to the first round, as shown in FIG. 124 (12), the decorative design display device 208 performs the above-described attack and defense effect.

  FIG. 124 (13) shows the contents of effects in the third round. As shown in FIG. 124 (13), in the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect in which a teammate character attacks an enemy character is performed as an attack / defense effect. At this time, the sub effect display device 208A is displaced from the first position to the second position. In the sub-effect display device 208A, a display for changing the color of the background on which the character display of “Yoshimune” is performed is performed. The start timing of the offense / defense production may be the same as the start of the third round, may be before the start of the third round, or may be after the start of the third round. Good. Further, the operation start timing of the sub effect display device 208A may be the same as the start of the attack / defense effect, may be before the start of the attack / defense effect, or after the start of the attack / defense effect. Also good.

  FIG. 124 (14) shows the contents of the effect in the fourth round. As shown in FIG. 124 (14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the above-described successful attack effect is performed, and the above-described acquisition display is displayed in the lower right corner. Thereby, it is notified that the current big hit game is a big hit where the third game condition is likely to be established. The start timing of the successful attack production may be simultaneous with the start of the fourth round, may be before the start of the fourth round, or after the start of the fourth round. Also good. Further, the display start timing of the acquisition display may be simultaneous with the start of the successful attack presentation, may be before the start of the successful attack presentation, or after the start of the successful attack presentation. Also good.

  Thereafter, in the fifth to twelfth rounds, as shown in FIG. 124 (15), the above-described effect of the big hit 2 is performed. Thereafter, for example, the same effects as those shown in FIGS. 119 (21) to 119 (29) are performed.

  As described above, in this example, the presence / absence of the performance and the execution mode of the performance differ depending on the timing at which it is notified that the third game condition is likely to be a special big hit. For example, there is a case where an accessory moves and a case where it does not move depending on the timing at which it is notified that it is a special big hit, and the type of the movable accessory may be different. Further, there are cases where an effect of operating the chance button 136 is executed depending on the timing when it is notified that it is a special big hit, and there is a case where it is not executed.

  FIG. 125 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect example in the 12th example of a pachinko machine. The example of the effect shown in FIG. 125 shows a state in which an enemy character that is displayed when the probability is changed in a 16R special big hit, for example, is selected. The following diagram shows how the production progresses in numerical order in parentheses.

  FIG. 125 (1) shows a state in which a jackpot game of 16 round special jackpot is being executed. FIG. 125 (1) shows the contents of the effect in the tenth round. In this example, at the 10th round, it becomes possible to select an enemy character displayed in the probability variation state. As shown in FIG. 125 (1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the above-mentioned acquisition display is displayed in the lower right corner, and this big hit game is a big hit game that easily satisfies the third game condition. It has been reported. In this example, as shown in FIG. 125 (1), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the character display “Please select a character” for promoting the selection of the enemy character is displayed, and the left side thereof is displayed. The character list CL is displayed. In the character list CL, items of character A, character B, and character C are displayed in a list in the vertical direction, and the player can move the cursor CSL by operating a cursor key (not shown), for example. it can. The item indicated by the cursor CSL may be changed every predetermined time. In FIG. 125 (1), the cursor CSL indicates the character A, and the item of the character A is highlighted. The start timing of the enemy character selection effect can be set arbitrarily.

  When the chance button 136 is pressed at the timing shown in FIG. 125 (2), as shown in FIG. 125 (3), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a character selection effect indicating that the character A is selected. Is done. At this time, a sound notifying that the character A has been selected is output from the speaker 120. Note that the start timing of the character selection effect indicating that the character A is selected may be the same as or different from the output timing of the sound for notifying that the character A is selected. Also, audio output may not be performed. Character selection effects are continuously performed until the big hit game is completed, as shown in FIGS. 125 (3) to 125 (8).

  After that, when the big hit game progresses and becomes the 14th round, the second variable prize opening 235a is opened long, and the V passing is easy, and the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 125 (4). In addition, a display indicating that it is the 14th round is performed, and a hitting instruction 2 effect “V Aim” for promoting the passage of V is executed. Different from FIG. 119 (24), the hitting instruction 2 effect during the execution of the character selection effect is such that the character display “V Aim” is displayed small in the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 125 (5), if there is a game ball passing (V passing) to the V passing switch SW2 in the second variable winning opening 235a, as shown in FIG. 125 (6), V The effect of winning is interrupted and executed in the character selection effect. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “V”, which is a notification that the probability variation has been confirmed. At this time, a sound for notifying that a V prize has been won is output from the speaker 120. It should be noted that the start timing of the effect indicating that the V prize has been won and the output timing of the sound for notifying that the V prize has been won may be the same or different. Also, audio output may not be performed. Further, the effect indicating that the V prize has been won may be displayed overlapping the character selection effect.

  Thereafter, at the fifteenth round, as shown in FIG. 125 (7), the character selection effect is resumed. At this time, for example, the character selection effect continues on the control while the effect of winning the V prize is performed. When the 15th round is reached, the character selection effect is resumed with the content after the progress. It has become so. When the character selection effect is resumed, it may be performed from the beginning of the effect. As shown in FIG. 125 (8), the character selection effect is executed until the 16th round ends (until the big hit game ends).

  When the 16th round is completed, as shown in FIG. 125 (9), the above-described effect of the big hit end 2 is performed. In the jackpot game described above, the third game condition is satisfied due to the passing of V in the 14th round. Therefore, after the jackpot game ends (after the third requirement is satisfied) It shifts to a high probability state (high probability state).

  When the big hit game is finished as described above, the state shifts to a probability change state (special figure high probability normal figure high probability state) and, as shown in FIG. 125 (10), the decorative symbol display device 208 is in a probability change state. “Yoshimune mode” is executed, and “Defeating the enemy is a big hit” is displayed to explain the content of the big win. The character A that is the enemy character to be defeated is displayed. . At this time, since there was no hold of the variable display of the special figure 2 and there were three hold of the variable display of the special figure 1, the hold (the first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested, and the first special figure display device The symbol variation display 212 is started, and the decoration symbol display device 208 also starts the variation display of the decoration symbol. The decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner at the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the remaining number of symbol variation displays in which the probability variation state can be executed is displayed at the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is decremented by one each time symbol variation display is started. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 125 (10), after the symbol variation display is started, at least four game balls have been won at the second special diagram starting port 232, and the variation display of the four special diagrams 2 has been suspended. Therefore, all four holding lamps in the second special figure holding lamp 220 are lit. On the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special figure 2 hold display h21, the second special figure 2 hold display h22, the third special figure 2 hold display h23, and the fourth special figure 2 hold display are displayed. h24 is provided. At the timing shown in FIG. 125 (10), since the fluctuation display of the four special figures 2 is held, the first special figure 2 hold display h21 to the fourth special figure 2 hold display h24 are all default displays. The hold display in the aspect is performed. In addition, the display of the number of consecutive chunks and the display for instructing a right-hand hit which have been displayed in the big hit game are continued.

  FIG. 126 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect example in the twelfth example of the pachinko machine. The example of the effect shown in FIG. 126 shows a state of selecting an enemy character that is displayed when the probability is changed in a 16R special big hit, for example. The following diagram shows how the production progresses in numerical order in parentheses.

  FIG. 126 (1) shows a state in which a jackpot game of 16 round special jackpot is being executed. The effect shown in FIG. 126 (1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 125 (1) and described above.

  FIG. 126 (2) shows the contents of the effect when the big hit game progresses and becomes the 14th round. In this effect example, the enemy character has not yet been selected, and therefore the effect shown in FIG. 126 (1) is continuously executed. In the fourteenth round, the second variable winning opening 235a is opened long, and the V passing is easy, and the decorative symbol display device 208 executes the above-described hitting instruction instruction 2 effect. This striking method instruction 2 effect is a mode in which the character display “V Aim” is displayed small in the lower center of the enemy character selection screen that is being continued.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 126 (3), if there is a game ball passing (V passing) to the V passing switch SW2 in the second variable prize winning opening 235a, as shown in FIG. 126 (4), V The effect of winning is interrupted and executed on the enemy character selection screen. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “V”, which is a notification that the probability variation has been confirmed. At this time, a sound for notifying that a V prize has been won is output from the speaker 120. In addition, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 can accept the operation of the cursor key and the chance button 136 related to the selection of the enemy character even during the execution of the effect indicating that the V prize is won. That is, even if the enemy character selection screen is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the position of the cursor CSL can be changed by internal control using a cursor key or the like, and internal control can be performed by operating the chance button 136. The item indicated by can be selected. The effect of winning the V prize may be displayed overlapping the enemy character selection screen.

  Thereafter, although not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the chance button at the timing shown in FIG. 126 (5) in a state where the cursor CSL indicates the character A in the internal control by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. When 136 is pressed, as shown in FIG. 126 (6), a character selection effect that character A is selected from speaker 120 is executed. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect of winning the V prize is continuously performed even though the chance button 136 is operated. Note that the effect of winning the V prize may be displayed overlapping the character selection effect. In addition, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the display may be switched from the effect of winning the V prize to the character selection effect.

  Thereafter, effects as shown in FIGS. 126 (7) to 126 (10) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 126 (7) to 126 (10) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 125 (7) to 125 (10) and described above, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

  FIG. 127 is a diagram showing an example of a specific effect example in the twelfth example pachinko machine. The example of the effect shown in FIG. 127 shows a state where, for example, an enemy character that is displayed in a probabilistic state at 16R special big hit is selected. The following diagram shows how the production progresses in numerical order in parentheses. The effects shown in FIGS. 127 (1) to 127 (6) are the same as those described above with reference to FIGS. 126 (1) to 126 (6), and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

  FIG. 127 (7) shows the content of the effect in the 15th round. In this effect example, after the effect of winning the V prize is performed, as shown in FIGS. 127 (7) to 127 (8), the game continues until the 16th round ends (until the big hit game ends). The character selection effect described above is not executed.

  When the 16th round is completed, as shown in FIG. 127 (9), the above-described effect of the big hit end 2 is performed. In the jackpot game described above, the third game condition is satisfied due to the passing of V in the 14th round. Therefore, after the jackpot game ends (after the third requirement is satisfied) It shifts to a high probability state (high probability state).

  When the big hit game is completed as described above, the state shifts to a probability change state (a special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state), and an effect as shown in FIG. 127 (10) is executed. The effect shown in FIG. 127 (10) is the same as that shown in FIG. 125 (10) and described above.

  Next, a thirteenth example of a game machine to which the present invention can be applied will be described. Hereinafter, the difference from the items described so far will be mainly described. The pachinko machine 100 in this example is described as an example provided with the attacker unit 2340 shown in FIG. 74. Of course, this example is also applied to the pachinko machine 100 provided with the game board 200 as shown in FIG. Can be applied. In this example, the general discharge passage (first discharge passage) for discharging the game ball that has entered the first variable winning opening 234a and passed through the winning count switch SW4 is different from the general discharge passage. A discharge passage (second discharge passage) is provided, and an effect area shutter that is displaceable between a state in which the game ball enters the effect discharge passage and a state in which the game ball is prevented from entering is provided. The effect area shutter is configured to be displaceable by, for example, driving the effect area solenoid, and the effect area solenoid is configured to be driven and controlled by the first sub-control unit 400, for example. In addition, an effect V passage switch SW9 is provided in the effect discharge passage so that a game ball that has entered the effect discharge passage passes therethrough. Further, in this example, a small hit is prepared, and when a small hit symbol is displayed on either the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214, the game shifts to a small hit game. It is configured to be controllable. In the small hit game, for example, the operation described above with reference to FIG. 113 (a) is performed. In addition, at least one of the multiple types of big hit games is configured to be able to execute the operation described above with reference to FIG. 113B, for example, in the first round.

  FIG. 128 is a diagram showing an example of a specific effect example in the thirteenth example of a pachinko machine. The following diagram shows how the production progresses in numerical order in parentheses.

  In FIG. 128 (a1), the jackpot symbol (for example, 16R special jackpot symbol) is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 212, and the ornament symbol display device 208 displays “decoration 1”-“decoration star”. A combination of decorative symbols (chance symbols) such as “mark”-“decoration 1” is stopped (determined). Further, the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 are stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 212, for example, in a red circle symbol corresponding to the stop display result. Note that the combination of decorative symbols shown in FIG. 128 (a1) may be displayed in the case of a big hit, or may be displayed in the case of a big hit. The timing for stopping the finalization of the decorative symbol and the special symbol may or may not be simultaneous. In FIG. 1, since there are three variable display holds, three lamps in the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the first special figure 1 hold display h11 and the second special figure 1 are displayed. The hold display h12 and the third special figure 1 hold display h13 are both displayed in the default display mode. On the other hand, on the second special symbol display device 214, the losing symbol is stopped and displayed, and the special symbol 2 and the fourth symbol t2 are also correspondingly stopped and displayed with, for example, a white square symbol. In addition, since the variable display hold of special figure 2 is 0, none of the second special figure hold lamps 220 is lit.

  When the big hit game is started and the game proceeds to the first round, as shown in FIG. 128 (a2), a big hit acquisition chance effect that a big hit is notified when the game ball passes the effect V passing switch SW9 is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, for example, an arrow indicating the direction in which the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is arranged together with the character information of “Get a chance when a ball enters V” is displayed. Display is performed. In the first round, the first variable winning opening 234a is opened long after performing a plurality of short opening, and the game ball that has entered the first variable winning opening 234a enters the effect discharge passage. The effect area shutter is driven and controlled so as to easily enter.

  If there is a passing of a game ball (effect V passing) to the effect V passing switch SW9 in the first variable prize opening 234a at the timing shown in FIG. 128 (a3), as shown in FIG. 128 (a4). Then, the effect that the effect V has passed is executed. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “V”, which is a notification that the game has been shifted to the 16R special jackpot game.

  FIG. 128 (b1) also shows a state in which the symbol pattern (for example, the symbol pattern for 16R special jackpot) is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 212. The effect shown in FIG. 128 (b1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 128 (a1) and described above.

  When the big hit game is started and the process proceeds to the first round, as shown in FIG. 128 (b2), the big hit acquisition chance effect described above is executed.

  As shown in FIGS. 128 (b3) to 128 (b4), even when a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed without passing the game ball to the effect V passing switch SW9, FIG. As shown in b5), the effect that the effect V has passed is executed. In other words, in the jackpot game that has been displayed with the jackpot symbol pattern stopped and displayed, whether the game ball has passed or not passed through the effect V passing switch SW9. This effect is executed, and the player is informed that the game has been shifted to the jackpot game of 16R special jackpot.

  In FIG. 128 (c1), the small symbol pattern is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212, and the decoration such as “decoration 1” — “decoration star” — “decoration 1” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208. A combination of symbols (chance symbols) is stopped (determined). Further, the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 are stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 212, for example, in a green circle symbol corresponding to the stop display result. The timing for stopping the finalization of the decorative symbol and the special symbol may or may not be simultaneous.

  When the small hit game is started, as shown in FIG. 128 (c2), the above big hit acquisition chance effect is executed. In the small hit game, the first variable winning opening 234a is only opened a plurality of times and is not opened a long time. The effect area shutter is driven and controlled so that the game ball that has entered the first variable prize winning opening 234a is unlikely to enter the effect discharge passage.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 128 (c3), when the small hit game is ended without passing the game ball to the effect V passing switch SW9, the small hit game end effect as shown in FIG. 128 (c4) is executed. The In the small hit game end effect, a character display of “sorry” indicating that the game has not shifted to the big hit game is displayed.

  FIG. 129 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific performance example in the thirteenth example of a pachinko machine. The effect example shown in FIG. 129 shows a state of a big hit game with a 16R special big hit, for example. The following diagram shows how the production progresses in numerical order in parentheses.

  FIG. 129 (a1) shows a state in which a jackpot game of 16R special jackpot is being executed. FIG. 129 (a1) shows the content of the effect in the sixth round. In addition, as shown in FIG. 129 (a1), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a big hit effect. In this example, the sixth round is a round in which the first variable prize opening 234a is opened. Here, the round which the 2nd variable prize opening 235a opens may be sufficient.

  Thereafter, when the above-described round end condition is satisfied and the first variable winning opening 234a is closed, as shown in FIG. 129 (a2), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs an inter-round interval effect. In the inter-round interval effect, for example, a part of the round number display displayed at the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208 is deleted, and only the letter “R” is displayed. Note that the round number display may be entirely deleted. Further, the number of rounds may be displayed in a form that is difficult to recognize. For example, the display form is gradually changed from “6R” indicating the sixth round to “7R” that is the seventh round. It may be. Thereafter, when the seventh round is started, as shown in FIG. 129 (a3), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “7R” indicating that it is the seventh round.

  FIG. 129 (b1) shows a state in which a jackpot game of 16R special jackpot is being executed. FIG. 129 (b1) shows the content of the effect in the sixth round. In addition, as shown in FIG. 129 (b1), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a big hit effect. In this effect example, the number of prize balls acquired by winning an attacker in the big hit game is displayed at the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 129 (b1), a character display of “795pt” indicating that 795 prize balls have been acquired is displayed.

  Thereafter, when the 16th round ends, a big hit end effect is performed as shown in FIG. 129 (b2). In the big hit this time, the number of winning balls won by winning the attacker is 2430, so the character display “TOTAL: 2430pt” is displayed in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. . Further, since the number of winning balls won by winning the attacker in this big hit has exceeded 2400, the character display of “2400 pt GET” is displayed on the upper part of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Next, a fourteenth example of the game machine to which the present invention can be applied will be described. Hereinafter, the difference from the items described so far will be mainly described.

  FIG. 130 is a schematic front view of the gaming board 200 provided in the pachinko machine 100 which is a premise of the embodiment of the present invention, as viewed from the front side (player side).

  A game board 200 shown in FIG. 130 is a so-called right-handed game board. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are provided, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined. In a generally known right-handed game board, by changing the strength of launching a game ball by a player's operation, a general-purpose starting port 228 and a second special-purpose starting port 232, which will be described later, 1 special drawing start port 230. Specifically, a game that rolls in the first area (the left area in the game area) that is the route to enter the first special figure starting port 230 by arranging the game nail 238 and the like with respect to the game area 124. The ball is configured so that it is difficult or impossible to enter the second special figure starting port 232, and conversely, it rolls in the second area (the right side area in the game area) provided with the second special figure starting port 232. The game ball is configured to be difficult or impossible to enter the first special figure starting port 230.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. In the effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed substantially in the center, and below that there are a universal diagram display device 210, a first special diagram display device 212, a second special diagram display device 214, and a general symbol display device 214. A figure holding lamp 216, a first special figure holding lamp 218, and a high-probability middle lamp 222 are provided. In this example, there is no hold for special figure 2, and there is no second special figure hold lamp.

  The display area (in this case, the size of 7 segments is equivalent) and the decorative symbol display device 208 (symbol display device) of the general symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, and the second special symbol display device 214 (notification means) ) Display area (here, the size of the display screen is equivalent), the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is larger. In addition, the general symbol display device 210, the first special figure display device 212, and the second special figure display device 214 cannot display a moving image, whereas the decorative symbol display device 208 can display a moving image. It is.

  In addition, a general prize opening 226, a general start opening 228, a first special figure start opening 230, a second special figure start opening 232, and a first variable winning opening 234 are arranged around the production device 206. Has been established.

  One normal start port 228 is arranged on the right side of the game board 200. The usual start port 228 is a start port that is expected to enter by making a right stroke.

  Only one first special figure starting port 230 is disposed below the central portion of the game board 200, and entering the ball is expected by making a left strike. The first special figure starting port 230 is a first starting region where the size of the entrance through which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls are discharged as prize balls to the upper plate 126, and the first special figure display is displayed. The special figure variation game by the device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which the size of the first special diagram starting port 230 does not change.

  Only one second special figure start port 232 is disposed below the general view start port 228. That is, the second special figure starting port 232 is provided on the right side of the game board 200 and is a starting port that is expected to enter the ball by hitting to the right. In the vicinity of the second special figure starting port 232, a pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid are provided. It corresponds to variable starting means, and is generally called an electric tulip (electric chew).

  The electric chew may be provided with a door member that opens and closes like an attacker.

  Only one first variable winning opening 234 is disposed below the second special figure starting port 232. That is, the first variable winning opening 234 is provided on the right side of the game board 200, and is a starting opening from which a winning is expected by making a right strike. The first variable winning opening 234 includes a winning opening and a door member 2341 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid. The winning opening may be referred to as a big winning opening. Hereinafter, the first variable winning opening 234 may be referred to as a first attacker. The first variable winning opening 234 (first attacker) corresponds to an example of the second area. The second area can also be referred to as a second entry area (hereinafter the same).

  Further, a second variable prize opening unit 235U is provided near the decorative symbol display device 208 between the normal figure starting port 228 (gate) and the second special figure starting port 232 (electrical chew). The second variable prize opening unit 235U includes a second variable prize opening 235 and an opening / closing member 2351 that can open and close the second variable prize opening 235 by a solenoid. A combination of the opening / closing member 2351 may be referred to as a second attacker. In FIG. 130, the opening / closing member 2351 indicated by a solid line is in the second state (open state or easy entry state), and the opening / closing member 2351 indicated by a dotted line is in the first state (closed state or entry difficult state). The second variable prize opening unit 235U includes a prize detection switch 2355 that detects a ball that has passed through the second variable prize opening 235. The ball that has passed through the second variable prize opening 235 enters either the V prize opening 2356 or the loser opening 2357. The second variable prize opening unit 235U is also provided with blocking means 2358 for preventing the game ball from entering the V prize opening 2356. The blocking means 2358 shown in FIG. 130 is in an open state that allows the game ball to enter the V winning opening 2356. The blocking means 2358 may be, for example, maintained in an open state only for a first opening time (for example, 1 second) after the opening / closing member 2351 is opened, and otherwise maintained in a closed state. However, the open state may be maintained only for a second open time (for example, 2 seconds) longer than the first time, and the closed state may be maintained otherwise, or the opening / closing member 2351 may be opened. After that, opening and closing may be repeated only for a second opening time (for example, 2 seconds). Further, although not shown, a V detection switch for detecting a ball that has won a V winning opening 2356 and a lose mouth detection switch for detecting a ball that has entered a lost opening 2357 are also provided. The detection area of this V detection switch corresponds to an example of the first area. The first area can also be referred to as the first entry area (hereinafter the same).

  The game characteristics in the game board 200 shown in FIG. 130 are as follows. When the ball enters the first special figure starting port 230 and hits the special figure variable game, the first attacker (the door member of the first variable winning port 234). 2341) open over the first round (eg, 7 rounds). The jackpot obtained by entering the first special figure starting port 230 is a jackpot with electric support with a first probability (for example, 50% probability), and the remaining probability (for example, 50% probability). Big hit without power support. However, when the ball enters the first special figure starting port 230 and hits the special figure variable game, the second attacker (the door member 2351 of the second variable winning port 235) is not opened. The power support state started here may be maintained while the symbol variation display of the special symbol is performed for the first number of times, or may be maintained until the next time (big hit or small hit).

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the second special figure starting port 232, a small hit is made with a second probability (for example, a probability of 90% or more), and the second attacker (the opening / closing member of the second variable winning port 235). 2351) open only once for a very short period (eg, 1.5 seconds). Even in this short-time one-time release, when the game ball enters the second attacker with good timing and further enters the V winning opening 2356, the first attacker (the door member 2341 of the first variable winning opening 234). ) Open over the second round (eg 15 rounds). In this case, after the first attacker opens for the second round, the state shifts to the electric support state. In addition, if there are multiple types of small hits, for example, if you win the first small hit and enter the V winning opening 2356, if you shift to the electric support state and win the second small hit May enter the V winning opening 2356 so that it does not shift to the electric support state, or when the second small hit is won, the open / close member 2351 remains closed and the V winning opening You may not give the chance to win 2356. The electric support state started here may be maintained while the special symbol variation display is performed the second number of times, or may be maintained until the next time (big hit or small hit).

  In addition, when the player enters the second special figure starting port 232, the player may win a big hit with a third probability (a probability of several percent). If the player wins a big hit, the first attacker (the first variable winning port) 234 door members 2341) open over a third round (eg, 15 rounds). The big hit here may be a big hit with electric support or a big hit without electric support.

  In addition, all the big hits in this example are big hits without probability change.

  In the game board 200 shown in FIG. 130, the arrangement of the general figure starting port 228, the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the first variable winning port 234, and the second variable winning port 235 is arranged. According to this, when the player hits the electric support state during the big hit game and after the big hit game is finished, the right hit is the most advantageous way for the player, and after the big hit game, the non-electric support state is reached. Left-handed is often the best way for players to hit.

  The 14th example described above is a so-called one-type and two-type pachinko machine.

  Here, characteristic pachinko machines to which the present invention can be applied will be described once more collectively. In addition to the one-type and two-type pachinko machines provided with the game board 200 shown in FIG. 130, the present invention can also be applied to the pachinko machines shown in FIG. 131.

  FIG. 131 is a diagram showing characteristics of a pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied.

  FIG. 131 (a) is a diagram showing the effect non-V pass switch SW10 and the effect V pass switch SW9 shown in FIG. For example, an effect V pass switch SW9 and an effect non-V pass switch SW10 are provided in the passage continuing from the first variable prize winning opening 235a. Here, when a door member of a first variable winning opening (not shown) is opened and a game ball enters the first variable winning opening, the gaming ball is detected by a winning switch (not shown) and the winning ball is paid out. . An opening / closing member (not shown) is provided on the upstream side of the effect V passing switch SW9. In the left side of FIG. 131 (a), the opening / closing member is opened, and the game ball is turned to the effect V passing switch. A state of progressing toward SW9 is shown. On the other hand, the diagram on the right side of FIG. 131 (a) shows a state in which the opening / closing member is closed, and the game ball advances toward the non-V passing switch SW10 for performance. As long as the opening / closing member is not opened, the game ball does not pass through the effect V passing switch SW9.

  The door member of the first variable winning opening is opened at the very first (first time) in the winning game, regardless of whether the result of the special symbol changing game is a big hit or a small hit. The opening / closing member is controlled to open / close by the main control unit 300, and the closed state is maintained when the result of the symbol variation game of the special figure is a small hit. As a result, the game ball that has entered the first variable winning opening passes the effect non-V passing switch SW10, the door member of the first variable winning opening is closed, and the winning game ends. On the other hand, when the result of the special symbol variation game is a big hit, the opening / closing member is opened, and the game ball that has entered the first variable winning opening can pass through the effect V passing switch SW9. When the game ball passes the effect V passing switch SW9, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the effect of determining the big hit. Here, the effect of determining the big hit is an effect informing that the door member of the first variable prize opening opens continuously, that is, the development after the second round, It was good not to have. It may be an effect to notify that.

  The detection area of the effect V passing switch SW9 corresponds to an example of a first area.

  The type of the pachinko machine provided with the switches SW9 and SW10 shown in FIG. 131 (a) may be hereinafter referred to as an effect V type.

  In this example, a second variable winning opening (V attacker) is provided separately from the first variable winning opening (first attacker), and the first round number (for example, 14 rounds or / When the 16th round (final round) is reached, the V-attacker opens and enters the V-attacker. After the big hit game is finished, the game shifts to a probable change state until the next big hit or the symbol fluctuation display is the first number of times (for example, The probability variation state continues until it is performed 100 times.

  Here, the unit having the V attacker may be as shown in FIG. 131 (b).

  FIG. 131 (b) is a diagram showing the second variable winning a prize opening unit shown in FIG. 78 and the like. The structure of the second variable prize opening unit here is the same as the structure of the second variable prize opening unit 235U of type 1 and type 2 shown in FIG. That is, a second variable winning opening (V attacker) provided separately from the first variable winning opening and a winning count switch SW1 are provided, and the game ball that has won the second variable winning opening 235a is: It is detected by the winning count switch SW1. The downstream side of the winning count switch SW1 is the second rolling region SP2. The second rolling region SP2 is divided into a V passage 2340g and a general passage 2340h. A sphere that has passed through the V passage switch SW2 is guided to the V passage 2340g, and a sphere that has passed through the discharge ball detection switch SW3 is generally used. Guided to passage 2340h. A V shutter 2352a, which is an opening / closing member, is provided on the upstream side of the V pass switch SW2. In the left side of FIG. 131 (b), the V shutter 2352a is opened, and the game ball passes through the V pass switch SW2. The state of entering the V passage 2340g is shown. On the other hand, the right side of FIG. 131 (b) shows a state in which the V shutter 2352a is closed and the game ball has entered the general passage 2340h through the discharge ball detection switch SW3. As long as the V shutter 2352a is not opened, the game ball does not pass through the V pass switch SW2.

  In this example, only when a game ball is detected by the V-pass switch SW2, after the big hit game is finished, the game changes to a probability change state. Therefore, even if a game ball is detected by the discharge ball detection switch SW3, the probability change state is not entered.

  The detection area of the V-pass switch SW2 corresponds to an example of the first area.

  As described above, the type of the pachinko machine provided with the second variable prize opening unit shown in FIG. 131 (b) may be hereinafter referred to as a V passing type.

  FIG. 131 (c) shows the big hit generation switch SW11. In the pachinko machine provided with the big hit generation switch SW11, the big hit game is not started unless the game ball passes through the big hit generation switch SW11. The big hit generation switch SW11 may be a dedicated switch, or may be also used as a ball detection sensor of the normal start port 228, for example. The big hit generation switch SW11 may be one that allows an unlimited number of game balls to pass even during normal times, or only when a specific stop symbol is confirmed and displayed on the special figure display devices 212 and 214. May pass through. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 101, it is possible to start a big hit game and to determine the number of rounds that can be executed in the big hit game. For example, a jackpot generating switch (second jackpot generating switch) SW12 different from the jackpot generating switch (first jackpot generating switch) SW11 shown in FIG. 131 (c) is prepared, and an entrance common to both switches is provided. When a game ball enters the entrance, the entered game ball is distributed to one of both switches. As a result, if the game ball passes the first big hit generation switch SW11, When a jackpot game of several rounds (for example, 10 rounds) is started and passed through the second jackpot generation switch SW12, a second number of rounds (for example, 4 rounds less than the first number) A big hit game may be started.

  The detection area of the first big hit generation switch SW11 corresponds to an example of the first area.

  FIG. 131 (d) shows the round determination means 2600. The round determining means 2600 equally divides the disk into four parts, and makes the opposing areas the same area. That is, when the game balls enter the first number of rounds (for example, 10 rounds), the entrance holes 2601 and 2603 provided in each of the first zone and the third zone, which have been subjected to single hatching representing red, are provided. The round holes are the entrance holes where the big hit game will be started, and the entrance holes 2602 and 2604 provided in the second zone and the fourth zone, respectively, with double hatching representing blue, When the game ball enters, the second hole (for example, four rounds less than the first number) is a hole that will start a big hit game. Therefore, each entrance hole becomes a big hit start / round determination opening.

  The entrance holes 2601 to 2604 in each area of the round determination means 2600 correspond to an example of the first area.

  As described above, the type of the pachinko machine provided with the switch SW11 shown in FIG. 131 (c) and the ball entrance holes 2601 to 2604 shown in FIG. 131 (d) may be hereinafter referred to as a round decision type.

  FIG. 132 is a diagram showing an example of effects in a one-type and two-type pachinko machine. In FIG. 132, time elapses in the order of alphabets written in parentheses.

  Each figure of FIG. 132 shows a decorative symbol display device 208, and further, below the decorative symbol display device 208, a first special graphic display device 212, a second special graphic display device 214, and a general graphic display device 210. A first special figure holding lamp 218 and a normal symbol holding lamp 216 are shown. As described above, there is no hold for the special figure 2 and there is no second special figure hold lamp. The background image of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 132 is a castle town background image. Also, on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208, a fourth symbol 2081 of the special symbol 1, a fourth symbol 2082 of the special symbol 2, and a fourth symbol 2083 of the common symbol are displayed. The 4th symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 is a round shape, the 4th symbol 2082 of the special figure 2 displayed below it is a quadrangle, and the 4th symbol 2083 displayed below it is a triangle. . Any of the fourth symbols 2081 to 2083 represents that white is changing, and black represents that stop display is being performed.

  In addition, the example shown here is an example during the electric support, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a character display (“right-handed”) that prompts a right-hand stroke and a right-pointing arrow (hit-style suggestion display), It is notified that the second special figure starting port 232 shown in FIG. 130 is aimed at the right region.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 132 (a), both the special symbol variation display and the regular symbol variation display are stopped and displayed on the upper left corner are "decoration 1"-"decoration 2"-"decoration". The combination of decorative symbols “1” is stopped. Further, in the effect area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 132 (a), a Tono-like character is displayed on the left side, and a target display 2084 is displayed on the opposite right side. The display in which the Tono-like character is displayed on the left side and the target display 2084 is displayed on the right side corresponds to a standby display.

  In FIG. 132 (b), the normal symbol variation display is started, and the triangle of the fourth symbol 2083 of the normal symbol is changed to white.

  In FIG. 132 (c), the normal symbol variation display is finished, the triangle of the fourth symbol 2083 of the normal symbol is changed to black, and the stop symbol of the winning symbol is stopped and displayed on the general symbol display device 210. As a result of winning the usual floating game in this way, the electric Chu (second special figure starting port 232) is opened, and there is one ball in the second special figure starting port 232.

  In FIG. 132 (d), the symbol variation display of the special symbol 2 is started, the square of the fourth symbol 2082 of the special symbol 2 is changed to white, and the decorative symbol variation display is also started on the upper left of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. Further, in the effect area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, the standby display is ended and the notification effect is started, and the right display 2084 displays “NO” and “X”. This “to” display and “×” display correspond to a turn effect.

  In FIG. 132 (e), the symbol variation display of special figure 2 ends, the square of the fourth graphic 2082 of special figure 2 changes to black, and the stop symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special figure display device 214. At the top left of the decorative symbol display device 208, a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 1”-“decoration 2”-“decoration 1” is stopped and displayed. The roaring effect in the notification effect continues.

  Eventually, the second attacker shown in FIG. 130 (opening / closing member 2351 of the second variable winning opening 235) is opened only once for a very short period (for example, 0.5 seconds), and the second variable winning opening 235 is opened. One game ball enters. When the winning detection switch 2355 detects a game ball, an arrow ar is fired from the left lord as a part of the roaring effect (see FIG. 132 (f)). Regardless of whether the winning detection switch 2355 detects a game ball or not, an arrow ar may be fired from the lord at the timing when the second attacker opens, An arrow ar may be fired from Tono at the timing when the stop symbol is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 132 (g) is a diagram illustrating a state in which the game ball passes through the lose mouth detection switch and does not pass through the V detection switch. That is, the game ball that has won the second variable prize opening 235 does not win the V prize opening 2356 but enters the loser opening 2357. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 132 (g), the display is switched from the roaring effect to the loss effect, and the arrow ar is hitting the display of “×”, and it is notified that it is a small hit. .

  In FIG. 132 (h), the notification effect is finished, and the same standby display as in FIG.

  On the other hand, FIG. 132 (g ′) is a diagram illustrating a state in which the game ball has passed the V detection switch and has not passed the lose mouth detection switch. That is, the game ball that has won the second variable prize opening 235 does not enter the loser opening 2357 but shows a state in which it has also won the V prize opening 2356. A period from immediately before FIG. 132 (f) to immediately before FIG. 132 (g ′) corresponds to an example of a first period. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 132 (g ′), the display is switched from the hit effect to the hit effect, and the arrow ar hits the “win” display, and it is notified that the hit is a big hit. .

  In FIG. 132 (h '), the winning effect is continued and it is continuously informed that it was a big hit.

  In FIG. 132 (i '), it is informed that the hit effect continues further and is a big hit, but here, the V animation is started. That is, the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is switched, no character is displayed, and the letter “V” is displayed small in the center. It should be noted that the Tono-sama character may be displayed.

  In FIG. 132 (j ′), the continuation of the V animation is displayed, the background image is also switched to become a background image in which a large number of characters and other characters are displayed, and the letter “V” gradually increases. Largely displayed in the center. In this scene, the stop display of the combination of decorative symbols displayed on the upper left, the hitting suggestion display, and the fourth symbols 2081 to 2803 are erased.

  The jackpot notification according to the hit effects shown in FIGS. 132 (g ′) to (h ′) described above corresponds to an example of the first mode notification (first notification). Hereinafter, “notification” may be read as “mode” or “notification mode”, and “mode” or “notification mode” may be read as “notification”.

  In addition, in the notification by the hit effect in FIG. 132 (g ′) to FIG. 132 (j ′), it can be seen that two types of big hit notification are performed. In other words, the jackpot notification by the display where the arrow ar hits the “win” display can be viewed as the first notification, and the jackpot notification by the V animation can be viewed as the second notification.

  Although illustration is omitted, in the decorative symbol display device 208 following FIG. 132 (j ′), the big hit game effect is produced in accordance with the big hit game opened by the first attacker (the door member 2341 of the first variable winning opening 234). Executed. A state in which a big hit game is being executed (a big hit game state) corresponds to an example of a second game state. The big hit game state is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the non-big hit game state such as a normal (losing) game state or a small hit game state. Since the first attacker opens when the V detection switch detects the game ball, the detection area of the V detection switch is an area related to the start of the big hit game.

  FIG. 133 is a diagram showing a first rare case and a second rare case of the effects shown in FIG. 132. Also in FIG. 133, time elapses in the alphabetical order written in parentheses. Hereinafter, the description overlapping with the example described with reference to FIG. 132 may be omitted.

  FIGS. 133 (a) to 133 (f) are the same as FIGS. 132 (a) to 132 (f).

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 133 (g) is the same as the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 132 (g), but FIG. 133 (g) shows the game that won the second variable winning opening 235. It is a figure which shows a mode when a ball | bowl does not pass through a lose mouth detection switch but timeout occurs. That is, even if the first waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) considering the rolling time of the game ball elapses after the winning detection switch 2355 detects the game ball, the V detection is also performed from the lose mouth detection switch. If the game ball detection signal is not output from the switch, the roaring effect is executed to the end. The end of the roaring effect is connected to the lost effect, and in FIG. 133 (g), as a result of the roaring effect being executed to the end, the arrow ar hits the display of “x” automatically as the lost effect. It is a figure which shows a mode that the display was made and it was alert | reported that it was a small hit. The first waiting time here corresponds to an example of a first period. Note that, as default of the notification effect, even when default effect data in which the flow of the loss effect to the loss effect is integrated is prepared, it is the same as FIG. 133 (g).

  FIG. 133 (h) shows the decorative symbol display device 208 when the effect execution period of the losing effect has elapsed without the game ball detection signal being output from either the losing mouth detection switch or the V detection switch. It is a figure and is equivalent to the 1st rare case. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 133 (h), the display returns to the same standby display as in FIG.

  Even if the first waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, the reason why the game ball detection signal is not output from the lose mouth detection switch or the V detection switch is that the second variable winning award opening unit 235U There may be an electric failure such as a ball clogging or fraud, or a switch failure or disconnection. Here, it is assumed that a ball is clogged, and the standby display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 until the ball clogging is eliminated, that is, until a game ball detection signal is output.

  Eventually, when the ball clogging is resolved and a game ball detection signal is output from the V detection switch, V animation is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 133 (i), the letter “V” is centered. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 6J, the background image is switched and the letter “V” is displayed in the center in the center. The period from FIG. 133 (h) to immediately before FIG. 133 (i) corresponds to an example of the second period. As described above, since the first waiting time corresponds to an example of the first period, the second period is a period that follows the first period.

  Further, the jackpot notification by the V animation in FIGS. 133 (i) to (j) corresponds to an example of the second notification. The big hit notification (second notification) by the V animation is performed when the game ball is switched to the V detection switch during the first waiting time (for example, a period from immediately before FIG. 132 (f) to immediately before FIG. 132 (g ′)). 132, the arrow ar in FIG. 132 (g ′) to FIG. 132 (h ′) hits the display of “present” (the first aspect in the hit effect) This is a notification that is executed after execution of the notification (first notification). On the other hand, the notification (first notification) of the mode (first mode) in the hit effect of FIGS. 132 (g ′) to (h ′) is performed after the first waiting time has elapsed (for example, FIG. 133 ( This is a notification that is not executed even if the game ball enters the V detection switch during the period from h) to immediately before FIG. 133 (i).

  In addition, the notification (first notification) in the hit effect in which the arrow ar in FIG. 132 (g ′) to FIG. 132 (h ′) hits the display of “to” is performed on the background image of the castle town as a character image. Is a mode in which one Tono-sama character image is displayed. On the other hand, the notification (second notification) by the V animation shown in FIGS. 133 (i) to (j) is a mode in which the background image is displayed in which a large number of characters and the like are displayed. Therefore, both notification modes are different. For example, in both notifications, the background image is different and the displayed character image is also different. In the second notification, a princess character image may be displayed.

  Further, even if the arrow ar in FIG. 132 (g ′) to FIG. 132 (h ′) hits the display of “T”, the notification (first notification) in the hit effect is also performed. Even if the big hit notification by the V animation of FIG. (J) is a notification related to the big hit gaming state, it is a notification executed before shifting to the big hit gaming state.

  In FIG. 133 (g ′), similarly to FIG. 13 (g), even when the first waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, the game ball detection signal is output from the lose mouth detection switch and the V detection switch. As a result of the execution of the roaring effect to the end without being output, the display that the arrow ar hits the display of “x” is automatically made as a loss effect, and it is reported that it was a small hit FIG. In the second rare case, if the game ball detection signal is not output even after the lapse effect production execution period has elapsed, the losing effect is not returned to the standby display as shown in FIG. 133 (h). Is played in a loop. When the ball clogging is resolved and a game ball detection signal is output from the V detection switch, V animation is started as shown in FIGS. 133 (h ′) to (i ′). The jackpot notification corresponds to an example of a second notification.

  When the ball clogging is eliminated and a game ball detection signal is output from the lose mouth detection switch, the display returns to the standby display as shown in FIG. 132 (h).

  FIG. 134 shows a third rare case of the effect shown in FIG. 132. Also in FIG. 134, time elapses in the order of alphabets written in parentheses. Hereinafter, descriptions overlapping with the first rare case may be omitted.

  134 (a) to 134 (h) are the same as FIGS. 133 (a) to 133 (h). That is, in FIG. 134 (h), a game ball detection signal is output from the detection switch even if the first waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses or the effect execution period of the lost effect elapses. First, the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 returns to the standby display.

  Eventually, when the ball clogging is resolved and a game ball detection signal is output from the V detection switch, in this third rare case, an error is notified before the start of the V animation. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 134 (i), an error notification is made by a character display of “Large winning mouth discharge error”, and it is notified that a ball clogging has occurred, and then as shown in FIG. 134 (j). V animation is started. In the third rare case, the combination of the “big prize exit error” and the V animation corresponds to an example of the notification (second notification) of the second mode. It should be noted that the notification of the “big prize exit discharge error” can be regarded as a third notification.

  The error notification may be started promptly when a game ball detection signal is not output even after the first waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed. In this case, the error notification may be started in parallel with the automatically generated loss effect, or the error notification may be started instead of the loss effect. Further, simultaneously with the start of the standby display, the error notification may be started in parallel with the standby display, or the error notification may be started instead of the standby display.

  According to the effects described above for the one-type and two-type pachinko machines described above, different types of notification regarding jackpot notification may be made depending on the winning timing of the game ball to the V winning opening 2356, which may improve the interest of the game. . Moreover, in FIG. 133 (g) and FIG. 134 (g), the lost effect is once made and then promoted to the jackpot effect, so that the interest of the game is greatly improved. In addition, when a ball clogging has occurred, a loss effect and a standby display are displayed, but when the ball clogging is eliminated and a winning is made to the V winning opening 2356, the big hit effect is executed properly. Can give people a sense of security and fairness.

  FIG. 135 is a diagram showing an example of effects in a round decision type pachinko machine. In FIG. 135, time elapses in the order of alphabets written in parentheses.

  Each figure of FIG. 135 shows a decorative symbol display device 208. Furthermore, below the decorative symbol display device 208, a first special figure display device 212, a second special figure display device 214, and a first special figure hold. A lamp 218 and a second special figure hold lamp 220 are shown.

  In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 135, a variation icon display region 208e is provided in the center portion of the effect display region 208d, and a hold icon display region 208f is located to the right of the variation icon display region 208e. Is provided. A frame-like image indicating the position of the fluctuation icon display area 208e is displayed on the outer periphery of the fluctuation icon display area 208e. This frame-like image is always displayed, but when the display condition is satisfied (for example, when the variation icon is not displayed in the variation icon display area or when it is displayed in the opposite direction, a reach effect is further performed. It may be displayed only when not). Note that only one of the change icon display area 208e and the hold icon display area 208f may be provided.

  One or a plurality of hold icons can be displayed in the hold icon display area 208f. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 135 (a), four hold icons h1 to h4 are displayed. These four hold icons h1 to h4 are all displayed with black circles, and the display with white circles indicates that the hold icons are not displayed. The hold icon is an icon indicating that the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure or the success / failure determination of the special figure is held, and the number of the hold icons to be displayed is basically the number of the hold of the special figure variable game. And the same number. The hold icons include the hold icon shown in FIG. 1 and the hold icon shown in FIG. 2, and the hold icon display area 208f may be divided into two to display areas for both icons. Further, the hold icon can be pre-readed about whether or not the hold is appropriate depending on the display mode. As animation related to the hold icon, for example, an increase animation that is executed when the hold increases and a new hold icon is displayed, and the rank of the hold changes due to digestion of the previous hold, and the hold Moving animation that is executed when the icon moves to another display position (for example, the position on the left), change animation that is executed when the display mode of the holding icon changes based on the look-ahead result, etc. Erase animation executed when the hold icon is deleted, and a save animation executed when the hold icon of the non-priority side special figure is evacuated when the hold of the priority side special figure increases in the priority change machine Etc. In addition to the above animation, the stand-by animation that can be executed independently during a period other than the execution of the animation (for example, a period in which there is no increase / decrease of the hold or change of the hold icon) and can be executed in duplicate with the animation. There is. As an example of this standby animation, an animation that is performed on the spot without changing the display position (for example, a repeated animation of a certain scale of animation) is given as an example. Note that a plurality of animations for increasing, moving, changing, erasing, saving, and waiting for the hold icon may be executed in duplicate.

  One variation icon can be displayed in the variation icon display area 208e. A star-shaped variation icon c is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The fluctuation icon is an icon corresponding to the special figure variable game that is displayed after the hold is digested and the special figure variable game is started. That is, the hold icon becomes a change icon simultaneously with the start of the special figure change game corresponding to the hold icon. This variation icon is displayed in a display size different from the hold icon (for example, a display size larger than the hold icon). Thereby, although the change icon and the hold icon may be easily identified, they may be the same size. In addition, the variation icon may have a display mode related to the display mode of the hold icon. The change icon can be notified of whether or not the change is appropriate (the change notice) depending on the display mode, and is basically erased at a timing when the result of the change is notified. Therefore, the variation icon can be regarded as an icon related to the hold, and can also be considered as a kind of the hold icon in the sense that the notification of the success / failure result of the special figure change game is held. Note that the erasing timing may be a timing before the timing at which the change success / failure result is notified, the same timing, or a timing after the timing.

  As an animation related to both the hold icon and the change icon, the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 208f and having the earliest start winning timing is changed to the change icon display area 208e when the hold is consumed. There are a movement animation for moving the icon as a variable icon and a change animation for changing the display mode of the hold icon to the display mode of the variable icon. These animations may be combined and executed at the same time. When the display mode of the hold icon and the display mode of the variation icon are the same, the execution of the change animation can be omitted.

  The animation related to the fluctuation icon includes a standby animation executed during execution of the special figure variable game, an erase animation executed when the special figure variable game ends and the fluctuation icon is deleted, and a fluctuation icon. There is a change animation executed when the display mode is changed in the middle. These animations may be executed at the same time in combination with each other. Further, the standby animation of the variation icon may be executed at the same time in combination with the movement animation or the change animation.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 135, the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol 2082 of the special figure 2 are displayed on the upper right. The 4th symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 is a round display, and the 4th graphic 2082 of the special figure 2 is a square display. In any of the 4th symbols 2081 and 2082, gray indicates that the symbol is changing, black indicates that the jackpot symbol is stopped (determined display), and white indicates that the lose symbol is stopped (determined display). It represents that.

  In FIG. 135 (a), both the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 display the stop symbol of the loss, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “decoration 3” − “Decoration 4”-“Decoration 1” is displayed. In addition, the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol 2082 of the special figure 2 are both displayed in a stopped state. The four first special symbol hold lamps 218 shown in FIG. 135 (a) are lit, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays four black circle hold icons, which are the hold indications of special figure 1. Therefore, no variation icon is displayed in the variation icon display area 208e.

  In FIG. 135 (b), the special symbol variation display of the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the decorative symbol variation display of the decorative symbol display device 208 is also started. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol update (variation display) is continuously performed in each of the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c. The special symbol variation display started here continues until FIG. 135 (g). Further, only three first special symbol hold lamps 218 shown in FIG. 135 (b) are lit, and only three hold icons (hold icons h1 to h3) are displayed in the hold icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208. The star-shaped variation icon c is displayed in the variation icon display area 208e. This is because, among the four hold icons h1 to h4 displayed in FIG. 5A, the hold icon h1 with the oldest start winning timing becomes a change icon, and the change icon display from the hold icon display area 208f. This is a result of moving to the area 208e. Furthermore, the 4th symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 which is a round display is changed to a display during change (gray).

  In FIG. 135 (c), the decoration symbol update is completed in the left symbol display area 208a, and the shaking display of “decoration 5” is started. In FIG. 135 (d), this time, the decoration symbol update is completed in the right symbol display area 208c, the shaking display of “decoration 5” is started, and the reach state is reached. Then, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 135 (e) is displayed with the letters “SP reach”, and is informed that it will develop into a super reach.

  In FIG. 135 (f), a combination of decorative symbols such as “decoration 5”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5” is displayed in a shaking manner as part of the super reach production. Up to FIG. 135 (f), both the first special figure display device 212 and the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 are in a variable display.

  In FIG. 135 (g), the big hit stop symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212, and the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 is also changed to black indicating that the big hit symbol is being stopped. On the symbol display device 208, a combination of ornamental symbols such as “decoration 5”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5” is stopped and displayed.

  After the jackpot stop symbol is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a notification effect. The big hit generation switch SW11 shown in FIG. 131 (c) is provided in the right area of the game area, and it is necessary to make a right turn to pass the big hit generation switch SW11. Further, a round determination unit 2600 similar to the round determination unit 2600 shown in FIG. 131 (d) is provided below the big hit generation switch SW11. Note that the round determining means 2600 shown in FIG. 131 (d) also has a function of a big hit starting port. However, in this example, the function of the big hit starting port is performed by the big hit generating switch SW11. It has only a function as a round decision opening.

  In this example, even if the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the special chart display device, the game ball is allowed to pass through the jackpot generation switch SW11 and is not allowed to enter any of the entrance holes 2601 to 2604 of the round determination means 2600. The big hit round (R), that is, the opening of the attacker is not started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 135 (h), a notification effect is started, and it is notified that it is necessary to make a right turn in order to pass the jackpot generation switch SW11 which is a gate provided in the right region. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 5 (i), the first zone and the third zone, which are prepared in the round determining means 2600, are subjected to single hatching representing red, and double hatching representing blue. A description of the applied second and fourth zones is displayed. That is, when a game ball enters the entrance holes 2601 and 2603 of the first zone and the third zone, a 16-round (R) jackpot game is surely started, and the entrance of the second zone and the fourth zone When a game ball enters the holes 2602 and 2604, a big hit game of one of 16 rounds (R) or 8 rounds (R) is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 135 (j), the letter “start” is displayed in a large size. This character display of “start” continues to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 until it is detected that the game ball that has passed the jackpot generation switch SW11 has entered the entrance holes 2601 to 2604 of any zone. . A series of displays from FIG. 135 (h) to FIG. 135 (j) corresponds to a roaring effect among the notification effects, and becomes a tutorial-like display regarding the big hit round.

  Eventually, the game ball passes through the big hit generation switch SW11 as shown in FIG. 135 (k), and further enters the entrance hole 2601 of the first zone as shown in FIG. 135 (l). Then, as shown in FIG. 135 (m), the decorative symbol display device 208 is notified of the round determination by the character display “16R GET” as the result notification effect of the notification effects.

  Then, the 16R jackpot game is started, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 135 (n), the execution of the jackpot effect is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a character display for notifying 16R big hit “SUPER”, a hitting suggestion notification, and a current round number display R1 are performed.

  136 is a diagram showing a rare case of the effect shown in FIG. Also in FIG. 136, time elapses in the order of alphabets written in parentheses. Hereinafter, the description overlapping with the example described with reference to FIG. 135 may be omitted.

  136 (a) to 136 (j) are the same as FIGS. 135 (a) to 135 (j). That is, after the jackpot stop symbol is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the notification effect, and the character display “start” corresponding to a part of the hit effect is passed through the jackpot generating switch SW11. It is continuously displayed until it is detected that the sphere has entered the entrance holes 2601 to 2604 in any zone. In this rare case, even if the second waiting time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, the game balls that have passed through the big hit generation switch SW11 enter the entrance holes 2601 to 2604 in any zone of the round determination means 2600. Do not enter. This is because the player has left the seat and the game ball is not being fired, whether it is fired or left-handed, or between the big hit occurrence switch SW11 and the round determining means 2600. It is conceivable that ball clogging has occurred. When the second waiting time elapses, as shown in FIG. 136 (k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, no character has ever appeared, but several characters have appeared, and “16R confirmed” R determination notification by the character display "is performed. This R determination notification is not a character display of 16 round determination but a character display of 16R determination to the last. Here, a scene in which several characters appear can be viewed as a background image, and it can be considered that the background image has been switched. In addition, the hitting suggestion notification for urging to make a right strike is continuously performed from the time when the notification effect is started, in other words, from the time when the turn effect is started, and is also continued in the R determination notification. . The hitting suggestion notification in the R determination notification differs from the conventional hitting suggestion notification in the manner of notification, and the character color changes and the size increases, so that it becomes more conspicuous. Note that the hitting suggestion notification in the R determination notification may be the same notification mode as the hitting suggestion notification so far.

  A player who leaves and returns or a player who has made a left turn by mistake sees the R determination notification, passes the game ball through the jackpot generation switch SW11, and enters the round determination means 2600. If it is inserted into the holes 2601 to 2604, it is assumed that the 16R big hit will be confirmed, and the game ball is restarted or right-handed. In addition, even if it is not R determination notification, it is sufficient if the player wants to pass the game ball through the big hit occurrence switch SW11 and to enter the ball entering holes 2601 to 2604 of the round determination means 2600.

  As shown in FIG. 136 (l), the game ball passes through the big hit generation switch SW11 and further enters the entrance hole 2602 of the second zone as shown in FIG. 136 (m). Then, as shown in FIG. 136 (n), the decorative symbol display device 208 is notified of the round determination by the character display “8R GET” as the result notification effect of the notification effects. Then, the 8R jackpot game is started, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 136 (o), execution of the jackpot effect is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, there is no character display of “SUPER”, but a hitting suggestion notification and a current round number display of R1 are performed. When a game ball enters the entrance hole 2601 of the first zone, a round decision notification with a character display of “16R GET” is performed, and in the big hit effect, “SUPER” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. "Is displayed.

  FIG. 137 is a diagram showing a modification of the effect shown in FIG. Also in FIG. 137, time elapses in the order of alphabets written in parentheses. Hereinafter, the description overlapping with the example described with reference to FIG. 135 may be omitted.

  FIG. 137 (a) to FIG. 137 (e) are the same as FIG. 135 (a) to FIG. 135 (e), and the first special figure display device 212 displays the special figure variation. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 137 (e), the characters “SP reach” are displayed, and it is informed that it will be developed into super reach.

  In FIG. 137 (f), the super reach production is started, and the duel scene between the hero's spear and the enemy role is displayed on the entire screen on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbol variation display is reduced and displayed in the upper left corner. Has been. Further, from the stage of FIG. 137 (e), the hold icons h1 to h3 disappear, and the frame-shaped image indicating the position of the variation icon display area 208e and the star-shaped variation icon c also disappear.

  In FIG. 137 (g), the duel scene progresses, and in FIG. 137 (h), the duel scene is used as a background image, and a character display of “game time” is displayed in the center of the screen.

  The big hit generating switch SW11 shown in FIG. 131 (c) is also provided in the game area of the pachinko machine of this modification, but this big hit generating switch SW11 can pass the game ball without making a right hit. it can. The big hit generation switch SW11 corresponds to an example of a first region. Further, the round hitting means 2600 shown in FIG. 131 (d) is not provided under the big hit generation switch SW11, and the game ball is passed through the big hit generation switch SW11 during the special symbol variation display, and thereafter If the crest character falls, the big hit of 16R is confirmed. That is, as part of the super reach production, the game ball is passed through the jackpot generating switch SW11. Even if the game ball is passed through the big hit generation switch SW11, if the family crest is not dropped, the small hit is confirmed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 137 (i), the tutorial display about the big hit determination is made above the image in which the duel scene is a background image and the game ball is passed through the big hit generation switch SW11. The display here is continuously displayed until the game ball passes the jackpot generation switch SW11 unless the super reach effect is finished.

  In FIG. 137 (j), the game ball passes the big hit generation switch SW11. The period before and after this FIG. 137 (j) corresponds to an example of the first period. When the game ball passes the big hit generation switch SW11, a result notification as a super reach effect is performed. In this example, the character of the family crest does not fall, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 137 (k) displays “unfortunate” on the background image as a result notification. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 137 (l), the image is switched to a background image of a dead tree animation, the character “defeat” is displayed relatively large, and the super reach effect ends. According to this result, it is not necessary to pass the big hit generation switch SW11. However, as will be described later, there are cases where the result notification is notified depending on whether the big hit generation switch SW11 is passed or not. Different.

  In FIG. 137 (m), the special symbol display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display device 212 is terminated, the small special symbol symbol is stopped on the first special symbol display device 212, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. While the letters “defeat” are displayed on the background image of the dead tree, a combination of small decorative patterns such as “decoration 5”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 5” is stopped and displayed in the upper left corner.

  In FIG. 137 (n), the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 (attacker) performs short opening (for example, opening for 0.5 seconds) in the small hit game.

  On the other hand, in the case of a big hit, first, an unillustrated family crest character 247 is dropped in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 here. Subsequently, as a result notification, as shown in FIG. 137 (k ′), a character “16R GET” is displayed on the background image without a pattern, and then, as shown in FIG. 137 (l ′), Is switched to the background image of the animation that defeated the enemy role, the character of victory is displayed relatively large, and the super reach production ends. In the case of a big win, the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 (attacker) performs a long opening (for example, opening for 10 seconds) as a big hit game. The variable winning opening 234 (attacker) corresponds to an example of the second area.

  It is also possible to provide an advantageous big hit and an unfavorable big hit for the big hit, so that the attacker opens long as an advantageous big hit game, and the attacker short opens as an unfavorable big hit.

  FIG. 138 is a diagram showing a first rare case of the effect shown in FIG. Also in FIG. 138, time elapses in the alphabetical order written in parentheses. Hereinafter, the description which overlaps with the example demonstrated using FIG. 137 may be abbreviate | omitted.

  FIGS. 138 (a) to 138 (i) are the same as FIGS. 137 (a) to 137 (i). That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 138 (i), as part of the super reach production, the duel scene is set as the background image, and the jackpot determination switch is displayed above the image that passes the game ball to the jackpot generation switch SW11. A tutorial is displayed. In this rare case, even if the third waiting time (for example, 20 seconds) elapses, the game ball does not pass the jackpot generation switch SW11. This is because the player is away from the seat and the game ball is not being fired, or even if it is fired, the big hit generation switch SW11 is not aimed, or the ball is clogged in the vicinity of the upstream of the big hit generation switch SW11. It is conceivable that this has occurred. When the third waiting time elapses, as shown in FIG. 138 (j), the decorative symbol display device 208 uses the duel scene animation as a background image and passes the game ball through the jackpot generation switch SW11 above the image. , R determination notification by the character display of “16R confirmation” is performed. This R determination notification is not a character display of 16 round determination but a character display of 16R determination to the last. The third waiting time here corresponds to an example of a first period.

  A player who leaves and returns, or a player who has not aimed at the jackpot generating switch SW11, sees the R determination notification and assumes that if the player passes the jackpot generating switch SW11, the 16R jackpot will be determined, and a jackpot will occur. A game ball is launched aiming at the switch SW11. In this case as well, it is only necessary to notify the player that he / she wants to pass the jackpot generating switch SW11 without using the R determination notification.

  As shown in FIG. 138 (k), the game ball passes through the big hit generation switch SW11, and then, as shown in FIG. 138 (l), the family crest character 247 falls in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Come. The character 247 of the family crest that has fallen makes it difficult to visually recognize all or part of the character displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  When the family crest character 247 falls, as shown in FIG. 138 (m), the decorative symbol display device 208 is notified of the result as a super reach effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 138 (m), as a result notification, a character display of “16R GET” is displayed on the patternless background image, and the super reach effect ends.

  The period before and after including FIG. 138 (k) described above corresponds to an example of the second period. As described above, since the third waiting time corresponds to an example of the first period, the second period is a period that follows the first period.

  In FIG. 138 (n), the special symbol display on the first special symbol display device 212 is terminated, the big special symbol display is stopped on the first special symbol display device 212, and the main character is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. A scene of winning the bag is displayed, and in the upper left corner, a combination of the big hit decorative symbols such as “decoration 5”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5” is stopped and displayed.

  In FIG. 138 (o), the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234 (attacker) is opened long (for example, opened for 10 seconds). Here, since the 16R jackpot is won, the long opening is performed 16 times.

  Here, the effect V passing switch SW9 shown in FIG. 131 (a) is separated from the first variable winning opening, and arranged alone in the game area, and the game ball fired in the game area directly produces the effect. The V passing switch SW9 may be allowed to pass. In this case, a game ball that becomes an out ball can also pass through the effect V passing switch SW9. In such a case, if the game ball is passed through the effect V passing switch SW9 and then the family crest accessory 247 shown in FIG. 138 falls, the big hit is confirmed. That is, as part of the super reach effect, a game ball such as an out ball is passed through the effect V passing switch SW9. Note that even if the game ball is passed through the effect V passing switch SW9, if the family crest is not dropped, the small hit is confirmed. This example is almost the same as the examples shown in FIGS. 137 and 138. That is, the big hit generation switch SW11 is replaced with the production V pass switch SW9, and the character display of “16R GET” is displayed as “big hit GET” on the patternless background image shown in FIGS. 137 (k ′) and 138 (m). Except for this, it is almost the same as the example shown in FIGS. 137 and 138.

  In such a gate passing effect using an out ball, a promotion notification that prompts the player to pass the game ball through the gate is performed, and after the game ball has passed through the gate, the result of the loss or jackpot is notified. On the other hand, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the execution of the promotion notification, the result notification is performed before the game ball passes through the gate, and when the game ball passes the gate thereafter, the result notification is further performed. Here, the result notification performed first and the result notification performed later may be partially different, all different, or all the same.

  FIG. 139 is a diagram showing a second rare case of the effect shown in FIG. Also in FIG. 139, time elapses in the order of alphabets written in parentheses. Hereinafter, the description which overlaps with the example demonstrated using FIG. 137 may be abbreviate | omitted.

  FIGS. 139 (a) to 139 (i) are the same as FIGS. 137 (a) to 137 (i). Even in this rare case, even when a third waiting time (for example, 20 seconds) elapses, the game ball does not pass the jackpot generation switch SW11. However, in this example, the R display notification, that is, the notification that the player wants to pass the jackpot generation switch SW11 is not performed, and the screen displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 139 (i) is displayed. As long as the super reach effect is not ended, the game ball is continuously displayed until it passes through the jackpot generating switch SW11.

  In the second rare case, after all, the game ball does not pass the jackpot generation switch SW11, and as shown in FIG. 139 (j), the decorative symbol display device 208 is notified of the result as a super reach effect. . In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 139 (j), as a result notification, a character display of “sorry” is displayed on the patternless background image, and the super reach effect ends.

  When the game ball passes the big hit generation switch SW11, as shown in FIG. 137 (l), it switches to the background image of the dead tree animation, the character “defeat” is displayed relatively large, and the super reach effect ends. It can be seen that the notification mode of the result notification differs depending on whether the jackpot generating switch SW11 is passed or not.

  In FIG. 139 (k), the special symbol display on the first special symbol display device 212 is terminated, the small special symbol display is stopped on the first special symbol display device 212, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The letters “defeat” are displayed on the background image of the dead tree, and the combination of small decorations such as “decoration 5”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 5” is stopped and displayed in the upper left corner.

  In FIG. 139 (l), the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234 (attacker) performs short opening (for example, opening for 0.5 seconds).

  As described above, in the round-decision type pachinko machine described with reference to FIGS. 135 to 139, the game ball passes through the gate and the entrance hole after the promotion notification is made to pass the gate and the entrance hole. Then, notification of the number of big hit rounds and notification of small hit or big hit confirmation are performed. On the other hand, when a predetermined time has passed since the execution of the promotion notification, the game ball is notified of the number of big hits before passing through the gate and the entrance hole, and after that, when the game ball passes through the gate and the entrance hole, Notifications such as the number of big hit rounds are made. Here, the notification of the number of big hit rounds performed earlier and the notification of the number of big hit rounds performed later may be partially different, all different, or all the same. There may be.

  In the case of a big hit internally, the big hit game is started by passing through the gate, but in the case of a small hit, the small hit game is started after a lapse of time. In addition, when the game ball does not pass through the gate within a predetermined period (within the waiting time) for each of the big hits and small hits, a hidden effect may be performed, and further, other effects may be performed after the predetermined period has elapsed. Good. In addition, during the display of the fluctuation of the special figure, an effect using the big hit generation switch SW11 may be started. In this case, since the big hit game cannot be started even if the gate passes during the special figure change, the start of the effect after the special figure is stopped may be performed only in the case of the big hit.

  FIG. 140 is a diagram for explaining the combination of effect data. In FIG. 140, time elapses from left to right.

  FIG. 140 (a) is a diagram showing data from a roaring effect to a loss effect starting from FIG. 133 (d) and continuing to FIG.

  The effect data shown in FIG. 140 (a) includes a display of “to” and “×” (for example, FIGS. 133 (d) to (e)) and a display in which an arrow ar is fired and flew ( 133 (f)) is a series of data in which the effect data of the shadow effect in the display (FIG. 133 (g)) in which the arrow ar hits the display of “x” following the beat effect is connected. is there.

  In FIG. 140 (b), the effect data B is overwritten on the rear side portion of the effect data A (here, the data portion of the lost effect). The effect data B is hit effect data of a display (FIG. 133 (g ′)) in which the arrow ar hits the “present” display, and the lose effect data is overwritten on the hit effect data. The effect data C is effect data of V animation (FIG. 133 (i ′) to FIG. 13 (j ′)), and the V animation is reproduced following the hit effect.

  In FIG. 140 (c), the arrow extending from the end of the effect data A to the start of the effect data C does not output a game ball detection signal from the detection switch even if the effect data A is displayed to the end. This is an arrow indicating that the picture of the last frame of the effect data A is continuously displayed until a game ball detection signal is output from the detection switch. According to FIG. 140 (c), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays information shown in FIGS. 133 (d) to (g ′) to (i ′).

  The effect data D is error notification effect data by a character display (FIG. 134 (i)) of “Large winning mouth discharge error”. According to FIG. 140 (d), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the screens shown in FIGS. 134 (d) to (k).

  FIG. 141 is a diagram for explaining the display area.

  FIG. 141 (a) shows a reserved icon display area 208f in the decorative symbol display device 208 which is a liquid crystal display device. The hold icon display area 208f is an area surrounded by a dotted line, and is an area in which four hold icons h1 to h4 can be displayed.

  FIG. 141 (b) shows the hold icon hd in the default display mode. In the example described with reference to FIG. 141, the default display mode is a gray rectangular display mode. On the other hand, FIG. 141 (c) shows a hold icon hc in the display mode of the pre-reading notice for the jackpot of the special figure, and the display mode of the pre-reading notice here is a display form of a gray rhombus. In both FIG. 141 (b) and FIG. 14 (c), the hold icons hd and hc are shown where the pixels p are shown in a matrix, and the pixels filled in black in each figure. The arrangement indicates the outline of the individual display area of each hold icon alone.

  FIG. 141 (d) shows the outline of the individual display area of the hold icon hd in the default display mode, and FIG. 141 (e) shows the outline of the individual display area of the hold icon hd in the display mode of the prefetch notice. That is, FIG. 141 (d) is a diagram showing only the arrangement of pixels painted black in FIG. 14 (b), and FIG. 141 (e) is an arrangement of pixels painted black in FIG. 141 (c). FIG.

  FIG. 141 (f) shows a state where the individual display area of the default hold icon hd shown in FIG. 141 (b) and the individual display area of the hold icon hd for the pre-reading notice overlap. FIG. In the part of the pixel p where the two individual display areas overlap, the hold icon drawn on the front (upper) layer is easier to see (viewable) and is drawn on the back (lower) layer. The hold icon is more difficult to see (not visible).

  FIG. 141 (g) is a diagram showing a state where the entire hold icon display area 208f is masked. That is, a black image covering the entire hold icon display area 208f is displayed, and the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 208f is invisible.

  FIG. 141 (h) is a diagram showing an individual display area of each hold icon in FIG. In FIG. 141 (h), the outline of the individual display area of each hold icon is represented by a white line, and the portion inside the outline is represented by light gray. The individual display area of each hold icon is an area formed by combining a white line and a light gray portion inside thereof.

  In FIG. 141 (i), the decorative symbol change display performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 is represented by a gray arrow. Here, as a result of the enlarged display of the decorative symbol variation display, a part of the left decorative symbol variation display and a part of the central decorative symbol variation display overlap the hold icon display area 208f. The state of the hold icon display area 208f shown in FIG. 141 (i) is entirely covered with a black image as in the state of the hold icon display area 208f shown in FIG. A part of the variable display and a part of the variable display of the decorative pattern in the center are also invisible due to the black image.

  FIG. 141 (j) is a diagram showing a state in which all the hold icons have disappeared due to the development of super reach production. Even in the state shown in FIG. 141 (j), the hold icon display area 208f and the individual display area of each hold icon are not lost, and the hold icon that should be displayed in the individual display area of the hold icon is not included in the individual display area. Is not drawn on the screen, or is drawn in the individual display area, but is drawn on the back (lower) layer, so that the player cannot see the hold icon.

  FIG. 142 is a time chart showing the relationship between the first period and the second period and the entry (entrance) of the game ball into the first area. In this time chart, time elapses from left to right in the figure.

  The first period is a period within a waiting time for detecting the entry (entrance) of a game ball into the first area, and the second period is a period following the first period. That is, the first period and the second period are continuous.

  FIG. 142 (a) shows an example in which a ball enters during the first period, FIG. 142 (b) shows an example in which a ball enters during the second period, and FIG. Fig. 4 (d) shows an example where there was no entry before the period, and Fig. 3 (e) shows an example where there was no entry during the first period and the second period. Here are some examples:

  Next, timing charts in various types of pachinko machines for which specific examples of effects are described with reference to FIGS. 132 to 139 will be described. In any of the timing charts to be described, time elapses from the left to the right in the figure, and the rising period is the on period, the open period, or the operating period. Moreover, the vertical short bold line represents the passage and entry of the game ball.

  FIG. 143 is a timing chart at the normal time in the type 1 and type 2 pachinko machine described in FIGS. 132 to 134, and FIG. 143 shows the game ball in the V prize opening 2356. FIG. 6B is a timing chart chart when a game ball enters the V winning opening 2356. FIG.

  In the power support state, the “Chicken Easy State” for the electric chew, the normal symbol variation display (“normal diagram variation”) is started, and when the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, When the “electric accessory” is released and right-handed, there is a ball in the electric chew, and the symbol variation display (“special diagram 2 variation”) of the special figure 2 is started. When the big win symbol is stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display of the special figure 2, the “big winning opening 2” (second variable winning opening 235) as the second attacker is opened. A winning detection switch 2355 (“large winning opening 2 sensor”) for detecting a ball entering the “big winning opening 2” is activated simultaneously with the opening of the large winning opening 2. Also, the winning detection switch 2355 is effective for a certain period as the remaining ball detection period even after the special winning opening 2 is closed.

  Simultaneously with the opening of the special winning opening 2, a state in which it is determined whether or not a big hit game is generated (“specific area valid state”) is entered. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 monitors whether or not a game ball detection signal is received from the V detection switch, and when it is determined that the game ball detection signal has been received, the big hit game occurrence flag ( “Activate the continuous action device”) is turned on. The above determination is performed only when the specific area valid state is the on state. While the solenoid for driving the blocking means 2358 for blocking the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening 2356 (“specific area solenoid”) is in the ON state, the blocking means 2358 is in the open state, and the game ball is in the V winning opening 2356. Can enter. The blocking means 2358 is opened for a moment during the control period indicated by the horizontal arrow.

  In the flowchart shown in FIG. 143 (a), the winning detection switch 2355 (“big prize opening 2 sensor”) is turned on soon after the big prize opening 2 is opened, and one ball enters the big prize opening 2. There will be. The main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine is provided with a coincidence confirmation counter, and the count value of the coincidence confirmation counter is changed from 0 to 1.

  Eventually, the game ball enters the lose mouth 2357 (“normal area”), and the lose mouth detection switch detects the game ball. In response to this, the count value of the coincidence confirmation counter returns from 1 to 0, the number of balls entered and discharged in the second variable prize opening unit 235U coincides, and ball clogging occurs in the second variable prize slot unit 235U. It turns out that it has not occurred.

  If the continuation condition is satisfied after the special winning opening 2 (second variable winning opening 235) is opened, the specific area solenoid is repeatedly controlled in units of control periods represented by horizontal arrows. The continuation condition here is satisfied when the count value of the match confirmation counter remains inconsistent.

  Also in the flowchart shown in FIG. 143 (b), the winning detection switch 2355 (“big prize opening 2 sensor”) is turned on once soon after the big prize opening 2 is opened, and the count value of the match confirmation counter is changed from 0 to 1. become. Subsequently, the blocking means 2358 is momentarily in the open state, and one game ball that has entered the big prize opening 2 enters the V prize opening 2356 at that timing, and the V detection switch detects the game ball. In response to this, the count value of the coincidence confirmation counter returns from 1 to 0, the number of balls entered and discharged in the second variable prize opening unit 235U coincides, and ball clogging occurs in the second variable prize slot unit 235U. It turns out that it has not occurred. That is, the continuation condition that the specific area solenoid is repeatedly executed is not satisfied.

  In addition, when the V detection switch detects the game ball, the easy winning state is ended (the non-electric support state is entered). When the V detection switch detects one game ball, the state for determining whether or not to generate a big hit game (“specific area valid state”) is turned off, and the above determination is not performed. After making a decision to generate a big hit game once and turning on the big hit game occurrence possible flag ("actor continuous operation device operation") is turned on, the above determination is made until the flag is turned off. Is also meaningless.

  As described above, in the normal time in the one type and two types of pachinko machines, the notification is performed a plurality of times, for example, the notification of the success of the roaring effect or the notification indicating that the V prize has been won.

  FIG. 144 is a timing chart of a rare case in one type and two types of pachinko machines. FIG. 144 (a) shows that the match confirmation counter does not match when the game ball has not entered the V winning opening 2356. FIG. 5B is a timing chart in the case where the match confirmation counter becomes inconsistent in a state where the game ball has entered the V winning opening 2356. Hereinafter, the description overlapping with the example described with reference to FIG. 143 may be omitted.

  In the flowchart shown in FIG. 144 (a), the winning detection switch 2355 (“big prize opening 2 sensor”) is turned on twice immediately after the big prize opening 2 is opened, and the count value of the match confirmation counter is 0. To 2. Thereafter, within the first control period of the specific area solenoid indicated by the horizontal arrow, the game ball enters the lose mouth 2357 (“normal area”), and the lose mouth detection switch detects the game ball. In response, the count value of the match confirmation counter is changed from 2 to 1. At the timing when the first control period ends, the count value of the coincidence confirmation counter remains inconsistent, the continuation condition is satisfied, and the specific area solenoid is opened for a moment even within the second control period. Even at the timing when the second control period ends, the count value of the coincidence confirmation counter does not change and remains inconsistent, the above continuation condition is satisfied again, and the specific area solenoid opens for a moment even within the third control period. It becomes a state. During the third control period, the game ball enters the loser mouth 2357 (“normal area”), and the loser mouth detection switch detects the game ball. In response to this, the count value of the coincidence confirmation counter returns from 1 to 0, the number of balls entered and discharged in the second variable prize opening unit 235U match, and is generated in the second variable prize opening unit 235U. You can see that the ball clogging has been resolved. That is, the continuation condition that the specific area solenoid is repeatedly executed is not satisfied.

  When the V detection switch has not detected a game ball and the count value of the match confirmation counter does not match, the state for determining whether or not to generate a big hit game ("specific area valid state") is on. The state is maintained, but if the V detection switch detects a game ball, it is turned off, and the above determination is not made, and if the game ball is not detected, if the count value of the coincidence confirmation counter matches, the state is also turned off. Thus, the determination is not performed.

  In the example described above, the specific area solenoid repeats a certain operation. In the meantime, the usual figure is variable and the electric support state, so the electric chew can be released and the number of balls can be increased.

  Also in the flowchart shown in FIG. 144 (b), the winning detection switch 2355 (“big prize opening 2 sensor”) is turned on twice immediately after the big prize opening 2 is opened, and the count value of the match confirmation counter is 0. To 2. Subsequently, the blocking means 2358 is in an open state for a moment, and one of the two balls that entered the big prize opening 2 enters the V prize opening 2356 at that timing, and the V detection switch detects the game ball. . As a result, “the specific area valid state is turned off and the count value of the match confirmation counter returns from 2 to 1, but the count value of the match check counter remains inconsistent even at the timing when the first control period ends. Yes, the above continuation condition is satisfied, and the specific area solenoid is opened for a moment even within the second control period.The count value of the match confirmation counter does not change even at the timing when the second control period ends, and there is a mismatch. Thus, the continuation condition is satisfied again, and the specific area solenoid is opened only for a moment even within the third control period, so that one ball has already entered the V winning opening 2356 and the specific area is valid. Although the state is also in the off state, the blocking means 2358 is in the open state. However, since the special prize opening is in operation, it performs a certain operation even if it is meaningless. This is in order not to give a negative impression to the player, and within the third control period, the game ball enters the losing mouth 2357 (“normal area”), and the losing mouth detection switch detects the gaming sphere. . In response to this, the count value of the coincidence confirmation counter returns from 1 to 0, the number of balls entered and discharged in the second variable prize opening unit 235U match, and is generated in the second variable prize opening unit 235U. You can see that the ball clogging has been resolved. That is, the continuation condition that the specific area solenoid is repeatedly executed is not satisfied.

  In the example described above, the accessory continuous operation device operates by passing through the specific area (V winning), but since it is in a mismatch state, the big hit game is not started and the game does not advance. Moreover, since it has shifted to the non-electric support state, it is difficult to increase the number of balls.

  FIG. 145 is also a rare case timing chart for a type 1 and type 2 pachinko machine, where the match confirmation counter becomes inconsistent when the game ball has not entered the V winning opening 2356, and then the V winning opening 2356. It is a timing chart when entering.

  Also in the flowchart shown in FIG. 145, the winning detection switch 2355 (“big prize opening 2 sensor”) is turned on twice immediately after the big prize opening 2 is opened, and the count value of the match confirmation counter is changed from 0 to 2. Become. Thereafter, within the first control period of the specific area solenoid indicated by the horizontal arrow, the game ball enters the lose mouth 2357 (“normal area”), and the lose mouth detection switch detects the game ball. In response, the count value of the match confirmation counter is changed from 2 to 1. At the timing when the first control period ends, the count value of the coincidence confirmation counter remains inconsistent, the continuation condition is satisfied, and the specific area solenoid is opened for a moment even within the second control period. Even at the timing when the second control period ends, the count value of the coincidence confirmation counter does not change and remains inconsistent, the above continuation condition is satisfied again, and the specific area solenoid opens for a moment even within the third control period. It becomes a state. At this timing, the remaining one ball enters the V prize opening 2356, the V detection switch detects the game ball, the count value of the match confirmation counter returns from 1 to 0, and the second variable prize opening unit 235U The number of incoming balls is the same as the number of discharged balls. When the count value of the coincidence confirmation counter matches, the blocking unit 2358 immediately returns to the closed state even during the period of maintaining the open state. Therefore, in this example, the player enters the V winning opening 2356 and the count value of the coincidence confirmation counter matches, but during the period in which the blocking means 2358 maintains the open state, it enters the loser opening 2357 and enters the coincidence confirmation counter. Even when the count values match, the blocking means 2358 immediately returns to the closed state.

  The same applies when two balls enter the second variable prize opening unit 235U, one ball enters the V prize opening 2356 first, and after a while, the second ball enters the V prize opening 2356. is there.

  In the example described above, since the specific area does not pass (V winning), the loss effect is performed to the end, and then the specific area passing (V winning) occurs, and the V animation is suddenly displayed. Note that the V animation may be displayed after the success effect is suddenly performed after the loss effect is performed to the end.

  FIG. 146 is a timing chart in the round decision type pachinko machine for which specific examples of effects are described with reference to FIGS. 135 and 136.

  The period tm0 shown in FIG. 146 (a) is the last period of the symbol variation of the special figure, and corresponds to, for example, a reach production period. The period tm1 shown in FIG. 146 (b) is a period from the end of the symbol change display of the special figure until the game ball enters the entrance hole 2601 of the round decision means 2600. This is the period during which the roaring effect is executed. During the period tm1 shown in FIG. 146 (b), a part tm11 (for example, the display shown in FIGS. 136 (h) to (j)) of the tutorial about the jackpot game and the jackpot generation switch SW11 are displayed. It can be divided into R determination notification (display of FIG. 136 (k)) that the user wants to aim at.

  The period tm2 shown in FIG. 146 (a) is a period after the game ball passes through the big hit generation switch SW11. The end of the tm2 period may be the start timing of the first round of the jackpot game, the end timing of the first round, or the first release timing of the attacker.

  In FIG. 146 (a), the first notification is a notification executed before the game ball passes the jackpot generation switch SW11, and the second notification is executed after the game ball passes the jackpot generation switch SW11. It is information to be done.

  The period tm0 shown in FIG. 146 (b) also corresponds to the reach effect period. The period tm1 shown in FIG. 146 (b) is a period from the end of the symbol change display of the special figure until the game ball enters the entrance hole 2601 of the round decision means 2600. This is the period during which the roaring effect is executed.

  The period tm2 shown in FIG. 146 (a) is a period after the game ball passes through the big hit generation switch SW11. The end of the tm2 period may be the start timing of the first round of the jackpot game, may be the end timing of the first round, or may be the first release timing of the attacker. Furthermore, a production period in which tm1 and tm2 are continuous may be used.

  In FIG. 146 (b), the first notification that is executed before the game ball passes the jackpot generation switch SW11 is omitted, and the second notification that is executed after the game ball passes is performed.

  FIG. 147 is a timing chart in the pachinko machine provided with the production V pass switch SW9 alone.

  In this example, the effect V pass switch SW9 shown in FIG. 131 (a) can be separated from the first variable prize opening and arranged alone in the game area, and the effect V pass switch SW9 can be aimed directly. . In this case, a game ball that becomes an out ball can also pass through the effect V passing switch SW9. The effect V pass switch SW9 prompts the player to pass, but it is only part of the effect, and since the effect V pass switch SW9 is passed, the big hit game is started or the effect V pass switch SW9 I didn't let me pass through, so I never lost.

  The period tm0 shown in FIG. 147 (a) is the middle period of the special symbol variation, and tm1 is the final period of the special symbol variation. The third notification started from the beginning of the period of tm0 may be a notification for announcing the development to reach. The first notification that is started from the beginning of the period tm1 is, for example, a notification that prompts the game V to pass through the effect V-pass switch SW9 in order to obtain a big hit in the super reach effect. Then, in the middle of the period tm1, the game ball passes the effect V passing switch SW9. The second notification that starts when the game ball passes through the effect V passing switch SW9 is, for example, notification indicating that the game is a big hit in the super reach effect. In the period of tm1, the period before the game ball passes the effect V passing switch SW9 may be the period of tm11, and the period after the passing may be the period of tm12.

  The period of tm2 shown in FIG. 147 (a) is a period that starts at the same time as the symbol change of the special figure ends and the jackpot game is started. The end of the period tm2 may be the start timing of the first round of the jackpot game, the end timing of the first round, or the first release timing of the attacker. . The third notification that is started from the beginning of the period of tm2 may be, for example, a notification in the big hit game start effect before the start of the round.

  The fifth notification shown in FIG. 147 (b) is a notification that tells whether or not to develop to reach, and is notification that reach is confirmed when the game ball passes through the effect V passing switch SW9. This fifth notification is executed in the period tm3 before the start of the reach effect. Eventually, the game ball passes through the effect V passing switch SW9 and switches to the period tm4, and the super reach effect is started. The second notification that starts from the beginning of the period tm4 is a notification that celebrates that the super reach effect has been executed and that it is a big hit. Also in the timing chart of FIG. 147 (b), when the special symbol variation ends, the big hit game is started and the fourth notification is performed during the period of tm2.

  In the time chart shown in FIG. 147 (c), the first notification shown in FIG. 147 (a) is executed, and in the super reach effect, the game ball is allowed to pass through the effect V passing switch SW9 in order to obtain a big hit. Prompt. However, the player does not pass the game ball to the effect V passing switch SW9, and the symbol variation of the special figure ends, but the big hit symbol is stopped and the big hit game is started, and during the period of tm2, the fourth hit is started. An announcement is made.

  The sixth notification shown in FIG. 147 (d) is a notification that prompts the game V to pass through the effect V passing switch SW9 in order to obtain a big hit. This sixth notification is executed in the period tm3 before the start of the reach effect. Eventually, the game ball passes through the effect V passing switch SW9, switches to the period tm4, and the second notification is started. This second notification is, for example, a notification that hits a big hit in a super reach production. However, in the time chart shown in FIG. 147 (d), even if the special symbol variation ends, the big hit symbol is not stopped and displayed, the losing is stopped and the big hit game is not started. Symbol variation starts.

  In the gaming machine described above, there are a plurality of consecutive periods, and the number of notifications related to the big hit game differs depending on the period during which the game ball enters. For example, in the case of a type 1 type 2 type production, the special drawing 2 starts to fluctuate, and the big prize opening 2 is opened by a small hit. On the other hand, when the V effect which is a notification indicating that a prize has been won is performed, if the V prize is not won, a roaring effect failure effect is performed. With this type 1 type 2 type, if there is a discrepancy between the number of balls entered into the big prize opening unit and the number of balls thrown out from the big prize opening unit due to clogged balls, The V effect is suddenly executed from the failure effect.

  If it is a 1 type 2 type pachinko machine, it may be notified several times by the entrance of a game ball, and the number of times of notification may increase or decrease by the entrance of a game ball.

  On the other hand, in a round-decision type pachinko machine or a pachinko machine in which a gate passing effect using an out ball is performed, the notification may be made multiple times as time passes regardless of the entry of the game ball. Further, although the number of notifications may decrease due to the entry of a game ball, it cannot be said that the number of notifications increases due to the entry.

  FIG. 148 is a front view of a sealed pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable.

  In a sealed pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 148, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game table. That is, the game medium launched from the launching means 901 to the game area 902 can be discharged from the game area 902 and supplied to the launching means 901 again. In addition, a display means 903 for displaying information on the number of game media (award balls, rental balls, total number of balls, etc.) and other information is disposed below the game area 902 on the front of the game table. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown in FIG.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 148 encloses a sphere, circulates the enclosed sphere in the pachinko machine, and uses the enclosed sphere as a launch sphere. May be executed by credit.

  What has been referred to as a lamp so far is an example of a light emitting means, and the lamp can be replaced as long as it emits light such as an LED or a cold cathode tube.

  Further, the notification can be replaced with the effect, and the effect can be replaced with the notification.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the description of “... in some cases” may be appropriately replaced with “may not be in some cases” or “is always in some cases”. is there.

In the above description,
“First area [for example, detection area of V detection switch];
Notification means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208];
A game machine equipped with
The first area is an area related to a second gaming state [eg, jackpot gaming state],
The second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state [eg, non-big hit gaming state (normal gaming state, small hit gaming state, etc.)]
The notification means is a means capable of executing a plurality of types of notification,
One notification of the plurality of types of notifications is the notification of the first aspect (hereinafter referred to as “first notification”) [for example, the hit effect of FIG. 132 (g ′) to FIG. 132 (h ′). Is a big jackpot notification]
One notification among the plurality of types of notifications is notification of the second mode (hereinafter referred to as “second notification”) [for example, jackpot by V animation in FIGS. 133 (i) to (j). Notification]
The second aspect is an aspect different from the first aspect,
The first notification is executed when a game ball enters the first area in a first period [for example, a period from immediately before FIG. 132 (f) to immediately before FIG. 132 (g ′)]. Is a notification to be
The second notification is performed when a game ball enters the first area in a second period [for example, a period from FIG. 133 (h) to FIG. 133 (i)]. And
The second notification is a notification that is executed when a game ball enters the first region in the first period,
The second notification is a notification that is executed after the execution of the first notification,
The first notification is a notification that is not executed even when a game ball enters the first region in the second period,
The second period is a period after the first period;
The first notification is a notification related to the second gaming state,
The second notification is a notification related to the second gaming state.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
This game table is, for example, one type and two types of game tables.

  Here, the second aspect may be an aspect that is partially different from the first aspect, or an aspect that is entirely different.

Also,
'The first area is an area related to the start of the second gaming state,
The second gaming state is a jackpot gaming state,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
'Variable winning means [for example, the door member 2341 of the first variable winning opening 234 shown in FIG. 130]
The variable winning means may change the first state [eg, when a game ball enters the V prize opening 2356 shown in FIG. To change the state]
The first state is a state in which a game ball is difficult to enter,
The second state is a state where a game ball can easily enter,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The notification related to the second gaming state is a notification executed before the transition to the second gaming state.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
The first notification is a notification by a display including a first background image [for example, a patternless background image]
The second notification is a notification by a display including a second background image [for example, an animated background image]
The second background image is a background image different from the first background image.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
The first notification is a notification by display including a first character image [for example, a character image of a hero's niece]
The second notification is a notification by a display including a second character image [e.g., a princess character image],
The second character image is a character image in which a displayed character is different from the first character image.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
The first aspect is a display aspect [for example, an aspect displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208]
The second aspect is also a display aspect [for example, an aspect displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, one type and two types of pachinko machines 100 including the game board 200 shown in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Furthermore, “first area [for example, each detection area of the V detection switch, the big hit generation switch SW11, the effect V pass switch SW9 arranged in the game area alone”;
Notification means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208];
A game machine equipped with
The first area is an area related to a second gaming state [eg, jackpot gaming state],
The second gaming state is a more advantageous state than the first gaming state [for example, a non-big hit gaming state (a normal gaming state, a small hit gaming state, etc.),
The notification means is a means capable of executing a plurality of types of notification,
One notification among the plurality of types of notifications is a first notification [for example, a jackpot notification by a hit effect from FIG. 132 (g ′) to FIG. (J ′), FIG. 137 (k ′) to FIG. (L ′) as a result of super reach production, and a result notification in which the character “Victory” is displayed in the background image of the animation in which the character appears after the “big hit GET” is displayed in the patternless background image]
One notification among the plurality of notifications is a second notification [for example, a big hit notification by V animation in FIGS. 133 (i) to (j), as a super reach effect in FIG. 138 (m). Result notification, result notification in animated background image]
The first notification includes a first period [for example, a period from immediately before FIG. 132 (f) to immediately before FIG. 132 (g ′), a period before and after FIG. 137 (j), and a period within the waiting time. ] Is executed when the game ball enters the first area,
The second notification is performed in a second period [for example, a period from FIG. 133 (h) to immediately before FIG. 133 (i), a period before and after FIG. 138 (k), a period after waiting time]. It is a notification that is executed when a game ball enters the first area,
The second period is a period continuous with the first period,
The first notification is a notification related to the second gaming state,
The second notification is a notification related to the second gaming state,
The second notification is a notification that is at least partially different from the first notification [for example, whether the arrow ar hits the display of “this” includes a big hit notification or an animation Whether or not the background image contains a notification as a result of relatively large text display]
A game stand characterized by that. Was explained.

  The second notification may be a notification partially different from the first notification, or may be a notification that is entirely different.

  For example, the period from FIG. 135 (k) to FIG. 13 (l) corresponds to an example of the first period, and the round determination notification by the character display of “16R GET” in FIG. 135 (m) is an example of the first notification. It corresponds to.

  In addition, the result notification as the super reach production in FIGS. 137 (k) to (l) and the result notification as the super reach production in FIGS. 137 (k ′) to (l ′) are the first notifications. It corresponds to an example.

  In addition, in the result notification as the super reach production in FIGS. 137 (k) to (l) and the result notification as the super reach production in FIG. 137 (k ′) to FIG. You can also see that the kind is being done. That is, the result notification (FIG. 137 (k), FIG. 137 (k ′)) in the patternless background image can be regarded as the first notification, and the result notification in the animated background image (FIG. 137 (l), FIG. 137 (l ′)) can be regarded as the second notification.

  In addition, the result notification as the super reach production in FIG. 138 (m) corresponds to an example of the second notification. Accordingly, the result notification (first notification) as the super reach production in FIG. 137 (k ′) to FIG. 137 (l ′) and the result notification (second notification) as the super reach production in FIG. 138 (m). The character display of “16R GET” matches the patternless background image, but it differs depending on whether or not the result of the relatively large character display is included in the animated background image. The patternless background image corresponds to an example of the first background image, and the animated background image corresponds to an example of the second background image. In addition, the result notification (second notification) as the super reach production in FIG. 138 (m) may be displayed as a letter “congratulations” on the background image including the princess character. All the second notifications are different. In addition, the result notification (first notification) as the super reach production in FIG. 137 (k ′) to FIG. 137 (l ′) is the game ball in the period before and after (second period) including FIG. 138 (k). Is a notification that is not executed even when the player has entered the jackpot generating switch SW11. Furthermore, although both the first notification and the second notification are in the notification mode by display, either one of the first notification and the second notification is used as a sound notification mode (for example, “16R GET” sound output) And the other may be a notification mode by display. In such a case, the type of the notification means itself is different.

  Also, in the gate passing effect using the out ball, the period within the waiting time for passing the gate corresponds to an example of the first period, and the result notification as the super reach effect in FIGS. 137 (k) to (l) is shown. Super-reach in which the character “Victory” is displayed on the background image of the animation in which the character appears as shown in FIG. 137 (l ′) after the “big hit GET” is displayed on the patternless background image. The result notification mode as an effect corresponds to an example of the first mode. It should be noted that the result notification in the patternless background image can be viewed as the first notification, and the result notification in the animated background image can be viewed as the second notification.

  In addition, the period after the waiting time is equivalent to an example of the second period, and the result notification mode in which “big hit GET” is displayed on the patternless background image corresponds to an example of the second mode.

In addition, “the second notification is a notification executed when a game ball enters the first region in the first period,
The second notification is a notification that is executed after the execution of the first notification,
The first notification is a notification that is not executed even when a game ball enters the first region in the second period,
The second period is a period after the first period.
A game stand characterized by that. Was also explained.

Furthermore, “the second notification is a notification whose notification mode is different from the first notification,
A game stand characterized by that. "
Also explained.

In addition, “notification related to the second gaming state is a notification about the second gaming state which is executed before the transition to the second gaming state [for example, notification of“ this ”,“ 16R GET "
A game stand characterized by that. Was also explained.

In addition, “a plurality of states [16R and 8R] having different advantages for the player are prepared as the second gaming state,
The notification related to the second gaming state is a notification about the advantage [for example, notification of 16R GET] in the second gaming state.
A game stand characterized by that. Was also explained.

  In the following, we will add that we have explained so far.

(Appendix 1)
The first area,
Notification means;
A game machine equipped with
The first area is an area related to a second gaming state,
The second gaming state is a more advantageous state than the first gaming state,
The notification means is a means capable of executing a plurality of types of notification,
One notification of the plurality of types of notifications is notification related to the second gaming state (hereinafter referred to as “first notification”),
The first notification is a notification configured to be executed a first number of times when a game ball enters the first area in the first period,
The first notification is a notification configured to be executed a second number of times when a game ball enters the first area in the second period,
The second period is a period continuous with the first period,
The second number of times is a number of times different from the first number of times,
A game stand characterized by that.

  Note that the second gaming state may be a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state.

  The number of times that the first notification is executed is the first number when a game ball enters the first area in the first period, and the number of times that the second notification is executed is When the game ball enters the first area in the second period, the second number may be used.

(Appendix 2)
The game machine according to appendix 1,
The first area is an area related to the start of the second gaming state,
The second gaming state is a jackpot gaming state,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 3)
A game machine according to appendix 1 or 2,
The informing means is means capable of executing the first informing in a plurality of types.
One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is a first aspect,
One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is a second aspect,
The second aspect is an aspect different from the first aspect,
The first notification according to the first aspect is a notification that is executed when a game ball enters the first area in the first period,
The first notification according to the second aspect is a notification that is executed when a game ball enters the first region in the first period,
The first notification according to the second aspect is a notification that is executed after the execution of the first notification according to the first aspect;
The first notification according to the second aspect is a notification executed when a game ball enters the first region in the second period,
The first notification according to the first aspect is a notification that is not executed even when a game ball enters the first region in the second period,
The second period is a period after the first period.
A game stand characterized by that.

That is, one notification among the plurality of types of notification is a second notification,
One notification of the plurality of types of notification is a third notification,
The second notification is the first notification according to the first aspect,
The second notification is the first notification according to the second aspect,
When the game ball enters the first area in the first period, the notification means executes a second notification and a third notification;
When the game ball does not enter the first area in the first period and the game ball enters the first area in the second period, the notification means executes a third notification. And
The second notification is executed when the game ball does not enter the first area in the first period, and when the game ball enters the first area in the second period.
A game stand characterized by that. It may be.

(Appendix 4)
The first period is a period after the second period.
A game stand characterized by that.

  In addition, even if it is the structural requirement contained only in each description of embodiment described above, a modification, or an additional remark, you may apply the structural requirement to another embodiment, a modified example, or an additional remark.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 100 Pachinko machine 208 Decorative symbol display device 208d Effect area 212 1st special figure display device 214 2nd special figure display device 230 1st special figure start port 232 2nd special figure start port 2321 Blade member 234 1st variable prize opening 235 Second variable prize opening 300 Main control unit 304 CPU
306 ROM
308 RAM
400 First sub-control unit 404 CPU
406 ROM
408 RAM
500 Second sub-control unit 600 Dispensing control unit

Claims (8)

The first area,
Notification means;
A game machine equipped with
The first area is an area related to a second gaming state,
The second gaming state is a more advantageous gaming state than the first gaming state,
The notification means is a means capable of executing a plurality of types of notification,
One notification of the plurality of types of notifications is notification of a first aspect (hereinafter referred to as “first notification”),
One notification of the plurality of types of notifications is notification of a second aspect (hereinafter referred to as “second notification”),
The second aspect is an aspect different from the first aspect,
The first notification is a notification executed when a game ball enters the first area in the first period,
The second notification is a notification that is executed when a game ball enters the first area in the second period,
The second notification is a notification that is executed when a game ball enters the first region in the first period,
The second notification is a notification that is executed after the execution of the first notification,
The first notification is a notification that is not executed even when a game ball enters the first region in the second period,
The second period is a period after the first period;
The first notification is a notification related to the second gaming state,
The second notification is a notification related to the second gaming state.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1,
The first area is an area related to the start of the second gaming state,
The second gaming state is a jackpot gaming state,
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1 or 2,
With variable winning means,
The variable winning means is means for changing from a first state to a second state when a game ball enters the first area,
The first state is a state in which a game ball is difficult to enter,
The second state is a state where a game ball can easily enter,
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 3,
The notification related to the second gaming state is a notification executed before the transition to the second gaming state.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 4,
The first notification is notification by a display including a first background image,
The second notification is notification by a display including a second background image,
The second background image is a background image different from the first background image.
A game stand characterized by that. A gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
The first notification is notification by display including the first character image,
Said 2nd alerting | reporting is the alerting | reporting by the display containing a 2nd character image,
The second character image is a character image in which a displayed character is different from the first character image.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 6,
The first aspect is a display aspect,
The second aspect is also a display aspect.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 7,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.